The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About025383 - Construction-Related - Contract - The Frymire Company� � Lr � � � � � � , . CITY SECRFTARY � ��►� C4NTRACT NO. �.�� //%S�'S 10NDIN6 CQ v CRY SEC�kEGQY THE CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS �„�,�,�f,�so� �x�� N SUMMERGLEN BRANCH LIB �-��a� QI�,T q1ZTH . �. �� . �.,.�. �� KENNETH BARR MAYOR BOB TERRELL CITY MANAGER Issue Date August 18,1999 � � -, � G ' HUGO MALANGA, P. E. DIRECTOR, TRANSPORTATION AND PUBLIC WORKS GLEr1IECE ROBINSON LIBRARY DIRECTOR Halbach • Dietz Archit 4388 West Vickery Boulevard, Sui Fort Worth, Texas 76107 ��9(r�� GS��VU�V �� Q�� o VY�J4��'�I1tlQ Ui.7l/�0 I� � From: Mike Mathews 817-871-8488 To: vcki McDonaid � u � � L � � I■. C l�J � C� � � � � � ADDENDUM NO. 1 SUMMERGLEN BRANCH LIBRARY Date: 8/i 6/99 Time:19:15:37 CITY OF FORT WORTH TRANSPORTATION AND PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT Page 1 of 5 ��f:� : �t �. Bid Opening Date: September 23,1999 (NO CHANGE} The Contract Documents and Specifications for the above referenced project are hereby revised and amended as follows: The Prebid Conference was held at 10:00 AM, September 7, 1999. The following attended: Architects: Joe Halbach Halbach-Dietz Architects Tommy Stewart Halbach-Dietz Architects City of Fort Worth: Mike Mathews Chief, Architectural Services Nancy Richardson PM, Architectural Services Duane Rubeor TPW Jack Durham Construction Mgr., TPW Charitta Bryant MM/BE Tessie Hutson FVVPublic Library 737-0725 737-0725 871-8274 871-8014 871-7864 871-8072 871-6104 871-7706 737-6261 737-6261 871-8488 871-8488 871-8106 871-8488 871-6185 871-8488 Contractors: � Mike Strange Falkenberg Construction (214)324-4779 (214)324-4667 Randy Jones Sam Binion & Assoc. 784-6501 468-4001 Jim Keeling K.B. Alexander & Co. 788-9533 788-8705 Rob Welch G.L. Barron 738-6104 738-6135 Tim Keck Keck & Co. 469-6035 459-1452 Don Ferrier Ferrier Builders, Inc. 237-6262 237-5758 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.Q1 GENERAL ' Q I� ., , This addendum modifies the drawings and project manual dated August 18, 1999, as noted within and shall become a part of the contract documents. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of addendum in the space provided on the bid form. Addendum 1 Page 1 of 5 � ' �F`rom: Mika Mathews 817-871-8488 To: vcki McDonaid Date: 9l16/89 Time:19:16:76 � Page 2 of 5 � . J � ■I � � � � � C. Each holder of bid documents registered with the City of Fort Worth Department Engineering Plans Desk will receive a copy of this addendum. Each prime bidder is responsible for distribution of information conveyed by this addendum to its subbidders and suppliers. ' D. Clarification: 1. Section 02372 Par•agraphs 1.01 A, 3.01 B, 3.01 C. each refer to pier casings. It is the intent of the documents to define the requirements for casing should they be required. No cost for the work should be included in the bid. Should casings be required, a change order will be negotiated and issued for the work. ` � 1.02 BID FORM E. Page P-1, under the heading "DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS", "Base Bid: Trench Safety:, change the line " LF X /LF" to read "80LF X /LF". 1.06 SECTION 01340 — SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES A. Add the following to page 01340-10. 'I � � LJ L�J I�J � � �� "DIVISI(JN 15000 Provide submittal information as required by paragraph 1.04, section 15010 — Mechanical General Provisions, page 15010-1." "DIVISION 16000 � Provide submittal information as required by paragraph 1.04, section 16010 — Electrical General Provision, page 16010-1." 1.03 SECTION 02221 — TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING A. In paragraph 3.03, B, 4, delete the following part of the final sentence. ".....and Section 00432 Schedule of Unit Prices." 1.04 SECTION 02372 — DRILLED PIERS A. Page 02372 —1, delete the following part of sentence contained in paragraph 1.02, B, 2. "...and to pertorm continuous pier drilling observations." Addendum 1 Page 2 of 5 � � From: Mike Mathews 817-871-8488 To: Ycki McDonald Date: 9l18/99 Time:19:18:49 Paga 3 of 5 � L•J' 1!' � u � � � �J � �� L�J � � L�J L!' L The services of a testing agency to provide continuous pier drilling observations will be paid for by the Owner. 1.Q5 SECTION Q7410— METAL WALL PANELS ., ,� ., , A. Page 07410-1, 2, delete paragraph 2.01. Insert the following revised paragraph: "A. U Panels: Metal panel, roll formed and factory finished, 26 gage panel with a g/" rib at 6" on center. Panel material shall be galvanized steel that confarms to ASTM A653, Grade E. Finish shali be Silicona Modified Polyester (SMP) factory coating. Co1or shall be se{ected from the fulf range of colors provided by the manufacturer. Provide "U" panels manufactured by VicWest a division of Jenisys Engineered Praducts, or approved equal." 1.Q6 SECTION 12496 — VERTIGAL BLINDS A. Delete this section entirely, replace it with section 12492 — Horizontal Louver Blinds included this Addendum and made a part of the Construction Documents. SECTI�N 12492 — HORIZONTAL BLINDS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Measurements: Provide custom size bfinds for the windows in which they are to be installed. Take careful measurements of each opening so that the blinds will fit properly. P{an dimensions sha{I not be used. Verify head, jamb, and sil! conditions. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Include manufacturer's catalog cuts and data sheets, and installation instructions. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide horizontal blinds of the one-inch wide slat type, with valance for each blind. Product/manufacturer; one of the following: Addendum 1 Page 3 of 5 � � �rom: Mike Mathews 817-871-8488 To: Vicki McDonald Date: 9h6l99 Time: 19:17:23 Page 4 of 5 L � Contract Flexalum Decor 1"Aluminum Blinds; Hunter pouglas, Riviera DustGuard 1" Blind; Levolor Corp. Bali Classics S3000 Mini Blinds; Springs Window Fashions Div � L�� CI L� L■J � 2.02 NIATERIALS AND FABRICATION I nc. Inc. . „ ,. A. Head channel shall be 0.025" thick Tomized steel with a plastic type coating. Channel shall be "U" shaped, approximately 1" high by 1-9/16" wide, with flanged edges at the top. B. Slat supports shall be braided o,f polyester yarn. The vertical component shall� have a diameter of not less than 0.045" nor greater than 0.066". Braiding shall be accurate to hold slats equally spaced, parallel and straight, and to assure proper tilt control and adequate overlap of slats. Provide 31 rungs per 2 feet of ladder equally spaced. Distance between ladders shall not exceed 21 ". The horizontal component shall consist of not less than four cables interbraided with the vertical component. ` C Slats shall be virgin aluminum alloy approximately 1" wide by 0.008" thick. 51ats shall have a crown and radius corners. � u � � � � l�l Bottom rail shall be 0.031" thick Tomized steel with a plastic type coating. E. Tilter shall be Tomized steel of enclosed construction. Unit shall tilt the slats to any desired angle and hold them at that angle. An automatic disengagement of worm and gear shall eliminate overdrive to prevent strain or damage to wand, worm, gear, ladder or top slat. �peration shall be by wand of sufficient length and swivel for easy operation. F. Lift cord shall be of adequate diameter braided of high strength synthetic fibers. G. Finish: The factory finish for the exposed surtaces shall be a plastic type finish coat baked-on. Color shall be as selected the Architect from manufacturer's complete color line. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTI(JN A. Examine windows to receive blinds for conditions which will adversely affect the � installation of the blinds. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. l�J !�J Addendum 1 Page 4 of 5 � � � � � a � � � a a � D � a 0 a � � � From: Mike Mathews 817-871-8488 To: Vicki McDonald Date: 9/16/99 Time: 19:18:02 Page 5 of 5 3.02 I N STALLATI O N A. Install horizontal blinds at all exterior windows; doors, entrances and sidelights are not included. B. Attach installation end brackets at each end of blind location. For blinds over 55 inches long, or over 50 sq. ft. in area, provide intermediate brackets. C. Blinds shall be mounted in brackets inside frame jambs by skilled mechanics under the supervision of an authorized representative of the manufacturer. The completed blinds shall be left clean and in perfect working order. Crates, cartons, and rubbish shall be removed from the premises and rooms shall be left broom clean. � END OF SECTION Acknowledge the receipt of this addendum on your Proposal. H. A. MALANGA, P.E. DIRECTOR OF TRANSPORTATION AND PUBLIC W�RKS By: Nancy Richardson, Architectural Services 817-871-8014, Fax 871-8488 RELEASE DATE: September 16, 1999 0 Addendum 1 Page 5 of 5 � � 1 ' � � � i � � � � � � � � � � From: Mike Mathews 817-871-8488 To: nancy richardson Date: 9/22/99 Time: 11:03:00 CITY OF FORT WORTH TRANSPORTATION AND PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT CLARIFICATION SUMMERGLEN BRANCH LIBRARY Date: September 22, 1999 To: Plan Holders and Plan Houses City Purchasing Department DOE Plans Desk • TPW Administration Bid Opening Date: September 23, 1999 (NO CHANGE) The following clarification of the Contract Documents and Specifications for the above referenced project is as follows: The following items on Sheet No. A602 are not to be included in the base bid: Refrigerator/ Freezer Range Range Hood Dishwasher Garbage Disposal Each prime bidder is responsible for distribution of information conveyed by this addendum to its sub-bidders and suppliers. Page 1 of 1 Nancy Richardson, Architectural Services Section 817-871-8014, Fax 871-8488 .� L�J � � � �� NOTICE YO BIDDERS Sealed bids for the Summerglen Branch Library located at 42G5 Basswood Boulevard, Fort Worth, Texas will be received at the Purchasing Office, City of Fort Worth, 1000 Throckmorton, Fort Worth, 76107, until 1:30 P.M., Thursday, September 23,1999 and will be opened and publiciy read aloud approximately thirty minutes later in the Council Chambers. A Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 10:00 A.M., Tuesday, September 7,1999 at the Central Library Conference Room. The conference room is located on the lower level of the Central Library located at 300 Taylor Street, Fort Worth, Texas. Bidders should enter the Library through the Tandy Center entrance on 3rd Street. � The Project consists of a new Branch Library consisting of approximately 11,055 square feet, including, but not limited to, site, architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical work. D The MWBE Goal for this project is 29%. Contact the MWBE office (871-6104) to obtain lists of certified subcontractors and suppliers. Contractors will be required to post Payment and Performance Bonds and provide Contractors � General Liability and Statutory Workers Compensation C�ver�ge. Copies of the Project Manual and plans for this project may be obtained at the Department of D Engineering Plans Desk, City Hall, 1000 Throckmorton Street (817.871.7910) in return for a$50 deposit for each set. For additional information contact Joe Halbach; Halbach-Dietz Architects, 4388 West Vickery Blvd., Suite 200, Fort Worth, Texas. Phone: 817.737.0725 DAdvertisement: Two dates, consecutive Thursdays � LiJ LiJ � �� u f �� , NTB-1 �' L�I L*! � � J LJ � TABLE OF CONTENTS � DOCUMENTS 0-- INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR BIDDERS (M/VVBE) . PROPOSAL GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION WEATHER TABLE PROJECT DESIGNATION SIGN WAGE RATES CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT � PERFORMANCE BOND . • PAYMENT BOND , CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW 00300 - INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS GEOTECHNICAL REPORT � DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 - SUMMARY . 01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES D 01270 - UNIT PRICES 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Q 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01630 - PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Q 01640 - YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS � � u � L�J liJ L�J Halbach � Dietr Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 DIVISION 2 -- SITE CONSTRUCTION 02221 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING 02223 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02230 - SITE CLEARING 02232 - SUB GRADE PREPARATION 02243 - SOIL STABILIZATION 02310 - GRADING 02315 - EXCAVATION 02316 - FILL AND BACKFILL 02361 - SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL 02372 - DRILLED PIERS 02577 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND SIGNS 02720 - STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM 02751 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02810 - IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02820 - WOOD FENCE 02874 - BICYCLE RACKS 02930 - LANDSCAPING Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas TOC-1 II� � L:I � I�� il � L�1 � � � LJ I� � � �i � � [fI L�J DIVISION 3 -- CONCRETE 03051 - CONCRETE COLOR ADDITIVE 03100 - CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 - CONCRETE REIFORCEMENT 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03361 - CONCRETE STAMPING DIVISION 4 -- MASONRY 04065 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04092 - MASONRY FLASHINGS 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04852 - STONE MASONRY VENEER DIVISION 5 -- METALS 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL . 05210 - STEEL JOISTS 05300 - METAL ROOF DECK 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6-- WOOD AND PLASTICS 06114 - WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06131 - HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING 06150 - WOOD DECKING 06181 - GLUED-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06410 - CUSTOM CABINETS 06650 - SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS DIVISION 7-- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07212 - BATT INSULATION 07410 - METAL WALL PANELS 07525 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07615 - STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07724 - ROOF HATCHES 07840 - FIRESTOPPING 07900 - JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 8-- DOORS AND WINDOWS 08111 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08410 - METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08462 - AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 08800 - GLAZING DIVISION 9 -- FINISHES 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09300 - TILE 09442 - EPDXY THIN-SET TERRAZZO FLOORING SYSTEM 09511 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING 09680 - CARPET 09685 - CARPET TILE 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS �� p- � ��'� � i c�� ,�� °y F�'�,. � � � ►* � �TE� 9349 .�� Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library TOC-2 a HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library CopyrigFit 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES � 10160 - METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS � � 10263 - CORNER GUARDS 10267 - PROTECTIVE WALLCOVERING � 10350 - FLAGPOLES . 10450 - CAST METAL LETTERS AND PLAQUES 10500 - LOCKERS 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES � 10557 - BOOK RETURNS 10810 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES � DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 11050 - WALL SAFES 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS. �j DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS U 12496 - VERTICAL BLINDS � DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING SYSTEMS � NOT USED �� DIVISION 15 -- MECHANICAL 15010 - MECHANICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS 15011 - PREFABRICATED CONVENTIONAL ROOF CURBS AND SUPPORTS 15180 - INSULATION 15400 - PLUMBING AND FIXTURES 15401 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15820 - DUCTWORK AND DEVICES 15851 - FANS 15852 - PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15908 - TESTING AND BALANCING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 15909 - TESTING AND BALANCING OF PIPING SYSTEMS � DIVISION 16 -- ELECTRICAL 16010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16110 - CONDUIT ry 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE u 16140 - DEVICES AND PLATES 16400 - SWITCHGEAR 16500 - LIGHTING � 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16770 - SOUND SYSTEMS � L1 END OF TABLE OF CONTE � � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library TOC-3 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � '�J INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. PROPOSAL REQUIREMENTS: The following requirements are considered in judging the responsiveness of a Proposal: • Use the Proposal Form provided in the Project Manual. • Entries on the Proposal Form may be handwritten or typed � � L.�'J �,t1 u �� LwJ � LJ � � t�J�' • Write in contract duration if not specified • Acknowledge all Addendums on the Proposal Form • Have a Principal sign the Proposal • Enclose a bid deposit of 5%. This can be in the form of a cashiers check or standard bid bond. Personal checks are not acceptable. Note Project Name on the check or bid bond MWBE REQUIREMENTS: If your bid is in excess of $25,000, the MWBE Program applies, and you have five City business days following the bid date to prepare and submit your M/WBE Plan. Early submittal is encouraged. Be aware that if you elect to provide documentation of a Good Faith Effort you will have to accomplish each and every action in th� Special Instructions to Bidders, Minority and Women Business Enterprises Specifications, included in this Project Manual. In order to meet all the requirements for a Good Faith Effort you will have to start at least two weeks before the Bid date. 2. BID SECURITY: Cashier's check or an acceptable bidder's bond payable to the City of Fort Worth, in an amount of five (5) per cent of the bid submitted. The Bid Security must accompany the bid and is subject to forfeit fin the event the successful bidder fails to execute the contract documents within ten (10) days after the contract has been awarded. The Bid Security shall be included in the envelope containing the bid proposal. Failure to submit the Bid Security will result in the proposal not being considered for this project. Bidder's bond will be returned if the City fails to award the contract within 49 calendar days of receipt of bids, unless an extension is agreed to by the Bidder. 3. PAYMENT BOND AND PERFORMANCE BOND: For projects in excess of $25,000, the successful bidder entering into a contract for the work will be required to give the City surety in a sum equal to the amount of the contract awarded. The form of the bond shall be as herein provided and the surety shall be acceptable to the Cit�. All bonds furnished hereunder shall meet the requirements of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, as amended. In order for a surety to be acceptable to the City, (1) the name of the surety shall be included on the current U. S. Treasury List of Acceptable Sureties (Circular 870), or (2) the surety must have capital and surplus equal to ten times the amount of the bond. The surety must be licensed to do business in the state of Texas. The amount of the bond shall not exceed the amount shown on the Treasury list or one-tenth of the total capital and surplus. If reinsurance is required, the company writing the reinsurance must be authorized, accredited or trusteed to do business in Texas. No sureties will be accepted by the City which are at the time in default or delinquent on any bonds or which are interested in any litigation against the City. Should any surety on the contract be determined unsatisfactory at any time by the City, notice will be given to the Contractor to that effect and the contractor shall immediately provide a new surety to the City. 08/14/99 ITB - 1 u� If the total contract price is $2'5,000 or less, payment to the contractor shall be made in one lump sum. Payment shall not be made for a period of 45 calendar days from the date the work has been competed and accepted by the City. � If the contract� is in excess of $25,000, a Payment Bond �shall be executed, in the amount of the contract, solely for the protection of all claimants supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work. If the contract amount is in excess of $100,000, a Performance Bond shall also be provided, in the amount of the contract, conditioned on the faithful performance of the work in accordance with the plans, specification, and contract documents. Said bond shall be solely for the protection of the City of Fort Worth. 4. BOND SURETY: Preferred sureties for bonds required for the project are included on the current U. S. Department of the Treasury - Fiscal Service list of companies holding certificates of authority as acceptable sureties on federal bonds and as acceptable reinsuring companies (Circular 570). The limit of a bond written by any one acceptable company shall not exceed the amount shown on the Treasury list for that company. Alternate ratings are discussed in the General Conditions. Surety must be admitted �to do business in the state and have capital and surplus equal to ten times the limit of the bond or any amount in excess of the ten percent limit must be reinsured by a company or companies duly authorized, accredited or trusteed to do business in this state. Should any surety for the contracted project be determined unsatisfactory at any time during Project. The Contractor shall immediately provide a new surety bond satisfactory to the City. No sureties will be accepted by the Owner which are at the time in default or delinquent on� any bonds or which are interested in any litigation against the owner. All bonds shall be made on the forms furnished by the Owner, and shall be executed by an approved surety company doing business in the City of Fort Worth, Texas, and which is racceptable to the owner. Each bond shall be properly eXecuted by both th�e Contractor and Surety Company 5. PRE-BID SITE INVESTIGATION: Prior to filing a bid, the bidder shall examine the site(s) of the work and the details of the requirements �set out in these specifications to satisfy himself as to the conditions which will be encountered relating to the character, quality, and quantity of the work to be performed and materials and equipment required. The filing of a bid by the bidder shall be considered evidence that he has complied with these requirements. 6. AMBIGUITY: In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating prices in the proposal, the City reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous construction thereof to the City or to reject the proposal. 7. WAGE RATE�: Not less than the prevailing wage rates set forth in Contract Documents, must be paid on this project. � 8. POST BID - PREAWARD SUBMITTALS: Bidders are required to s,ubmit the following information to the Project Manager within five business days subsequent to bid opening (Normally Thursday following a Thursday bid opening) in order to assist City staff in determining the Contractor's capability of perForming the work and in meeting City�contract requirements: Minority/Women's Business Documentation (for bids.in excess of $25,000) Contractors Qualification Statement (AIA Form A305) Proposed Subcontractors Assurance of Insurability for Workers Compensation Insurance ITB - 2 08/14/99 L"J 9. PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS: Acceptance of the bid in no way requires the City to � accept the qualifications of the subcontractors. The .Subcontractor lists are for use by the City in preparing recommendations for award of the contract. The Contractor must provide and use subcontractors listed unless requested or allowed to substitute by the City. 10. DISCREPANCIES AND �DDENDA: �� I � l�J �I� ►� Should a bidder find any discrepancies in the drawings and specifications, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall notify the City at once and, if required, the City will then prepare a written addendum which will be available to all Bidders at the Plans Desk or place designated for distribution of Bid Documents by the Notice to Bidders. The Contractor is responsible for determining if addendums are available and for�securing copies prior to submitting a proposal. Oral instructions or decisions unless confirmed by addenda will not be considered valid, legal or binding. No extras will be authorized because of failure of the contractor to include work called for in the addenda. � Bidder must acknowledge• addenda in the Proposal. Failure to acknowledge addenda may cause the Proposal to be ruled non-responsive. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain Addenda and include its information in the Proposal. 11. MINORITY/WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (M/WBEI: The lowest responsive, responsible, bidder meeting the M/WBE requirements will be recommended for award. Information concerning participation of Minority and Women's Business Enterprises is not required for Projects less than $25,000. All purchases from M/WBE suppliers, second tier subcontractors and second tier suppliers may be included in M/WBE contribution toward meeting the goal. � The Bidder shall submit the M/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, PRIME CONTRACTOR WAIVER FORM and/or th� GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM ("Documentation") as appropriate. The Documentation must be received no later than 5:00 P.M. five City business days after the bid � opening date. The Bidder shall obtain a receipt from the appropriate employee of the managing department to whom delivery was made. Such receipt shall be evidence that the Documentation was received by the City. � L�J The city will verify proposed participation prior to recommending award of contract. Successful Bidder will be required to submit co-signed letters of intent or executed agreements with all M/WBE subcontractors and suppliers prior to receiving a Notice to Proceed. 12. WORKERS COMPENSATION INSURANCE: Bidders will be required to demonstrate � that coverage is in effect at time of Award of Contract. Sample Certificate of Insurance, or other proof that Workers Compensation Insurance will be obtained, must be submitted within five working days of bid opening. � � � L�J 13. TAXES: Equipment and materials consumed by or incorporated into the work are not subject to State sales taxes under House Bill 11, enacted August 15, 1991. 14. PERMITS: Contractor shall apply for all City of Fort Worth Permits and for any other permits required by this project. City of Fort Worth Construction Permit fees are waived. Inspection fees for the various trades are not waived. Separate permits will be required for each facility. O8/14/99 ITB - 3 � 15. CONTRACT DURATION: Tim.e is of the essence. City will evaluate the bids based upon � construction cost and stated bid period of time for construction. Where time is proposed by the Bidder, the City will evaluate the City's program needs in determining the acceptability of the � proposed contract duration. The City reserves the right to award the contract upon those �terms considered by the City to be in its best interests. 16. PLAN DEPOSIT: Tt�e City will deposit plan deposit checks to its account two weeks following receipt of bids. Plans must be returned by all except the apparent low bidder prior to that time. Contractors forfeit their plan deposit after that time. 17. ADJUSTMENT OF QUANTITIES: Where unit prices and estimated quantities are used to compute the contract amount, the Owner t�nay increase or decrease the quantities by an amount that is 20% of the total cost for fhat section. Unit p�ices for adjustmenfs to unii �quantities in excess to 20% may be negotiated at the request of either party. � l"-_"7 � 18. MANUFACTURER'S REFERENCE: Catalog, brand names, and manufacturer's references are descriptive, not restrictive. Bids on brands of like nature and quality will be � considered. For all items other than reference specifications and equivalent products listed in each section, a full size sample and/or detailed product descriptions must be provided to the architect within 14 calendar days of receipt of bid. � _ �00000 "�J � l'�J �I L�J L�J C�J � � � C�J � ITB - 4 08/ 14/99 � � R �� • w � e • � I■ C � I�l I�l I�l � L�J � l#J � � � � � �� PROPOSAL MR. BOB TERRELL CITY MANAGER CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS FOR: SUMMERGLEN BRANCH LIBRARY 4205 BASSWOOD BOULEVARD FORT WORTH, TEXAS Pursuant to the foregoing "Notice to Bidders," the undersigned has thoroughly examined the plans, specifications and the site, understands the amount of work to be done, and hereb� proposes to do all the work and furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary to fully complete all the work as provided in the plans and specifications, and subject to the inspection and approval of the Director of Transportation and Public Works of the City of Fort Worth. Upon acceptance of this Proposal by the City Council, the bidder is bound to execute a contract and, if the contract amount exceeds $25,000.00, furnish Performance and/or Payment Bonds approved by the City of Fort Worth for performing and completing the Work within the time stated and for the following sum, to wit: DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS Base Bid: Trench Safety: � �� LF X �LF � TOTAL BASE BID: $ I �� `7� • tk� $ � �� Oc�U. �,Ldw� TERNATIVES: Circle "add or deducY' as appropriate Add ��t Alternate 1: Thin set epoxy terrauo flooring in lieu of porcelain ceramic tile . Add �� Alternate 2: Limestone masonry veneer in lieu of U#2 at North and West walls as indicated. Add / �t Alternate 3: Green painted aluminum storefront and green tinted glazing in lieu of anodized aluminum storefront and bronze tinted glazing. �Add Alternate 4: Sod in lieu of hydromulch at rear portion of ing as indicated. Add c1�Y)f Alternate 5: Concrete stamping in lieu of broom finished concrete at front entrance. Add �tDFX Alternate 6: Armstrong "Cirrus" ceiling in lieu of mstrong "Minaboard" ceiling. Add / educ Iternate 7: Laminated wood framing in lieu of heavy timber framing. Add ��Alternate 8: Six inch (6") concrete parking paving in lieu five inch (5") concrete parking paving P-1 $ 9,700.00 $ 900.00 $ 4,500.00 $ 5,400.00 $ 4.000.00 $ �.nnn_�n � .�♦ • � 11 11 !J . a, . � � � 1 ■J IJ • Unit Prices: The foilowing are Unit Prices for specific portions of the Work as listed, and are applicable to authorized variations from the Contract Documents. Unit prices to include all material and labor required to comply with design requirements for piers as indicated in drawings, including placement. Unit Price List Item Description Add / per lineal foot Credit / per lineal foot � 16" dia, piers $ 14.50 $ ( -6.75) 18" dia. piers $ 17.50 $ 27.00 $ ( -8.00) $ (-13.75) 24" dia. piers L�' � � Unit price per lineal foot for trenches exceeding 5 foot in depth: Add 20.00 The undersigned agrees to complete the Work within 300 calendar days a�ter the date of Notice to Proceed. The City reserves the right to accept or reject any and all bids or any combinatfon thereof proposed for the above work. � The undersigned assures that its employees and applicants for employment and those of any labor organization, subcontractors or employment agency in either furnishing or referring employee appficants to the undersigned are not discriminated againsi as prohibited by the terms � of City Ordinance 7278 as amended by City Ordinance 7400 (Fort Worth City Code Section 13A-21 through 13A-29). u u L�J I�l L �' u � Residency of Bidders: The 1985 Session of the Texas Legislature passed house Bill 620 relative to the award of contracts to non-resident bidders. The law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, non-resident bidders (out of state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are outside of the State of Texas) that bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in Texas at an amvunt lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a non-resident bidder in order fo obtain a comparable contract in the state in which the non-residenYs principal place of business is located. The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all non-resident bidders in order for your bid to meet specifications. The failure of out of state or non-resident bidders Failure to complete the forms may disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B. A. Non-resident vendors in (give state), our principal place of business, are required to be oercent lower than resident bidders by state 1aw. Non-resident vendors in (give state), are not required to underbid resident bidders. B. � Our principal place of business or corporate offices are in the State of Texas. P-2 l■J �, . . � � I�I � u L�J � � l_� 1 Ll 1� L�J l�J I■I l�l CI C�I ' Within ten (10) days of receipt of notice of acceptance of this bid, the successful bidder wifl execute the formal contract and will deliver an approved Surety Bond for the faithful performance of this contact. The attached deposit check in the sum of 5% GAB Dollars (� ) is to become the property of the City of Fort Worth, Texas, or the attached Bidder's Bond is to be forfeited in the event the contract and bond are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated damages for delay and additional work caused thereby. MINORI7Y/WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (M/WBE): (For bids in excess of �25,000) • ! am aware that I must submit information to the Director, Transportation and Public Works, concerning the M/WBE participation within F1VE BUSINESS DAYS of submittal of this Proposal in order to be RESPONSIVE. Respectfully submitted, The Frymire Company Company N By: / J, Signature � � � G. L. Frymire, President Printed Name of Principai Title Address: 3000 Shotts Street Fort Worth, TX 76107 P one: $17-336-4514 Fax: $17-870��9155 Receipt is acknowledged of the foilowin a denda: Addendum No. 1: 9-16-99� dd�dum N o. 3: Addendum No: 2: Addendum No. 4: P-3 L!' �� I�l � �l I�I I■I I � l�l � � L�J Sep 3.0 99 01:08p TPW 817-871-8488 p.3 • SEP-28-1999 13:27 FROM THE FRYMIRE COMPANY TD 8718A8B P.02 � ATt/1CH�AF�� P�e 4�: city of Fort wor#h � Nfinority and Women Business Enterprise Speci�cations � MBEIWBE UTiLIZATlON � I,r��7'*t r� �oMf'�n�'f ��2� �S'�- P E COM A E BtD Mr1 wicrl�i �!�'� ' PROJEGT NAME PROJECT NIfNfBER �CfTY'$MhVbE �R03EC]'GOAL: �5 j� � �A!/WSE PER�N7'AGEACiIiEVED: ��♦ � �y`'� .. , , :� _ _..,� . ...,.� ' Pai�u�e,to completc�this lonn� in tea entirely with supporiing documentation, and recetved bjr ths Managlag t�s "y on or l�fore,5=Q0 p.m. fiv� (S} City t�siness days afte� bis opetlMs, Qxcfusive ai bid openis�g date� wiN res�{t ip tfi� , being:contidered aon-rosponalv� to btd cpeclfiC�tions.� , _..__i,, ihi"uiiilersiQried �bidel�r agri�s to Qale� int� A fonrraf �s�eemen! with the M8E ondfor WRE fimu for wotic list�d h� � scheduli;�;conditionsd upoe �xecutioa ot a acnlr+ct witl� the CitY of Fort 1Natls. ihe is�tentiortal �ndfor ka . t�isropinseqtailon of facts is prounds tor cansideratFao o! tiisquau'ticatloR �nd will resun in ehe 6id �sin� eoAs .., nan-respOnstvi to sp�cif'�ttotne. Conipar�i Nant�� Cor�nM Nam�. Cauna Spec:if!► tt .Cer�traatM9 � SP�� !o be /►ddns�Fand Tobphon� No. Scop� of WorK ('j 3uppqed('j � �a � o�~ --- �. . = S e.» �� ►1� . �. T.l�p�'isi ?Y �� .'�+�7'�'� . -� � � � ac� rr 7' _...../ �T w $ � �we�,r� b 9�t� - So{l� ��c6�r��c��►� i�ollar M�� '.' Z� . �s � ��l,�o�`� Je�+u ,��,,► � X - 3, MA�.�.s� � •v.��4��x'�'� _ 1`Z,C��ar,,�;r' .a,otir�t a_�� —��t -�i� � . l�l � ��fl, ��`�' � � !1 �, ?f+�. . . . .. ,� �� uuwS�s musc w tocat.Q In p� ��Mn�) cwa►b a��rtatdac. or cun�mly doMp baatuess !n ttN macl�tara at th. u�nr af a�d. ... .i : � {{•) Sp�saTy aU snas in wldch NiNt�Ey an to bo uNliud a�dfor lxms 10 bs wppSNd: ^� 1(`} A catnpl�lr flsdn� of 1Nm� to � sYppilN � r0,W1'ed In ordar to r�ulw endu Io«�rd tM NNM9� �at. � � � l�l ('") Identify �ach Titr i�r�t. ikr. Mca�u t1�e I�vei at subcontractinp bdotiv tl�e p�im* contrac�atcoa�u�tud.1.... a 0'ind Wlrw!!! � �u tl e hom th� pfimo cOnlractor to a subcontraetor Is consld�nd 1'� Aer, a pa�rmsnt bry � su�oor�r7i�Wf hs =upplh� (s consf��nd 2"� ff�t. i1i15 FORM MUST B� RECEtV�O BY iHE MANAG(NG �EPARTMF.�iT 8Y 5:00 p.m., F1VE (� CTTY BUSfNESS DAYS Af'iER s!9 OPEAfiNG. EXCLl1S1VP OF THE B1D QPFNlAlG DATE � p�y •Y!' ��. i'a�es 1 and 2 of Attachcnent iA must be received by the Ma�a9ing Dopa�trreent r � �ZZ�%�� ......� � � . �� ,Sep 30 99 01:09p TPW 817-871-8488 � SEP-26-1999 13�28 FROM ?F� FRYh1IRE COMPANY TO 8718488 P.03 � • . ' � � Ci�y Of FOtf WOC�h IVtinority and Women gusiness Enterprise Specifications . MBE/WBE UTIt�tZATiON � � � � � � � a a � � � � p � a Compa�ry I�tame, Cvatact Name� Gru1Md Adderss� and%kphons Na � F� z � � � I�JV�� . _ Q r �„�+ a.,�,�o �U9�-'��,c,� ,� � � - _,�NNtE T�►,pi..t � Sp�cit� Illl Cpntrac.tl� Specity Alf ltems to be ScoPe of Work (•) SuPpfi.d('� • ��a��: M��a A7"rl.l�6� p.4 - c�otl�r�i,�"pifi� , , �� . � . I � t31,� . . .._ ,...r .,�...w,i 7he bidder fnrti�er aQr�es ta provide, directly to the City uport request� complete and accun�te infoRn�tian � actual work pe�fonned by :Il sabcoatractors, includiqg MBE{s) and/or WBE(s) amn��m�nts �ubmitted with.�.e, 1'he bidder �Iso agrees to ailovr aa audit sndlor examutstion of aay books� secorids and Cle� hetd by lheir cor�qy witt cubstantiate the actual work perfvnr►ed by the MBE�{s) andlor MYBE(s) on this coatract, by an authorized �.g� employea oi the City. Any intentton:l andlor knowi�g mfsrepresentatian of (actc wi11 he pronnas Tor t.renin�t„ contract or debsrnrent from Ciry work (or a perioct of not lers thaa three (3j years and for initiat{� a�ttflr ondt� .�M.� State or LocaE I:ws conceming tak� Matemeats. Any iailaro to compiy with this ordirtarrce arid creates � py� breach ot contnct may re�uit in a deter�lnatioci oi an imesponsible c�Hprar and barr�d !rom pasttclpatsr►y in f�jl� � io� a pe�iod o! tiMe not less than one (1) yaar. � MBEz and WBC-s MUST SE CERTiFtED BY TIiE C1TY BEFORE CONTRACT AWARQ � � A �ized sign �f5."� 9��i�.7r^�!f � . . . �3s ✓��.,.f` . Y't � Contact Name and Titte (it difiennt) � �� _�� 127'�r� �ro�� 3�-��"/ , � � . Company Na � Telephono Number (s� � • ��sv ��40'7''�' � �,� -- SJ �� `�a�� Fax Num r ' /�T �o.��`�-1t ?`"�C 7�I �'7 5' �.� SS S � . _ . CitylSti�l p Code Dato . THlS P4RM MusT 8E RECElVED SY THE MAN�IGikG t7EPARiM�NT 8Y 5:00 p_m_, FlY� [5) C1TY BU3INESS pAYS AFiE$'�'• OPENiNG, EXCLUSIVE OF TNE BID OPENiNG DATE � �� Pages 1 and 2 of Attachment 1A must be �ecti�ed dy the Managing DepaRment TOTAL P.03 � �•Sep 30 99 01:08p TPW 817-871-8488 p.2 SEP-2B-1999 13�2? F=ROM THE FRYMIRE COf1PAhtY TO 8718488 P.01 THE FRYNi1RE COMPAI�Y � Q 3000 SHOTTS F4RT W4RTH, 7EXAS 76107 �� F-MAf L: irymireco�woNdnetatt.net - � , WEB PAGE: frymire.net � � �'' . 'r"•: �A��;: y �z 7 l�"S �= ��uM►�,��c.,��1 �� {�"��'��' � C� NUMBER OF MAtL pAlGiNAL: �'J YES OR O NO � PAGES: . � � (tncluding cover sheet) . . TO: AA�G 1�..1C.iKa�Z�� aA-1 FR�M: l.I.1QQi �"�r`'! 1'G� '' . � i� �� - a �� ATTENTION: SENT BY: aPHONE: PHQNE: SI'7/33G-4514 . FAX �AX - 8171$70-9135 � . � RENfARKS�; �. � . . . .. .. . � � O URQENT t7 Ff1R YniJR F�FVIFW f'T RfP�Y A�AP *J PLEASE COMMEWT � �''j � �n.�� (1'1-1�--r2�Q i 1�.{ ,��''�L�� . � . . . - . � _ ., a . . . o, _- __ _ _ ___ . o � o . � � o � � � .s: o � � � City of Fort Worth, Texas Transportation/PublTc Works Departmenf Building Services Divlsion/Archifectural Services Section GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION � li� �� il i'_'J u' '�! � � � � l"J � l�i L� SECTION A DEFINITIONS, PROCEDURES AND INTERPRETATIONS A-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. By the term Contract Documents is meant all of the written and drawn documents setting forth or affecting the rights of the parties, including but not necessarily limited to, the Contract, Notice to Bidders, Proposal, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Plans, B.onds and all Addenda, Amendmer.is signed by all parties, Change Orders, written Interpretations and any written Field Order for a minor change in the Work. A-2 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. The Contract Documents represent the entire agreement between the Parties, and no prior or contemporaneous, oral or written agreements, instruments or negotiations shall be construed as altering the terms and effects of the Contract Documents. After being executed, the Contract Documents can be changed only by a written Amendment signed by the Contractor and the Owner, or Change Order, or by a written Field Order for a minor change. A-3 WORK. By the term Work is meant all labor, supervision, materials and equipment necessary to be used or incorporated in order to produce the construction required by Contract Documents. A-8 INTERPRETATIONS. The Architect will fumish such Interpretations of the Plans and Specifications as may be necessary fdr the proper execution or progress of the work. Such interpretations shall be fumished at the instance of the Architect or at the request of the Contractor, or Owner, and will be issued with reasonable promptness and at such times and in accordance with such schedule as may be agreed upon. Such Interpretations shall be consistent with the purposes and intent of the Plans and Specifications and may be effected by Field Order. In the event of any dispute between any of the parties to the Contract and the Architect or each other involving the interpretation of the Contract Documents, the evatuation of work or materials performed or furnished by the Architect Contractor, or any subcontrac:or or maYerialsman, or involving any question ,Qf fault or liabiliry of any party, the decision of the Owner shall be final and binding. In the event of inconsistency in the contract documents, the foliowing sequence for interpretation shail be used in order of precedence: Change Orders and/or Field Orders (by date of issuance); Addenda (by date of issuance); Drawings; Notes and dimensions on Drawings; Technical Specifications; Special Provisions; Supplementary General Conditions; Generai Conditions; and, Construction Contract. A-4 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall be executed in six originals by the Contractor and the Gwner in such form as may be prescribed by law. A-5 FAMILIARITY WITH PROPOSED WORK. Before filing a bid, the bidder shall examine carefully the proposal, plans, specifications, special provisions, and the form of contract to be entered into for the work contemplated. He shall examine the site of work and satisfy himself as to the conditions that will be encountered relating to the character, quality and quantity of work to be perFormed and materials to be fumished. The filing of a bid by the bidder shall be considered evidence that he has complied with these requirements and has accepted the site as suitable for the work. Claims for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually encountered in construction and as indicated by the plans will not be allowed. A-6 ONE UNIFIED CONTRACT. Insofar as possible, the Contract Documents will be bound together and executed as a single unified Contract, the intention of the Contract Documents being to provide for all labor, supervision, materiais, equipment and other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of ttie Work. Words that have well recognized technical or Vade meanings are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings. A-7 DNISION OF WORO(. The arrangement of Drawings and/or Specifications into Divisions, Sections, Articles, or other Subdivisions shall not be binding upon the contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Trades. A-9 COPIES OF WORKING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. The Architect will fumish to Contractor free of charge 15 sets of working Drawings and 15 sets of Specifications. Contractor shall pay the cost of reproduction for all other copies of Drawings and Specifications fumished to him. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof fumished by the Owner of the Ar itect are and shall remain the property of the Owner. The�are not to be used on any other project and, with ihe excepti�n of one Contract set for each Party to the Contract, are to be returned to the Owner on request at the completion of the work. A-10 MINORITY AND WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE POLiCY. The City of Fort Worth has goals for the participation of disadvantaged business enterprises in City contracts. Compliance with the poiicies designed to meet these goals is mandatory in order to be considered a responsive bidder. The City policy and procedures to be followed in submitting bids is included. A-11 CORRELATION AND INTENT. In general, the drawings indicate dimension, locations, positions, quantities, and kinds of construcUon; the specifications indicate the quality and construction procedures required. Work indicated on the drawings and not specified of vice-versa, shail be fumished as though set forth in both. Work not �Jetaiied, marked or specified shall be the same as sfmilar parts that are detailed, marked or specified. If the drawings are in conflict or conflict with the specifications the better quality or greater quantity or work or materials shall be estimated and shail be fumished or included. Dimensions on drawings shall take precedence over small-scale drawings. Drawings showing locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, electrical apparatus, etc., are diagrammatic and � job conditions may not allow installation in the exact location shown. Relocation shall not occur withouf the Architects approvai. SECTION B IDENTITY OF ARCHITECT B-1 CONTRACT ADMINIST�TION. Where the term "Architect" is used in the "General onditions of the Contract for Construction", it shal� refer to the Director, Transportation and Public Works or his designated Project Manager. The Director, Transportation wiil designate a Project Manager and Construction Manager to administer this contract and perform the functions of the "Architect" as indicated in the General Conditions. The design architect may also be designated to perform the duties of "Architect". B-2 TERMINATION AND SUSPENSION OF WORK: The Owner has the right to terminate the Project for any reason. If the project is terminated, the Contractor shall: a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination. b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated. c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they reiate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of termination. After termination as above, the City will pay the contractor a proportionate part of the contract price based on the work completed; provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by the portion thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any otherwise made. Contractor shall submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or allowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph, such dispute or controversy shall be re�ol�ed and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be finai and binding upon all parties to this contract B-3 DUTIES OF THE ARCHITECT As used herein, the term Architect means the Architect or his authorized representative. Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall create any privity of Contract between the Architect and the ConVactor. B� ARCHITECT AS REPRESENTATIVE �OF THE OWNER The Architect will provide general administration of tFie Contract on behalf of the Owner and will have authority to act as the representative of the Owner to the extent provided in the Contract Documents unless changed in writing by the Owner. The Architect will be available for conferences and consultaGons with the Owner or the Contractor at all reasonabie times. B-5 ACCESS TO JOB SITES. The Architect shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in prepara6on and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Architect may perform its assigned funcGons under the Contract Documents. 7he Architect will make periodic visits to the Site to familiarize himself with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on-site observations, the Architect will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. Based upon such observations and the Contracto►'s applications for payments, the Architect witl make deteRninations and recommendations conceming the amounts owing to the Contractor and will issue certificates for payment amounts. B-6 INTERPRETATIONS. The Architect will be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the requirements of the Plans and Specifications and the judge of the performance thereunder by the Contractor, subject to the final decision of the Owner. The Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect "will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. B-7 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK. The Architect will have authority to reject work, that does not conform to the Plans and Specifications. In addition, whenever, in its reasonable �opinion, the Architect considers it necessary or advisable in order to insure the proper realization of the intent of the Plans and Specifications, the Architect will have authority to require the Contractor to Stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or testing of the Work wheth'er or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. B-8 MISCELLANEOUS DUTIES OF ARCHITECT. Shop Drawinqs. The� Architect will review Shop Drawings and Samples as provided in Section D. Two copies of each approved Shop Drawing and submittal will be provided to the Owner by the Architect. ChanQe Orders. Change Orders and Field Orders for Minor Changes in the Work will be issued by the Owner through the Architect in accordance with the provisions of Section L. Guarantees. The Architect will receive on behaif of the Owner all written guarantees and related documents required of the Contractor. Upon completion of the project the Contractor shall provide the Architect five copies of each guarantee. The Architect will provide three copies of each guarantee to the Owner. Inspection •. The Architect will conduct inspections for the purpose o� determining and making his recommendations conceming the dates of substantial completion and final completion. Ooeration and Maintenance Manuals. The Architect will receive on behalf of the Owner, six copies of all applicable equipment instailation, operation, and maintenance brochures and manuals required of the Contractor. The Architect will provide three copies of this infortnation to the Owner. B-9 TERMINATION OF THE ARCHITECT. In case of the termination of the employment of the Architect by the Owner, the Owner shall either assume the duties of the Architect throuyh the Director of the Department of Transportation and Public Works, or shatl appoint a L"'�J � 1!"J �� !� �� l� '�! � �I � L"J 1'r`I � L'J � successor Architect against whom the Contractor makes no reasonable objection. SECTION C OWNER C-1 IDENTIFICATION. By the term Owrter is meant the City of Fort Worth acGng herein by its duly authorized representatives in the manner provided by law. Authorized representatives include the City Manager, Assistant City Manager, the Director and of Transportation and Public Works Department and members of the Building Services Division. Generally speaking a designated representative will be identified from within the Building Services Division to act as a point of contact for day to day contract administration. C-2 DUTIES OF THE OWNER. The Owner shall furnish surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal limits and utility locations for the site of the Work; provided, however, that the Contractor hereby covenants that he has inspected the premises and familiarized himself therewith and that the locations of utilities and other obstacles to the prosecution of the Work as shown on the Owner's survey are for information only, are not binding upon the Owner, and the Owner shall not incur any liability for loss or damage by virtue of any inaccuracies or deficiencies in such surveys. The Owner shall secure and pay for title to the site and all necessary permanent or construction easements. The Owner wilt cooperate with the Contractor in the prosecution of the Work in such manner and to such extent as may be reasonable and shall fumish information under its control with reasonable promptness at the request of the Contractor. C-3 INSTRUCTIONS. The Owner shali issue aIl instructions to the Contractor through the Architect. C-4 ACCESS TO JOB SITE. The Owner shall at all times have access to the Work whenever it is in preparation and progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Owner may perform its assigned functions under the Contract Documents. C-5 PROGRESS INSPECTIONS. The Owner �nd the Architect will make visits to the Site to familiarize themselves with the progress and quality of the Work and to determine if the worfc is proceeding in accordance with the Contract documents. On the basis of on-site observations and reports provided by the Architect conceming the progress and quality of the work, the Owner will approve and authorize the Contractors applications for payments. C-6 AUTHORITY TO STOP WORK. The Owner will have authority to reflect work that does not conform to the Plans and Specifications. Whenever, in its reasonable opinion, the Owner considers tt'necessary or advisabie in order to insure the proper realization of th� intent of the Plans and Specifications, the Owner will have authority to require the Contractor to stop the work or any portion thereof, or to require the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, or to require special inspection or tesUng of the Wo�lc whether or not such Wo�lc be then fabricated, installed or completed. C-7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION. Upon agreement of the Contractor and Architect that the Work is substantially complete, the Owner will schedule a Substantial Completion Inspection to be conducted by ihe Architect and attended by representatives of the Architect, Owner and Contractor. Items identified during this inspection as being incomplete, defective or deficient shall be incorporated into a punch list to be prepared by the Architect and attached to the. AIA document G704, which is to be prepared and signed by the Contractor, and accepted, approved and signed by the Owner. C-8 RIGHT TO AUDIT: Contractor agrees that the City sh�ll, un61 the expiration of three years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any direcUy.pertinent books, documents, papers and records of the contractor involving transactions relating to this contract. Contractor further agrees to include in ali his subcontracts hereunder a provision to the effect that the subcontractor agrees that the City shall, until the expiration of three years after final payment under the subcontract, have access to and the right to examine any directly pe�tinent books, documents, papers and records of such subcontractor, involving transactions to the subcontract. The term "subcontract" as used herein includes purchase orders. Contractor agrees to photocopy such documents as may be requested by the city. The city agrees to reimburse Contractor for the costs of copies at the rate published in the Texas Administrative Code. � SECTION D CONTRACTOR D-1 IDENTIFICATION. The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the Contract. The term Contractor means the Contractor or his authorized representative. D-2 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor shall perform all work and services hereunder as an independent contractor, not as an officer, agent, or employee of the City. Contractor shall have excluslve control of and the exclusive right to control the details of the work and services performed hereunder, and all persons performing same, and Contractor shall be solely responsibie for the acts and omissions of its officers, agents, and empioyees. Nothing herein shall be construed as creating a partnership or joint enterprise between Ciry and the Contractor, its o�cers, agents and emp�oyees, and the doctrine of respondeat superior shall not apply. D-3 £U�LETTiNG It is further agreed that the performance of this Contract, either in whole or in part, shali not be sublet or assigned to anyone eise by said Contractor without the written consent of the Director of Transportation and Public Works of the City of Fort Worth. D-4 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract, Drawings, Specifications, Addenda and modifications and shall at once report to the Owner and to the Architect any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover. The Contractor shall do no work without Drawings, SpecificaUons and Interpretations. D-5 SUPEi2VIS10N. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. He � shall be solely responsible for ali construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract Documents. D-6 LABOR AND MATERIALS. Unless othervvise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work. The successful low bidder will use its reasonabie best efforts to hire local laborers, workmen and materialmen. The general condition is not to be constructed as limiting the right of any bidder to employee laborers, workmen or materialmen from outside local area. The Contractor shall at all times enfOrce strict discipline and good order among his employees, and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not'skilled in the task assigned to him. D-7 PREVAILING WAGE RATE. The Contractor agrees to pay not less than the generai prevailing rate of per diem wages for Work of a similar character in the locality in which the Work is performed, and not less than the general prevailing wage of per diem wages for a Iegal holiday and overtime work to all laborers, workmen and mechanics employed on the Work under this Contract. The Contractor agrees to pay at least the minimum wage per hour for all labor as the same is classified and set out by the City of Fort Worth, Texas, a copy of which is attached hereto and made a part hereof the same as if it were copies verbatim herein. D-8 WARRANTY. The Contractor wanants to the Owner and the Architect that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards �may be considered defective. If required by the Architect or the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of m�terials and equipment. The warranty provided in this Section shall be in addition ta and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy provided by law or the Contract Documents. D-9 TAXES. The Contractor i9 exempt from State Sales Tax on material incorporated into the finished construction, Excise and Use Tax. D-10 LICENSES. NOTICES AND FEES. The Contractor shall obtain all Permits, Licenses, Certificates, and Inspections, whether permanent or temporary, required by law or these Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give all Notices and comply with all Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulationg and Orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If the Contractor observes or becomes aware that bearing on the pe►formance of the Work. If the Contractor observes or becomes aware that �ny of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Architect in writing and any necessary changes will be made. If the Contractor performs any Worl: knowing that it is in violation of, or contrary to, any of such Laws, Statutes: Charter, Ordinances, Orders or Directives, or Regulatinns without�fumishing Notice to the Architect, the Contractor will assume full responsibility therefor and bear all costs attributable thereto. D-11 CASH ALLOWANCES. The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. These allowances shall cover the net cost of the ma!erials and equipment delivered and unloaded at .the site, and all applicable taxes. The• Contractor's handling costs on the site, labor, instaliation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the original allowance shall be included in the Contractor Sum and not in the allowance. The Contractor shall cause the V�/ork covered by these allowances to be perFormed for such amounts and by such persons as the Architect may direct, but he will not be required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection. If the cost, when determined, is more than or less than the ailowance, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order which will include additional handling costs on the site, labor, instaliation costs, field overhead, profit and other direct expenses resulUng to the Contractor from any increase over the original allowance. D-12 SUPERINTENDENT. The Contractor shali employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Contractor and the Owner. The superintersdent shall represent the Contractor and all commu�ications given to the superintendent shall be binding as ff given to the Contractor. Important communications will be confirmed in writing. Other communications wili be so confirmed on written request in each case. D-13 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR EMPLOYEES AND SUB-CONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of ali his employees and all Sub-contractors, their agents and employees, and all other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. D-14 FAILURE TO COMMENCE WORK: Should the Contractor fail to begin the work herein provided for within the time herein fixed or to carry on and complete the same acc;ording to the true meaning of the intent and terms of said Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, then the Owner shall have the right to eitherdemand the surety to take over the work and complete same in accordance with the Contract Documents or to take charge of and complete the work in such a manner as it may deem proper,•and if, in the completion thereof, the cost to the said City shall axcee�i the contract price or prices set forth in the said plans and speciflcations made a part hereof, tF�e Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay said City on demand iA writing, setting forth and specifying an itemized statement of the total cost thereof, said excess cost. D-15� PROGRESS SCHEDULE. The Contractor, immediately after being awarded the contract, shall prepare and submit for the Architect's approval, an estimated progress schedule for the Work. The progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project. This schedule shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various states of construction and shall be revised as required by the conditions of the Work, subject to the ArchitecYs approval. It shall also indicate the dates for submission and approval of shop drawings and submittals � � � L�1 � 0 l�J �� !"J � � � � � �� as well as the delivery schedule for' major pieces of equipment and/or materials. � The progress schedule shall be updated at least monthly by the contractor and submitted to the Architect for approval with the Contractor's monthly progress payment requests. D-16 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS AT THE SITE. The Contractor shall maintain at the sita for the Owner one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, approved Shop Drawings, Change Orders, and other Changes and Amendments in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These shall also tze available to the Architect. The Drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction, shall be delivered to the Architect upon completion of the Work, and the Architect will prepare, and provide to the Owner, one complete set of reproducible record drawings of the work. D-17 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and othEr data which are prepared by the Contractor or any Subco�tractor; manufacturer, supplier or distributor, and which illustrate some portion of the Work. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the Work will be judged. The Contractor shall review, stamp with his approval and submit, with reasonable promptness and in orde�iy sequence so as to cause.no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor, normaliy within the first 90 days of the work, six copies of all shop Drawings and Samples required by the� Contract Documents or subsequently by the Architect as covered by changes or amendments. Shop Drawings and Samples shall be properly identified as specified, or as the Architect may require. At the Gme of submission the Contractor shall inform the Architect in writing of any deviation in the Shop Drawings or Samples from the requirements of the Contract Documents. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing given in the Contract Documents. The ArchitecYs approval of a separate item shall not indicate approvat of an assembly in which the item func6ons. The Architect will review and approve Shop Drawings and Samples with reasonabie promptness so as to i;ause no delay, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. The ArchitecYs approval of a separate item shail not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The Contractor shal� make any corrections required by the Architect and shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings or new Sar�ples untii approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings to revlsions other than the corrections requested by the Architect o� previous submissions. � The ArchitecYs approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the cequirements of the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect has given written approval to the specific devia6on as authorized in Paragraph A-2. ArchitecYs approyal shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or Samples. No portion of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submission shall be commenced until the Architect has approved the submittal. All such portions of the Work shali be in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and Samples. D-18 SITE USE. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment. Until acceptance of the work by the Ciry Council of the City of Fort Worth, the entire site of the Work shall be under the exclusive control, care and responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall take every precaution against injury or damage to persons or property by the action of the elements or from any other cause whatsoever. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good at his own expenses all injuries or damages to any portions of the Work occasioned by any of the above, caused before acceptance. D-19 SAFE WORK PRACTICES. The Contractor shall employ safe practices in handling materials and equipment used in performing required work so as to insure the safety of his workmen, City employees and the public. The Contractor shall keep the premise free at atl times from accumulation of waste materials or rub,bish. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all his wastes and rubbish from and about the work area, as weil as his tools, equipment and surplus materials and shatl leave the area as clean and free of spot, stains, etc., as before the work was undertaken. D-20 FIELD OFFICFS AND SHEDS. The Contractor is not required to provide a temporary field office or telephone for projects under $500,000. Contractor shall equip the Project Superintendent with a pager and provide 24-hour contacts to the City. D-21 TRENCH SAFETY The Contractor shall be responsible for all design and implementation of trench shoring and stabilizatlon to meet regulatory requirements. If the Propos3l requires, the Contractor shall include a per unit cost for trench safety measures in his bid. If not inGuded in the Proposal, the Contractor shall include a cost for trench safety measures for all trenches over 5 feet in depth in his Schedule of Values. D-22 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his Work that may required to make its severai parts fit together properly, and shall not endanger any Work by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering the Work or any part of it. D-23, CLEAN UP. The Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materiats or rubbish. At the completion of the Work he shall remove all his waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all his tools, construction equipment, � CJ machinery� and surplus materials, and shall clean all glass surfaces and leave the Work "Broom-clean" or its equivalent, except at otherwise specified. In addition to removal of nibbish and leaving the bulldings "broom-clean", Contractor shall clean all glass, replace any broken glass, remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorated work; clean hardware, remove paint spots and smears from all surfaces, clean fixtures and wash all concrete, tile and terrazo floors. If the Contractor faiis to clean up, the Owner may do so, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the ConVactor. D-24 COMMUNICATIONS. As a general rule, the Contractor shall forward all communications to the Oyvner through ttie Architect, and in all other instances the Contractor shall fumish the Architect a copy of any communication sent directly to the Owner. SECTION E SUBCONTRACTORS. E-1 DEFINITION. �A Subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender and means a Subcontractor or his authorized representative. Nothing contained in the Contract, Documents shall create any contractual relation between the Owner and the Architect and any subcontractor or any of his sub- subcontractors or materialmen. pursuant to an appropriate. agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate between Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that: 1. preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect ��nder the Contract with respeet to the Work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights; 2. require that such Work be performed in accordance with the.requirements of the Contract Documents; 3. require submission to the ConUactor of applications for payment under each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable tirne to enable the Contractor to apply for payment; 4. require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or othervvise with respect to subcontracted portions of the Work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub- subcontractor where appropriate) in the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like ciaims by the Contractor upon the Owner; 5. waive alt rights the contrac6ng parties may have against one another for damages caused by fire or other periis covered by the property insurance, except such rights, if any, as they.�nay have to proceeds of such insu.►ance held by the Owner, and, � 6. obligate each Subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this Section � � � � � E-1 AWARD OF SUBCOJ�TRACTS. The bidder shall fumish a list of the n�mes of the subcontractors or other persons, or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for such portions of the Work as may be designated in the bidding requirements, or if none is so designated in the bidding requirements, the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the Work. Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect shall notify the successful bidder in wriUng if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any person or organizatioR on such list. Failure of the Owner and Architect to make an objection to any person or organization ort� the list prior to the award of this Contract shall not constitute acceptance of such person or organization. If, prior to the award of the Contract, the Owner or Architect has an objective to any person or organization on such list, and refuses to accept such person or organization, the apparent low bidder may, prior to the award, withdraw his bid without forfeiture of bid security.�lf such bidder submits an acceptable substitute, the Owner may,, at its discretion, accept the bid or he may disqualify the bid. If, after the award, the Owner or Architect objects �.in writing to any person or organization on such list, the Contractor shall provide an acceptable substitute. The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or organization that has been accepted by the Owner and the Architect, unless the substitution is also acceptabie to the Owner and the Architect. E-3 TERMS OF SUBCONTRACTS. All wcrlc performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be All of the• provisions set out in this section shall be deemed to have been included in every subcontract, and every subconUact shall be so construed and applied as to the Owner and the Architect, whether or not s�ich provisions are physically included in the sub-contract. E-4 MINORITY AND WOMENS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE lM/WBEI. Should the baseybid be less than $25,000, the requirements of this section do not apply. In accordance with Ciry of Fort Worth Ordinance No 11923, the City of Fort Worth sets goals for the participation of minority business enterprises and women business enterprises in City contracts. Ordinance No 11923 is incorporated in these Specifications by reference. A copy of the°Ordina�ce may be obtained from the Office of the City Secretary. Failure to comply with the Ordinance shall be a material breach of contract. The M/WBE UTILIZATION FORM, M/WBE 'GOALS WAIVER FORM and GOOD FAITH EFFORT FORM, as applicable, must be submitted within five city business days after bid opening. Failure to submit the post bid information shall render the bid non-responsive. The City will consider the contractor's performance on other City Projects regarding its M/WBE program in the evaluation of bids. Failure to comply with the City's M/WBE program, or to demonstrate a"good faith effort", shall result in a bid being considered irresponsible. Upon request, Contractor must provide the City with complete and accurate information regarding' actual work performed by a Minoriry or Women Business Enterprise (M/WBE) on the contract and proof of payment thereof. Contractor further agrees to permit an audit and/or C� � � � � � � � � � � �� i l"J � � � �� L�"J !�J Il.�'J � ��` LI examination of any books, records or files in iYs posSession that will substantiate the actual work performed by an M/ WBE. The misrepresentation of acts (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or the commission of fraud by the Contractor will be grounds for termination of the contract and/or initiating action under appropriate federal, state, or local �aws or ordinances relating to false statemenG Further any such misrepresentation (other than a negligent misrepresentation) and/or commission of fraud will result on the Contractor being determined to be irresponsible and barred from participating in City work for a period of time of not less than three years. Contractor shall provide copies of subcontracts or cos(gned letters of intent with approved M/WBE subcontractors prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall also provide monthly reports on utilization of the subcontractors to the Construction Manager. � The Contractor may count first and second tier subcontractors and/or suppliers toward meeting the goals. The Contractor may count toward its goal a portion of the total dollar amount of the contract with a joint venture equa! to the percentage of the M/V11BE participation in the jolnt venture for a clearly defined portion of the work to be performed. Ail subcontractors used in meeting the goals must be certified prior to the award of the Contract. Whenever a change order affects the work of an M/WBE subcontractor or supplier, the M/WBE shall be given an opportunity to perform the work. Whenever a change order is in excess of 10% of the original contract, the M/WBE coordinator shali determine the goats applicable to the work to be performed under the change order. During the term of the contract the contractor shall: 1. Make no unjustified changes of deletions in iYs M/WBE participation commitments submitted with or subsequent to the bid, and, 2. If substantial subcontracting and/or substantial supplier opportunities arise during the term of the contract which the contractor had represented he would perform with his forces, the contractor shall notify ihe City before subcontracts or purchase orders are let, and shall be required to comply with modifications to goals as determined by the City, and, 3. Submit a REQUEST FOR APPROVAL OF CHANGE FORM, if the contractor desires to change or delete any of the M/WBE subcontractors or suppliers. Justification for change may be granted for the following: 1. Failure of subcontractor to provide evidence of coverage by Workers' Compensation Insurance 2. Failure of subcontractor to provide required general Iiability or other insurance. 3. Failure of subcontractor to execute a standard subcontract form in the amount of the proposal used by the Contractor in preparing his M/WBE Participation plan 4. Default by the M/WBE subcontractor or supplier in the performance of the subcontract. Other reasons at the discretion of the M/WBE Coordinator Within ten days after finai payment from the City the contractor shali provide the M/WBE Office with documentation to reflect final participation of each M/WBE subcontractor and supplier used on the project. E-5 PAYMENTS TO SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, an amount equal to the percentage of completion allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's Work. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make sfmilar payments to his subcontractors. If the Architect refuses to issue a Certificate for Payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on demand, made at any time after the Certificate for Payment would otherwise hav� been issued, for his Work to the er.tent completed, less the retained percentage. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and he shall require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to his Subcontractors. The Architect may, on request and at its discretion, furnish to_any Subcontractor, if practicable, fnformation regarding percentages of completion certified to the Contractor on account of Work done by such Subcontractors. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to ariy Subcontractor. SECTION F SEPARATE CONTRACTS F-1 OWNER'S RIGHT. The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Work. When separate contract are awarded for other portions of the Work, "the Contracto�' in the Contract Documents in each case shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract. F-2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. If any part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Architect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his Work, except as to defects which may deVelop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's Work. Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor on the site, the Contractor shall, upon due• notice, settle with such other contractor by agreement, if he will so settle. If such separate contractor �fJ sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor who shall defend against such suit at the Contractors expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy such judgment and shall reimburse the Owner for all attomey's fees, court costs and expenses which the Owner has incurred in connection with such suit F-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS. The Contractor shall do atl cutting, fitting or patching of his Work that may be required to fit it to receive or be received by the work of other contractors shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not endanger any work or any other contractors by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering any work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor except with the written consent of the Architect. Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. F-4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP. If a disputc� arises between the separate contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up, the Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the severai contractors as the Director of the Department of Transportation and Public Works shall determine to be just. SECTION G MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS G-1 CONFLICT OF LAWS. The law of the place where the site is located shall govern the Contract. The Contractor must familiarize himself and stricUy comply with ali Federal, State, and County and City Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordlnances, Regulations, or Directives controlling the action or operation of those engaged upon the work affecting the materials used. He shall indemnify and. save harmless the City and all of its officers and agents against any claim or tiability arising from or based on the violation of any such Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations, or Directives, whether by himself, his employees, agents or subcontractors. G-2 GOVERNING LAWS. it is mutualiy agreed and understood that this agreement is made and entered into by the parties hereto with reference to the existing Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth and the laws of the State of Texas with reference to and goveming all matters affecting this Contract, and the Contractor agrees to fully comply with all the provisions of the same. G-3 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In performing their dutles under the Statutes of.the State of Texas and the Charter and Ordinances of the City of Fort .� Worth in connection with this Contract, or in exercising any of the powers granted the Owner herein, the officers, agents and employees of the City of Fort Worth are engaged in the performance of a govemmental function and shall not incur any personal liability by virtue of such performance hereunder, except for gross negligence or wiliful wrong. G-4 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. Contractor agrees the comply with all laws, Federal, state and local, including all ordinances, rules and regulations of the City of Fort Worth, Texas. Materials incorporated into the finished Project are not subject to State Sa�es Tax. Cont�actors are responsible for obtaining construction permits from the governing agencies. Contractor shall schedule all code fnspections with the Code Inspection Division in accordance with the permit requirements and submit a copy of updated schedule to the Construction manager weekly. Building, plumbing, electrical and mechanical building permits are issued without charge. Water and sewer access fees will be paid by, the City. My other permit fees are the responsibiiiry of the Contractor. G-5 INDEMNIFICATION: Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify City's engineer and architect, and their personnel at the project site for Contractor's sole negligence. In addition, Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own expense, the Owner, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims or suits for property'ioss, property damage, personal injury, including death, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed hereunder by Contractor, (ts officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees, whether or not any such in%ury, damaqe or death is caused, in whole or in part, bv the neqlipence or alleqed neqlipence of Owner, its o�cers. servants, or emplovees. Contractor likewise covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against any and all injuries to Owner's officers, servants and employees and any damage, loss or destruction to property of the Owner arising from the performance of any of the terms and conditions of this Contract, whether or not anv such Iniury or damaae is caused in whole or in part bv the nesrliaence or alieaed nealipence of Owner, its o�cers, servants or emp/oYees. In the event Owner receives a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcontractors prior to final payment, final payment shall not be made until Contractor either (a) submits to Owner satisfactory evidence that the claim has been settled and/or a release from the claimant involved, or (b) provides Owner with a letter from Contractor's liability insurance carrier that the claim has been referred to the insurance carrier. The Director may; if he deems it appropriate, refuse •to accept bids on other Ciry of Fort Worth public work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work performed under a City Contract. G-6 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. Except as provided in Paragraph E-2, this contract shall be binding upon and insure to the benefit of the parties hereto, their Successors or Assigns. Contractor shall not assign or sublet all or any part of this Contract or his rights or duties hereunder without the pr(or written consent of the Owner. Any such purported. assignment or subletting without the prior written consent of Owner shall be void. ' G-7 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written NoUce shall be deemed to have been iiuly served if delivered in person to the individual or member of the firm or to an o�cer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. G-8 SURETY BONDS: Surety Bonds are required on all City contracts in excess of $25,000. The Contractor agrees, on the execution of this Contract, and before heginning work, to make, execute and deliver to said City of Fort Worth good and sufficient surety bonds for the faithful l�� `^J ��1 L�'1 � ['_'9 �I �� L!J lJ �� L�1 performance of the terms and stipulations of the Contract and for the payment to all claimants for labor and/or materials furnished in the prosecuUon of the work, such bonds being as provided and required in Article 5160 of the Revlsed Civil Statutes of Texas, as amended, in the form included in the Contract Documents, and such bonds shall be 100 percent of the totai contract price, and the said surety shall be a surety company duly and legally authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and acceptable to the City Council of the City of Fort Worth. Bonds shall be made on the forms fumished by or otherwise acceptable to the City. Each bond shall be properiy executed by both the Contractor and the Surety Company. Bonds required by the City shall be in compliance with all relevant local, state and federal statutes. To be an acceptable surety on the bond the name of the surety should be included on the current U. S. Treasury List of Acceptable Securities [Circular 570], and must be authorized to do business in Texas. SureUes not listed in Circular 570 may write performance and payment bonds on a project without reinsurance to the limit of 10 percE:nt of it� capital and surplus. Such a surety must reinsure any obligation over 10 percent. The amount in excess of 10 percent must be reinsured by reinsurers who are duly authorized, accredited, or trusteed to do business in the State of Texas. Should any surety for the contracted project be determined unsatisfactory at any time during same, the Contractor shall immediately provide a new surery bond satisfactory to the City. G-9 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the.Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, enter the site and make good such deficiencies. In such pse an appropriate Change Order shail be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the cost of the ArchitecYs additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not su�cient to cover such amount, the Contract shall pay the difference to the Owner. G-10 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and Iicense fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the Owner harmless from Ioss on account thereof and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified; however, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infingement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he prompUy gives such information to Architect. G-11 TESTS. If the Contract Documents, Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Regulations or Orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of its readiness and the date arranged so the Architect may observe such inspection, testing or approval. The Owner shall bea�� all costs of such inspection, tests and approvals unless otherwise pro��ided. tf affer the commencement of the Work, the' Owner or Architect determine that any Work requires special inspection, testing or approval not included above, the Owner or the Architect, upon written authorization from the Owner, will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as required in the preceding paragraph. If such speciat insaection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to compiy (1) with the requirements of the Contract Documents or (2) with respect to the performance of the work, with Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinance's, Regula6ons or Orders of any public authority having Jurisdiction, the ConUactor shall bear all costs thereof, inGuding the ArchitecYs additional services made necessary by such costs; otherwise the Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The Contractor shall secure certificate of inspection, testing or approval, and three cqpies will be promptly delivered by him to the Architect. The Architect will review the certificates and forward one copy of each with his recommendation(s) to the Owner. If the Architect or Owner wish to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by this Section, they will do so prompUy and, where practicable, at the source of supply. Neither the observations of the Architect or the Owner in their administration of the Construction Contract, nor inspe..tions, tests or approvals by persons other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. G-12 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES SERVICES. The Contractor shail perform the work under this Contract with a minimum of outage time for all utilities. Interruption shall be by approved sections of the utility. In some cases, the Contractor may be required to perform the work white the existing utility is in service. The existing utility service may be interrupted only when approved by the Owner. When it is necessary to interrupt the existing utilities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least ten days in advance of the time that he desires the existing service to be interrupted. The interruption time shall be kept to a minimum. Depending upon the activities at an existing facility that requires continuous service from the existing utility, an interruption may not be subject to schedule at the time desired by the Contractor. In such cases, the interruption may have to be scheduled at a time of minimum requirements of demand for the utility. The amount of time requested by the Contractor of existing utility services shall be as approved by the Owner. G-13 •LAYING OUT WORK. The Contractor shall verify dimensions and elevations Indicated in layout of existing work. Discrepancies between Drawings, Specifications, and exisGng conditions shall be referred to Architect for adjustment before work affected is perFormed. Failure to make such notification shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in satisfactory workmanlike manner at the Contractor's sole expense. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of atl the construction contemplated by the Construction Documents. Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shatl carefully compare and check all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical I� an Electrical drawings; each with the other that in any affects the locations or elevation of the work to be executed by him, and should any discrepancy be found, he shall lmmediately report the same to the Architect for verification and adjustment. Any duplication of work made necessary by failure or neglect on his part to comply with this function shall be done at the contractors sole expense. G-14 MEASUREMENTS: Before ordering any material or doing• any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the site or at the building and shall be wholly responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of any difference between actual dimensions and dimensions indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration and adjustment before proceeding with the project. G-15 EXISTING OVERHEAD OR UNDERGROUND WORK. The Contractor shall carefully check the site where the project is to be erected and observe any existing overhead wires and equipment. Any such work shall be moved, replaced or protected, as required, whether or no shown or specified at the contractor's sole expense. Attention is directed to the possible existence of pipe and other underground improvements that may or may not be shown on the Drawings. All reasonable precautions shall be taken to preserve and protect any such improvements whether or not shown on the Drawings. Location of exis6ng underground lines, shown the Draw;ngs ar� based on the best available sources, but are to be regarded as approximate only. Exercise extreme care in locating and identifying these lines before excavation in adjacent areas. G-16 ALIGNMENT OF JOINTS IN FINISH MATERIALS. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to make certain in the installation of jointed floor, wall and ceiling materials that: 1. preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract with respect to�the Work to be performed under the suticontract so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights; 2. Place joints to relate to all opening and breaks in the structure and be symmetrically placed wher�ver possible. This includes heating registers, light fixtures, equipment, etc. If because of the non-related sizes of the various materials and locations of openings, etc., it is not possible to accomplish the above, the Contractor shall request the Architect to determine the most satisfactory arrangement. The Contractor shall establish centerlines for all trades. G-17 INTEGRATING EXISTING WORK. The Contractor shail protect all existing street and other improvements from damages. . Contractor's operations shall be confined to the imrriediate vicinity of the new work and shall not in any interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to an from existing adjacent facilities. Where new site work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised by the Contractor not to disturb or damage the existing work more than necessary. AII damaged work shall be replaced, repaired and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Owner. G-18. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL CERTIFICATION: It is the intent of the contract documents, whether expressly stated or not, that nothing containing hazardous materials, such as asbestos, shall be incorporated in to the project. The contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to ensure that asbestos-containing materials are not incorporated into any portion of the project, including advising all materials suppliers and subcontractors of this requirement. The contractor shall verify that components containing lead do not contact the potable �water supply. G-19 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING. Drawing showing location of equipment, piping, duchvork, etc. are diagrammatic and job conditions may not always permit their instaliation in the location shown. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the .ArchitecYs attention immediatelyr and the relocation determined in a joint conference. The Cuntractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the ArchitecYs approval. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Architect. Where possible uniform margins are to be maintained between parallel lines and or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling surfaces. G-20 OVERLOADING. The Contractor shall be responsibld for loading of any part or parts of structures beyond their safe carrying capacities by placing of materiais, equipment, tools,'machinery or any other item thereon. No loads shall be placed on flAors or roofs before they have attairied their permanent and safe strength. G-21 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. Where it is required in the Specifications that materials, products; processes, equipment, or the like be installed or applied in accorcJance with manufacturer's instructions, direction or specifications, or words to this effect, it shall be construed to mean that said application or installation shall be in strict accordance with printed instructions fumished by the manufacturer of the material concerned for use under conditions similar or those at the job site. Six copies of such instructions shall be fumished to the Architect and his approval thereof obtained before work is begun. G-22 CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by employees or as a result of the work. At completioi� of work, the General Contractor shall, immediately prior to final inspection of complete building, execute the foilowing final cleaning work with trained janitorial personnel and with material methods recommended by the manufactures of installed materials. 1. Sweep and buff resilient floors and base, and vacuum" carpeting. 2. Dust all metal and wood trim and similar finished materials. 3. Clean all cabinets and casework. 4. Dust ail ceilings and wails. 5. Dust, and if necessary wash, ali piumbing and electrical fixtures. � � � 6. Wash all glass and similar non-resilient materials. 7. Ail hardware and other unpainted metais shall be cleaned and polished and ail equipment and paint or decorated work shall be cleaned and touched-up if necessary, and ail temporary labels, tags, and paper coverings removed throughout the buildings. Surfaces that are waxed shall be polished. ( J 8. ti� � � 9. �� 'i:� � IIL�'J � � �l� �`, � � The exterior of the building, the grounds, approaches, equipment, sidewalks, streets, etc. shall be cleaned similar to interior of buildings and left in good order at the time of final acceptance. All paint surfaces shail be clean and unbroken, hardware shall be clean 'and polished, all required repair work shall be completed and dirt areas shall be scraped and cleared of weed growth. Clean all glass surfaces and mirrors of putty, paint materials, etc., without scratching or�injuring the glass and leave the work bright, clean and polished. Cost of this cleaning work shall be borne by Contractor. 10. Cleaning, polishing, scaling, waxing and ali other finish operations indicated on the Drawings or required iFl the Specifications shail be taken to indicate the required condition at the time of acceptance of all work under the Contract. 11. Buming: Buming of rubbish on the premises will not be permitted. G-23 DUST CONTROL. Precaution shail be exercised at all times to control dust created as a result of any operations during the construction period. If serious problems or complaints arise due to air-bome dust, or when directed by the Architect, operaUons causing such problems shall be temporarily discontinued and necessary steps taken to control the dust. G-24 FIRE PROTECTION. The contractor shall at ail 6mes maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage or injury to workmen. All scrap materials, rubbish and Vash shall be removed daily from in and about the building and shall not be permitted to be scattered on adjacent property. Suitab�e storage space shali be provided outside the immediate building area for storing flammable materials and paints; no storage will be permitted in the building. Excess flammable Iiquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal container and removed from the building during unused periods. A fire extinguisher shall be available at each location where cutting or welding is being performed. Where electric or gas welding or cutting work is done, interposed shields of incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damage due to sparks and hot metal. When temporary heating devices are used, a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other wo�icmen are not on the premises. The Contractor shall provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations and NFPA Bulletins Nos. 10 and 241. However, in all cases a minimum of lwo fire extinguishers shall be available for each floor of construction. G-25 CU7TING AND PATCHING. Wherever cutting and removal of portions of the existing work is indicated, such work shall be neatly sawed or cut by contractor in a manner that will produce a neat straight line, parallel to adjacent surfaces or plumb for vertical surfaces. Care should be exercised not to damage any work that is to remain. . At no time shall any structural members be cut withqut written consent from the Architect. G-26 PROJEC7 CLOSEOUT. Final Insoection. Record Drawinas: Attention is called to General Conditions Section � entitled, "Payments and Completion " Maintenance Manual: Sheets shali be 8'/z" x 11", except pull out sheets may be neatly folded to 8%z " x 11". Manuals shall be bound in plastic covered, 3 ring, loose leaf binder with title of project lettered on front and shall contain: 1) Name, address and trade of all sub-contractors. 2) Compiete maintenance instructions; name, address, and telephone number of installing Contractor, manufacturer's local representative, for each piece of operative equipment. 3) Catalc,g data on plumbing fixtures, valves, water heaters, heating and cooling equipment, temperature control, fan, electrical panels, service entrance equipment and light fixtures. 4) Manufacturor's name, type, color designation for resilient floors, windows, doors, concrete block, paint, roofing, other materials. Submit six copies of Maintenance Manual, prior to request for final payment. Oaerational Insoection and Maintenance Instruction: The Contractor shall provide at his expense, competent manufacturer's representatives to completely check out all mechanical and electrical systems and items covered by the Drawings and Specifications. This requirement shall be scheduled just prior to and during the initial start up. After ail systems are functioning properly the representatives shall instruct maintenance personnel of the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of each item. G-27 GUARANTEE AND EXTENDED GUARANTEE. Upon completion of the Project, prior to final payment, guarantees required by technical divisions of SpecificaGons shall be properly executed in quadruplicate by subcontractors and submitted through the Contractor to Architect. Delivery of guarantees shail not relieve Contractor from any obligation assumed under Contract. The Contractor shall guarantee the entire Project for one year. in addition, where separate guarantees, for certain portions of work, are for longer periods, General Contractors guarantee shall be extended to cover such longer periods. Manufacturer's extended warrantees shall be included in this contract. Guarantees shall become valid and operative and commence upon issuance of Certificate of InspecGon and Acceptance by Owner. Guarantees shall not appty to work � where damage is result of abuse, neglect by Owner or his successor(s) in interest. The Contractor agrees to warrant his work and materials provided in accordance with this contract and the terms of the Technicat Specifications contained herein. Unless supplemented by the Technical Speciflcations or the manufacturers normal extended warrantees, the Contractor shall warrant all work materials, and equipment against defects for a period of one year from the date of finat acceptance. The Contractor further agrees to bear all costs of making good all work that is found to be defective or not provided in accordance with the Contract Documents. Additionally if the facility or contents are damaged due to defective materials or workmanship of the Contractor, the Contractor further agrees to bear all cost of repairing and/or replacing damaged items and components to bring such items back to at least their original condition. G-28 RECORD DRAWINGS. Upon completion of the Work and prior to application for final payment, one print of each of the drawings accompanying this specificat?on shall be neatly and clearly marked in red by the Contractor tn show variations between the construction actually provided and that indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. The annotated documents shall be delivered to Architect. Where a choice of materials and/or methods is permitted herein and where variations in the scope or character of the work from the entire work indicated or specified are permitted either by award of bidding items specified for that purpose, or by subsequent change to the drawings, the record drawings shall define the construction actually provided. The representation of such variations shall conform to standard drafting practice and shall include supplementary notes, legends and details which may be necessary for legibility and clear portrayal of the actuai construction.,The record drawings shall indicate, in aifdition, the actual location of all sub-surface utility lines, average depth below the surface and other appurtenances. G-29 CONSTRUCTION FENCE. At the Contractor's option, he may provide a substantial chain-link construction fence around all or a part of the site. The fences and gates must be maintained throughout the construction period. Remove the fences and gates upon completion of the Project and restore the site to the required original or contract condition. G-30 PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE. HANDLING. The Contractor shall handle, store and protect materials and produets, including fabricated components, by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft (and resulting delays), thereby ensuring highest quality results as the work progresses. Control delivery schedules so as to minimize unnecessary long-term storage at project site prior to installation. G-31 AGE In accordance with the policy ("Policy") of the Executive Branch of the federal govemment, Contractor covenants that neither it nor any of its officers, members, agents, employees, program participants or subcontractors, while engaged in performing this conUact, shall, In connection with the employment, advancement or discharge of employees or fn connection with the terms, conditions or privileges of their employment, discriminate against persons because of their age except on the basis of a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory requirement. Contractor further covenants that neither it nor its officers, members, agents, employees, subcontractors, program participants, or persons acting on their behalf, shall specify, in solicitations or advertisements for employees to work on this contract, a maximum age limit for such employment unless the specified maximum age limit is based upon a bona fide occupational qualification, retirement plan or statutory equipment. Contractor warrants it will fully comply with the Policy and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties or subcontraG tor against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' alleged failure to comply with the above referenced Policy conceming age discrimination in the performance of this agreement. ,G-32 DISABILITY: In accordance with the provisions of the Americans With Disabilities Act of 1990 ("ADA"), Contractor warrants that it and any and all of its subcontractors wiil not unlawfully discriminate on the basis of disability in the provision of services to the general public, nor in the avaitabiliry, terms and/or conditions of employment for applicants for employment with, or Pmployees of Contractor or any of its subcontractors. Contractor warrants it will fuily comply with ADA's provisions and any other appiicable federal, state and local laws conceming disability and will defend, indemnify and hold City harmless against any claims or allegations asserted by third parties ar subcontractors against City arising out of Contractor's and/or its subcontractors' aileged failure to comply with the above-referenced laws concerning disabiiity discrimination in the performance of this agreement. SECTION H CONTRACT TIME H-1 DEFINITIONS. The Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract Documents for completion of the Work. The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Notice to Proceed. If there is no notice to proceed, it shall be the date of the Agreement or such other date as may be established therein. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect with the approval of the Owner that construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner may occupy the Work or designateci portion thereof for the use for which it is intended. Final acceptance of the completed worl( or any portion thereof can be made only by the City Councii of the . City of Fort Worth or iYs designated Assistarit City Manager, and no other form of acceptance will be binding upon the Owner. A calendar day constitutes 24 hours of time and is any one of the seven days of a week, including Sunday, regardless of whether a"Working Day' or not, and regardless of weather conditions or any situation which might delay construction. An extension of contract time shall be in accordance with this Section. Extensions of time will be as recommended by the Architect with final approval by City of Fort Worth. A working day is defined as a calendar day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in which weather or � � ,� � � 1 �1 � � i� � �� I'�'1 �� other conditions not under the control of the Contractor permit the performance of work for a continuous period of not less than seven hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. However, nothing in these Contract Documents shall be construed as prohibiting the Contractor from working on Saturdays if he so desires. Should the Contractor choose to work on Sat4rdays, one day wlll be charged as contract working Gme when weather or other conditions permit seven hours of work as delineated above. Legai holidays are defined as being New Years Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, Memorial Day, and Veteran's Day. H-2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION. All the time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of essence to the ConUact. • The Contractor shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in this SecUon. He shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces and shail complete it within the Contact Time. ' H-3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME. If thh Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by any employee of the Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual de�ay in transportation, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the ConUactor's control, or by any cause which the Architect determines may justify the delay, then the contract time may be extended by ehange Order for such reasonable time as recommended by the Architect and approved by the Owner. When the Contractor is delayed due to abnormai weather conditions, tha weather table provided as WT-1 in these Contract Documents shall be used as the basis for providing a fair and equitable adjustment of the contract•time. All Gaims for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Architect no.more than fifteen days after the occurcence of the delay; otherwise they shall be waived. . If no schedule or agreement is made stati�g the dates upon which written interpretations shail be fumished, '.hen no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure to fumish such interpretation until fifteen days after demand is made for them, and not then unless such a claim is reasonable. H-4 NO DAMAGE FOR DELAY. No payment, compensation or adjustment or any kind (other than the extensions of time provided for) shall be made to the contractor for damages because of hindrances or delays from an,cause in the progress of•the work, whether such hindrances or delays be avoidable or unavoidable, and the contractor agrees that he will make no Gaim for compensation, damages or mitigation of liquidated damages for any such delays, and will accept (n full saUsfaction for such delays said extenslon of time. SECTION I PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION I-1 CONTRACT SUM. The Contract Sum is stated in the proposal as accepted and is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. i-2 • SCHEDULE OF VALUES. Before the first Applicable for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a Schedule of Values of the various portions of the Work, including quantities if required by the Architect, aggregating the total Contract Sum, divided so as to facilitate payments to Sub-contractors, prepared in such form as specitied or as the Architect and the Contractor may agree upon, and supported by such data to substantiate its correctness as the Architect may require. Each item in the Schedule of Values shall inGude its proper share of overhead and profit. This Schedule, when approved by the Architect and the Owner, shall be used as a basis for the Contractor's App�ications for Payment. I-3 ADJUSTMENT OF QUANTITIES. Where unit prices and estimated quantities are used to compute the contract amount, the Owner may increase the quantities by an amount that is 20% of the total cost for that section. Unit prices for adjustments to unit quantities in excess to 20% may be negotiated at the request of either party. I-4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS. On the first day of each month after the first month's work has been completed, the Contractor" wiil make current estimates in writing for review by the °Architect of materials in place complete and the amount of work performed during the preceding month or period and the value thereof at the prices contracted for as shown on the approved Schedule of Values and Progress Schedule. If payments are to be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated In the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or in an independent, bonded warehouse such payments shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials or equipment or otherwise protect the Owners interest including applicable insurance and transportation to the site. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that tiUe to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear of ail liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances hereinafter referred to as "liens"; and that no Work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other persons performing the Work at the site or fumishing materials and equipment for the Work, subject to an agre�ment under which an interest therein or an e�cumbrance thereon is retafned by the seller or , otherwise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. The Contractor shall prepare each application for payment on AIA Document G702, "Application and Certificate for Paymeni, and attached thereto AIA Document 'G703, "Continuation Sheet", to indicate the progress made to date and the period or month for which payment is requested for each Item listed in the Schedule of Values. A copy of the revised monthly work progress schedule must be attached before the pay request can be accepted. I-5 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT. If the Contractor has made Application for Payment as above, the above, the Architect will, with reasonable promptness but not more than seven days after the receipt of the Application, prepare a Certificate of Payment, with a copy to � the Contractor, for such amount determined to be properly due, or state in writing reasons for withholding a Certificate. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the' ArchitecYs observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whoie upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests required by the Contract Documents, .to minor deviations' from the Contract Documents correctabte prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications stated in the Certificate); and recommendations to the Owner that the Contractor be paid in the amount certified. In addition, the ArchitecYs approval of final payment assures the Owner that the conditions precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment as set forth in this Section have been fulfilled. After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shail approve or disapprove same within ten days after it has been delivered to the Director of the Department of Transportation and Public Works. For contracts less than $400,000, Owner shall pay 90% of the approved estimate to the Contractor within seven days after its approval, and the remaining 10°/a of�each such estimate will be retained by the Owner until the final estimate is approved and the :Work is accepted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth. For contracts in excess of $400,000, the Owner will rGtain only 5% of each estimate until the final estimate is approved and work accepted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth. No Certificate for a progress payment, ^nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner, shall constitute an acceptance of any Work, not in accordance with the Contract Documents, or relieve the Gontractor of liability in respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall promptly remedy any defects in the Work and pay^for any damage to other work resulting tFierefrorri that shall appear within a,.period�of one year from the date of final acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified. 1-6 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The Architect may decline to approve an Application for Payment and may withhold his'Certificate in whole or in part if in his opinion he is unable to make the representations to the Owner as provided in this Section. The Architect may also decline to approve any Applications for Payment or, becausa of subsequenUy discovered evidence or subsequent inspections, may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued to such exter�t as may be necessary in his opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: ' ' ' ' 1) defective work not remedied; 2) claims filed or reasonable,evidence indicating probable filing of clafms; 3) failure of the Contractor to make payments prope�ly to Subcontractors, or for labor, materials or equipment; 4) reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; 5) damage to another contractor; 6) reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; or� '7) unsatisfactory prosecution of the.. Work by the Contractor. ' When such grounds for the refusal of payment are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. The Owner reserves the right to withhold the payment of any month�y estimate, without payment of interest, if the Contractor fails fo perform the Work in accordance with the specifications or instructions of the Architect. I-7 UNRESOLVED CLAIMS: In the event a written claim for damages against the Contractor or its subcon- tractors remains unsettled at the�time all work on the project has been completed to the satisfaction of the Director of the . Transportation and Public Works Department, as evidenced by a final inspection, final payment to the Contractor shall not be recommended by the Ditector of the Transportation and Public Works Department for a period of 30 days after the date of such final inspection, unless the Contractor shall subtnit written e�iidence satisfactory to the Director that the claim has been settled and a retease has been obtained from the claimant involved. Although the ,Gaim concemed remains unsettled at the expiration of the above 30-day period, the Cont�actor may be deemed to be enGtled to a semi-final payment for work completed, such semi-final payment to be in an amount equal to tt�e total doliar amount then due less the doilar value of any written claims pending against the Contractor arising out of the performance of such work, and such semi-final payment may then be recommended by the Director. The Director shall not recommend final payment to a Contractor against whom such a claim for damages is outstanding for a period of six months following the date of the acceptance of the work performed unless the Contractor submits evidence in writing satisfactory to the Director that: 1) The claim has been settled and a release has been obtained from the cla?mant involved, or 2j Good faith efforts have been made to settle such out- standing claims, and such good faith efforts have failed. If condition (1) above is met at any time within the six month period, the Director shail recommend that the final payment to the Contractor be made. If condition (2) above (s met at any time within the six-month period, the Director may recommend that the final payment to the Contractor be made. At the expiration of the s(x- month period the Director may recommend that final payment be made if all other work has been performed and all other obligations of the Contractor have been met to the satisf8ction of the Director. The Director may, if he' deems it appropriate, refuse to accept bids on other Transportation and Public Works Department contract work from a Contractor against whom a claim for damages is outstanding as a result of work perFormed under a City contract. I-8 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: The deduction for liquidated damages shall be as follows: Amount of Contract Liquidated Damages Per Day �� J � �� $15,000 orless $45 $15,001 to $25,000 $ 63 $25,001 to $50,000 $105 $50,001 to $100,000 $154 $100,000 to $500,000 $210 $500,001 to $1,000,000 $315 $1,000,001 to $2,000,000 $420 $2,000,001 to $5,000,000 $630 $5,000,001 to $10,000,000 $840 over$10,000,000 $980 1-9 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If, without fault on the part of the Contractor, the Architect should fail to Issue any Certificate for Payment within seven days after receipt of the Contractors Application for Payment, if the Contractor's Applica6on for Payment, or if, without fault on the part of the Contractor, the Owner should fail to approve such estimate or to pay to the Contractor 90% or 95% (as applicable) of the amount thereof within the period of time specified, then the Contractor may, upon seven (7) days additional written notice to the Owner and to the Architect, stop the Work undl payment of the amount owing has been received. I-10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Prior to the request for final payment, the Contractor must meet all provisions for Project Closeout. When the Contractor determines that the Work or a designated portion thereof acceptable to the Owner is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare the submission to the Architect a list of items to be completed or corrected. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the Work is substantially complete, he then will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion (G704) which, when approved by the Owner, shall establish - the Date of SubstanGal Completion, shall state the responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for maintenance, heat, utilities, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall complete the items Iisted therein, said time to be within the Contract time unless extended. Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for finai inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment and upon receipt of a fina� application for payment, providing the record drawings have been received by the Architect, the Architect will conduct such test and/or inspections as he deems necessary, and if in his opinion the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate of Substantial Completion stating that to the best of his knowiedge, information and belief, and on the basis of his observatlons and inspections, the Work has been completed irr accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor is due and payabie. Final acceptance can be made by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth or iYs designated representaGve, and no other form of acceptance will be bfnding upon the Owner. Final payment and release of the retainage amount will become due within fifteen days following approval of the City Council of the City of Fort Worth in accep6ng the work as complete. Neither the final payment nor the remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect: 1) Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims (G706) stating that all payrolls, bllls for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or his property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, 2) Consent of Surety to Final Payment (G707), if any, to finai payment, 3) Contractors Affidavit of Release of Liens (G706A), and, 4) Other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If any Subcontractor, materialman or laborer refuses to fumish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may, at the election of the Owner, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any right, claim or lien which might be asserted by such Subcontractor, materialman or laborer. If any such right, claim or lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made. The Contractor shall refund to the Owner ali monies that the latter may be compelled to pay to discharging such right, claim or lien, including all costs and reasonable attomey's fees. The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims hy the Contractor except those previously made in writing and still unsettled. SECTION J PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY J-1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall designate a respansible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractors superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Architect. J-2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (1) all employees on the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; (2) all thP Work a�d all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or-off the •site,• under the care, custody or controt of the • Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub- contractors; and (3) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocaGon or replacement in the course of construction. Until acceptance of the Work, it shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every precaution against injury or damage to the Work by the action of the elements or from any other cause whatsoever, whether arising from the execution or from the non- execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, I�� G restore and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any of the above, caused before its completion and acceptance. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws, Ordinances, Rules, Reguiations and Orders of any public authority having jurisdicGon for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss� He shall erect and maintain, as required by exisGng conditions and progress of the Work, ail reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other wamings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost �ca're and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. All damage or toss to any property referred to in the preceding paragraphs caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by the Contractor, including damage or loss attributable to faulty Drawings or Specifications and acts or omissions of the Architect or anyone employed by hlm or for whose acts he may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor or anyone claiming through the Contractor for such damage or loss. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the Work to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. J-3 HARD HATS. Hard Hats will be required at all construction sites included in this Contract from start to completion of work. Each Contractor, employee and visitor at any construction site inctuded in the Contract will be required to wear a hard hat. The Contractor shall enforce the wearing of hard liat"s by Contractor, employees and visitors. These requirements are in addition to the Accident Prevention Clause in the General Conditions of the Contract. Contractor shall provide ten hard hats for use by the consulting Architects and Engineers and visitors. J-4 EMERGENCIES. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act at his discretion to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on ..account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Changes in the Work. SECTION K - INSURANCE K-1 Insurance Reauired. The Contractor shall not commence work under this; Contract until he has obtained all insurance requ�red under this Section and sucli insurance has been approved by the City of Fort Worth, nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work to be performed under this Contract until all similar insurance of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. K-1 Insurance Required. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until<he has obtained all Insurance required under this Section ar.d such insurance has been approved by the City of Fort Worth, nur shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence work to b� performed under this Contract until all similar insurance of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. K-2 Workers' Compensation Insurance: 1) General � a) Contractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to provide to the Owner (City) a certificate showing that it has obtained a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each of its employees employed on the project in compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued untii the Contractor has complied with this section. b) Subcontractor's Worker's Compensation Insurance. Contractor agrees to require each and every subcontractor who will perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each employee employed on the project. Contractor will not permit any subcontractor to perform work on the project�until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of all such certificates to the Owner (Ciry). c) By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the City that all 2mployees of the contractor who will provide ' services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regul'ation. Providing false or misleading informaGon may subject the,contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalGes or other civil acUons. d) The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the Ciry to declare the ' contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the City. 2) Definitions: a) Certificate of coverage ("certificate"). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance aoverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. b) Duration ofthe Project. Includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the City. c) Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in section 406.096)-includes all persons or entities perForming all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform � � � l�l [J on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted direcUy with the contractor and regardiess of whether that person has employees. This inciudes, without IimitaGon, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor camers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any enGty which fumishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without Iimitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other services related to a project. 'Services" does not inciude activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 3) Requirements a) The contractor shall provide coverage, based on � proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all �� employees of the contractor providing services of the project, for the duration of the project. b) The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the govemmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. � � � � � � �1 LJ c) If the coverage period shown on -the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the City showing that coverage has been extended. d) The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the City: , i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the govemmental entity wiil have on file � cerUficates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate oi coverage ends during the duration of the project. e) The contractor shall retain all required certificates • of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. � The contractor shall notify the City in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materiaily affects the provision of coverage of any ��person providing services on the proJect. g) The contractor shall post on each project site a noGce, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify cover�age and report Iack of coverage. h) The contractor shail contractuaily require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on � project, to: i) provide coverage, based on proper reporting on the classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for ali of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; fi) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; iii) provide�the con#ractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during ,the duration of the project; iv) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; v) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. vij notify the City in writing by certified mail or , personal delivery, within ten (10) days after • the person knew or should have known, of � any change that materialty affects the ' provision of coverage of any person , providing services on the project; and vii) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs h-i)�- vii), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are provfding services. 4) Posting of Required Worker's Compensation Coverage. a) The contractor shall post a notice on each project site informing atl persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker"s Compensation Act or other Texas Worker's Compensation Commission rules. This notice must be printed with a tiUe in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. L�J � The text for the notices shall be the foliow�ng text, without any additionai words or changes: vehicles, vandalism, and malicious mischief, at a limit equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. � "REQUIRED WO�tKER'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by worker's compensation insurance. This Includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing tabor or transportation or other service related to the project, re�ardless of the IdenGty of their employer or status as an employee". Call the Texas Worker's Compensation Commission at 512-440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verifjr whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." K-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall procure and maintain during the term of this Contract such Liability Insurance as shall protect him, the City of Fort Worth and any Subcontractor performing work covered by this Contract, from claims of damage which may arise from operations under this Contract, including blasting, when blasting is done•on, or in connection with the Work of the Project, whether such operaGons be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them and the limits of such insurance shall be not less than the following: 1) Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 each accident, or reasonably equivalent split limits for bodily injury and property damage. Coverage shall be on "any auto" including leased, hired� owned, non-owned and borrowed vehicles used in connection with this Contract. 2) Commercial General Liabiliry: $1,000,000 each occurcence. Coverage under the policy shall be as comprehensive as that provided in a current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy form approved for use ir� Texas and the policy shall have no exclusions by endorsement unless such are approved by the City. 3) Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance: When the Project specifically requires the removal of Asbestos Containing Materiais, the Contractor shall be required to maintain Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance as follows: $1,000,000 per occurrence; a?_,000,000 aggregate limit. The coverage shall include any pollution exposure, including environmental impairment liability, associated with the services and operaGons performed ynder this conVact in addition to sudden and accidental contamination or pollution liability for gradual emissions and clean-up costs. K�L BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE. Unless stated otherwise in the Proposal or Invitation, the Contractor shall procure, pay for and maintain at all times during the term of this Contract, Builder's Risk Insurance against the perils of fire, lightning, windstorm, hurricane, hail, riot, explosion, civic commotion, srr�oke, aircraft, land The policy shali inciude coverage for materiais and supplies while in transit and while being stored on or off site. If specifically required in the Instructions to Bidders, the policy shall include coverage for flood and earthquake. Different sublimits for these coverages must be approved by the City. Consequential damage due to faulty workmanship and/or design performed by the Contractor or his agents shail be covered. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall notify the City of Fort Worth in writing before terminating this insurance. K-5 PROOF OF CARRIAGE OF INSURANCE. Ttie Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance documenting the Transportation and Public Works Department, City of Fort Worth as a"Certificate Holder", and noting the specific project(s) covered by the Contractor's insurance as documented on the certificate of insurance. More than one certificate may be required of the Contractor depending upon the agents an/or insurers for the Contractor's insurance coverages specified for the project(s). K-6 OTHER INSURANCE RELATED REQUIREMENTS. 1) The City� of Fort Worth shall be an additional insured, by endorsement, on all applicable insurance policies. 2) Applicable insurance policies shall each be endorsed with a waiver of subrogaUon in favor of the City of Fort Worth. 3) Insurers of policies maintained by Contractor and its subcontractor(s), if applicable, shail be authorized to do business in the State of Tex�s, or otherwise approved by the City of Fort Worth, and such shall be acceptable to the City of Fort Worth insofar as their financial strength and solvency are concerned. Any company through which the insurance is placed must have a rating of at least A:VII, as stated in current edition of A. M. BesYs Key Rating Guide. At the' City's sole discretion, a less favorable rate may be accepted by the City. 4) Deductible limits on insurance policies and/or self insured retentions exceeding $10,000 require approval of the City of Fort Worth as respects this Contract. 5) The City of Fort Worth shall be notified in writing a minimum of thirty days prior to an insurer's action in the event of cancellation, non-renewal or material change in coverage regarding any policy providing insurance coverage required in this Contract. 6) Full limits of insurance shatl be available for claims arising out of this Contract with the City of Fort Worth. 7) Certificates of insurance shall be provided by the Contractor to the City prior to commencement of operations pursuant to this Contract. Any failure on part of the City of Fort Worth to request such documentation shall not be construed as a waiver of insurance requirements specified herein. � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �! �d 1�J � �� L^J �` LJ � �� 8) The City of Fort Worth shali be entitled, upon request and without incurcing expense, to revlew the insurance policies including endorsements thereto and, at its discretion, to require proof of payment for policy premiums. 9) The City of Fort Worth shall not be responsible for paying the cost of insurance coverages required herein. 10) Notice of any actuai or potential claim and/or litigation that would affect insurance coverages required herein shall be provided to the City in a timely manner. 11) "Other insurance" as referenced in any policy of insurance providing coverages required herein shall not apply to any insurance policy or program maintained by the Ciry of Fort Worth. 12) Contractor shall agree to either require its subcontractors to maintain the ,same insurance coverages and limits thereof as specified herein or � such coverage on the Contractor's subcontractors shall be provided by the Contractor. SECTION L CHANGES IN THE WORK L-1 CHANGE ORDER. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order Changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletlons or other revisions, the Cont�act Sum and the�Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All Such Changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. . A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Contractor, Owner and the Architect, issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a Change in the Work or adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. Any changes in work required due to changed or unforeseen conditions, or by request of either the Contractor or the City, shall be coordinated with the Director, Department oi Transportation and Public Works. A change order must be written and duly negotiated and executed prior to performing changed work. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a Change fn the Fort Worth shall be deterrnined in one or more o� the following ways: 1) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum property itemized, :� including the allowance to Contractor for ovefiead and profit stipulated in the original contract proposal; 2) by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; or 3) by cost and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee. If none of the methods set forth herein above is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided he receives a Change Order, shall promptly proceed with the Work invulved. The cost of such work shall then be determined on the basis of the Contractor's reasonable expenditures and savings, includiny a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit as indicted in the original contract proposal. In such cases, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such fonn as the Architect shall prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Pending final determination of cost to the Owner, payments on account shall be made on the ArchitecYs Certificate of Payment as approved ty tl�e Owner. If after the contract has been executed, the Architect, requests a price proposal from the Contractor for a proposed change in scope of the work, Contractor shall process such proposal within seven days of receipt and retum the price quote to the Architect in writing. The Architect shall review the price quotation and if approval is recommended, forvvard the proposed change order request and price proposal to the Owner for approval. If the Architect will attempt to negotiate with Contractor to revise the proposal to a figure which is fair and reasonable and forward it on to the Owner for approvai. If the negotiations do not resuit in an equitable solution, the Architect shall prepare a cost-plus type Change Order with a price-not-to-exceed figure for approval by the City and require specific documentation to be provided by Contractor in accordance with the paragraph above. Contractor is advised that according to City of Fort Worth Charter, that when the cumulative effect of Change Orders results in an increase in cost of the contract amount by over $3,000, the City Council must approve all such Change Orders which will exceed this limit. Normal processing time for the City Staff to obtain City Council approval, once the recommended change order has been received at the City, is approximately thirty (30) days . Owner, Architect and Contractor shail endeavor to identify Change Ortler items as early in the Construction process as possible to minimize their impact on the construction schedule. If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if the quanG6es originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of Work proposed will create a hardship on the Owner or the Contractor, the applicable unit prices shali be equitably adjusted to prevent such hardship. If the Contractor claims that additional cost or time is involved because of (1) any written interpretation issued pursuant to Section A, (2) any order by the Architect or Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section B, where the Contract was not at fault, or (3) any written order for a minor change in the Work, the Contractor shall make such claim. L-2 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST OR TIME. If the Contractor wishes to make a Gaim for an increase in the Contract Sum or an extension in the Contract Time, he shall •give the Architect written notice thereof within a r�asonable time after the occurrence of the event that gave rise to such clalm. This noGcs shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Section J. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time resulting from such claim, if approved by the Owner, shall be authorized by Change Order. L-3 OVERHEAD Al.LOWANCES FOR CHANGES: Should any change in the work or extra work be ordered, the following applicable percentage shall be added to Material and Labor costs to cover overhead and profit: � 1. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by the Contractor's own forces shall not exceed fifteen percent 1( 5%). 2. Allowance to the Contractor for overhead and profit for extra work performed by a Subcontractor and supervised by the Contractor shall not exceed ten percent 1( 0%). L-4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK. The Architect shall have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contact Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.�Such changes may be effected by Field Order or°by other written order. Such changes shall be confirmed in writing by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and the Contractor. L-5 FIELD ORDERS. The Architect may issue written Field Orders which interpret the Contract Documents in accordance with Section A, or which orde� min'or changes in the Work in accordance with Section L•Nithout change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor shall carry out such Field Orders promptly. SECTION M UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK M-1 UNCOVERING OF WORK. If any Work should be covered contrary to the request of the Owner or Architect, it must be uncovered for observation and replaced, at the Contractor's expense. If any other work has been covered which the Owner or Architect have not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the Architect or the Owner may request to see such work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such work be found not in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, the • Contractor shall pay such costs unless it be found that this condition was caused by a separate contractor employed by the Owner. M-2 CORRECTION OF WORK. The Contractor shali promptly correct all work rejected by the Owner or Architact as defective or as failing to conform to the Plans and Specifications whether observed before or after Substantial CompleGon and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcGng such rejected .Work, including the cost of the ArchitecYs additional service thereby made necessary. If, within one year after the' Date of Substantiaf Completion or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by �law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any of the work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Corttractor a written acceptance of such condition, describing same specifically and not generally. The Owner shali give such notice prompUy after discovery of the condition. All such defective or non-conforming work under the preceding paragraphs shall be removed from the site where necessary, and the work shatl be corrected to comply with the Contract Documents without cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work of separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or correction. If the Con'rac:or doas not remove such defective or non- conforming work within a reasonabie time fixed by written notice from the Architect or the Owner, the Owner may remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten days thereafter, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written .notice sell such work at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net procegds thereof, after deducting all the costs that should have been bome by the Contractor including compensation for additional architectural services. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs that the Contractor should have bome, the difference shail be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If. the Contractor fails to� correct such defective or non- conforming work, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section G. The obligation of the Contractor under this Section shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any obligations imposed upon him by special guarantees required by the Contract Documents or otherwi§e prescribed by law. M-3 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON- CONFORMING WORK. If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non-conforming work, he may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in whlch case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the Contract Sum, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the Contractor. SECTION N TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT N-7 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR. If the work is,stopped for a period of 30 days under an order or any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the work under a contract with the Contractor, or if the work should be stopped for a period of 30 days b;� the Contractor for the Owner's failure to make payment thereon as provided in Section I, then the Contractor may after the e�d of such period of 30 days ,and upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract. N-2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER. If the contractor is adjudged as bankrupt, or if he makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, of if the Contractor refuses, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or fails to comply with al Laws, Statutes, Charter, Ordinances, Regulations or Orders of any pubtic authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of � � � � � C� lai � � L#'! �1 � �� LJ lf_l � the Contract Documents, then the Owner, on �its own initiative or upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any rights or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his surety, if any, seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take posses,sion pf the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and may finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be enUUed to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's additional services., exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The City of Fort Worth may terminate this contract in whole, or from time to time, in part, whenever such terminaGon is in the best interest of the City. Termination will be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying to what extent performance of the work of the � contract is being terminated and the effective date of termination. After receipt of termination the contractor sha�l: a) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified on the notice of termination. b) Place no further orders or subcontracts except as may be necessary for the completion of the work not terminated. c) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the work terminated by the notice of termination. After termination as above, the City will pay the contractor a proportionate. part of the contract price based on the work completed; provided, however, that the amount of payment on termination shall not exceed the total contract price as reduced by.the portion thereof allocatable to the work not completed and further reduced by the amount of payments, if, any othervvise made. Contractor shali submit its claim for amounts due after termination as provided in this paragraph within 30 days after receipt of such claim. In the event of any dispute or controversy as to the propriety or alfowability of all or any portion of such claim under this paragraph, s�ch dispute or controversy shall be resolved and be decided by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, and the decision by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth shall be final and binding upon all parties to this contract SECTION O SIGNS The Contractor shall construct and instali the project designation sign as required in the Contract Documents and in strict accordance with the Specifications for °Project Designation Signs " This sign shall be a part of this Contract - and shall be included in the Contractors Base Bid for the Project. SECTION P TEMPORARY FACILITIES P-1 SCOPE. The Contractor shali furnish, erect, and maintain facitities and perform temporary work required in the performance of this Contract, including those sh��wn and specified. . P-2 USE OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES. All temporary facilities shall be made availabte for use by all workmen and subcontractors employed on the project, subject tq reasonable directions by the Contractor as to their proper and most efficient utilization. P-3 MAlNTENANCE AND REMOVAL. The Contractor shall maintain temporary facilities in a proper, safe operating and sanitary condition for the duration of the Contract. Upon completion of the Contract, all such temporary work and faciliGes shall be removed from the premises and disposed •of unle5s othervvise directed or specified hereunder. P-4 FIELD OFFICES AND SHED. The Contractor shall provide a temporary field o�ce building for himself, his subcontractors and use by the Architect. For construction contracts with a bid price in excess of $1,000,000.00, the Contractor shail provide a separate field office for the City's field representative (but the separate office may be in the same structure). The buildings shall afford protection against the weather, and each o�ce shall have a lockable door, at least one window, adequate electricai outlets and lighting, and a shelf large enough to accommodate perusal of the project drawings. Openings shall have suitable locks. Field offices shall be maintained for the full time during the operation of the work of the Contract. During cold weather months, the field offices shall be suitably insulated and equipped with a heating device to maintain 70 degree Fahrenheit temperature during the workday. During warm weather the offices shall be equipped with an air conditioning device to maintain temperature beiow 75 degrees F. Upon completion of the work of the Contract, the Contractor shall remove the building from the premises. In addition to the drawing sheif, provide for the City field representaUves o�ce: one deck, four'chairs, plan rack and 8 four drawer filing cabinet (with �ock). Each office shall contain not less than 120 square feet of floor space. The Contractor shall �provide and maintain storage sheds, other temporary buildings or trailers on the project site as required for his use. Location of sheds and trailers shail be as approved by the Architect. Remove sheds when work is completed, or as directed. P-5 TELEPHONE. The Contractor shall provide and pay for telephone installation and service to the field offices described above. Service shall be maintained for the duration of operations under this contract. The Contractor shall provide for and pay for an automatic telephone- answering device at the site office for the duration of the project. The c:ontractor shali provide a separate telephone line, and instrument for use by the City's field representatives. P-6 TOILET FACILITIES. The Contractor shall provide proper, sanitary and adequate toitet facilities for the use of all workmen and subcontractors employed on the project. P-7 UTILITIES. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provide for temporary water and electricity required during the construction. Contractor shall provide and install temporary utility meters during the contract construction period. These meters wiil be read and the Contractor will be billed on this actual use. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials required to tap into the utilities. The Contractor shatl make the '�! connections and extend the service lines to the construction area for use of all trades. Upon completion of the.work all utility lines shall be removed and repairs made to the existing lines. Only utilities at existing voltages, pressures, frequencies, etc. will be available to the Contractor. Water. Provide an ample supply of potable water for all purposes of construction at a point convenient to the project or as shown on the Drawings. Pipe water from the source of supply to all points where water'"will be required. Provide sufficient hose to carry water to every required part of the construction and allow the use of water facilities to subcontractors engaged on the work. Provide pumps, tanks and compressors as may be reGuired to produce r�quired pressures. Electric Service. Provide adequate electric service for power and lighting to all points where required. Temporary, electric service shall be of sufficient capacity and characteristics to supply proper current for various types of construction tools, motors, welding machines, lights, heating piant, air conditioning system, pumps, and other work required. Provide sufficient number of electric ouUet, so that 50 foot long extension cords will reach all work requiriri� light or power. LiQhtinp. Supply and maintain temporary lighting so that work of all trades may be properly and safely performed, in such areas and at such time that day-lighting is inadequate. Provide at least 0.75 watts of incandescent lighting per squqr4e foot and maintain a socket voltage of at least 110 volts. Use at least 100 watt lamps. In any event, tt�e lighting intensity shall not be less than 5 foot candles in the vicinity of work and traffic areas. P-8 HEATING. Heating devices required under this paragraph shall not be electric. The Contractor shall provide heat, ventilation, fuel and services as required to protect all work and materials and to keep the humidity down to the extent required to prevent corcosion of any metal and to prevent dampness or mildew which is potentially damaging to materials and finishes. -All such heating,.ventilation and .,. :. services shall be provided and maintained until final acceptance of all work. In addi6on, the ConUactor shall provide heat ventilation prior and during the following work operations as foliows: , a) At all times during the placing, setting and curing of concrete provide sufficient heat to insure the heating of the spaces involved to not less than 40 F. b) From the beginning of the application of drywall and during the setting and curing period, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature in the spaces involved of not less than 55 F. . c) For a period of seven (7) days previous to the placing of interior finish materials and throughout the placing of finish painting, decorating and laying of resilient flooring materiais, provide sufficient heat to produce a temperature of not less than 60 F. P-9 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION. EQUIPMENT AND PROTECTION hoisting equipment, rubbish chutes, ladders to roof, barricades around openings, and ali other temporary work as required to complete all work of the Contract. Contractor shall coordinate the use and fumishing of scaffolds with his sub-contractors. The Contractor shatl provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work, or sooner, if authorized by the Architect, all fences, barricades, lights, shoring, pedestrian walkways, temporary fire escapes, and other protective structures or devices necessary for the safety df workmen, City employees, equipment, the public and property. All temporary construction and equipment shall conform to all regulations, ordinances, laws and other requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction, including insurance companies, with regards to safety precautions, operation and fire hazard. The Contractor shall provide and maintain pumping facilities, including power, for keeping the site, ali times, whether from underground seepage, rainfall, drainage of broken lines. The Contractor shall maintain provision for slosing and locking the building at such time as possible to do so. if this is not feasible, maintain a night The Contractor shall provide and maintain all barricades or enclosures, required to protect the work in progress from outside elements, dusts, and other disturbances as a result of work �under this Contract. Such protection shall be positive, shall meet the approval of the Architect and shall be maintained�for the duration of the construction period or as required°to provide for the protection as specified. P-10 -PROJECT BULLETIN BOARD. The Contractor shall fumish, install and maintain during the life of the project a weather-tight bulletin board approximately 3 feet high by 5 feet wide hav(ng not less than two hinged or sliding glass doors with provisions for locking. The bulletin board shall be mounted where and as approved by the Architect, in a prominent place a�cessible to employees of the Contractor and sub-cont'ractors, and to applicants for employment. The ,bulletin board shall rema!n the ,property of the Contractor and shall be removed by him upon completion of the Contract work. The following information which will be fumished by the City to the Contractor; shall be posted on the bulletin board and shall be maintained by the Contractor in easily readable condition at all times for the duration of the Contract. a. The Equal Oppbrtunity Poster and Notice Nondescrimination of Employment (Standard Form 38). b. Wage Rate Information Poster (Form SOL 155), with the Contract Schedule of minimum wage rates as required by the Davis-Bacon Act. c. Safety Posters. SECTION Q VENUE Should any action arise out of the terms and conditions of this contract, venue °for said action shall lie in Tarrant County, Texas. The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and remove upon completion of the work all temporary ri�ging, scaffoiding, � � � A I � {�J � � � � � L�1 �� .� � DEFINITIONS PROCEDURES AND INTERPRETATIONS GENERkL CONDITIONS INDEX A-1 Contract Documents A-2 EnUre Agreement A-3 Work A-4 Execution of the Contract Documents A-5 Familiarity with Proposed Work A-6 One Unified contract A-7 Division of Work A-8 Interpretations A-9 Copies of Working Drawings and Specifications A-10 Minority and Women's Business Enterprise Policy A-11 Conelation and Intent B IDENTITY OF ARCHITECT � B-1 Contract Administration B-2 Termination and Suspension of Work B-3 Duties of Architect B-4 Architect as Representative of the Owner - B-5 Access to Job Site B-6 Interpretations B-7 Authority to Stop Work B-8 Miscellaneous Duties of Architect B-9 TerminaGon of Architect � C OWNER G1 Identification C-2 Duties of the Owner C-3 Instructions C-4 Access to Job Site C-5 Progresslnspections� C-6 Authority to Stop Work GT SubstanGal Compietion Inspection G8 Right to Audit D CONTRACTOR D-1 Identification D-2 Independent contractor D-3 Subletting D-4 Review of contract Documents D-5 Supervision • , D-6 Labor and Materials D-7 Prevailing Wage Rate D-8 Warranty D-9 Taxes D-10 Licenses, Notices and Fees D-11 Cash Allowances D-12 Superintendent D-13 Respbnsibility for Employees and Sub-contractors D-14 Failure to Commence work D-15 Progress Schedule D-16 Drawings and Specifications at the Site D-17 Shop Drawings and Samples D-18 Site Use D-19 Safe Work Practices D-20 Field Offices and Sheds D-21 Trench Safety D-22 Cutting and Patching of Work D-23 Cleaning Up D-24 Communications SUBCONTRACTORS E-1 DefiniUon E-2 Aw2rd of Subcontracts E-3 Terms of Subcontracts E-4 Minority and Women's Business Enterprise (M/WBE) E-5 Payments to Sub-Contractors F SEPARATE CONTRACTS F-1 Owner's Right F-2 Mutual Responsibility of Contractors F-3 Cutting and Patching Under Separate Contracts F-4 Owner's Right to Clean Up L G-1 G-2 G-3 G-4 G-5 G-6 G-7 G-8 G-9 G-10 G-11 G-12 G-13 G-14 G-15 G-16 G-17 G-18 G-19 G-20 G-21 G-22 G-23 G-24 G-25 G-26 G-27 G-28 G-29 G-30 G-31 G-32 H MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Conflict of Laws Governing Laws Personal Liability of Public O�cials Compliance with Laws Indemnification Successors and Assigns Written Notice Surety Bonds '' Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work Royalties and Patents Tests Interruption of Existing UGlities Services Laying Out Work Measurements Existing Overhead or Underground Work Alignment of Joints in Finish Materials Integrating Existing Work Hazardous Material Certification Location of Equipment and Piping Overtoading Manufacturer's Instruction Cleaning Up Dust Control Fire Protection Cutting and Patching Project Ctoseout Guarantee and Extended Guarantee Record Drawings Construction Fence Product Deliver, Storage, Handling Age Disability CONTRACT TIME H-1 Definitions H-2 Progress and Completion H-3 • Delays and Extension of Time H-4 No Damage for Delay 1 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION I-1 Contract Sum I-2 Schedule of Values I-3 Adjustment of Quantities I-4 Progress Payments I-5 Certificates for Payment � i-s 1-7 I-$ I-9 I-10 J J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 K K-1 K-2 K-3 K-4 K-5 K-6 L L-1 L-2 L-3 L-4 L-5 Payments Withheld Unresolved Claims Liquidated Damages Failure of Payment Substantial Completion and Final Payment PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Safety Precautions and Programs Safety of Persons and Property � Hard Hats Emergencie5 INSURANCE Insurance Required Workers' Compensation Insurance Liability Insurance Builder's Risk Insurance Proofoflnsurance � Other Insurance Related Requirements CHANGES IN THE WORK Change Order Claims for Additional Cost or Time Overhead Allowance for Changes Minor Changes in the Work Field Orders M M-1 M-2 M-3 N N-1 N-2 O P P-1 P-2 P-3' P-4 P-5 P-6 P-7 P-8 P-9 P-10 Q UNCOVERING ANO CORRECTION OF WORK Uncovering of Work Correction of Work Acceptance of Defective or Non-Conforming Work 1 ERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT Termination by the Contractor Termination by the Owner SIGNS TEMPORARY FACILITIES Scope Use of Tetnporary FaciliGes Maintenance and Removal Field O�ces and Sheds Telephone Toilet Facilities Utilities � Heating Temporary Construction, Equipment and Protection Project Bulletin Board VENUE � 00000 � � � � a � „Y � � •�..7 � � � � � � .� � � WEATHER TABLE Month Average Inches of Snow/Ice Days of Rainfall Pellets Rain , January .7 1.80 1 February 7 2.36 ` March 7 2.54 ` April 8 4.30 0 May 8 4.47 0 June 6 3.05 0 July 5 1.84 0 August 5 2.26 0 September 7 3.15 0 October 5 2.68 0 November 6 2.03 * December 6 1.82 * I ANNUALLY I 77 I 32.30 I 1 (1) Mean number of days rainfall, 0.01" or more (2) Average normal precipitation, in inches (3) Mean number of days 1.0 inch or more * Less than 0.5 inches This table is based on information reported from Dallas-Fort Worth Regional Airport, Texas. Latitude 32 deg 54 min north, longitude 97 deg 02 min West, elevation (ground) 551 ft. Average number of days of rain, snow, and ice are based on records covering 27 years. Precipitation is based on record of 1941-1970 period. . This table is to be used as a basis for calculation of excess rain or weather days for projects with duration in calendar days. If the site records indicate that the Contractor was unable to carry out operations due to weather, it is counted as a weather day. If the number of weather days exceeds the number of average rain days plus the snow/ice-pellet days for a given month, the contract period will be adjusted by Change Order. �1v�il l�J � � � � � � . � �, � 4 -0' � � �` � � � �,. � � ti � . t � I 3" 3" 4" 1-1/2" 1/2" 2-,l2'�� 1-3/4" Y �-��2�� AROJECT DESjGNAT�ON S1GN � � .,: ��..i� t�;,� , , �-�� /�,-• ' � YI��I T� . . + � . r P ro ject Titl� � Contractor: Contractors Name 2-1l2" 1-1l2" �� -�rr� . � � . �=�r�„ FUNDED BY �r �r � � �r �r �r �r * �r * �r �r SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE . YEAR . I � i / !�,-�i SIGN IS WHITE WITH BLUE BORDER AND LEfTERING IN PMS 288. PROJECT TITLE, C�NTRACTOR, BOND AND COMPLEf10N DATE INFORMATiON IS IN HELVEf1CA. CITY OF FORT WORTH L�GO lS AVAILABLE !N A VECTOR FORMAT FROM THE CITY OF FORT WOR7H REPROGRAPHICS DEPT. ALL COPY IS IN PMS 288. THE LINES THAT COMPOSE THE "STAR" ARE PMS 167. 0 y L�'J � �� •J � L� � � � � r� . l� 19s9 CLASSIFACTION BUILDING & CONSTRUCTION TRADES STANDARD WAGE RATE FOR TARRANT COUNTY HOURLY RATE CLASSIFa►CTION AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC AIR CONDITIONING MECHANIC HELPER ACOUSTIC CEILFNG INSTALLER ACOUSTIC CEILING INSTALLER HELPER BRICKLAYERISTONE MASON BRICKLAYER/STONE MASON HELPER CARPENTER CARPENTER HELPER CONCRETE FINISHER CONCRETE FINISHER HELPER ' CONCRETE FORM BUILDER CONCRETE FORM BUILDER HELPER DRYWALL TAPER DRYWALL TAPER HELPER ELECTRICIAN JOURNEYMAN ELECTRICIAN HELPER ELECTRONIC TECHNICIAN ELECTROMC TECHNICIAN HELPER FLOOR LAYER (CARPE'1� FLOOR LAYER (RESILIENT) FLOOR LAYER HELPER� GLAZIER GLAZIER HELPER INSULATOR INSULATOR HELPER LABORER COMMON LABORER SKILLED LATHER LATHER HELPER METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER METAL BUILDING ASSF.MBLER HELPER PAINTER PAMTER HELPER PIPEFITTER PIPEFITTER HELPER $15.96 8.81 13.82 9.79 13.25 9.86 13.00 9.34 12.00 9.44 11.59 8.87 11.87 8.25 16.29 10.20 I 2.86 12.67 13.58 14.48 8.56 13.66 9.26 15.89 9.46 7.82 9.66 15.80 11.75 13.34 7.85 11.93 8.3U 14.33 10.93 HOURLY RATE PLASTERER PLASTERER HELPER PLUMBER PLUMBER HELPER REINFORCING STEEL SETTER REINFORCING STEEL HELPER ROOFER ROOFER HELPER SHEET METAL WORKER Sii$ET METAL WORKER HELPER SHEETROCK HANUER SHEETROCK HANGER HELPER SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER SPRINKLER SYSTEM INSTALLER HELPER STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKER STRUCTURAL HELPER WELDER WELDER HBLPER HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATORS EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CONCRETE PUMP OPERATORS CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE, DERRICK, D'LINE SHO FORKLIFT OPERATOR FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR FRONT END LOADER OPERATOR TRUCK DRIVER 13.29 8.63 16.26 9.39 11.88 9.18 13.17 7.82 15.87 9.29 12.70 9.71 16.93 7.81 14.66 7.91 14.87 9.67 14.66 13.30 13.03 1034 11.66 11.60 9.80 � � � � CITY OF FORT WORTH, TEXAS CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT THE STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TARRANT KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: � This agreement made and entered into this the 2"d day of November AD, 19 99 , by and befinreen the CITY OF FORT WORTH, a municipal corporation of Tarrant County, Texas, organized and existing under and by virtue of a special charter adopted by the qualified voters within said City on the 11th day of December, A.D. 1924, under the authority (vested in said voters by the "Home Rule" provision) of � the Constitution of Texas, and in accordance with a resolution duly passed at a regular meeting of the City Council of said city, hereinafter called OWNER, and The Frvmire Companv of the City of Fort Worth County of Tarrant State of Texas hereinafter called CONTRACTOR. L�J L� LJ � � � l�l � I�J WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be made and perFormed by the Owner, and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, the said Contractor hereby agrees with the said Owner to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: SUMMERGLEN BRANCH LIBRARY 4205 BASSWOOD BOULEVARD FORT WORTH That the work herein contemplated shall consist of furnishing as an independent contractor all labor, tools, appliances and materials necessary for the construction and completion of said project in accordance with the Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents adopted by the City Council of the City of Fort Worth, which Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents are hereto attached and made a part of this contract the same as if written herein. The Contractor hereby agrees and binds himself to commence the construction of said work within ten (10) days after being notified in writing to do so by the Owner. City agrees and binds itself to pay, and the said Contractor agrees to receive, for all of the aforesaid work, and for stated additions thereto or deductions therefrom, the price shown on the Proposal submitted by the successful bidder hereto attached and made a part hereof. Payment will be made in monthly installments upon actual work completed by contractor and accepted by the Owner and receipt of invoice from the Contractor. � The agreed upon total contract amount shall be $1,326,100.00 and includes the base bid and Alternates No. 1-6 and 8. Contractor agrees to complete the project, suitable for occupancy and beneficial use, within 300 calendar days. The Contractor will provide a Certificate of Insurance listing the Transportation and Public Works Department � as certificate holder, showing the required General Contractors Liability coverage, Auto Liability, Builder's Risk and Worker's Compensation coverage. If this Contract is in excess of $25,000, the Contractor shall provide Payment Bond. If the Contractor is in excess of $100,000, the Contractor shall provide both � Payment and Performance Bonds for the full amount of the contract. Contractor shall apply for all City of Fort Worth Permits and for any other permits required by this project. City of Fort Worth Permit fees are waived. Separate permits will be required for each facility. I�l � If the Contractor should fail to complete the work as set forth in the Plans and Specifications and Contract Documents within the time so stipulated, plus any additional time allowed as provided in the General Condi- C-1 l�l � tions, there shall be deducted from any monies due or which may thereafter become due him, the liquidated � damages outlined in the General Conditions, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable to the Owner for such deficiency. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City of Fort Worth has caused this instrument to be signed in SEVEN (7) 1 counterparts in its name and on its behalf by the City Manager and attested by its Secretary, with the corporate seal of the City of Fort Worth attached. The Contractor has executed this instrument through its duly authorized officers in SEVEN (7� counterparts with its corporate seal attached. � Done in Fort Worth, Texas, this the 2nd day of R" By: � � � � � t ' 1 ' � � _�'� �� li� 1(-e.. �w.� 0.��.,�( Contractor � � V! Name � . . r'--�j2R.} i r � �A�X_� `<_�1�.�� -�'e �-�- Office �r�- V �,-t�. 4`1lQIG� $'�'1— 3 31� — 4� 1'-� APPROVAL RECOMMENDED: November , AD, 19 99 . APPROVED: By: '�'� .�/' �� Assistant City Mana�r RECORDED: �i r--'�M � � +' � B 1 — ,_ ,. . � ;� �d ;;m, B i ��G�� " " � , �, y� � . y Trar�sportation-and Pubfie FiFlarks C,�, City cretary APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY: /v By: Assistant City Attorney C-2 �% `� �� '9,� Date � � � / / �� ontract Authorization �� Date ' � BOND � � � a � � � � � # 3-632-024 THE STATc OF TE:G�S .. COU�fTY OF T�,RRANT I�vOW ALL �tE�! BY THESE PRESENT: Tl�at we (1) The Frvmire Comqanv (2) Comn�nv of Tesas hereinafter called Principal and (3) WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY , a corporation orQanized and e�isting under the lativs of the State and fully authorized to transact business in the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Ciry of Fort Wurth, a municipal cocporatiun urjanized and esistin� under the la�vs of the State of TeYas liereinafter called Otivner, in the penal sum of: One Million, Three Hundred T�ventv Sis Thousand. One Hundred Dollars Sc No Cents 51.336,1OQ.00 Dollars in lativful money of tha L'nited States, to be paid in�Fort �Vorth, Tarrant County, Te:cas, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made, we -hereby bind ourselves, our heirs, eYecutors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firm(y by these presents. TI� CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that �%hereas, the Principal entered into a � certain contract with the City of Fort Worth, the O�vner, dated the 2�d day of November . 1999 . a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for the construction of: L�J SUM�IERGLEN BR�YCH LIBR�,,RY desiQnated as Project �lumber C1=�1/0201�10�0101 , a copy of which contract is � hereto attached, refened to, and made a part hereof as ful•ly and to the same eYtent as if copies at length herein, such project and construction bein� hereinafter referred to as the "work". L� � u � � � L�1 � NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal shalI well, truly and faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specification, and contract document during the original term thereof, and any eYtensions thereof which may be aranted by the Owner, with or �vithout notice to the Surety, and if he shall satisfy aIl claims and demands incurred under such contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the O�vner from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of faiIure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the owner all outlay and e:cpense which the Otivner may incur in makin� ?ood any default, then this oblijation shall be void; otherwise to remain in fu11 force and effect. PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any le�al action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant County, State of Tesas. AND PROVIDED �URTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no chanQe, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any �vtse affect its obligatioi� on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such chan;e, e:ctension of time aIteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. A:14PERBOND.FRM PERFOR1l�IANCE BOND IN WIT�IESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in 7 Counterparts each one of wliich sitall be deemed an oriQinal, this the 2nd dav of �lovember , 1999. 1 � i �� ATTE T: /6�/ ,I� � C; �f (Principaf) ec e[ary Les Mendenhall (S EAL,) 136 N. THIRD STREET (Address) HAMILTON, OH 45025 ATTEST: (Surety) Secretary �,��,E�) ��r,f� /�L-�-�`�:' �_ ./ 2-',�?zc:� � itness as to S urety THE FRYM�$� COMPANY Principal (�) � B / '' � Y� � G. L. Frymire, President (Prin[ed Name/Title) 3n00 SH(1TTS ,STRRFT ADDRESS FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76107 CITY/ST�,TE/ZTP WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) B. (Attorne DAVID C. OXFORD (Printed Attorney-in-Fact) �Vote: (11 (�) (3) (�) (S) Date of Bond must not be prior to date oj Contract Correct name of Contractor d Corporation, a Partnership or and Indivrdual, as case mav be Cor�ect ,Vame of Surety IjContractor rs partnersnip a!1 Parlxers should execu�e bond ,� true capy of Power oj.�l�torney shalF be attacl�ed [o bond by attarney-in-Fact � , , a� �� BOND #3-632-024 a - � THE ST�TE OF TE;�AS COINTY OF TARR.4NT n KNOW ALL �IEN BY THESES PftESENTS: Tl�at �ve, The Frvmire Comnanv a corporation j� ot Tarrant County, Tesas hereinafter called Principal and (3) WEST AMERl�j�7 TNSTlRAT7('F. ('(IMPATIV � _, a corporation or�anized and existin� under the la�vs of the State and fully authorized to transact business in the State of T'eYas, as Surery, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Forc Worth, a municipal corporation organized and existinQ under the (aws of the State oP T'exas, hereinafter called � O�vner, and unto all persons, firms, and corporations who may tiirnish materials for, or perform labor �ipon, the buildin� or improvements hereinafrer referred to in the penaf sum of: LiJ L�J One Nlillion, Three Hundred Twentv Sis Thousand, One Hundred Dollars & No Cents SY.326.100.00 fa�vful money of the United States, to be paid in Fort �Vorth, Tarrant Counry, Te:cas, for the payment of wi�ich sum weli and truly be made, �ve bind `ourselves, our heirs, e:cecutors, administrators and successors jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. � T'HE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the City of Fort Worth, the Owner dated the 2nd day of November , 1999. a copy of �vhlch is hereto attached and made a part hereof. for the construction of: J P aYI�tENT BOND SUI�utiIERGLEN BR�'�tCH LIBR.ARY � designated as Project Number C141/02014105010I copy of which contract is hereto attached, referred to, and made a part hereof as fully and to the same e:ctent as if copied at len�h herein, such pro�ect and construction being hereinafter referred to as the "�vorks". � � NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of the obligation is such that, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all claiinants as defined in Articie � 160 of tl�e Revised Civi1 Statutes of Te:cas, supplyin; labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, then this obliQation shall be null and void, othenvise it shall remain iu full force and effect. THIS BOND IS I�fADE A�.�+D ENTERED into so[eiy for the protection of all claimants supplying � labor and material in the prosecution of the �vork provided for in said Contract, as claimants are defined in said Article � I60, and atl such claimants shall have a direct right of action under the bond as provided in Article � l6d of the Revised Civil Statutes. '!�J � � �I L�J PROVIDED FURTHER, that ii any leaa! action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Tarrant County, State of TeYas, and that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change e:ctension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specification accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such chan�e, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or the specifications. PROVIDED FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor sha11 abrid�e the riQht of any beneficiary hereunder whose claim shall be unsatisfied. A:15PAY80ND.FRM � IN WITi�IESSETH WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in 7 counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an ori�inal, this the ?n� day of November . 1999. ATT ST: , ��^� � ` (Principal} Secretar� � Les Mendenhall � (SEAL) 136 N. THIRD STREET (Address) HAMILTON, OH 45025 ATTEST: (Surety) Secretary (SE ) � /9��/i�u-��.--�� .Z�C�J"7L�� . ;� � Witness as to Surety THE FRYMIRE COMPANY Principal (-tl � BY: / J�C C�� . �' G. L. Frymire, President (Printed Name/Title) ,i�nn SHOTTS STRFF.T :�DDRESS FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76107 CITY/ST �TE/ZIP WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) � Y B u: / i (A orney-in-Fact) (5 DAVID C. OXFORD (Printed Attorney-in-Fai� fVote: Date aj $ond musr not be prior to date oJ Conrracr (1) Co�rect name oJContractar (1) .d Corporation, a Parrnership or and Individual, as case mcry be (3) Correcr ;Vame of Surery (-I) Ij Contractor is Partnership al! Partners shauid eseeule bond � ;. '� CERTIF'IED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY TI� OHIO CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY AMERICAN FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY No. 34-064 Know All Men by These Presents: That TFIE OHIO CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY and AMERICAN FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, each an Ohio � Cotporation, and WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana Corporation, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 7 of the By-I.aws of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company and Acnerican Fice 8c Casualty Company and Ar[icle VI, Section 1 of Weat American Insurance Company, do hereby nominate, constitute and appoint: David C. Oxford, Steve Rickenbacher, Helen Zook, Rudolph Norris, Clinton Norris or Rebecca S. Thacker ot Dallas, Te$as �� true and lawful agent (s) and attomey (s)-in-fact, to make, execute, aeal and deliver for and on its behalf as aurety, and as ifs act and deed any and all BONDS, LINDERTAICINGS, D and RECOGNIZANCES, not exceeding in any aingle instance FIFTEEN MII.LION ($15�000�000.�0� DOLLARS, excluding, however, any bond(s) or undertaking(s) guaranteeing the payment of notes and interest thereon � In WITNESS WFIEREOF, the undersigned officer of the said The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, American Fire & Casualty Company and West American Insurance Company has heretmto subscribed his name and affixed the Cocporate Seal of each Company thia 24t11 day of Mdj�,1999. � , ltA!lAy,�, �3,,"�','� e`��,�' .�j�,w,s, . G f r4�='� � � �/ �.a t c, � SEAL � ��5E13D.�; ;� SEAL � �� 6�i C \ ! I�i/W� �Kv�' a-"•v`��+ � Syw.....Ap L 111� � . � Sam Lawrence, Assistant Vice President STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF BUTZER a � � D � D � � � a � a Md the execution of such bonds or undectakings in pursuance of these presents, ahall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officere of the Companies at their administrative offices in Hamilton, Ohio, in their own proper persons. The authority granted hereunder aupeisedes any previous authority heretofore granted the above named attomey(s)-in-fact. On this 24th day of May, 1999 before the aubscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Ohio, in and for the County of Butler, duly commissioned and qual�ed, came Sam Lawrence, Assistant Vice Proaident of THE OHIO CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, AMERICAN FIRE & CASUALTY COMF'ANY and WEST AMERICAN INSLJRANCE COMF'ANY, to me pereonally known to be the individual and officer deacribed 'uy and who executed the preceding instcument, and he acknowledged the execulion of the same, and being by me duly swom deposeth and saith, that he ie the officer of the Companies aforesaid, and that the aeals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Coiporate Seals of said Companiea, and the said Corporate Seals and his signature as officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. IN TESTIIv10N1' VJF�REOF, I have hereunto aet my hand and affixed my �cial Seal at the City of Hamilton, State of Ohio, the day and year £ust above written. ��+un �,��ll� ��ttj�� rti �I •�� b��:"'�r+�' �a�e.Qiar''°`' �°y��4'r`' Notary Public in and for County of Butler, State of Ohio MV Commisaion expires September 25, 2002. This power of attomey ia granted under and by suthority of Article VT, Section 7 of the By-Laws of The Ohio Casualty Inswance Company and American Fire & Casualty Company and Article VI, Section I of Weat American Insurance Company, extracts from which read: Atticle VI, Section 7. APPOINTMENT OF ATTORNEYS-IN-FACT, ETC. "T'he chaitman of the boazd, the president, any vice-preaident, the secretary or any assistant aecretary of each of these Companiea ahall be and ia hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint attomeys-in-fact fot the pwpose of signing the name of the Companies as aurety to, and to executa, attach the cocporate seal, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, stipulations, undettakings or other instruments of auretyahip and policies of insurance to be given in favor of any individual, fum, corporation, or the official representative thereof, or to any county or state, or any official boazd or boards of county or atate, or the United Statea of America, or to any other political subdivision." Article VI, Section 1. APPOINTMENT OF RESIDENT OFFICERS. "The Chaitman of the Board, the Preaident, any Vice President, a Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and suthority to appoint attomeya in fact for the puipose of signing the name of the co:poration as surety or guarantor, and to execute, attach the co�porate seal, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizancea, atipulations, unde�takinge or other instruments of surety-ship or guarantee, and policies of insurance to be given in favor of an individual, firm, corporation, or the official representative thereof, or to any county or atate, or any official board or boards of any county or state, or the United SUtea of America, or to any other political subdivision." This insWment is signed and aealed by facsimile as authorized by the following Resolution adopted by the respective directors of the Companies (adopted May 27, 1970-The Ohio Casualty Insuranca Company; adopted Apri124, 1980-Weat American Inswance Company; adopted May 21, 1998-American Fire 8c Casualty Company): "RESOLVED that the signature of any officer of the Company suthorized by the By-Lawa to appoint attorneye in fact, the signature of the Secretary or any Assistant Sectetary certifying to the cocrectrtess of any copy of a power of attorney and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facaimile to any power of attorney or copy theceof issued on behalf of the Company. Such signatures and seal are hereby adopted by the Company as original signatures and seal, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." CERTIF�TCATE I, the undersigned Assistant Vice President of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company, American F'ue & Casualty Company and Weat American Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing power of attomey, the referenced By-Lawa of the Companies and the above Resolution of their Boards of Directora are true and correct copiea and aze in full force and effect on this date. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I liave hereunto set my hand and the seals of the Companiea thia 2 ND �y� au `� }SS IIJ�fI� �` �H� `qt W'.�......` 1� = ` ��. p'�, �� 3EAL�' g( �iSg�]g� � SEAL � ` �( b ��' ��-}� a S-4300 3l99 dayof NOVEMSERi 1999 �� Assistant Vice President � J � � L�J � � I�l I�I I�l � � CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW Pursuant to Article 8308-3.23 of Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes, Contractor, The Frvmire Comnanv certifies that it provides worker's compensation insurance coverage for a11 of its employees employed on City of Fort Worth project Summerglen Branch Library project number, C�/020141050101. By: {�-� r �1.1, _ � \�-��YY� \ � `l_' � �..PS � � � I ,c�- Title 111��, �, Date STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF TARRANT e E BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared l`.�I • l-- •��.1 t� ��'"'� , known to me to be the person � whose name is subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed the same as the act and deed of ��. �,�('�_ � 0��( , for l the purposes and considerations therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated. � IVEN L7NDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this �� day of 0�`�.1r��.�(?Qt� , 19�C1 . � o00000 ` � 1_1� :o"�Y•';e�:'�; KIMBERLY ANN ROBERTSON 2'�,, � Notary Pubtic. State of Texas Notary Public in and for the State of Texas Q �•,; ��s My Commission Exp. 09-30-2001 n ,.,,,, �� II �� agrees to provide to the City a certificate showing that it has obtained a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each of its employees on the project in compliance with state law. No Notice to Proceed will be issued until the Contractor has complied with this section. (b) Contractor agrees to require each and every subcontractor who will perform work on the project to provide to it a certificate from such subcontractor stating that the subcontractor has a policy of workers compensation insurance covering each employee employed on the project. Contractor will not permit any subcontractor to perform work on the project until such certificate has been acquired. Contractor shall provide a copy of all such certificates to the City. F_AF��'�'N7 :� .(d�] i5 � � :7 �'� I � �, �� O � �l L�J I� C�J a� � �� 0 � 0 0 � INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS EXISTING REPORTS AND SURVEYS 1.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the buil�ing site is attached following this section: � 1. Title: Geotechnical Engineering Study Summerglen Branch Library 4205 Basswod Boulevard Fort Worth, Texas 2. Date: March 1999 3. Prepared by: Rone Engineers. B. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of foundations, prepared primarily for the use of the �rchitect. C. The recommendations described shall not be construed as � requirement of this Contract, unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents. I D. This report, by its nature, cannot reve,al all conditions that e'xist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, cF�anges in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting cre�iits or expenditures to the Contract Price accruing to the Owner. ; SECTION 00300 i END OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE 70j BIDDERS I i � : , . : : : . � . . . ; � Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Warth Public Library Fort V'Jorth, Texas 00300 - 1 � r Q� � � � � � W � � � � � � � � 0 � � � , Rone Enginelers, inc. Fort Worth/Datlas 121 North Rayner Street Tel. (81 � 831-6211 Fort Worth, Texas 76111 Metro (817) 429-4328 Fax (817) 834-4833 March 26, 1999 Report No. 513-9-497-03 City of Fort Worth 1120 Fournier Street Fort Worth, Texas 76102 Attn: Mr. Ryan Jeri, P.E. Gentlemen: GEOTEC.HNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY FAR NORTH BRANCH LIBRARY BASSWOOD BOULEVARD . FORT WORTH, TEXAS RoneEngineers �- Submitted here are the results of a geotechnical engineering study for the referenced project. This study was performed in general accordance with our Proposal No. 5139841 dated February 9, 1999. The geotechnical services were authorized by Mr. Ryan Jeri, P.E. of the City of Fort Worth on February 11, 1999. Engineering analyses and recommendations are contained in the text section of the report. Results of our field and laboratory services are included in the appendix of the report. We would appreciate the opportunity to be considered for providing the materials engineering-testing and '� geotechnical observation` services during the � construction phase of ttiis project. We appreciate the opportunity to be of senrice to the City of Fort Worth. Please contact us if you have any questions or if we may be of further service at this time. Respectfully submitted, RONE ENGINEERS, INC. ��--�' � James A. McDaniel, E.I.T. � % y 1 Charles M. Jackson, P.E. r(� Vice President g�� Texas No. 46088 CMJ/amc �P�� OF TF\�, r .•.....,, 1 15 .•'� '•.� 1 , s, *: %* ---------- . � �;� 46088 � ` . :, :� .• .� • ,�C � N s� �, t,�i��NA L 'E?�� Copies submitted: (2) Mr. Ryan Jeri, P.E.; City of Fort Worth (1) Mr. Charles Gojer, P.E.; Charles Gojer and Associates, Inc. (1) Mr. Joe Halbach, AIA; Halbach-Dietz Architects Geotechnical 8 Environmental Consultants, Materials Engineering and Environmental Exploration � r � � � �' � � � � � � � � � � ..� � L.a � � U � � TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................... 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 EXPANSIVE SOIL CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.OEARTHWORK ....................................... 7.0 PAVEMENTS ........................................ 8.0 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.0 CLOSURE .......................................... APPENDIX A Pa4e 1 3 6 7 19 28 31 32 33 Pla e PLAN OF BORINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 KEY TO CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 LOGS OF BORINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4-A.9 FREE SWELL TEST RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.10 APPENDIX B SOIL MODIFICATION AND LIME SLURRY WATER PRESSURE INJECTION i � 1 � 1 � � � 1.0 INTRODUCTION 1.1 Project Description This report presents the results of a geotechnical engineering study for the proposed Far North Branch Library located on Basswood Boulevard in Fort Worth, Texas. The library will consist of a single-story, steel-framed structure. Column Ioads on the order of 75 kips for a ground-supported floor and 150 kips for a suspended floor structure can be expected. 1.2 Purpose and Scope The purpose of this geotechnical engineering study has been to determine subsurface conditions, evaluate the engineering characteristics ,of the subsurface materiais encountered, provide guidelines for foundation design and construction requirements. To accomplish its intended purposes, the study has been conducted in the following phases: (1) drilling sample borings to determine the general subsurface conditions and to obtain samples for testing; (2) performing laboratory tests on appropriate samples to determine pertinent engineering properties of the subsurface materials; and (3) performing engineering analyses, using the field and laboratory data, to develop geotechnical recommendations for the proposed construction. The design is currently in progress and the locations and/or elevations of structures 4 Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. � � .� � .� � � � .-rj �-- � � � � � � � � � � L�J � u , � coufd change. The recommendations contained in this report are based on data supplied by Messrs. Ryan Jeri, P.E. of the City of Fort Wortf� and Charles Gojer, P.E. of Charles Goje� and Associates,� inc. during February 1999. Once the final design is near completion (80- to 90-percent stage), it is recommended that Rone Engineers, Inc. be retained to review those portions of the construction documents pertaining to the geotechnical recommendations, as a means to determine that our recommendations have been interpreted as intended. 1.3 Report Format The text of the report is contained in Sections 1 through 9. AI! plates and large tables are contained in Appendix A. The aipha-numeric plate ,and tabie numbers identify the appendix in which they appear. Sma(I ta6tes of less than one page in length may appear in the body of the text and are numbered according to the section in which they occur. Units used in the report are based on the English system and may include tons per square foot (tsf), kips ( 7 kip = 1,000 pounds), kips per square foot (ksf), pounds per square foot (psf), pounds per cubic foot (pcf), and pounds per square inch (psi). RepoR No. 513-9-497-03 0 2 RONE ENGINEERS, lNC. ! ♦ I f� , , f 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING 2.1 Field Exploration Subsurface materials at the project site were explored by six borings d�iiled to depths of 5 to 25 feet. The borings were drilled using truck mounted drill equipment at the approximate locations shown on the Plan of Borin�gs, Plate A.1. The boring locations were selected by Rone Engineers, Inc: The boring logs are included on Plates A.4 through A.9 and keys to classifications and symbols used on the logs are provided on Plates A.2 and A.3. Undisturbed samples of cohe,sive soils were obtained with nominal 3-inch diameter �� thin-walled (Shelby) tube samplers at the locations shown on the logs of borings. The Shelby tube sampler consists of a thin-walled steel tube with a sliarp cutt�ng edge connected to a head equipped with a ball valve threaded for rod connection. The tube is pushed into the soil by the hydraulic pulldown of the drilling rig. The soil specimens were extruded from the tube in the field, logged, tested for consistency with a hand penetrometer, sealed, and packaged to limit loss of moisture. The ronsistency of cohesive soil samples was evaluated in the field using a calibrated hand penetrometer. In this test a 0.25 inch diameter piston is pushed into the relatively undisturbed sample at a constant rate to a depth of 0.25 inch. The results of these tests, in tsf, are tabulated at respective sample depths on the logs. When the capacity of the� penetrometer is exceeded, the value is tabulated as 4.5 +. Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, tNC. 3 .� ,-.a � � � � � _�J � � � � � �� Ground-water observations during and after completion of the borings are shown on the upper right of the boring log. Upon completion of the borings, the bore holes were backfilled with soil cuttings and plugged at the surface by hand tamping. 2.2 Laboratory Testing Laboratory soil tests were performed on selected representative samples recovered from the borings. In addition to the classification tests (liquid limits and plastic limits), unconfined compression strength tests, unit dry weight determinations, and moisture content tests were performed. Results of the laboratory classification, unconfined compression strength, unit dry weight, and moisture content tests conducted for this project are included on the boring logs. A Free Swell test was performed on a selected sample of the higher-plastic�ty clays. This tests, was performed to help in evaluating the swell potential of near-surface soils in the area of proposed structure. The results of the swell test are presented on Plate A.10. The above laboratory tests were performed in general accordance with applicable ASTM or U.S. Army Corps of Engineers procedures, or generally accepted practice. � � LJ L�'J Report No. 513-9-497-03 � 4 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. �� I 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDIT10N5 � � � � � � � 3.1 Subsurface Stratigraphy ' Specific types and depths of subsurface strata encountered at the boring locations are . � , �-- � � shown on the boring logs in Appendix A. The generalized subsurface stratigraphy . r encountered in the borings is discussed below. �� I � Overburden soils consist of dark brown, brown, gray, reddish brown, and tan clays, � calcareous clays, and shaly clays of high plasticity. The clay soils are generally firm f"j � �,1 to hard with pocket penetrometer readings of 2.5 to over 4.5 tsf. The liquid limit and � d soils var from 50 to 73 and 32 to 48, res ectivel . � plasticity indices of teste y , p Y ��°-�: �� Moisture contents and unconfined compression strength ranged from 13 to 32 percent . : a iand 3,150 to 12,800 psf, respectively. ' � � Fill was discovered in one of the borings. Fill on the order of 5 feet was denoted in a ' Boring B-5. � , � � a � 3.2 Ground-Water Observations � The borings were advanced using auger drilling methods in order to observe ground- � . @ water seepage levels during drilling. All of the borings were dry upon completion. � Fluctuations of the ground-water level can occur due to seasonal variations in the � amount of rainfall; site topography and runoff; hydraulic conductivity of soil strata; and a Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 5 � Y� .� .� � � � � � � � � �� L!J � other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed. The possibility of perched ground wate� within granular, more permeable zones or atop rock exists. � Due to the variable subsurface conditions long-term observations would be necessary to more accurately evaluate the ground-water level. Such observations would require installation of piezometers or observation wells which are sealed to prevent the influence of surface water. � 4.0 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1 General Foundation Considerations Two independent design criteria must be satisfied in the selection of the type of foundation to support the proposed s�'ructures. First, the ultimate bearing capacity, reduced by a sufficient factor of safety, must not be exceeded by the bearing pressure transferred to the foundation soils. Second, due to consolidation or expansion of the underlying soils during the operating life of the structures, total and differential vertical movements must be within tolerable limits. The foundations for the proposed buildings are discussed below. Foundation construction considerations are presented in� Section � 4.4. C � l�9 Column loads on the order of 75 kips for a ground-supported floor and 150 kips for a suspended floor can be anticipated. During the investigation, near surface soils were Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. � � 1 ! noted to be highly plastic. Thes� soils in a dry state tend to have a greater strength and swell potential than when they are moist. In order for a ground-suppbrted floor to be considered the near surface soils will need to be modified to reduce swelling. The following foundation option is recommended for the library structure: Underreamed pier foundations founded' at a depth of 15 feet below ground surface . � 4.2 Pier Foundation Underreamed piers may be founded in the brown, reddish brown, and gray shaly clay at a depth of 15 feet below existing grade. Underreamed piers may be designed for an allo'wable end bearing capacity' of 5.0 ksf. A bell-to-shaft diameter ratio between : 2 and 1 and 3 to 1 should be used in design of underreammed piers. Tension loads may be resisted by the dead load of the belled pier plus the weight of the soil enclosed by a cylindrical surface formed by the circumference of the bottom of the bell and the depth of the pier below finish grade. All �piers should be spaced a minimum of 2 shaft diameters apart, edge-to-edge. Piers founded as close to a 1 shaft diameter, edge-to-edge, should be designed for 75 percent of the total anticipated load capacity due to overlapping stress effects. The end-bearing and side friction values include a factor of safety of 3 for dead load plus live load with respect to shear failure. Piers proportioned for these values should experience 0.75 inch or less of settlement after construction. The weight of the piers below the final ground surface may be neglected in determining the design loads. Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. % �, � J � . 1 �� ' „-+ � rJ � � _! � � �� .— �� J �a] �- The settlements will be primarily elastic with a portion Qf the settlement occurring during construction. The settlement response of the drilled piers will be impacted �more by the quality of construction than by the response of the final structural loads to the foundation. Expansive soil movement in relation to pier foundations is discussed in Section '4.3. 4.3 Expansive Soil Considerations for Foundations The drilled piers will be subjected to uplift pressures and tensile forces caused by expansion within the surrounding soils, as the soils undergo seasonal moisture changes. Accordingly, each shaft should include reinforcing steel to counteract these tension forces. .Uplift pressures for drilled piers have been estimated to be 1.2 ksf for a soil thickness and side shaft exposure depth of 12 feet. This uplift can be resisted by the bell or underream portion of the underreamed ,pier. 4.4 Drilled Pier Construction °Drilled pier construction should be monitored by a representative of the geotechnical engineer to observe, among other things, the following items: Identification of bearing material. Adequate penetration of the shaft excavation into the bearing layer. The base and sides of the shaft excavation are clean of loose cuttings. • If seepage is encountered, whether it is of sufficient amount to require Report No. 513-9-497-03 ' RONE ENGINEERS, INC. _ 8 0 0 t_ 1 the use of temporary steel casing. If casing is needed it is important that� the field, representative observe that a high head of plastic concrete is � r� � 1 maintained within the �casing at all times during their extraction to ' prevent the inflow of water. Precautions should be taken during the placement of reinforcing steel and concrete to prevent loose, excavated soil from falling into the excavation. Concrete should be placed as soon as practical after completion of the drilling, cleaning and observation. Excavation for a drilled pier should be filled with concrete before the end of the workday, or sooner if required to prevent deterioration of the bearing material. Prolonged exposure or inundation of the bearing surface with water will result in changes in strength and compressibility characteristics. If ,delays occur, the drilled pier excavation should be deepened as necessary and cleaned, in order to provide a fresh bearing surface. u , , Ground-water seepage could be encountered in some areas of the site during drilled pier construction. If this occurs, good .results have been achieved in areas of comparable subsurface conditions by scheduling the concrete placement to closely follow the drilling operation, to help in minimizing the seepage. Rapid placement of reinforcing steel and concrete will be required under these c`onditions. The complete installation of a drilled pier should be accomplished as rapidly as possible in order to limit seepage problems and deterioration of bea�ing surfaces. Report No. 513-9-497-03 � RONE ENGINEERS, INC. .� �' � � � �f � � � � � � L�J � L'�J u � � The concrete shouid be placed in a manner to prevent the concrete from striking the reinforcing cage or the sides o� the excavation. Concrete should be tremied to the bottom of the excavation to control the maximum free fall of the plastic concrete to less than 10 feet. A� drilling rig of sufficient size and weight will be necessary for drilting and/or coring through the.hard layers to reach the desired bearing stratum and achieve the required penetration. In addition to the above guidelines, the specifications from the Association of Drilled Shaft Contractors Inc. "Standards and Specifications for the Foundation Drilling Industry" as Revised 1995 or other recognized specifications for proper installation of drilled shaft foundation systems should be followed. 4.5 Grade Beams Grade beams used in conjunction with the drilled piers shouid be tied into the.tops of the piers and shoutd have a permanent void space of eight inches beneath. This void is required to prevent vertical movements within the soil from applying pressure to the . bottom of the beam. If cardboard carton forms are used to create the void space, care should be taken to protect the cardboard forms from damage, crushing, or becoming wet prior to pfacement of concrete. The cardboard cartons should extend the full length between piers and the full width of the beam. The in-place void boxes should Reporf 1110. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 10 t � I � i � ; be observed prior to concrete placement to determine that they are firm and capable of supporting the wet concrete and that they are placed the tull width a�d leng#h of the beam, between piers. . 4.6 Interior �toor Slab Systems Structural Floor: Interior f(oor s(abs are generalty IigF�tly foaded and may not� be capable of resisting the heaving forces of expansive clay soils. The estimated soil movements should be considered detrimental to floor siabs placed on grade. In areas sensitive to floor slab movement, a positive means of preventing movement is to structurally suspend the floor system (beams and slab) above the expansive subgrade. Support of the structural floor is provided by the drilled piers. A minimum vertical void of 8 inches is recommended below the structura! system. !f a crawl space is employed, provision should be made to provide drainage of the void space below the slab, in the event water becomes trapped or seeps into this area. Drain iniets which are tied into the storm sewer or a sump and pump system may be necessary. A(so, because of capiilary moisture buildup, proper ventilation should be provided in the space below the slab. Ground-Suanorted Floor: If a ground-supported floor system is to be used in conjunction with the pier and beam foundation, it will be neces'sary to reduce the soil movement. To provide mo�e uniformity of potential movements to ground-supported floor slabs and to reduce the amount of potential vertical movement of these expansive soils, it is recommended that lime slurry/water pressure injection activities be performed on the onsite soils at the final grade during construction and prior to filling. Report No. 573-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. � 11 e� '��.. i � i � � � � L� A weli-designed site drainage plan is of utmost importance and surface d�ainage should be provided during construction and maintained throughout the life of the struct�re. Consideration should be given to the design and location of gutter downspouts, planting areas, or other features which would produce moisture concentration adjacent to or beneath the structure or paving. It is� desirable that paving and/or extorior flatwork extend to the building line rather than have planting areas next to the structure. Consideration should be given to the use of self-contained, watertfght � planters. Joints next to the� structure should be sealed with a flexible joint sealar to prevent infiltration of surface water. Proper maintenance should include periodic inspection for open joints and cracks and resealing as necessary. Rainwater collected by the gutter system should be transported by pipe to a storm drain or to a paved area. If downspouts discharge next to the structure onto flatwork or-paved areas, the area should be watertight in order to eliminate infiltration next to the building. 5.3 Additional Design Considerations The following information has been assimilated after examination of numerous projects constructed in active soils throughout the area. It is presented here for your convenience. If these features are incorporated in the overall design of the project, the performance of the structure should be improved. • Any structural floor system must have the underlying exposed soils graded to drain to a collection point where the water is channeled away from the structure. We further recommend that any step-down, below grade walls, etc. be provided �vith suitable dewatering devices to reduce accumulated water. � RepoR No. 513-9-497-03 � 14 RONE ENGINEERS INC. � � r �� • Special consideration should be given to completion items outside the building area, such as stairs, sidewalks, signs, etc. They should be adequately designed to sustain the potential vertical movements mentioned in the report. � � � � � � � , � � � � � � � � � � ' � • Roof drainage should be collected by a system of gutters and downspouts and transmitted away from the structure where the water can dr.ain away without entering the building subgrade. • Sidewalks should not be structurally connected to the building. They should be sloped away from the building so that water will drain away from the structure. • The parking lot and the general ground surface• should be sloped away from the building �n all sides so that water will always drain away from the structure. Water should not be allowed to pond near the building �after the slab has been � placed. • Every attempt should be made to limit the extreme wetting or drying of the subsurface soils since swelling and shrinkage will result. Standard construction practices of providing good surface water drainage should be used. A positive slope of the ground away from the foundation should be provided to carry off tFie run-off water both during and after construction. • Backfill for utility lines or along the perimeter beams should consist of on-site materi�al so that they will be stable. If the backfill is too dense or too dry, swelling may form a mound along the ditch line. If the backfill is too loose or too wet, settlement may form a sink along the ditch line. Either case is undesirable since several inches of� movement is possible and floor cracics are likel� to result. The soils should be processed using the previously discussed compaction criteria. • The floor slab placed at or below existing grades should be provided with a moisture barrier in order to prevent wet spots. 6.0 EARTHWORK 6.1 Site Preparation The subgrade should be firm and able to support the construction equipment without displAcement. Soft or yielding subgrade should be corrected and made stable before constr��ction proceeds. The subgrade should be proof rolled to detect soft spots, which flepon N��, 613-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 15 1� ► m � I � . � � � � � � � � � � �� L�J if exist, should be reworked to provide a firm and otherwise suitable subgrade. Proof rolting should be performed using a heavy pneumatic tired roller, loaded dump truck, or similar piece of equipment. The proof rolling operations should be observed by the project geotechnical engineer or hislher representative. Prior to fill placement, the subgrade should be scarified to a minimum depth of 6 inches, its moisture content adjusted, and recompacted to the moisture and density recommended for fill. 6.2 Placement and Compaction Fill material should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 inches in uncompacted thickness. The uncompacted lift thickness should be reduced to 4 inches for structure backfi�l zones requiring hand-operated power compactors or small self-propelled compactors. The fill material should be uniform with respect to material type� and moisture content. Clods and chunks of material should be broken down and �the fill material mixed by disking, blading, or plowing, as necessary, so that a° material of uniform moisture and density is obtained for each lift. Water required for sprinkling to bring the fill material to the proper moisture content should be applied eveniy through each layer. The fiA material should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined by the Standard Proctor test, ASTM D 698. In conjunction with the compacting operation, the fill material should be brought to the proper moisture content. The moisture content for general earth fill should range from two percentage points below to 4 percentage points above optimum (-2 to +4). These ranges of Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 16 ! I I � moisture contents are given as maximum recommended ranges. For some soils and under some..conditions,`the contractor may have to maintain a more narrow range of moisture content (within the recommended range) in order to consistently achieve the recommended density. � . Field density tests should be taken,as each lift of fill material is placed. As a guide, one field density test per lift for each 5,000 square feet of compacted� area is recommended. For small areas or critical a:�eas the frequency of testing may need to be increased to one test per 2,500 squa�e feet. A minimum of 2 tests per lift should be required. The earthwork operations should be observed and tested on a continuing basis by an experienced geotechnician working in conjunction with the project geotechnical engineer. Each lift should be compacted, tested, and approved before another lift is added. The purpose of the field density tests is to provide some indi�ation that uniform and adequate compaction is being obtained. The actual quality of the fill, as compacted, i should be the responsibility of the �contractor and satisfactory results from the tests i should not be considered as a guarantee of the quality of the contractor's filling � operations. i 6.3 Excavation The side slopes of excavations through rthe overburden soils should be made in such a manner to provide for their stability during constriction. Existing structures� pipelines � Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS. INC. 17 .� � ,' i,� �� -� � .� �� ' specifically loaded areas. The pavement c�oss sections can be confirmed by � . performing strength tests on the subgrade materials once the traffic characteristics are established. Periodic maintenance of pavement structures normally improves the durability of the overall pavement and enhances its expected life. It is important that the owner provide aggressive maintenance of the pavement in the future. This will include periodic observation of the pavement for cracking and proper sealing of cracks to prevent/abate moisture migration below the pavement. 8.0 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS � � M � � � � � � � In any �geotechnical investigation, the design recommendations are based on a limited amount of information about the subsurface conditions. In the analysis, the geotechnical engineer must assume the subsurface conditions are similar to the conditions encountered. in the borings. However, quite often during construction anomalies in the subsurface conditions are revealed. Therefore, it is recommended that � Rone Engineers, Inc. be �etained to ob erve foundation installation, earthwork, and pavement� installation and perform rrf aterials evaluation � and testing during the construction phase of the project. This enables the geotechnical engineer to stay abreast of the project and to be readily available to evaluate unanticipated 'conditions, to conduct additional tests if required and, when necessary, to recommend alternative solutions to unanticipated conditions. � No. 513-9-497-03 Report � � RONE ENGINEERS, INC. , 1 I 1 � „ It is proposed that construction phase observation and materiais testing commence by the project geotechnical engineer at the outset of the project. Experience has shown that the most suitable method for procuring these services is for the owner or the owner's design engineers to contract directly with the project geotechnical engineer. This results in a clear, direct line of communication between the owner and the owner's design engineers and the geotechnical engineer. 9.0 REPORT CLOSURE The borings for this study were located by Rone Engineers, Inc. using approximate taping methods from existing topographic features. The locations and elevations of the borings should be consideredY accurate only to the degree implied by the methods used in their determination. The boring logs shown in this report contain information I related to the types of soil encountered at specific locations and times and show lines 1 delineating the interface between these materials. The logs also contain our field representative's interpretation of conditions that are believed to exist in those depth intervals between the actual samples taken. Therefore, these boring logs contain both � factual and interpretive in'formation. Laboratory soil classification tests were also performed on samples from selected depths in the borings. The results of these tests, along with visual-manual prpcedures were used to generally classify each stratum. � Therefore, it should be understood that the classification data on the logs of 6orings � � represent visual estimates of classifications for those portions of each stratum on Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 21 �� 1 , �� a � �� a � � � � � .� � � � � � � � � � � L� � � � � � �'J which the full range of laboratory soil classification tests were not performed. It is not implied that these logs are representative of subsurface conditions at other locations and times. With regard to ground-water conditions, this report presents data on ground-water levels as they were observed during the course of the field work. In particular, water level readings have been made in the borings at the times and under conditions stated in the text of the report and on the boring logs. It should be noted that fluctuations in the level of the ground-water table' can occur with passage of time due to variations in rainfall, temperature and other factors. Also, this report does not include quantitative information on rates of flow of ground water into excavations, on pumping capacities necessary to dewater the excavations, or on methods of dewatering excavations. Unanticipated soil conditions at a construction site are commonly encountered and cannot be fully predicted by mere soil samples, test borings or test pits. Such unexpected conditions frequently require that additional expenditures be made by the owner to attain a properly designed and constructed project. Therefore, provision for some contingency fund is recommended to accommodate such potential extra cost. The �analyses, conclusions and recommendations contained in this report are based on site conditions as they existed at the time of our field investigation and further on the assumption that the explorator.y borings are representative of the subsurface conditions throughout the site; that is, the subsurface conditions everywhere are not significantly different from those disclosed by the borings at the time they were Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 22 t I ' � � , completed. If, during construction, different subsurface conditions from those encountered.in our borings are observed, or appear to be present in excavations, we rnust be advised promptly so that we can review these conditions and reconsider our recommendations where necessary. If there is a substantial lapse of time between submission of this report and the start of the work at the site, if conditions have changed due either to natural causes or to construction operations at or adjacent to the site, or if structure locations, structural loads or finish gra,des are changed, we urge that we be promptly informed and retained to review our report to determine the applicability of the conclusions and recommendations, considering the changed conditions and/or time lapse. m Further, it is urged that Rone Engineers, Inc. be ret�ined to review those portion� of the 'plans and specificaxions for this particular project that pertain to foundations, earthwork, and pavements as a means to determine whether the plans and specifications are consistent with the recomrx�e,ndations contained in this report. In addition, we are available to observe •construction, particularly the compaction of structural fill, or backfill and the construction of foundations and pavements as 'recommended in the report, and such ,other field observations as might be necessary. The scope of our services did not include any environmental assessment or investigation for the presence or absence of wetlands or hazardous or toxic materials in the soil, surface water, ground water or air, on or below or around the site. The scope of services also did not include any assessment of the site for suitability for the Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 23 �� '� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ��! � L�� . � � � .r1 � � � L.r � � � � � � [J l�J a proposed construction or use, related to items or conditioms other than those specifically addressed in this report. This report has been prepared for use in developirtg an ov�rall design concept. Paragraphs, statements, test results, boring logs, diagrams, et�., should not be taken out of context, nor utilized without a knowledge and awarenes� of their intent within the overall concept of this report. The reproduction of this report, o� any part thereof, supplied to persons other than the owner, should indicate that this study was made for design purposes only and that venfication of the subs�rface conditions for purposes of determining difficulty of excavation, trafficability, e�c. are responsibilities of the contractor. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the City o�f Fort Worth and their consuitants for specific application to design of this project. Th� only warranty made by us in connection with the services provided is that we hav�; used that degree of care and skill ordinarily exercised under similar conditions by rep�.atable members of our profession practicing in the same or similar locality. No other w;arranty, expressed or implied, is made or intended. � * �► � � Re ort No. 513-9-497-03 p � 24 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. .� .. . ' � � Ro�E�� n� � � � I I 1 • � � .� - � � _.. � - � - � � - . I ' � I � -�-B-1 �- � -�ir- B-4 . ' B-2 � , � i , PROPOSED ; i STRUCTURE� � ' ' ' I � , i �,---- � � � ' / I _ � . . i � ' ' ' -� B-3 ; , �- ---! � � . ) . � . �B-5 PARKING -�- B-g I � . AREA , �, [_ -- - ` , -� .-__ . I _ . �_ . . ` � _ I NORTH . BASSWppp BovC� SCALE: 1"= 50' vaRD ; _ �.` � ' � � FA - R NORTH BRANC1i LIBRARY FORT WORTH, TEXAS � 513-9-497-03 Pl.AN OF BORINGS PLATE A.1 6 C Z 'il m CJ � 0 r (�1 r Y � � � n D � 0 z � � � --, m � .� � 1 � 'O r � rn D N '____1 ---� ; �-1 �� —'1 • ------� --------•• - -------_._ - --�---------- 1'inu lyain�il a.uls CU31�U (j1u11�4(J Sci�l9 -- (I.iU18 IIIaI� IIJII QI IIIJIp1IJ� IY S/IIiIOL'1 IIIi111 I iU 2iMl siuv�) (1.1<ua lhuu holl ol u�ulmid �, Iwp�� Ihan t la 2(� :,�uvr si�e) i b�IJy Ol�d�IIC aoi15 � � � u � W � � < 0 �, � n � --------- -----• --- -•--------•� - -----�-•_. _—__-- T �t _'t r i } S r � � � � � � � � _; � -- -..�_,...---- .- �._ � � w q � L n n� n F 7 �� •� �� ai� �� e.�-� � � �� _ � � � 3 � j � � � � Ei � ��. �;,. _ � �� 3 ' � � � � � � � —_, .------ "_'. _Pla:.li�:dy �nJu, . . _. � - -- - c -. o u o � c; c; p— ._-.' .-"`---"' --'^ .._...-.-.-• -.. - - �--- o" , .._ . _.. . . . . . ._ . . �• 3 � -• -- �--•- �-- - - \ . ,� � r �p' � ♦ —_-•--. _—_ -. • - - - . . . t' � . `o • \ - •--- •- - ... --• --_. n � * 4 , •. � � ' o _____ __---- �� ---- -- —� -- � • - --- . � o --- -._ ----• ••---- - . _- - - - - -_ _ ci �� c� x ��, � p ___ '�"_- -_ . _ ...-_ ._ _" \ _ � m = o------- ------- --- --- -- `-- -• ---- � `�' ---- ___ _.. ._ - -- - � . . — - � - �� . � ._ . � � .- - -�- -- . _. ._ � � � � �.. � �� Shcs dml i.la� 5 Sdis ornl �layy (t iquid lunil p�unlw Il��u� 50) p iyui�l lui�il lues Ilwn 5u) -- ------ — --- Suudy' -�- •- - -- 7 --�-�----�----- ��ivL{g . .. � (t.luiu Ilwn I�aq �I c.a.u�su h�i.lian 19 (1.1otB Ihan hull �I c:aa�ea bt.cJio(115 n --, aupltm tl�w� Ilu � tiu�u �itu) lut�ur U�mn Ila. 4 uevu Gtb) 3� SYII(19 Y.IIII GIIU! ..-. . -- ._' ' "'-'.... � . ^. ' _' " (j�YY4I9 WIIII Gf107 T—' � ,Clua�� aan�la Cken piavNs " (A��.�uUdI.IJ �uGulA (A�.(,ty(:laUtl Wf�Uul�l (1 futu ut nu f�nus) �d inuy) _�---- ----- ol G��on) p iulm u r�o 6nas) - �'-- �— � -- --v -- -- � -- - -----"-..--- � v � � � . �1 � �� i - � � � 3 `^A u � � �� . � �� n , � � �' � . R$ �� , s. � � _ � � , � c � � � K� � o � 0 7 � 2 � � r � • � � � � �� G .� � n 3 � � � K ' . � -----•---- ---- - - --- --. __.. ....._. -� -- -- I)ululllll/�tl �qlLuld8Vu5 LI OUIIII W�fI �nvul IIUII (JiW�I si�o c.uivu i--^--------- --r- - (1u�NuiLu� on �,c�cwauqu ol I+uus �liu�.Uun s�null�i ►I�Nn I iu [iii) siuru sito), warsn prwr.�,:l �ads riu tJaes�hud us I�JIu.:.: 1 �sa u�an 5 �,u� c.ui �I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liVl. GF'. S1Y. SP � 1.1u�uUia�l2�.uiwid.. ... ... • - - ...... ... ....[�1.1.fi(:..`.t.1.5(.' 51u12�NllWd ... ...... . .. . ..Ihnl/uGl14COSc91uc�1A�U�Ud�id�yud.c.ls • --- • - - --�- . .- ��L� 5�� `�� R�n �� . ___. - -- -('•--' � Z � Ei l: j �t 5 :J I 7 I�,1 ! ,-J i: � j. �± � I r y !� [� g c� 5 ii � I S� Z 0 �' - 1 � '� y fi .., . .� �' if ��' ;��u � � �� a � u� � . _'_u� __� � __ �-, � --�--�u�--- � t`i � ° . r� � � �c� �(aj� n � u,•, ` a�e C' o�� 3 � � j s � k n � C�� S. � O O � � °,n ° c, . n ( �i i� ; �=,o o c o ` � � . L�:-S� � b f1 }�a� � $ K, i`o' � ' � � � � � � '�� aa�1' - ��$� �: � _�}�' 3 p} � � ^ Y/ I. 3 � 3� .. � . ..__. i ._ ` I l � � 1 � . � � �E�� _ � � �: � -,s �� --W �='�.------�-_ ' � �� ', ---------._ -_�.^._.._...---------..__ _-•------- " v;. � ' � L �..i � ! �� , ` RoneEncineers ' • iisa�■�— ISOIL OR ROCK TYPES � � GRAVE_ / LE.aN CIAY � � I � � j • � �� : • � � • SAN� � ' . S�NOY — . � •� . — � �� i�«T I I IS��-� _ jt;ic��r � � � FLaS � ;C CL�Y �C�4Y�Y r- -ITERNiS DE�CFIEING CONSiST�NCY, LIMESTONE — � , Si-!ALc SANOSTOME / - __ , _ cCr�GLcti�E=�.aT� I �he:by I .a��er I Split SOaan Roc:< Cure I C:.ne P<n �o I TuCe `'�,,.��' i CONDI i tON, A��D �TRUCTUft� �F S�IL Fine GrairE� Soils (�icre,h�n �0?6 ?sssing No. �QO Sie�re} �esc;iptive Item Fsrtetrometer Reading, (tsr �ort a.00 ta 1.00 � �:r,n 1.00 to 1.�0 � �tir 1.5�7 ta �.00 + V2^� �tirt 3.00 to �.�0 i �2rC -�.�c:+ � � CCcrSc Ci clrE� C�:IIS ,�1ore';^an 5u'4b �ecainea on No. _CO ��avei � Fenetration Resis:enca Desc:iptive Item I �Clcws;�aat) Q`�1 � :C � Q I 1C'e �� a ;o ��7 � Cve� :L� �Scii Struc:�r� l Caic�recus ISiic.cens��e: ! Laminated F;ssured IInterbe�ce� TcRN1S � F��rcre�s �/er� Laos2 LOOS2 �tedium Qensz Dens2 Very Censz ��elative Censity � to ��o., _.. :C �C�� 0 :c ?0°S ,-0 ;o �0°'� �0 ;c t CC°'� CJ(1La1I15 a0Cr2�:anle de,.^.OSitS �T :3�C:L'�;, �aP:.Cflci2: :E.^.2fcl�;/ ,�CCU�cf �:aV1f1C�. If1C:ined Clanes or'N2SK��@SS �~�I af2 �iIC:C SRC �IC�S� f� 3CC23faf1C� C�mccs2d of thin laye:s or �iariino c�lcr ��r ;e;cr.:ra C�nt�ining �:ac:cs, s�rre;imes ;iile� �Nith `rre �src cr ��it C�mpos2d ot attemate laye:s of c;Tf2C2^L �ull ;�Fes, U.SJci�;/ 11 �CCfCXLTiaic�:`� 3�::a� ti:,��,.^,Cr:��^5 C�E�CR1BtNC FhYS1CAL P�OFE�TiE� OF �OCK arc De�r�� or C�mentGiicr �Iery Sort or =?asic Soft IMOS2fct2!`/ -'efC t;ard �Very Hard Pooriy Camented or Friable Camented I Can be remolded in hand; c�rr2s�:,cn�s �r,. c:,ns;Ce^c� uc :o ••�e^� s:iif in sciis Can be sc,�atched �aith fingemail Can be sc:atched zasily �Nith knir2: car:nct �e ��:atc�ed •Niih ;ineemail Ciific�lt to sc:atc:t with ,<nife Cannot be sc:atc�ed �Nith knife Easily crumbled Bound together by c;�emically precipitated material; Cuartz, calcite, dolomite. siderite, anc 'ron oxide are c�mmon c�menting marterials �Degree of V�/eathering . I IUflweathered Rocic in its natural state before being exposed ;o atmespheric agents � Siightly �Neathered Noted predominantly by color ctiange with no disintegratea �ones � Weathered Complete color change with zones of sfightly decamposea rocic I Exiremely Weathered Comalete color chanqe with confistenc��, texture, and aPnPr�l �nnearance aporoachinq soil KEY TO CLASS1FiCAT10N ANO SYMBOLS '. PLATE A.3� � .� 1 � � � Project No. Boring No. Project Far North Branch Library - Basswood Boulevard 513-9--197-03 B-1 � Fort Worth, Tezas Location " Water Observadons • See Ptate A.1 . Dry at completion . Completion Completion Depth �.0' I Da� 2-24-99 Surface Elevation � Type Auger , N w � „ G �- % � � �� Ca I i I Stratum Description CL�Y, brown, w/ small gravel, stiii - calcareous clay, brown w/ some gray, 1.�'-3' - dark brown and gruy, w/ calcareous nodules, gravel, and shells, very stifE 3'-8' Si�WLY CLAY, brown, reddish brown, and gray, slickensided, very stiffto hurd - brown, 14'-l3' �- brown, gray, and reddish brown, blocky, I8'-23' - brown and dark gray, 23'+ �-----—----�------ � 1 � I � I o I � ui i � o� ;I I � � �i � � �� i i� i ol � I i n I 01 V I � � � m LOG OF BORING NO. B-1 ne�ngir.ec . � � o �y � c� � - V Q�. � O r�.1 � Q�� I �� z b �, m- 3LL c�u�i ; : �m c\ �" o� o �c Z'� cm�, C7 O 3C�: y> 7'=� N= Nm NC �y UE7 , w c�J om� Rm cE mE m'o 0o ca coo ; z s mat= a�n JJ a� a ��o �� va 2.75 . I 61 21 40 28 I � i I � � ; 2.75 19 � � � I I � I � � 325 �. � Z� I � '.' . i � � � � ' I � ( � ! � � � ' j � • i i � � j j j � i 4'� I � � 23I ' � � I � � '� � , � ! I � i � i � I I � � ! � 1 I � , i � � � ; � I i �'� I � � i 19 I l09 ; 31�0 � � � � � � � � ; � � � � � � � � I � � : f . , , , ; � � i ! i I I � ' � ;:�.s � ; � I I za ; loa : axio I � i; � i i ! i I I I I i; � � I I� I I ! i � ' i j � I � i . � �.S � I I � 181 � � i I i ' I ; � i � i I i • i , �� i I ' i I I � � � I i � ' ' �� i 1� i ' I I I � Plate A.4 � � l �� t� � � �'� � *�, � � � � � � � � I � � ryI � � OIc� w� o`� � � a� c� � ol nlrn � � o� � OIc� 0 � m Project No. Boring No. 513-9-�197-03 . B-2 Location See Plate A.1 Compledon Compledon Depth, ��e Dute 2_2499 Surface Eleva6on P�1�= Far North Branch Library - Basswood Boulevar�l Fort Worth, Teaas Water Observations � Dry at compietion Type Auger n ne�nqin� � w � ; s � a a � y Stratum Description CI.�1Y. b�own, dark brown, and gray, w/ small gravel, limestone fragments, and shells, very stiff to hard CaLCaREO[JS SHALY CL�IY, brown and gray, tvi limestone tiagments,'very stiti SHALY CL�1Y, brown, roddish brown, and gmy, slickensided, very sriff to hard - blocky, 9'-1 1' I - brown and dark gray, wi small reddish brown and tan sandstone seams. 19'-25' -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - � � i LOG OF BORING NO. B-Z . o Q y' L Ol N G IL O C O ' o';« � � i ++ � Z e A ' 3 u' C N dJ � e �o c� ` va � `c �� 4'`73' I U I G 3 �u: y> >=r n� y m �� U o ac � w cl am� �om Q'E �E A�a oo c� coo � z I� maH am JJ a� a5 �U �� Ua ! I 4.5 - i 29 i : ! ' � � . 2.� 50 l8 I 32 23 94 i I � •. � � � i 3.0 � ; Zp ; , I ' � ' I � � 1 ! i ; I i I I i ; i ; � I � i . !' I I � , ;, j � ; :'�.� � I 60 ; 21 : 39 � 23 i � j i I I, �;� . j i � ; � ! : � . � � � � � � I � ' i � J I � � � . � a � � � � ;'�.� I i � � 20 � l08 I 3330 . I i � i i� � � � � j � � � � ; 4 � I � I i j ; . j I�1.� I i ♦ . i l8 � , � � � ' I ! , ; � � • � I i � � � � ; ' � � � . . i � � � : � ;:�.s j i ; t� ; t is � t�soo � � ' � i ; � . ; , ; ' . � ; � � I I i ! i I � � � I I � � I � I � i � i � � � � � I � p' � i I � ate A.5 � I Pmject No. Boring No. 513-9-•197-03 B-3 [.ocation See Plate A.1 Completion Cbmpledon Depth ?S.�r D�te 2-24-99 Sud'ace Elevation �.L� y C ?� .: � � a � Q !lyly � ._ j r � � i � t0 � �. I � � � ; i� L � I— i : � 30 �— i L I ��5 � � .�� i �' Re�nai:��er proJ�j Far North Branch Library - Basswood Boulevard ��r � Fort Worth, Teaas , Water Observutions • � Dry at completion � ` �'". � Type Auger Stratum Description CI.�Y. dark brown, w/ small gravel, limestone tiagcnents, and shells, stifi - brown, tan, and gray,•wi abundant calcareous nodules. limestone tiagments, and shells. �1'-9' SF�WLY CL�1Y, dark reddish brown and gray, slickensided, very stitito hard - brown, reddish brown, and gray, ld'-23' , I _ i � o I ` � N . I C � ., ' p C O � .: � 'O � . +�'4 �' o A � 3�� uyif� p o � m �� o o y � C �� 4:. m y V � o �vi y m QE R E m� 'a c� y c°� E� i W f'1 m cQ ._ O C� � C O O 0.' Q�' CGaF- �!n JJ �J � C �(i �JI �Ua i 2.� i i :� I i � ' # V � 2'� I � i �� i j , "I I I. � I � i • � z.s � � � ; t3, t I i ' ' , � � � , i � ! � ! I , .. � � I � i ; i � i ; � � i I j ; , j '� : a.s j j � I I'�� . i � , , Y, � i i . • , . I � � , � I . � � _ i � I � � � � � I , i . ! I � I i � I . � :-�.� I I , I I �=Q '• 107 ' �830 � i I ' . i � '+ad ; ; i i ! I i , . � , I j6 I ! . ! i , � � I • i i ' I ! �� I � d.� � j i � �� I�% . �J�� i � � � !� i � i ' � I � � i � � � I ' i ; � - brown and dark gray, somewhat slickensided, 23'+ ; ' . I ' ' . ' ' �i.� ; I � I , � `� , � -----------------; i I � ' ; � ; ' � � � � � i � � � i j . . � i � ; ; � i � j �, i j i , i � �i j i; i � I� � � �I � i � I � � Iw , � I a' I � � 0 � I e I °j I � ' m� LOGOFBORINGNO. � ' � ' ' ' � i ' � � ' I I I I ; � I ; � ; � i � � i , I I � , � i i I I �' � �� I';; I ` � � i I I i � � : ! , � � i � , i i i ; t '� j i � ' � I � � t i • ; � � • � , , 'r � i ; ; i ; Plate A.6 � � • Project No. ' I Boring No. P�o��t ; Far North Branch Library - Basswood Boulevard ' S13-9-t97-03 B-4 Fort Worth, Tezas Location Water Obsorvutions See Plate A.1 Dry at compietion • Cumpletion Completion Depth �.�� Da� 2-2�-99 � Surface Elevadon Type Auger N �1eEnainc�rs • ��! �'- � N c u L' � a • Q(� � O r`C�.1 � Q � a ^ '�^ � Z \ l � � (�i � c y y Stratum Descri ption o a; m �= : a= � � z�� U � a Cy u`�, m�= a= y m y C � y °o E 3 w � m �_ crE RE �a� oo c,o coo . z z cnaE- am JJ a� n.5 �U �� Ua � _ j CLr1Y, brown and dark brown, w/ calcareous I I 3.25 69 15 �1�3 26 I r� nodules, very stiff � • I - brown and dark brown w/ tan seams and abundant ; � � ' � / gravel.l.�'-3' . � � 4.� I � 13 . I � - /, � : �� _ � C�LCAREOfIS SHALY CLaY, brown, reddish i � � I I ' brown, and gray, w/ abundant small gravei snd shells ; I`�•� � ; � 16 i , _ —� � -----------------i . � � : � • � ' � ' I � � � i I � � I � � j � � , � ' ! � � i � ! � j ' � j i , � I I i � � ; �• � � I � � i . � � i i � � I j i ' I ! 3 � I i � � � � ii I II , 1 i �' I II i �.i� �� ' � 1�✓' , I ' , I 1 il .i I I I � I � I � � . � � � �; � i� � I I 1 �� '� � I . I � �I � � 0 c� w z z � a' � 0 rn � P � � 0 � z � m LOG OE BORING NO. B-4 � � � i i i � � I � ! I � � I I j I i . � � � � � . i , f i i i , � i � . I � ; ! i , � i . � ; ! ; � I � � . . ; � � � ; � � � , , ; . i i i , � ; � � I � i ; � , � ' t 1 i , � � � � � I I i i I � � ; ; � i i i i I I � I i I i � Plate A.7 [ � � � � � � _ � L �' ' �� ' � j � ; � � i ; 1; I � � I � { � � _ I � � � � I � ' I i � � � i � ' i � � � � �+ ��I � �t w � � � o I RI I � OI c� I m� LOG OF � Projcct No. Boring No. 513-9-d97-03 B-5 Locadon ' See Plate A.1 Completion Completion Depth 5.0' Date 2-2�-99 Surface Elevation � � d s � na � T � Q �� Project Far North Branch Library -�Basswood Boulevard ��n��i:a�t` � Fort Worth, Tezas ; Watcr Observutions ' (' � Dry at completion . Type Auger Stratum Description CL.aY, brown and dark brown, snfi: hly - w/ brown sand laycrs, 1'-2' - w/ brown sand layers•and grass. �l'-�' ; T— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —' � i ; � ; . ; � � � ; � ; i BORING NO � � I � ' .-� . � . I, � N � C►L � p C O o r'r' �C �o z � 3� my� o , y m c� �° oe o � m ��j c�'�o a � W��• omvi Rm cE mE m� y= =a co3, z j z; mp.l-� av��.�.7 'a� a ��U �� Ua° i,:. j : 3�5 55 20 35 14 �' � � ( ; . . i- j 2.iS 3i i I � i � � i ; �;. � � z.� � 3t � , i I � � � , i j i ��: � . � � ; i � ; � � ! � f , � i , :,�� ; , ;. ,; . � � ; . I . ; � � i I ' i � � � , I � i ! i I � � ! i � ; : ; I �� ' � ' � i i � I I ' : ' t , � � � t : ; I � I � 1 I . I � I � I i i � ' I i � I ' � i i I � . , , I � j i ; ; . � � ! � . � ' � � ' �. � ; I I I � � � ' i , � � ; i , i . � I i , i i � � � f � � � ; � i j I � , , , � � I' I i I i , � i j ' i I ' I I i ' G � I I � ' I ' I I i i � I ' I I ' ' ' � � Plate �1.3 � i , Project No. Boring No. I 513-9-t97-03 I B-6 Locution � See Plate A.1 � Compledon Completion I D`P�h 5.0' I Dau 2-24-99 Surfacc Elevation i7 y • w � � Project Far North Braq�h Library - Basswood Boulevard Fort Worth, Te�� . Water Observadons . Dry at completilln Type Auger � c � � Stratum Description � _ � CL,-1Y, brown and dark brown, w/ abundant gravel and shells, very sti$' � _ 1 . �� j �e — � I �-�� -------=-------- - � % � / i I i i - � i � � � � � 1 � � � ' � ; � i i i � �,} i � � � ... p, ! • t ,�,.. �'a � � �''� BORING NO. B-C r�negnQin� .�� I ` � N C trL �Q Z : 3u m�a�i � ; : �m c' ' v' v �c �� c�� q C 3 C� q> 7� H� a�i m N C O ai U E 3 w c'1 amy �m cE RE m� ao ca coo z z maH au� JJ n..� a � iU �� c�a 4.0 73 25 48 18 i I I I_ I I i i d.5 I 29 � ; � � I i .�.o i� � i I f i ! ! i � � I � ; ; , � � , ; � ; ' � � , � ; I � • i � � � I i , i I � i � i i ' i � � ' I i I i ; � � Plate A.9 ! 1 I I � � FREE SWELL TEST RESULTS Free swel) tests performed at approximate overburden pressure . � Boring Depth Sample Liquid Plastic Plasticity Moisture Content % Percent No. .Intervai Description Limit Limit Index Swell (ft.) LL(%) PL(%) PL(%) Initial Fnai �o�a� B-2 1.5-3 Clay 50 18 32 23.0 25.3 0.7 � < .� � � APPENDIX B �SOIL MODIFICATION ,� LIME SLURRY AND WATER PRESSURE INJECTION � � : Guidelines GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION FAR NORTH BRANCH LIBRARY BASSWOOD BOULfVARD FORT WORTH, TEXAS �� REPORT NO. 513-9-497-03 Purpose The purpose of these recommendations is to obtain a relatively uniform, moist, stable �` zone of soil beneath the proposed structure. Due to the wide variation in quality of injection subcontractors, lime slurry pressure injection is no recommended' as a stabilization technique unless a full-time laboratory inspector of Rone Engineers, Inc. ,,.,� is retained. Material � � 1. The lime slurry is to consist of clean fresh water, hydrated lime, and surfactant and shall be continuously agitated to ensure uniformity of mixture. 2. The hydrated lime (calcium hydroxide) should conform to the applicable parts of ASTM #C207 Type N. • � 3. A nonionic surfactant (wetting agent) should be used according to manufacturer's recommendations, but in no case should proportions be less than one part (undiluted) per 3,500 gallons water. � l�� L�!J l�] Propor�ion the �lime slurry within the range of 4 to 6 pounds of hydrated lime per square foot of injected area. Check specific gravity of the slurry with Ertco Hydrometer #2545. Specific gravity readings should range from 1.12 to 1.17. Specific gravity checks should be made at both the mixer tanks and at injection pipes. j� Plate B.1 f..� 1 I l■ Application � 1. Provide injection work after the subgrade has been under cut to the desired depths and prior to fill placement, installation of underground utilities and pavement. 2. Injection 'vehicle should have injection pipes spaced on 5-foot center, and each injection pipe should be capable of exerting a minimum penetration force � of 10,000 psi. Force injection pipe into the soil; do not wash down by scouring action of fluid. Furnish track-mounted injection vehicle in order to traverse the ground under its own power, or if rubber tire-mounted vehicle is used, provide a track-mounted machine where necessary toTpull injection vehicle through mud. 3. Continue injection of fluid until refusal at all probes (i.e., until soil will not take any more and fluid is running freely on the surface, either out of previous injection -' holes or has fractured the ground in several places around refusal). If this occurs around any probe, cut this probe off so that water can be properly injected through the remaining probes until refus�al ��occurs for all probes. 4. Injection pipes should penetrate the soil in approximately 12-inch intervals, injecting to refusal at each interval to a total depth of 7 feet. � 5. Lower portion of injection pipe should consist of a hole pattern that will uniformly disperse fluid throughout the entire depth. Injection vehicle should be fitted with individual cutoff valves for each probe. At each 12-inch interval, each valve � should be cut off and on to assure that each probe is not blocked and that injection fluid is flowing. If one of two probes are blocked, cut the others off so that the added pressure will clear out the blockage. 6. Do not exceed five feet on center each way for� injection spacing. Each consecutive injection should be five feet in center and spaced 2-1 /2 feet offset in two orthogonal directions from the previous injection. 7. Adjust injection pressures to inject the greatest quantity of fluid possible within a pressure range of 5� - 100 psi. In order to assure that pressure is within this specified range, equip each injection vehicle with an accurate pressure gauge attached to the manifold (the pipe fitting on which the probe valves are attached). 8. Extend injection five feet outside the perimeter of the structure. 9. After a minimum curing time of 48 hours, the pad should be injected with water and surfactant. The water injections should be five feet on center each way and spaced 2-1 /2 feet offset in two orthogonal directions from the initial injection. The water pass should penetrate the soil in approximate 12-inch intervals, injecting to � refusal at each interval to a total depth of 7 feet. 10. At a minimum, one lime injection and one water injection should be performed prior to testing. 1 1. The swell potential, moisture content, and other soil properties will be evaluated I � � the many unpredictable variables involved. • Estimates of soil movements for this site have been performed using data from the Texas Department of Transportation (Tx-DOT) procedure TEX-124-E for estimating Potential Vertical Rise (PVR), swell tests, and engineering judgment and experience. Vertical soil movements ranging from approximately 2 to 4 inches have been estimated for the clay soils encountered from the surface to a depth of approximately 14 feet in the building borings, as the soils undergo moisture changes. The estimated soil movements are based on the subsurface conditions revealed by the borings and for seasonal moisture fluctuations: Soil movements, significantly larger than estimated, could occur due to inadequate site grading, poor drainage, ponding of rainfall, and/or leaking pipelines. 5.2 Site Drainage An important feature ofi the project is to provide positive drainage away from the proposed buiidings. If water is permitted to stand next to or below the structure, excessive soil movements (heave) can occur. This could result in differential floor slab or foundation movement. Ponding water can result in soil movements exceeding those previously given. A slope of 1.5 to 3 percent should be provided, such that the soil slopes away from the building. Report No. 513-9-497-03 13 0 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. � � � � . � ��: � � � � � � � � � � � � r�l �.. 0 Furthermore, if construction occurs during the wetter periods of the year when on site soils are moistened by rainfall, no injection may be necessary. Preconstruction moisture checks of on site soils can establish the need for injection activities. A minimum 1-foot zone of select fill should be placed atop the injected soils to maintain the insitu soil moisture content during construction. Guidelines for lime slurry and water pressure injection are provided in Appendix B. It is imperative to maintain the moisture in the soils and allow no drying. It should be noted that this method of soil treatment is presented as an option for the owner's consideration. The option may or may not be practical or economically feasible, depending on the expected performance of the proposed structure. The owner should be aware that �his method will not prevent movement of soil-supported foundation elements, and can only reduce the magnitude of the movement to a value on the order of one inch. Placement of the floor slab on _grade represents a compromise between construction cost and risk of floo� distress. 5.0 EXPANSIVE SOIL CONSIDERATIONS 5.1 Potential Vertical Movements The expansive soils encountered at this site can shrink and swell as the soil moisture content fluctuates during seasonal wet and dry cycles. Additionally, the site environment is impacted by grading and drainage, landscaping, ground-water conditions, paving and many other factors which affect the structure during and after construction. �Therefore, the amount of soil movement is difficult to determine due to Report No. 513-9-497-03 RONE ENGINEERS, INC. 12 � � � � to determine acceptance of injected areas. The test results shouid be used to determine if additional water injections are required. � 12. Repeat injections with water and surfactant five feet on center. Each consecutive water and surfactant injection should extend to depths of 7 feet, injected as � described above. 13. A minimum of 24 hours should elapse between each injection application ,in any one area to allow for moisture absorption. � � � � � � � � �•� � � � � I� � � 14. Upon completion of the final pressure injection, scarify the free surface lime into the top six inches of the soil and recompact to a minimum of 95 percent of 'the maximum dry density at a moisture content between optimum and five percent above the optimum value. Observation and Testing 1. A full-time laboratory technici�n should be present throughout the injection operations. Undisturbed samples should be taken at one-foot intervals to the total depth injected from one test hole per 5,000 square feet� of injected area. Adjustments in the testing program should be at the discretion of the testing engineer. 2. A minimum of one free swell test should be performed per test hole. Samples will be.,tested at the approximate overburden pressure of the sample depth. The lime slurry and water pressure injections could be terminated when the results of the free swell tests extrapolated over a depth of 7 feet indicate that post-construction movement will be limited to one inch or less. L'"`J � � �� i� l�] �� a O � � l*J � � � SECTION 01100 SUMMARY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT A. Project Name: Summerglen Branch Library � B. Owner's Name: City of Fort Worth,Texas C. Architect's Name: Halbach-Dietz Architects. D. The Project consists of the construction of a new Branch Library for the City of Fort Worth, Texas. 1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Sum. '1.03 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award a separate contract for supply and installation of Library furniture. B. The Owner will pay for utility tap and impact fees. C. Other items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied by Owner before Substantial Completion. D. Owner will supply and install the following: 1. Data cable and labor for ISS Room connections. 2. Library furniture. 3. Library equipment, incluciing "checkpoinY' book loss prevention equipment. 4. Domestic water and sanitary sewer ta�s to city services. Extension of piping to facility by Contractor. 5. Housing and support for public telephone. Conduit for phone connection by Contractor. E. Owner will supply the following for installation by Contractor: 1. Light poles for exterior light fixtures (light fixtures provided by Contractor) 2. Flagpoles. 3. 3 Bur Oak trees and 2 Live Oak trees as shown on sheet L101 1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY � A. The Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owne� occupancy. ' 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES � A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others. 3. Work by Owner. C. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Provide an unobstructed means of egress to building exits in accordance with requirements of applicable codes where the Project is located. Halbach • Die� Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01100-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 0 � PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01100-2 � � �"J � � �I � �� J �� L*�'J l�J L�J � � � � PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. � . D. Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. E. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment. 9.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Construction Contract: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period. B. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work. C. Section 01270 - Unit Prices: payment and modification procedures relating to unit prices. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. Include values for trench safety systems. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization and bonds and insurance. � D. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS SECTION 01200 A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Present required information in typewritten form. C. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required. D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following: 1. Item Number. 2. Description of work. � 3. Scheduled Values. 4. Previous Applications. 5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application. 6. Authorized Change Orders. 7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application. 8. Percentage of Completion. 9. Balance to Finish. 10. Retainage. E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summefglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas ,��y_�iI�bl F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products. G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work. H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. Include the following with the application: 1. Transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01300. 2. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01300. 3. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01300. 4. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors. 5. Project record documents as specified in Section 01780, for review by the Architect which will be returned to the Contractor. 6. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. 1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes to the Work. B. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not ir�volving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time as authorized by the Conditions of the Contract by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710. ` . C. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a document, signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. � 1. �The document will describe changes in the Work, and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract_Time. .� - 2. Promptly execute the change in Work. - . ,� D. Proposal Request: The Architect may issue a document which includes a�detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation withm 5 calendar days. E. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to the Architect/Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: 1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will be based on Contractor's price quotation and as approved by the Owner. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Owner. 3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. 4. For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from the Contractor, the amount will be determined by the Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 _ Fort Worth, Texas 01200-2 � � �'� � � � � i'�� G. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information require.d for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data: a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented. � - 2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was perFormed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. 3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. H J. K. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract on AIA G701. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, r.evise sub- schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents. � � 1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT L�I � � 1*'J J � L"'J � LJ � A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 6. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures speci�ed in Section 01700. 2. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS NO7 USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summe�glen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library' Fort Worth, Texas 01200-3 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � PART 1 GENERAL 9.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. List of unit prices, for use in preparing Bids. B. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. C. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected work. 1.02 COSTS INCLUDED A. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities indicated in the drawings are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by parties designated by the Owner. B. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required. C. Measurement Devices: 1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable state Weights and Measures department within the past year. 2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle. 3. Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable State department within the past year. D. Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight. E. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness. F. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. G. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. 1.05 PAYMENT A. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities of Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the Owner, multiplied by the unit sum/pnce. SECTION 01270 UNIT PRICES Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01270-1 B. Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products. 1.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the, Architect will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The defective Work may remain, but the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price at the discretion of the Architect. 2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the Architect, and the unit sum/price will be adjusted to a new sum/price at the discretion of the Architect. C. The authority of the Architect to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Drilled piers B. Trench Safety PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED � END OF SECTION � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD .lob No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 01270-2 � � � S � � � � � � � � � � � L�'J l#''J � � � l�l L1 SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART9 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preconstruction meeting. � B. Progress meetings. , C. Construction progress schedule. D. Submittafs for review, informafion, and project cfoseouf. _ E. Number of copies of submittals. F. Submittal procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions of the Contract For Construction: Duties of the Contractor. B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Designated by the Owner. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, for access, traffic, and parking facilities. , C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. G. Make the following types of submittals to the Architect through the Project Coordinator: 1. Requests for interpretation. 2. Requests for substitution. . 3. Shop drawings, product data,, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 6. Applications for payment and change order requests. 7. Progress schedules. 8. Coordination drawings. 9. Closeout submittals. � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01300-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required: 1. Owner. 2. Architect 3. Contractor. 4. Electricai Subcontractor. 5. Mechanical Subcontrator. C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of fist of Subconfractors, list of Products, schedufe of values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling. 8. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 9. Owner's requirements, � " 90. Survey and building layout. 11. Security and housekeeping procedures. 12. Schedules. 13. Application for payment procedures. 94. Procedures for testing. " 15. Procedur�es for maintaining record documents. . 16. Requirements for start-up of equipment. � " � 17. (nspection and accepfance of equipment put into service during construction period. D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. � 3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at monthly intervals. Conduct additiona! meetings when directed by the Architect. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meefings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: , . 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 01300-2 � � � � � ..�._ � � � � � � � �� , �� L�'"�J � L*'J E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. � C. Within 10 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review. 1. Include written ce�tificafion that major Subcontractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. 5. Design data. 6. Certificates. 7. Test reports. 8. Inspection reports. 9. Manufacture�'s instructions. 10. Manufacturer's field reports. . 11. Other types indicated. B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. E. See Section 01340 — Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples for additional requirements. 3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 12. Other business relating to Work. Schedules to be developed and revised using the Critical Path Method. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule. � A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. � 3. Warranties. . 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated. I� � L Submit for the Architect's benefit during and after project substantial completion. � �� See Section 01780 — Closeout Submittals for additional requirements. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01300-3 3.06 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents for Review: 1. Small size sheets, not larger than 11 x 17 inches: Submit the number of copies established during the Preconstruction Meeting. 2. Larger sheets, not larger than 36 x 48 inches: Submit the number of copies established dunng the Preconstruction Meeting. B. Documents for Information: Submit the number of copies established during the Preconstruction Meeting. C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make two reproductions of submittal originally reviewed. Submit two extra of submittals for information. D. Samples: Submit the number of copies established during the Preconstruction Meeting. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated. 3.07 SUBMI7TAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. � E. Deliver submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator. F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor H. I. J. K. L. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Froduct or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01300-4 � L1 � � � � � � � � �J �L�J � � � � � PART1 GENERAL SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Schedule of submittals. 9.02 SHOP DRAWlNGS A. Submit original drawings wF�ich illustrate the work. Show fabrication, layout, setting, and erection details, prepared by a qualified detailer. Title each drawing with Project and Contract name and number; identify each element of drawings by reference to sheet number and detail, schedule, or room number on Contract Documents. B. Identify field dimensions; show relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or Products. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit only pages which are pertinent; mark each copy of standard printed data to identify pertinent products, referenced to Specification Section and Article number. Show reference standards, pertormance characteristics, and capacities; wiring and piping diagrams and controls; componenf parts; finishes; dimensions; and required clearances. B. Modify manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams to supplement standard information and to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. Delete information not applicable. 1.04 SAMPLES A. Submit full range of manufacturer's standard finishes except when more restrictive requirements are specified, indicating colors, textures, and patterns, for Architect selection. B. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of Products, including parts and attachments. . C. Approved samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in the Specification section. D. Label each sample with identification required for transmittal letter. E. Provide field samples of finishes at Project, at location acceptable to Architect, as required by individual Specifications section, lnstall each sample complete and finished. Acceptable finishes in place may be retained in completed work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR REVIEW A. Review submittals prior to transmittal; determine and verify field measurements, field construction criteria, quantities and details, manufacturer's catalog numbers, and conformance of submittal with requirements of Contract Documents. B. Coordinate submittals with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. C. Sign or initial in a rubber-stamped review block format, each sheet of shop drawings and product dates, and each sample label to certify compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Notify Architect in writing at time of submittal, of any deviations from requirements of Contract Documents. D. Do not fabricate products or begin work requiring submittals until return of submittal with Architect acceptance. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library , 01340-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas E. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by ArchitecYs review of submittals. F. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's review of submittals unless Architect gives specific written acceptance of deviations. Architect will review submittals for general conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.06 SUBMIITAL REQUIREMENTS A. Transmit submittals in accordance with approved Progress Schedule, and in such sequence to avoid delay in the Work or work of other contracts. B. Provide two 8 x 4 inch blank spaces on each submittal for Contractor and Architect stamps. C. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed, certifying to review, verification of products, field dimensions and field construction criteria, and coordination of information with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Designate the individual specification section of review on the stamp in compliance with requirements of this section. D. Coordinate submittals into logical groupings to facilitate approval of the items submitted. 1. Finishes which involve Architect selection of colors, textures, or patterns. 2. Associated items which require correlation for efficient function or for installation. E. Submit reproducible transparencies and opaque copies of shop drawings in the number established in the Precons�ruction Meeting. , F. Submit number of copies of product data and manufacturer's instructions established in the Preconstruction Meeting. G. Submit number of samples specified in individual Specification sections. H. Any submittal requiring an engineers pre-review and approval will be submitted bearing the seal and signature indicating approval prior to submission to the Architect. 1.07 RESUBMITTALS A. Provide resubmittals under procedures specified for"initial submittals. Identify changes made since previous submittal. ' B. Do not submit a resubmitted item with any other submittal. 1.08 ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER REVIEW A. Architect and consultants will review shop drawings, product data, and samples and return submittals, generally within (10) ten days. 1.09 DISTRIBUTION A. Duplicate and distribute reproductions of shop drawings, copies of product data, and samples, which bear Architect stamp of acceptance, to �ob site file, record documents file, subcontractors, suppliers, and other entities requiring information. 1.10 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of submittals attached at the end of this section. PART2 PRODUCTS NOT USED Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � , , , � �� ■ L'�l � L�J � � � � � � � 01340-2 � ��"J �-. - t � � SECTION 08211 Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. Shop Drawings: tllustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, specia! blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for louvers. Samples: Provide two samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. Architect will view samples at project site. . Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. "� SECTION 0831Q �,J Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. � Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units. � � � SECTION 08410 Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details. • Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional limitations. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. SECTION 08462 � Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detai( sheefs, and specifications. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of doors, operators, and interface with other products. Samples: Color charts or samples, for selection of inetal finishes. , � Operating and Maintenance Data: Operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists, and wiring diagrams. � SECTION 08710 . Shop Drawings: _ Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. � Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. . Manufacturer's Instaflation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. � Project Record Documents: Record actua! locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection _ procedures related to preventative maintenance. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. � Warraniy: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been comp(eted in Owner name and registered with manufacturer. � SECTION 08800 Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, � iimitations, special app(ication requirements. Identify available co(ors. Samples: Submit one sample 12 x 12 inch in size of glass units, showing coloration. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01340-7 {-� HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � � Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �,.� SECTION 09260 Product Data: Provide data on metal framing. SECTION 09300 Product Data: Provide instructions for using grouts and adhesives. Samples: Provide two samples of each tile type for color approval. SECTION 09442 Product Data: Provide manufacture�'s specifications on cured system and. individual components, including physical and performance properties, test results, and Material Safety Data Sheets. Color Chart: Provide manufacturer's standard color chart for color selection. Samples: Provide cured samples not less than 6 by 6 inches for verification of color selection and finish texture. Include 6 inch length of divider strip. Architect will view samples at project site. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and spacing of divider strips and control joints. Provide details of terrazzo termination and transition to other flooring. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include special procedures such as installation of control and expansion joints, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, requirements for preparation of substrate, and final finishing and protection. SECTION 09511 Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. SECTION 09650 • . Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance' procedures, recommended suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. performance characteristics; maintenance materials, and S�CTION 09680 � Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings. Product Data: Provide data on specified product�, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. . SECTION 09685 Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and perFormance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. � Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. SECTION 09900 Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC and MSDS product data. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surtace preparation procedures. , SECTION 10160 Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 7999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01340-8 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � SECTION 10263 Product Data: Manufacturer's complete and current product data for each product required, including complete installation requirements. SECTION 10267 Product Data: Provide Submit manufacturers product data including installation instructions. Samples: Submit two , 7 x 9 inch in size, illustrating thickness, pattern and color. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions for protective wallcovering. SECTION 10450 Product Data: Provide product data indicating letters to be provided; include letter sizes and attachment method. Provide product data indicating plaques to be provided; include plaque size, copy layout and attachment method. SECTION 10500 Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly. SECTION 10523 Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. SECTION 10557 Product Data: Provide product literature for book returns indicating; product proposed, physical dimensions and manufacturers installation instructions. SECTION 1081,0 Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and accessories. Shop Drawings: Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products manufacturer of products of this section. Quality Assurance Submittals: Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of section, and countersigned by Contractor. SECTION 11050 Product Data: Provide product data illustrating conformance with provisions of this section. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures. of anchors and not supplied by products of this SECTION 11132 Product Data: Provide product literature indicating projection screen size, surface finish, border type, motor characteristics and screen housing. Shop Drawings: Indicate installation procedures including required electrical connections and electrical characteristics. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01340-9 SECTION 12496 Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, product descriptions, installation instructions, detail sheets. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color chart or sample set. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions and interface with other products Room schedule including field-verified dimensions of each opening to receive window shade systems. Indicate System Series, operator, fabric selection, and mounting type. Indicate control type. . END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01340-10 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �� I � � � � � � � � �� SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Control of installation. C. Tolerances. D. Testing and inspection services. E. Manufacturers' field services. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. � Document 00700 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures. C. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Design Data: Submit for the knowledge of the Architect, information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. B. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Include: a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results. 2. Test reports are submitted for the Architect's knowledge, for information, for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01400-1 E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Architect's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for the Architect's benefit. 1. Submit for information for the litnited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. . G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for the Architect's benefit. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by the Architect. 1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS C. � E. A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are reqwred by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. Maintain copy at project site during subrriittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Architect before proceeding. F. The contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference atherwise in any reference document. . - � . 1.05 TESTIIVG AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to pertorm specified testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. Halbach • Die� Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 01400-2 � L�JI ]LJ � � � � � � � �� ,�� l� D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. , E. F Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. � Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of Products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. ' Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place. 3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Pertorm specified sampling and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Arrange with agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fo�t Worth, Texas 01400-3 E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by the Architect. Payment for re-testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price. , 3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate mstructions when necessary. B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. 3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT � A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. END OF SECTION 0 Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch �ibrary HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 01400-4 � � � � � � �l r �I � �� i� � �' � � � �� , [�I SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. � B. Temporary light and power. • C. Temporary telephone and fax service. D. Temporary water and heat. E. Temporary sanitary facilities. F. Temporary Controts: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. G. Security requirements. H. Vehicular access and parking. I. Water ponding control. J. Waste removal and recycling requirements. K. Field offices. L. Removal of utilities, facilities and controls. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for construction purposes. B. New permanent facilities may be used. 1.03 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER . A. Arrange with local power company for temporary electrical service to be extended to the project site. Provide equipment necessary to provide temporary power and lighting. Pay all charges for equipment and installation and for power consumed during construction operations. Provide electrical service of adequate capacity for equipment used in construction. Temporary power, wiring and equipment to be in accordance with applicable governing codes. B. Provide a temporary lighting system that will satisfy minimum requirements of safety and security. Provide mirnmum 1/4 watt per square foot of floor area; providing lighting levels appropriate to the work being performed. Use minimum 100 watt lamps. 1.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE AND FAX SERVICE A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. B. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.05 TEMPORARY WATER . A. Provide water necessary for construction purposes. Make temporary connection to existing main and provide temporary water meter. Pay all charges for installation of and use of temporary water utilities. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01500-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 FoR Worth, Texas • 1.06 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide necessary heat during the course of construction, including equipment and fuel. Provide equipment and fuel of a non-smudging type. 1.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Furnish and maintain adequate sanitary toilet facilities for use of all construction personnel. Portable facilities as approved by city health authorities, properly maintained, may be used. Upon completion of construction, remove the temporary toilets and restore the site to an acceptable condition. 1.08 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for ctwner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. • � � a � � B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of- � way. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. 1.09 FENCING A. Provide fencing to enclose the construction area and provide public protection and safety. Fencing to conform to the applicable Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth. , B. Provide 6 foot high temporary chain link fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. Construct of 1-1/2 inch inside diameter line posts spaced 10 feet apart . Provide 2-1/2 inch inside diameter corner posts with no. 11-gage galvanized chain link fabric stretched over the supports. Provide gates, hung with heavy strap hinges and fitted with hasps for locking. Maintain fence in serviceable condition during construction. Remove construction fencing and fill post holes at time of substantial completion. _ fi �i [�� :t � :� [�1:� � � [�i ��1:�� A. Provide temporary weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working coriditions ar�d protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required-ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.11 PROTECTIVE FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain temporary guardrails, handrails, and covers for floor, roof and wall openings. If movement of the protective facilities is required by a subcontractor to perform his work, it will be the responsibility of that subcontractor to give prior notification to the Contractor and to replace the protective facilities in a satisfactory manner. 1.12 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1.13 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. B. C. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. ss8s Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 01500-2 � `�J fE.J � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. E. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement. 1.14 WATER PONDING CONTROL A. During construction keep the site and construction free from accumulation of ponding water. Provide pumping and bailing equipment to keep excavations dry. Slope ground to drain surface water away from foundations. 1.15 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Dispose of waste off-site periodically. C. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids. � 1.16 REQUIRED RECYCLING OF WASTE A. Collect and donate the following waste items to Habitat for Humanity. 1. Waste lumber exceeding 6 feet in length. 2. Waste gypsum board equal to or larger than '/Z sheet. 1.17 FIELD OFFICES A. B. C. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture,.drawing rack and drawing display table. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures. 1.18 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort WoRh, Texas 01500-3 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � l!�J � `�i � � SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Procedures for Owner-'supplied products. F. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product quality. monitoring. B. Section 01630 - Product Options and Substitutions. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 30 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards. B. Product Data Submittals:' Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project. C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project. D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interFacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns. E. Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances. PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01600-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot (2 m) cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. 2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS / SUBSTITUTIONS A. See Section 01630 — Product Options and Substitutions. 2.03 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. � Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. See Section 01630 — Product Options and Substitutions for product substitution requirements. 3.02 OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. See Section 01100 - Summary for identification of Owner-supplied products. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. - 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B C Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. c� Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. C. Store, sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product. D. For exterio� storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01600-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. . H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01600-3 � I , � � � � s � 0 � � .�'� 1.01 � 1.02 SECTION 01630 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Within ten days of Notice to Proceed, submit finro copies of the Products and Materials List detailing the methods, products, and materials proposed for installation Options: � A. . For products specified only by reference and pertormance standards, select any manufacturer meeting standards. Provide information confirming that particular model meets specified requirements. � B. � For products specified by naming one or more products, select any of the products specified, or �'-' submit two copies of Request for Substitution for products not specifically named. � � � � � � � � � � � � � 1.03 Submissions: Include following information (all products): A. For products to be supplied as specified, include following information: 1. Tabulate by specification number 2. Manufacturer's literature highlighted to indicate the particular models and options chosen to meet contract requirements. 3. . include: Name and address of manufacturer Trade name Model number or catalog description Manufacturer's performance and test data B. For alternative products and methods as follows: 1. Request for Substitution 2. Detailed description of proposed product or method 3. Samples � 4. Name and address of similar local projects on which the product was installation 5. Drawings illustrating methods. 6. Schedule impact 7. Relation to other trades and contracts. 8. Accurate cost data comparison with specified method used and date of C. In submitting Requests for Substitution, the Contractor represents that: 1. He has personally investigated the proposed product or method and has determined that it is equal to or superior to that specified. 2. He will provide the same or better warranty for the substituted product as for that specified. 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, making such changes � as may be required. 4. He will waive all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently become apparent. 5. Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under the contract. D. Substitutions will not be approved if: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without prior approval of substitution request. 2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of contract documents. E. If substitution is not approved or accepted, contractor shall furnish specified product or construction method. � Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01630-1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION DATE: REQUEST NO: PROJECT NAME: � PROJECT NUMBER: City Contractor � INVE REQUEST APPROVAL OF THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEM AS AN APPROVED SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: ---------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------- 1.01 Name and Description of SPECIFIED Product or System Specification Section Page(s) _Paragraph Drawing No. Detail or Section No. 1.02 Name and Description of proposed substitute: Name of Manufacturer: Address: Telephone: 1.03 Name of Supplier: Address: - Telephone: 1.04 What effect does substitution have on applicable code requirements? 1.05 Difference between proposed substitution and specified item? 1.06 List differences befinreen guarantees or warranties of proposed and specified items: � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01630-2 HD Job No. s889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth,'Texas � �i �I � ,�-- �J � � � � � � � � � � � � 1.07 Reason for not giving priority to specified item: 1.08 If substitution affects other material or systems, attach complete information. . 1.09 Dimensional revision or redesign of structural, mechanical, or electrical systems required? Yes (_) No (_). If yes attach complete data. 1.10 Saving or credit to Owner for accepting substitute. 1.11 Will the undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs used by the request for substitution. Yes (_) No (_) 1.12 On a separate sheet: List similar local projects using the proposed substitution. Include name and phone number for contact person. List availability if maintenance service and replacement materials on an attachment. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other � work or project. 1.13 Any license fees or royalties required: Yes () No () THE UNDERSIGNED STATES THAT THE FUNCTION, APPEARANCE AND QUALITY ARE EQUIVALENT OF SUPERIOR TO THE SPECIFIED ITEMS. Submitted by: Contractor's Signature Firm Telephone Date ACTION BY OWNER Accepted []Accepted as Noted [] Not accepted [] Received Late [] Remarks: By Owner's Representative Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Date Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01630-3 � � � � : �� . � � � � � SECTION 01640 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE A. Requirements for hardware, software and firmware date/time transfer between the years 1999 and 2000. 1.02 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Warranty: The Contractor warrants that each hardware, software and firmware product delivered for incorporation into the Work be able to accurately process date/time data between the years 1999 and 2000, including leap year calculations and as described below: 1. Warrant transfer of date/time data between the information technology incorporated into the Work and information technology purchased separately from the Work but intended to be used in association with warranted products or systems. 2. Where the contract documents require that products must perform as a system with respect to date/time data transfer, the warranty described herein applies to the performance of the system rather than to individual products. 3. The duration of this warranty and the remedies available to the Owner for the breach of this warranty shall be as defined in and subject to, the terms and limitations of the Contractor's standard commercial warranty or warranties. 4. The remedies available to the Owner under this warranty shall include repair or replacement of any product or system whose non-compliance is discovered and made known to the Contractor, in writing, within one year following the date of substantial completion. 5. Nothing in the provisions of this warranty shall be construed to limit any rights or remedies the Owner may have with respect to defects discovered in the Work not related to compliance requirements of this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. 1.04 WARRANTY A. B. C. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty reqUirements. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Provide one year warranty for accurate transfer of date/time data between the years 1999 and 2000 as described within this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01640-1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-installation meetings. B. Cutting and patching. . C. Surveying for laying out the work. D. Starting of systems and equipment. E. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. F. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures. B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures. C. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Exterior enclosures, temporary heating/cooling/ventilating facilities. D. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds. E. Section 07840 - Firestopping. F. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 2. Limitations on cutting structural members. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs as for the project record. SECTION 01700 B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request: a. Identification of Pro�ect. b. Location and descnption of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and Products to be used. e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. g. Date and time work will be executed. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01700-1 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located, and certified by the City of Fort worth. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. C, D, Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of inechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. �D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS A. B. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. � Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01600. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 01700-2 � � � � � � 17�\:�iK�� 1�«11��C�I► 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Beginning new work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. � E. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. � � � � � � � � � � � a � 0 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surtaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior tn applying next material or substance. C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of ineeting date: D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 3.04 LAYING OUT 7HE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings. E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction. F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01700-3 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. � L. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations. Periodically verify layouts by same means. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. 3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install Products as specified in individual sections. B. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. C. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect. D. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings� in the work for penetration of inechanical and elecfrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit Products together to integrate with other work. B. C. D. E. F. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surtaces to receive patching and finishing. Employ original installer to perForm cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces. . Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. Restore work with new Products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840, to full thickness of the penetrated element. H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. 3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING A. 7 Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas . � 01700-4 i� L�1 � � �� LJ � � L�J l�J � C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off- site. 3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surFaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surtaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 3.09 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipm�nt are complete and tested. � F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION O � � � � � I� A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion. I� C. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time, at equipment location. Demonstrate systems for heating and cooling. . Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to pertorm demonstration and instruction of owner personnel. 3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 01400 and Division 15 sections. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01700-5 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 0 3.12 FINAL CLEANING . A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surFaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. . C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surtace and material being cleaned. D. Clean filters �of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities. 1. Provide copies to Architect. B. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial�Completion. C. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for ArchitecYs review. D. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. E. Accompany Architect on preliminary final inspection. F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete. G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 01700-6 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � J �� rL] � LJ �, � � � L'�J lJ L�� -� � � L*�] I� � CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Project Record Documents. B. Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Warranties and bonds. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 -.Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data. D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Submit two sets of documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 da�rs prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission. 3. Submit five sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection. C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Architect's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED SECTION 01780 Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01780-1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Make Project Record Documents available for inspection at monthly meetings. B. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents, record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. � 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting. C. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner. D. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. E. F. Record information concurrent with construction progress. Make Project Record Documents available for inspection at weekly meetings. G. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications. � 4. Submit MSDS and VOC safety sheets for paints and coatings used. H. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surtace improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Details not on original Contract drawings. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA , A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify speci�c products and component parts, and � data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � � � 01780-2 � l�J L1' J !'I � � � � � L*.� rl l� � � L�� LJ lr7 � � � � � 3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. . 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include pertormance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed. C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. D. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassemble instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. E. F. G. H. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. � Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. � Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 01780-3 � Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. . b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. � d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data. � 3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Architect's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined. [� C Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. Co-execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. I� � L*� II*� [�'J � � L�J E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table � of Contents. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � � � � � � 01780-4 � �� I�J L! � � l�] SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench excavation, backfilling and compaction of trenches for a storm drain prior to placement of new pavement. . 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02720 — Storm Drainage Systems 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section �, shall comply with the latest revision to the following item of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 402. Trench Excavation and Backfill for Storm Drain - � 2. Item 525. Trench Safety System � �� J L�7 4J � O � � � 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS Refer to paragraph 1.03 of Specification Section 02230 for provisions governing protection of the public and employees, traffic control, protection of existing utilities and work around high voltage lines PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 STORM DRAINS A. Material needed for trenching, backfilling and compaction for storm drains shall comply with the applicable provisions of the above referenced "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth": 1. Item 402. Trench Excavation and Backfill for Storm Drain 2. Item 525. Trench Safety System � Crushed limestone used for embedment of storm drain installed in pavement areas shall conform to Public Works Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction Division 2 Item 208.2 — Materials and Division 2 Item 208.3 — Materials Sources. Halbach 0 Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02221-1 � 1* 1 PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify; and protect utilities that remain from damage. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. 3.03 STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION A. For storm drain construction, the Contractor shall comply with the applicable sections of the above referenced Specification Items in the City of Fort Worth "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction": 1. Item 402. Trench Excavation and Backfill for Storm Drain 2. Item 525. Trench Safety System Refer to Part 3 of Section 02230 for provisions governing the disposal of spoil/fill material within the City of �Fort Worth. B. Trench safety system for storm drain trench exceeding 5' in depth: 1. DESCRIPTION: This item will consist of the basic requirements which the Contractor must comply with in order to provide for the safety and health of workers in a trench. The Contractor shall develop, design and implement the trench excavation safety protection system. The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility for the adequacy of the trench safety system and providing "a safe place to work" for the workman. 2. GENERAL: The trench excavation safety�protection system shall be used for all trench excavations deeper than five (5) feet. The Excavating and Trenching Operation Manual of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Subpart P, shall be the minimum governing requirement of this item and is hereby made a part of this specification. The Contractor shall, in addition, comply with all other applicable federal, state and local rules, regulations and ordinances. 3. MEASUREMENT: All trench safety systems will be measured by the linear foot. The quantity allocated for this project is based on the linear foot amount of trench depth greater that five (5) feet and shall include mains, service lines and all other appurtenances. Trench depth for payment purposes for Trench Safety Systems is the vertical depth as measured from the top of the existing ground to the bottom of the pipe. L�! t'.l L�I L�J ��J �� Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02221-2 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L�. � LJ L�J LJ � � � �i � � �J � � L��i � � � 4. PAYMENT: Payment for trench safety system shall be full compensation for safety system design, labor, tools, material, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work including removal of the system and backfill. Trench safety system shall be paid for per linear foot at the price bid. Refer to Section 01270-Unit Prices and Section 00432-Schedule of Unit Prices. All other work relating to trenching, backfilling and compacting is part of the lump sum bid for the completed project. All provisions in the referenced City of Fort Worth specifications pertaining to measurement and payment for trenching, backfilling and compacting are void. END OF SECTION � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02221-3 E� HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � u � � � � O LJ � � lJ � � � 1!7 � CJ � �� I SECTION 02223 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES . A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Removal of designated construction. C. Disposal of materials. D. Identification of utilities. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS • � A. Section 01010 - Summary: Work sequence and continued occupancy of the building. B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures. C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Re-installation of removed components. D. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re-connection, and public safety. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress from any building exit or site exit. D. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. E. Dispose of waste materials off site in accordance with regulations of authority having jurisdiction. 1.05 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 01100. 1.06 SCHEDULING A. Schedule work to coincide with new construction. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02223-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �, 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interterence with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not resume operations until directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS . NOT USED. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. • B. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors; and noise to permit continued building occupancy and as directed by Owner. C. Protect existing materials and related building components that are not to be demolished. D. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. E. Notify affected utilify companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. F. Mark location and termination of utilities. G. Provide appropriate femporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, remove, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. Notify Owner of utility demolition work affecting airport operations. . B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Dispose of demolished materials off site in accordance with applicable regulations of authority having jurisdiction. D. Remove materials as demolition progresses. Upon completion of demolition, leave areas in clean condition. E. Remove temporary facilities. LRJ u � � � � �! LJ Ll �►�, ,LJ O � END OF SECTION l�J Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 ` Fort Worth, Texas �.�`J � 02223-2 � � �� u � � � LJ L�J � L�J � � L�J � 1� O � � L�] SECTION 02230 PART 1 — GENERAL SITE CLEARING 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of surface debris. B. Removal of trees, shrubs and other plants. C. Removal of sod. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 — Grading: Topsoil removal. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. For parking lot construction refer to the "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 100. Preparing Right-of-Way 2. Item 101. Mobilization 3. Item 102. Clearing and Grubbing � 4. Item 104. Removing Old Concrete The section pertaining to measurement and payment in the above specification items shall not apply. B. Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission (TNRCC) Regulation: 1. The Contractor shall comply with TNRCC regulations regarding the disposal of old asphalt material removed from the site. 2. The Contractor shall also comply with applicable portions of the Texas Clean Air Act regarding emissions to the air during demolition operations and removal from the site. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conform to applicable regulations relating to environmental requirements, disposal of debris, and use of herbicides. B. Coordinate clearing work with utility companies. C. Protect utilities to remain from damage. D. Protect trees, plants, and other features designated to remain as final landscaping. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02230-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �:: � E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, and existing structures from damage or displacement. F. Conduct site clearing operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum interFerence with roads, streets, walks and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. � G. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner or other authorities having jurisdiction. H. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. I. Where pedestrian or driver safety is jeopardized by site cleaning operations, provide temporary traffic control, signs and barricades as required. Traffic control and barricades shall comply with the following provisions: The Contractor shall be responsible for providing traffic control during the construction of this project consistent with the provision set forth in the "1980 Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways," issued unde� the authority of the "State of Texas Uniform Act Regulating Tcaffic on Highways," codified as Article 6701d Vernon's Civil Statutes, pertinent sections being Section Nos. 27, 29, 30 and 31. The Contractor will not remove any regulatory sign, instructional sign, street name sign or other sign which has been erected by the City. If it is determined that a sign must be removed to permit required construction, the Contractor shall contact the Transportation/Public Works Department, Signs and Markings Division, (Phone Number 871-8100) to remove the sign. In the case of regulatory signs, the Contractor must replace the permanent sign with a temporary sign meeting the requirements of the above-referenced manual and such temporary sign must be installed prior to the removal of the permanent sign. If the temporary sign is not installed correctly or if it does not meet the required specifications, the permanent sign shall be left in place until the temporary sign requirements are met. When construction work is completed to the extent that the permanent sign can be reinstalled, the Contractor shall again contact the Signs and Markings Division to reinstall the permanent sign and shall leave his temporary sign in place until such reinstallation is completed. a. The Contractor shall furnish barricades, flares, etc., for the protection of the public and the work. � b. The cost of the traffic control shall be considered subsidiary to other items of work, and no other compensation will be allowed. c. The Contractor shall furnish a traffic control plan to the City of Fort Worth at the pre-construction meeting. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02230-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L�I � �� ! LJ � � L�'J � � � � � � � `�J ��1 L� l�9 ►�J �!� L� � � L*J u L�'J � �� 2. The Contractor shall prosecute his work in such a manner as to create a minimum of interruption to traffic and pedestrian facilities and to the flow of vehicular and pedestrian traffic within the project area. 3. Barricades, warning and detour signs shall conform to the City of Fort Worth Standard Specifications "Barriers and Warning and/or Detour Signs," Item 524, and/or as shown on the plans. Construction signing and barricades shall conform with "1980 Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Vol. No. 1" or latest edition thereof. 4. Conduct operations to prevent injury to existing construction to remain, adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities and persons. 5. The Contractor shall take special care to protect existing utilities and improvements. The plans show the locations of all known surface and subsurFace structures. However, the City of Fort Worth assumes no responsibility for failure to show any or all of these structures on the Plans, or to show them in their exact location. It is mutually agreed that such failure shall not be considered sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for extra work or for increasing the pay quantities in any manner whatsoever. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying the locations of and protecting all existing utilities, service lines, or other property exposed by his construction operations. Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for the support, protection, relocation, and/or temporary relocation of all utility poles, gas� lines, telephone cables, utility services, water mains, sanitary sewer lines, electrical cables, drainage pipes, and all other utilities and structures both above and below ground during construction. The Contractor is liable for all damages done to such existing facilities as a result of his operations and any and all cost incurred for the protection and%or temporary relocation of such facilities shall be included in the Contract price. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED. Where existing utilities or service lines are cut, broken or damaged the D Contractor shall replace or repair the utilities or service lines with the same type of original material and construction, or better, unless otherwise shown or noted on the plans, at his own cost and expense. The Contractor shall � immediately notify the owner of the damaged utility or service line. He shall cooperate with the owners of all utilities to locate existing underground facilities and notify the City of Fort Worth of any conflicts in grades and alignment. Any and all permanent structures such as parking lot surFace, � fencing, and like structures shall be replaced at no cost to the City of Fort Worth by material of equal value and quality as that damaged. � � � In case it is necessary to change or move the property of a public utility, such property shall not be moved or interfered with until ordered to do so by the City of Fort Worth. The right is reserved to the owner of public utilities to enter upon the limits of the project for the purpose of making such changes or repairs of their property that may be made necessary by performance of this contract. � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02230-3 � � The utility lines and conduits shown on the plans are for information only and are not guaranteed by the City of Fort Worth to be accurate as to extent, location, and depth; they are shown� on the plans as the best information available at the time of design, from the owners of the utilities involved and from evidences found on the ground. 6. The following procedures will be followed regarding work'near the voltage lines: a. A warning sign not less than five inches by seven inches, painted yellow with black letters that are legible at twelve feet shall be placed inside and outside vehicles such as cranes, derricks, power shovels, drilling rigs, pile drivers, hoisting equipment or similar apparatus. The warning sign shall read as follows: "WARNING - UNLAWFUL TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT WITHIN SIX FEET OF HIGH VOLTAGE LINES." b. Equipment that may be operated within ten feet of high voltage lines shall have insulating cage-type of guard about the boom or arm, except back hoes or dippers, and insulator links on the lift hook connections. c. . When necessary to work within six feet of high voltage electric lines, notification shall be given the power company (TU Electric) who will erect temporary mechanical barriers, de-energize the lines, or raise or lower the lines. The work done by the power company shall not be at the expense of the Owner. The notifying department shall maintain an accurate log of all such calls to TU Electric, and shall record action taken in each case. d. The Contractor is required to make arrangements with the Texas Electric Service company for the temporary relocation or raising of high voltage lines at the Contractor's sole cost and expense. e. No person shall work within six feet of a high voltage line without protection having been taken as outlined in Paragraph (3). PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Herbicide: Type approved for application to subsurface stumps and approved for use by applicable governing authorities. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Locate and identify utilities to remain. B. Verify that existing plants designated to remain are tagged or identified. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02230-4 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � i.�E u � LJ L'J !�J �� L�� lJ �. � � � l!1 �! � t� l�J � � !J L� � � � � � � � 3.02 CLEARING A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work B. Remove trees, shrubs, and stumps within marked areas. C. Remove roots to a depth of 18 inches. D. Clear undergrowth and deadwood without disturbing subsoil E. Appfy herbicide to remaining stumps to inhibit growth. F. Remove existing sod where required without disturbing topsoil. G. Temporarily stockpile on site all topsoil removed for the building, parking areas and drives for use later for landscaped areas. H. For the construction of parking areas and drives, the Contractor shall comply with the applicable sections of above referenced Specification Items in the City of Fort Worth "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction": � 1. Item 100. Preparing Right-of-way 2. Item 101. Mobilization 3. Item 102. Clearing and Grubbing 4. Item 104. Removing Concrete 3.03 REMOVAL A. Remove surface rock. B. Remove debris from site. a � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02230-5 �� J � � � � � � � u � � � [iJ 4 � � � � � SECTION 02232 SUBGRADE PREPARATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation of subgrade below concrete pavement areas for parking areas and drive. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading . B. Section 02751 — Portland Cement Concrete Paving 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall generally comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 200. Sprinkling for Dust Control 2. Item 202. Rolling 3. Item 204. Subgrade Preparation PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 The Contractor shall comply with the applicable sections of above referenced Specification Items in the City of Fort Worth "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction": Item 200. Sprinkling for Dust Control, Item 202. Rolling; Item 204 Subgrade Preparation. This is a lump sum bid contract. All provisions in the referenced specifications pertaining to measurement and payment for subgrade preparation are void. END OF SECTION Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02232-1 � LI l_�1 � I� �� !EI f�l � � � L�J � � �� PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 02243 SOIL STABILIZATION A. Lime stabilization of the subgrade under concrete pavement for parking areas and drive. � 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading B. Section 02232 — Subgrade Preparation C. Section 02751 — Portland Cement Concrete Paving 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall generally comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: . 1. Item 210. Lime Treatment (Material Manipulation) 2. Item 212. Hydrated Lime and Lime Slurry PART 2 — PRODUCTS Lime slurry material used for lime stabilization shall comply with the applicable provisions of the above referenced Specification Item 212. Hvdrated Lime and Lime Slurrv. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 Lime stabilization methods, including the scarifying of subgrade, application of lime slurry, manipulation of the subgrade and compaction and final grading of the subgrade shall comply with the applicable provisions of the above referenced Specification Item 210, Lime Treatment (Manual Manipulationl. No dry application of lime is allowed on this project. The application rate for lime shall be 27 Ibs. per square yard for 6" depth. This is a lump sum bid contract. All provisions in the referenced speci�cations pertaining to measurement and payment for soil stabilization by lime slurry are void. � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02243-1 u L■J t�,l L�! � �' �l � � SECTION 02310 GRADING PART 9 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of topsoil. B. Rough grading the site for building foundations and site improvements C. Finish grading. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02330 — Site Cleaning. B. Section 02315 — Excavation C. Section 02316 — Fill and Backfill: Filling and compacting. � � L�J u � � � � C'J � 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Construction of parking areas and drives shall conform to the "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following item of the above referenced specifications: . 1. Item 106. Unclassified Street Excavation B. Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission (TNRCC) Regulation: 1. The Contractor shall comply with applicable portions of the Texas Clean � Air Act regarding emissions to the air during earthwork operations including dust control. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities � remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. � 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect above- and below- grade utilities that remain. B. Protect plants, lawns, and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping. ' Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02310-1 HD ,Job No. 9889 • • Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas ' �� C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 — PRODUCTS A. Topsoil: See Section 02316. B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 02316. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain from damage. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re- graded, without mixing with foreign materials. B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re- graded. D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. , E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. F. See Section 02316 for filling procedures. G. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key fill material to slope for firm bearing. H. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02310-2 � � � I� C � �'J � �� LiJ � u � C C'' � � � L�l � l�J 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL AND STOCKPILING A. Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. B. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. . C. Stockpiles: Use areas designed on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. D. DISPOSAL OF SPOIUFILL MATERIAL: Prior to the disposing of any spoil/fill material, the Contractor shall advise the Director of Engineering Department, acting as the City of Fort Worth's Flood Plain Administrator ("Administrato�"), of the location of all sites where the Contractor shall not dispose of such material until the proposed sites have been determined by the Administrator to meet the requirements of the Flood Plain Ordinances of the City of Fort Worth (Ordinance No. 10056). All disposal sites must be approved by the Administrator to ensure that filling is not occurring within a floodplain without a permit. A floodplain permit can be issued upon approval of necessary Engineering studies. No fill permit is required if disposal sites are not in a floodplain. Approval of the Contractor's disposal sites shall be evidenced by a letter signed by the Administrator stating that the site is not in a known flood plain or by a Flood Plain Fill Permit authorizing fill within the flood plain. Any expenses associated with obtaining the fill permit, including any necessary Engineering studies, shall be at the Contractor's expense. In the event that the Contractor disposes of spoil/fill material at a site without a fill permit or a letter from the administrator approving the disposal site, upon notification by the Director of Engineering Depa�tment, Contractor shall remove the spoil/fill material at its expense and dispose of such materials in accordance with the Ordinances of City and this section. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. 6. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in access of'/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products. C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surFace to depth of 3 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding and planting are indicated. F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02310-3 G. Piace topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses: 1. Areas to be Seeded with Grass; 6 inches. 2. Shrub Beds: 18 inches. H. Place topsoil during dry weather. I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. L. Lightly compact {�laced topsoil. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation. �. Top SurFace of Finish Grade: Plus or minus'/z inch. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See section 02316 for compaction density testing. 3.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. END OF SECTION Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02310-4 � � l�, � L � PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 02315 EXCAVATION A. Excavating for building volume below grade, slabs-on-grade, paving, site � structures, utilities within the building, and foundation systems. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. D1.02 RELATED SECTIONS QA. Section 02310 — Grading: Soil removal from surface of site. B. Section 02310 — Grading: Grading. DC. Section 02316 — Fill and Backfill: Fill materials, filling and compacting. � � � L�J L�I CI� 1�J � u L�J 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Construction of parking areas and drives shall conform to the "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following item of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 106. Unclassified Street Excavation 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect plants, lawns and other features to remain. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 — PRODUCTS NOT USED Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02315-1 L�J � PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. - B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurFace conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. C. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. D. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. E. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. F. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surFaces that are disturbed; see Section 02316. G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surFace water from draining into excavation. H. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. I. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated in site in accordance with Section 02310. J. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 — Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. � , � F� C�� :�, i� � I� � � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02315-2 � L*� � � 3.04 PROTECTION 0 A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. � B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. l�J � � L�J L�J L■J � � � LI � � � END OF SECTION � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library � 02315-3 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas O � � u � L�J � u SECTION 02316 FILL AND BACKFILL PART 1 — GENERAL 9.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfiliing, and compacting for buiiding volume below grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections, except storm drain. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 — Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. � . B. Section 02310 — Grading: Site Grading � C. Section 02315 — Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. LwJJ LJ u L!J � � � � � � �'� D. Section 03300 — Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE A. ASTM D 698 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 1991. � B. ASTM D 1556 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 1990 (Reapproved 1996). C. ASTM D 2167 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994. D. ASTM D 2487 — Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 1993 E. ASTM D 2922 — Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- � Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1996. F. ASTM D 3017 — Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1996. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02316-1 G. Construction of parking areas and drives shall conform to the "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications. 1. Item 114. Embankment 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: 4 inches below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated; 6 inches below finished grade elevations for concrete pavement for parking areas and drives. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. � 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site. 1. Graded. _ 2. Free of lumps larger that 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. B. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or � soluble materials and organic matter. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol SW. C. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site. 1. Free of roots, rocks larger than '/ inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas oz3, 6_2 a �i�a � �J � PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, level, contours, and datum locations. � � l�l � � L�J L�J � L�� L�J L!J � L�J B. See Section 02310 for additional requirements. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify subgrade surFace to a depth of 6 inches to identify soft spots. B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. • C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Fill up to finish grade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. Do not exceed 4 inches depth when hand operated power compaction equipment is used for compaction. G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft., unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. H. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Fill with concrete. I. Other areas: Use general �II, flush to required elevation. (� J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: U 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 95 percent of maximum dry density, tested in accordance with ASTM D 698. � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02316-3 � K. Moisture Content 1. Moisture content for full; 2 percentage points below to 4 percentage points above optimum. (-2 to 4+) L. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. M. Filling operations for parking areas and drives shall conform to Item 114.— Embankment of the "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth," latest revision. 3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. At Lawn and Planting Areas: 1. Use general fill. 2. Fill up to subgrade elevations designated in Section 02310. 3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 4. See Section 02310 for topsoil placement. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 'h inch from required elevations. B. Top SurFace of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. . 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 — Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing.� B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determine by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specific requirements, remove work, replace and retest. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 � Fort Worth, Texas 02316-4 � �rJ [�1 t,! E. Frequency of Test: � 1. Foundation Subgrade: Minimum one field density test of subgrade for � every 2,500 sq. ft. of foundation structure, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2,500 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. � 2. Backfill: Take at least 2 field density test, at locations and elevations as directed. 3. Test Failure: Where fill is placed below specified density, provide � additional compaction until specified densities are reached. Re-test for specified densities at Contractor's expense. 3.07 CLEAN-UP � A. Remove unused stockpile materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. � END OF SECTION � L�J � u L�!i � � � I� � �{ Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02316-5 =� HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas O � l*'J � � L■J �� l�l � l#J Ll � u � l�� CI SECTION 02361 SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 GENERAl. 1.01 SECTIOfV INCLUDES A. Chemical soil treatment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act; United States Code; 1947 (Revised 1988). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended application rate. C. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required. D. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate caution requirements and warranty requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and: 1. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 2. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials. 3. Licensed in the State in which the Project is located. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUlREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for application, and comply with EPA regulations. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants. 1.06 SEQUENCING A. Apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier under slabs-on-grade. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused to termites. 1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage. Repair damage and, if required, re-treat. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02361-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Agrotec, Inc. 2. Bayer Corp. ' 3. Chas. H Lilly Co. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil. C. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer. 2.02 MIXES A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions. I�1��iK3��C+1�1 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive treatment. B. Verify final grading is complete. 3.02 APPLICATION � A. Inject toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply toxicant at following locations: 1. Under Slabs-on-Grade. 2. At Both Sides of Foundation Surface. � 3. Soil Within 10 feet of Building Perimeter. C. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations such as grounding rods or posts. D. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment. E. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK . A. Do not permit soil grading over treated work. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02361-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � u liJ � � u PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Description of Work: Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with driiled pier foundations complete, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Layout of drilled piers. 2. Excavation of drilled piers � 3. Temporary steei casings - if required. 4. Furnishing and placing reinforcing steel 5. Furnishing and placing concrete. , 6. Remaval of spoil (excavated material) resulting from drilled pier excavations. � B. The extent of drilled piers is shown on the drawings, including locations, diameters of shafts, elevation of top bearing stratum for bidding purposes, top elevations, reinforcement, and details of construction. u L�!' L�J � C. Refated work specified in other sections: 1. Testing Laboratory Services: Section 01400. 2. � Reinforcing Steel: Section 03200. 3. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03300. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pier drilling contractor shall be required to submit proof of qualifications requirements including: • 1. Minimum of 5 previous p�ojects of similar scope and nature or larger. 2. Verify having been in business for a minimum of three years: SECTION 02372 DRILLED PIERS Q B. Testing laboratory services: 1. Refer to section 01400 for additional information concerning laboratory services in conjunction with drilled pier work. 2. The contractor sha11 pay for the services of an indEpendent testing agency to design � the concrete mix in conjunction with drilled piers and to perform cantinUous pier drilling observations. i� � L'�J � � �, �� C. Drilling Log: Keep an exact log of each pier regardless of soil conditions indicating: � 1. Pier number. 2. Pier location. 3. Depth drilled through overburden. 4. Depth drilled in bearing stratum. 5. Elevation of ground surface. 6. Top elevation of concrete. 7. Top elevation and length of casing. 8. Diameter in shaft. 9. Diameter and type of bell (if bells are required) 10. Estimated inflow of water, source, and depth in bottom of hofe when concrete is placed. 11. Description of bearing stratum. Halbach • U�erz Arcn�tects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 Summergten Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas U'L3 ('1-1 12. Pumping required. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduling: 1. Schedule pier drilling so that piers will be filled with concrete immediately after drilling. 2. Fill each pier with concrete the same day it is drilled. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRILLING EQUIPMENT A. The equipment used shall be adequate to drill the sizes indicated to depths necessary for a stable foundation, giving consideration to subsurFace conditions reported by the Geotechnical Investigation. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03200. B. Cement, Aggregates and Admixtures: As specified in Section 03300. 2.03 MIXES A. As specified in Section 03300. PAR7 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Drilling 1. Drill piers with power auger foundation drilling rig designed for that purpose. Drill piers vertically, to diameters shown on drawings. 2. If caving or substantial amounts of ground water are encountered, use casings, if required, to prevent caving and exclude water. B. Casings • 1. Protective steel casing, at least as large in inside diameter as the nominal shaft size and of sufficient wall thickness to resist crushing by hydrostatic and earth pressures, shall be installed in each pier hole when needed, in the judgement of the Foundation Inspector (s), to prevent caving or fall-in. C. Casing Removal � 1. An initial jerk of "2" to "4" shall be allowed to start the lift; thereafter, while being removed from the pier hole, the casing must be kept plumb and �nust be pulled with a smooth, vertical motion (no rotation permitted), without jerks. Vibration of the casing during pulling is not approved. A positive head of not less than 3' of concrete above the pressure at the bottom of the casing from the outside water table shall be established before the casing is lifted, and shall be maintained as the casing is pulled out. 2. Where cutoff elevation is below ground level, maintain protective casing to the ground surFace if necessary to prevent detrimental caving or intrusion of shallow soils into the shaft. 3. Dowels shall be placed and positioned after the casing has been pulled and the surFace of the concrete has bEen established. lialbaCn • Uie� HrCniteCts Summerglen Branch Library U'L3l1-Y HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L, � � C�J � u LJ L�J L�] L] �,�� U LJ D. Removai of Groundwater Seepage 1. Water above an average depth of 2" above the bottom of the excavation shall be pumped or removed before placement of concrete. if water cannot be held below this level long enough for concrete to be placed in the normal manner, place concrete by one of the following methods: a. Use of a submersible pump in the bottom of a straight hole or in a sump excavated in the bottom of a bell, with concrete being placed to cover the intake pipe before the pump is lifted. b. Use of a Tremie pipe of "elephamt's trunk". c. Use of pumped-in concrete discharging througti a pipe below the water and below the surface of the concrete in the hole. E. Allowable Tolerances: 1. The piers shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with these Specifications. No pier shall be off center from its design locations more than 3" at the top of the pier. No vertical pier shall be out of plumb more than 1°/a of its length. All piErs and shafts shall be at least as large in diameter as indicated on the Drawings. Deviations from �.inderream configurations (if required) may be made only with prior written approval of the Structural Engineer. 2. If any of the above tolerances are exceeded, additional construction (including costs � of engineering and redesign) as required by the Structural Engineer shall be paid for by the Contractor. 3.02 PLAC(NG REINFORCING STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Do not place steel or concrete until pier holes have been inspected, logged and approved by the Testing La6oratory. B. Reinforcing steel shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. All steel shall be free from excessive rust, mud or any foreign material which would hinder bondingof concrete and steel. Reinforcement cages shall be straight and shall conform to the design dimensions. Adequate provision shall be made to ensure that the reinforcement steel will remain in place thrughout placement of concrete and that specified concrete cover for the reinforcement steel is attained and maintained. The use of precast concrete spacer blocks or "Centraligner" pier sleds by Pieresearch, Arlignton, TX (or equal) is recommended for this purpose. Q C. After approval of the excavated pier hole by the Testing Laboratory, concrete shall be placed in a manner that will not cause segregation of the particles or permit infiltration of water or any other occurrence which would tend to decrease the strength of the concrete or � the capacity of the finished pier. All concrete shall be placed in the presence of the Testing Laboratory. � ,I� I�J L�1 � D. Concrete may be placed in a dry hole by dumping in free-drop from the surFace, provided that a hopper or other device approved by the Testing Laboratory is used to force the concrete to drop straight down without hitting the sides of the holes or the reinforcement before striking the bottom. E. Maintain min., 3" clearance between bottom of excavation and reinforcement. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF SOIL Remove spoil from the graund around the excavation before concrete placement is started. fialdacn • uietz Hrcnitects Summerglen Branch Library U"L�/1-3 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � � LJ L�J SECTION 02577 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing and applying pavement markings as shown on the plans. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS � A. "Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges-1993". 1. Item 666-Reflectorized Pavement Markings L�J � C � �' � � � � � L�J C PART 2 — PRODUCTS A. PAVEMENT MARKINGS Pavement markings as shown on the plans, including painted lines shall comply with the TxDOT Specification Item 666-Reflectorized Pavement Markings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 All pavement markings installed on this project shall comply with the State of Texas Manual on Uniform Tra�c Control Devices, 1980. Pavement markings, including colors and symbology, used to mark handicap parking spaces shall comply with requirements of City, State and Federal ADA regulations, including the Texas Accessibility .Standards (TAS) of the Architectural Barriers Act. A. PAVEMENT MARKINGS Painted pavement markings, including parking space lines, lane lines, fire lanes, handicap space symbol, crosswalk and island stripping shall be applied per the requirements of TxDOT Specification Item 666-Reflectorized Pavement Markings and per the layouts shown on the Plans. This is a lump sum bid contract. All provisions in the referenced specifications pertaining to measurement and payment for pavement markings and signs are void. END OF SECTION Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02577-1 �� C�l �' � � � � �,i� L1 �� IIL�J u L�J � � � � SECTION 02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnishing and installing storm drain pipe as shown on the plans. B. Construction of a curb inlet at the location shown on the plans. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 440. Reinforced Concrete Pipe 2. Item 444. Manholes and Inlets PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 Reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) for storm drain shall comply with the material requirements of Standard Specification Item 440-Reinforced Concrete Pipe. Materials used for the construction of curb inlets shall comply with the requirements of Standard Specification Item 444-Manholes and Inlets. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 Construction of reinforced concrete pipe storm drain shall comply with the requirements of Standard Specification Item 440-Reinforced Concrete Pipe. Connection of new RCP storm drain pipe to existing RCP storm drain pipe shall be per the Storm Drain Tap Detail on the Plans. The grout used for pipe connections shall consist of one (1) part Portland Cement and three (3) parts clean concrete sand. Construction of curb inlets shall be per the requirements of Standard Specification Item 444-Manholes and Inlets and per Standard Drawing No. S-SD- 2-Standard 10' Storm Drain Inlet. Trench excavation, backfill and compaction for storm drain installation shall be per the requirements of SECTION 02221-TRENCHING, BACKFILL AND COMPACTING. This is a lump sum bid contract. All provisions in the referenced specifications pertaining to measurement and payment for RCP storm drain, curb inlets and drop inlets are void. END OF SECTION Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Tcxas 02720-1 � L*J � � � L` � � � L�J � l'�' � � � l!�J �J � PART 1 — GENERAL SECTION 02751 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 1.01 SECTION IfyCLUDES A. Concrete sidewaiks, stair steps, integral curbs, gutters, median barriers, parking areas and roads. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310-Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base and preparation of subsoil at pavement perimeter for planting. B. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 — Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heaveyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991. B. ACI 301- Speci�cations for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 1996. C. ACI 304R — Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1989 D. ACI 305R — Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1991. E. ACI 305R — Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988. F. ASTM A 185 — Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric, Plain, for � Concrete Reinforcement; 1997. G. ASTM A 615/A 615M — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet- Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 1996a. H. ASTM C 39 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1996. I. ASTM C 94 — Standard Specification for Ready-Mix Concrete; 1997. � Halbach 0 Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 � Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02751-1 J. ASTM C 173 — Standard Test Method for Air �ontent of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 1994a. K. ASTM C 309 — Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1997. L. ASTM C 685 — Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 1995a. M. ASTM D 1751 — Standard Specification for PerFormed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 1983 (Reapproved 1991). N. ASTM D 1752 - Standards Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 1984 (Reapproved 1996). O. Construction of Parking areas and drives shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base The section pertaining to measurement and payment in the above specification items shall not apply. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pertorm work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. C. ' Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02751-2 � � l�] L�J lJ u �� I11 t�J L"'J � I�I .� � �u � �j � r� L�� E. Quality assurance of concrete parking areas and drives shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shalf comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surtace temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen. B. Environmental requirements for concrete parking areas and drives shall comply with the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301 B. Joint Filler: Performed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D 1751) or sponge rubber or cork (ASTM D 1752). 1. Thickness: '/ inch. C. Form materials for concrete parking areas and drives shall comply with the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply' with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420); deformed billet steel � bars; unfinished finish. B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A 185; in flat sheets; unfinished. C. Dowels: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. �Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects «"� HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02751-3 � L'�J � D. Reinforcement for concrete parking areas and drives shall coriform with the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03300. B. Concrete materials for concrete parking areas and drives shall conform with the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: . 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 2.04 ACCESSQRIES A. Curing, Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A. B. Accessories including curing compound and joint sealer, for concrete parking areas and drives shall conform to the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of'the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: recommendations. L"" L�J L�'J L•, � � � � � �� Comply with ACl 211.1 � r� B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trail mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trail mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable � to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACf 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Concrete Properties: 1. Compress Strength, per ASTM C 39 at 28 days: 3000 psi. 2. Total Ai� Content: 4 percent, per ASTM C 173. 3. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. Fialbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � l*J � L!J 02751-4 � L'�"7 � �� L L�J � I� � � L�J � i� � � � ��--• ��, L� l�l E. Concrete mix design for concrete parking areas and drives shall conform to the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced speci�cations: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 2.06 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batcher mixer, comply with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. PART 3 — EXECUTION B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94. 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh conGrete. 6. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. . 3.03 FORMlNG A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Placing .joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to framework during concrete placement. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement at midheight of slabs-on-grade. B. Interrupt reinforcement at expansion joints. C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02751-5 l*�1 3.05 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. ' D. Place concrete to indicated pattern. E. Placement of concrete for concrete parking areas and drives shall conform to the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base The base bid thickness of concrete pavement for parking areas and drives is five (5") inches. For Bid Alternate No.8, the thickness of concrete pavement areas and drives is six (6") inches. Construction of concrete curb shall be as follows: (1) Monolithic Curb Monolithic curb shall be constructed along the edge of the pavement as an integral part of the slab and of the same concrete as the slab. The concrete for the curb shall be deposited no more than (30) minutes after the concrete in the slab. (2) Superimposed Curb Concrete for superimposed curb shall have a minimum compressive strength of three thousand (3000) pounds per square inch at twenty-eight (28) days. The quantity of mixing water shall not exceed seven U.S. gallons per sack (94 Ibs) of Portland Cement. The slump of the concrete shall not exceed three (3) inches. A minimum cement content of five (5) sacks of cement per cubic yard of concrete is required. This is a lump sum bid contract. All provisions in the referenced specifications pertaining to measurement and payment for concrete curb concrete pavement are void. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02751-6 � � �*J � � L�J u L�J � � L■�� I� I� � � l*J �#�i � 3.06 JOINTS A. Align curb and sidewalk joints. B. Placement of joints in concrete pavement for concrete parking areas and drives shall conform to the pavement jointing plan and details as shown in the Plans and with "Standard Specifications for Street and � Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base Cracks in newly constructed concrete pavement: All crack (s) shall be individually evaluated by the City of Fort Worth to determine severity. The entire panel of pavement (to the nearest joint) shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense if it is determined that such crack (s) will undermine the structural integrity or maintainability of the pavement. Crack (s) which are determined to be cosmetic in nature shall require no change. The City of Fort Worth at its sole discretion may dictate that only one half (1/2) of a panel be removed and repaved providing that adequate measures have been taken by the Contractor to eliminate sympathetic cracking. 3.07 FINISHING A. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge'/4 inch radius. B. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surFaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Finishing of concrete pavement for parking areas and drives shall conform to the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 3.08 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07900 for joint sealer requirements for concrete pavement other than concrete parking areas and drives. B. Placement of silicone joint sealant for concrete parking areas and drives shall conform to the following specifications: � Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02751-7 � SILICONE JOINT SEALANT INCLUDING SAW CUTTING: This Items shail be governed by General Provisions No. 314 —"Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base", except as modified herein. Silicone joint sealant shall be applied to longitudinal and traverse joint locations on proposed concrete pavement in accordance with the "Paving Plan with Concrete Pavement Joint LayouY' for the UPRR Parking area and the I-30Nickery Parking area as shown in the Plans. Joint depth shall be 1-3/4". ' Specifications for "Silicone Joint Sealing" are as follows: SILICONE JOINT SEALING (Revision 1, October 18, 1989) 2. 3 SCOPE This specification for silicone joint sealing Portland Cement Concrete pavement and cubs shall supersede Item 314.2 (11) "Joint Sealing Materials" of STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STREET AND STORM DRAIN CONSTRUCTION — DITY OF FORT WORTH, and Item 2.2.10 "Joint Sealing" of STANDARD SPEIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION — NORTH CENTRAL TEXAS COUNCIL OF GOVERNMENTS. DESCRIPTION This,specification or silicone joint sealing shall apply to, but shall not be limited to, all Portland Cement Concrete street pavement, parking lot pavement, valley gutters, concrete drive approaches, curbs and curb and gutter sections. MATERIALS 3.1 The silicone joint sealant shall meet Federal Specifications TT-S- 001534A for Class I, Class II and Class III silicone joint sealant, the Contractor shall furnish the City of Fort Worth certification by an independent testing laboratory that the silicone joint sealant meet those requirements. 3.2 The manufacturer of the silicone sealant shall have a minimum two- year demonstrated, documented successful field performance with Portland Cement Concrete pavement silicone joint sealant systems. Veri�able documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer. Acetic acid cure sealant shall not be accepted. The silicone sealant shall be cold applied. 3.3 Class I: Silicone Joint Sealant: Class I low-modulus silicone joint sealant shall be used for sealing Portland Cement Concrete pavement "dummy" joints, construction joints and expansion joints. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02751-8 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas l�] � The joint sealant shali be Dow Corning 890 silicone joint sealant as � manufactured by Dow-Corning Corporation Midland, MI 48686-0994, or an approved equal. � Table I: Silicone Joint Sealant Test Method Test Requirement AS SUPPLIED L� LsJ � � �l L�J � �l � � � � � � LiJ Non Volatile Content, % min. 95 MIL-S-8802 Extrusion Rate, grams/minute 90 to 250 ASTM D 1475 Specific Gravity 1.450 to 1.515 MIL-S-8802 Flow, inches max. 0.2 MIL-S-8802 Tack-Free Time, minutes 35 to 75 Cure Time, days 7 Full Adhesion, days . 14 to 21 AS CURED - AFTER 7 DAYS AT 25°C (77°F) AND 50% R'H ASTMD 412, Die C Elongation, % min. 1200 ASTMD 412, Die C Modulus @ 150% Elongation, psi max. 45 ASTMC 719 Movement, 10 cycles @ 100%50% No Failure ASTMD 3583 Adhesion to Concrete, % Elongation min. 500(Sect. 14 Mod.) ASTMD 793 Accelerated Weathering, @ 5,000 hrs. No Bond Loss 3.4 Class II: Self-Leveling Silicone Joint Sealant Class II low-modulus self-leveling silicone joint sealant shall be used for sealing Portland Cement Concrete pavement "dummy" joints, construction joints and expansion joints. The joint sealant shall be Dow Corning 89Q-SL self-leveling silicone joint sealant as manufactured by Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, MI 48686-0994, or an approved equal. Table II: Self-Levelina Silicone Joint Sealant Test Method Test� Requirement AS SUPPLIED � Non Volatile Content, % min. 93 to 95 MIL-S-8802 Extrusion Rate, grams/minute 100 to 600 ASTM D 1475 Specific Gravity 1.290 to 1.390 Skin-Over Time, minutes max. 60 Cure Time, days 14 to 21 Full Adhesion, days 14 to 21 AS CURED - AFTER 21 DAYS AT 25°C (77°F) AND 50% RH ASTMD 412, Elongation, % min. 1300 ASTMD 412, Modulus @ 150% Elongation, psi max. 3 to 30 ASTMC 719 Movement, 10 cycles @ 100%50% No Failure ASTMD 3583 Adhesion to Concrete, % Elongation min. 550(Sect. 14 Mod.) ASTMD 793 Accelerated Weathering, @ 5,000 hrs. No Bond Loss 3.5 Class III: Self-Leveling Silicone Joint Sealant for Asphalt Class III ultra-low modulus self-leveling silicone joint sealant for asphalt shall be used for sealing the joints between asphalt shoulders and Portland Cement Concrete Pavements. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects � Summerglen Branch Library 02751-9 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L!9 The joint sealant shall be Dow Corning 890-SL self-leveling silicone joint sealant for asphalt as manufactured by Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, MI 48686-0904, or an approved equal. Table III: Self-Levelina Silicone Joint Sealant for Asphalt Test Method Test Requirement AS SUPPLIED ' � Non Volatile Content, % min. 96 to 99 MIL-S-8802 Extrusion Rate, grams/minute 275 to 550 ASTM D 1475 Specific Gravity 1.260 to 1.340 Skin-Over Time, minutes max. 60 Full Adhesion, days 14 to 21 AS CURED - AFTER 21 DAYS AT 25°C (77°F) AND 50% RH ASTMD 412, Die C Mod. Elongation, % min. 1400 ASTMD 3583 , Modulus @ 150% Elongation, psi ma (Sect. 14 Mod.) ASTMC 719 Movement, 10 cycles @ 100/-50% No Failure ASTMD 3583 Adhesion to Concrete, % Elongation min. 600(Sect. 14 Mod.) ASTMD 3583 Adhesion to Asphalt, % Elongation min. 600Sect. 14 Mod.) 3.6 The joint filler stop shall be of a closed cell expanded polyethylene foam backer rod and polyethylene bond breaker tape of sufficient size to provide a tight seal. The back rod and breaker tape shall be installed in the saw-cut joint to prevent the joint sealant from flowing to the bottom of the joint. The backer rod and breaker tape shall be compatible with the silicone joint sealant and no bond or reaction shall occur between them. 3.7 Reference is made to the "Construction Detail" sheet for the various joint details with their respective dimensions. 4. TIME OF APPLICATION On newly constructed Portland Cement Concrete pavement, the joints shall be initially saw cut to the required depth with the proper joint spacing as shown on the "Construction Detail" sheet or �as directed by the City of Fort Worth in a manner to provide cracking at the plan locations without damage paving. (Note that for the "dummy" joints, the initial 1/4 inch width "green" sawcut and the "reservoir" saw cut are two (2) separate saw cutting operations. Immediately after the saw cutting pressure water washing shall be applied to flush the concrete slury from the freshly saw cut joints.). The pavement shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 7 days. Then the saw cuts for the joint sealant reservoir shall be made, the joint cleaned and the joint sealant installed. During the application of the joint sealant, � the weather shall not be inclement and the temperature shall be 40°F (4°C) and rising. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02751-10 � L� � �� 5. EQUIPMENT � 5.1 All necessary equipment shall be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep his equipment in a satisfactory working condition and shall be inspected by the City of Fort � Worth prior to the beginning of the work. The minimum requirements for construction equipment shall be as follows: � L� � 5.2 Concrete Saw: The sawing equipment shall be adequate in size and power to complete the joint sawing to the required dimensions. 5.3 High Pressure Water Pump: The high pressure cold water pumping system shall be capable of delivering a sufficient pressure and volume of water to thoroughly flush the concrete slurry from the saw-cut joint. 5.4 High Pressure Water Pump: The high pressure cold water � pumping system shall be capable of delivering a sufficient pressure and volume of water to thoroughly flush the concrete slurry from the saw-cut joint. �� ,� �� u 5.5 Extrusion Pump: The output shall be capable of supplying a sufficient volume of sealant to the joint. 5.6 Injection tool: This mechanical device shall apply the sealant uniformly into the joint. 5.7 Sandblaster: The design shall be for commercial use with air compressors as specified in Paragraph 5.4. 5.8 Backer Rod Roller and Tooling Instrument: These devices shall be clean and free of contamination. They shall be compatible with the joint depth and width requirements. 6. CONSTRUCTION METHODS � 6.1 General: The joint reservoir saw cutting, cleaning, bond breaker installation and joint sealant placement shall be � perFormed in a continuous sequence of operations. L�! � �� Li] LJ 6.2 Sawing Joints: The joints shall be saw-cut to the width and depth as, shown on the "Construction Detail " sheet. The faces of the joints shall be uniform in widfh and depth along the full length of the joint. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Publ'ic Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02751-11 6.3 Cleaning Joints: Immediately after sawing, the resulting concrete slurry shall be completely removed from the joint and adjacent area by flushing with high pressure water. The water flushing shall be done in one-direction to prevent joint contamination. When the Contractor elects to saw the joirit by the dry method, flushing the joint with high pressure water may be deleted. The dust resulting from the sawing shall be removed from the joint by using compressed air (Paragraph Rev. 1, October 18, 1989). After complete drying, the joints shall be sandblasted. The r�ozzle shall be attached to a mechanical aiming device so that the sand blast will be directed at an angle of 45 degrees and at a distance of one to two inches from the face of the joint. Both joint faces shall be sandblasted in separate, one Directional passes. Upon the termination of the sandblasting, the joints shall be blown-out using compressed air. The blow tube shall fit into the joints. The blown joint shall be checked for residual dust or other contamination. If any dust or contamination is found, the sandblasting and blowing shall be repeated until the joint is cleaned. Solvents will not be permitted to remove stains and contamination. Immediately upon cleaning, the bond breaker and sealant � shall be placed in the joint. Open, cleaned joints shall not be left unsealed overnight. 6.4 Bond Breaker Rod and Tape: The bond breaker rod and �tape shall be installed in the cleaned joint prior to the application of the joint sealant in a manner that will produce the required dimensions. 6.5 Joint Sealant: Upon placement of the bond breaker rod and tape, the joint sealant shall be applied using the mechanical injection tool. The joint sealant application shall not be permitted when the air and pavement temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). Joints shall not be sealed unless they are clean and dry. The sealant surface shall be tooled (if a non-self- leveling silicone joint sealant is used) to produce a slight concave surtace approximately one-quarter inch (1/4") below the pavement surface. The tooling shall be accomplished before a skin forms on the surFace of the sealant. The use of soap or oil as an aid in tooling shall not be allowed. Tooling will not be required for self-leveling silicone joint sealant. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02751-12 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas I�1 �I � � � l� � l� I L�J LJ � Unsatisfactory sealed joints shall be re�lled. Excess sealant left on the pavement surface shail be removed and discarded and shall not be used to seal the joints. The pavement surFace shall present a clean final condition. Traffic shall not be allowed on the fresh sealant until it becomes tack-free. . 6.6 Approval of Joints: A representative of the sealant manufacturer shall be present at the job site at the beginning of the final cleaning and sealing of the joints. He shall demonstrate to the Contractor and the City of Fort Worth the acceptable method for sealant installation. The manufacturer's representative shall approve the clean, dry joints before the sealing operation commences. 7. WARRANTY The Contractor shall provide the City of Fort Worth a manufacturer's written guarantee on all joint sealing materials. The manufacturer shall agree to provide any replacement material free of charge to the City of Fort Worth. Also, the Contractor shall provide the City of Fort Worth a written warranty on all sealed joints. The contractor shall agree to replace any failed joints at no cost to the City. Both warranties shall be for one year after final acceptance of the completed work by the City of Fort Worth. Precast concrete wheel stops for installation in parking lots shall be Strip- A-Zone No. 200 or No. 215 or approved equivalent. Wheel stops shall be installed per manufacturer's written specifications. This is a lump sum bid contract. All provisions in the referenced � specifications pertaining to measurement and payment for portland cement concrete paving are void. � � r� � IiJ � � 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: '/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: '/4 inch. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01400 and other reference specifications. 1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02751-13 3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 75 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. C. Compressive Strength Tests for concrete parking areas and drives shall conform to the requirements of "Standard Specifications for Street and Storm Drain Construction, City of Fort Worth", latest revision: Unless otherwise stated herein, work in this section shall comply with the latest revision to the following items of the above referenced specifications: 1. Item 314. Concrete Pavement and Concrete Base 3.11 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing. END OF SECTION Halbach ❑ Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02751-14 � � L�J ��, L�1 � .�l � � � l�' ... u l�l L*1 � SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, emitters, bubblers and accessories. B. Control system. 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 1996. B. C. D. E. F. G. ASTM B 42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 1996. ASTM B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 1996. ASTM D 2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 1996b. ASTM D 2282 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 1996a. ASTM D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 1996a. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1991. � 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate piping layout to water source, location of sleeves under pavement, location and coverage of sprinkler heads, components, plant and landscaping features, site structures, schedule of fittings to be used. C. Product Data: Provide component and control system and wiring diagrams. � D. Samples: Provide one outlet of each type, with housing. Accepted samples may be used in the Work. �� 1�� E. Record Documents: Record actual locations of all concealed components piping system. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal • activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog. 2. Provide schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide a determined amount of water. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02810-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 1.05 REGULATORY REQU(REMENTS • A. Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of products in system. 1.06 COORDINATION - A. Coordinate the work with site hackfilling, landscape grading and delivery of plant life. 1.07 MAINTENANCE SERVICES • A. Installer's Field Services: Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01650. 1.08 EXTRA MA7ERIALS , A. Furnish extra components: 1. Two sprinkler heads of each type and size. 2. Two valve keys for manual valves. 3. Two vaive box keys. 4. Two keys for valve markers. 5. Two wrenches for each type head core and for removing and installing each type head. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM � A. Electric solenoid control.led underground irrigation system, with low point self drain., 1. Source Power: 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz. 2. Low Voltage Controls: 24 volt. B. Manufacturers: 1. Toro. 2. Substitutions: See 1600 — Product Requirements � 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2241; 200 psi pressure rated upstream from controls, 160 psi downstream; solvent welded sockets. B. ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2282; 160 psi pressure rated upstream from controls, 100 psi downstream; solvent-weld sockets. C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 8�8 (ASTM B 88M), Type L(B); annealed temper. D. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, regular type. E. Fittings:, Type and style of connection to match pipe. F. Pipe Risers at Valves: 200 psi copper pipe. � G. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564 for f�VC pipe and fittings. � H. Solder and Flux: ASTM B 32 solder, with suitable flux. I. Sleeve Material: PVC. � � � ,� � � � � � � � � � . � � � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02810-2 � � L�J LJ l#J � I� Ls] � li' t�J l�] � �� I � I�J� lJ � � L�J LJ 2.03 OUTLETS, VALVES AND CONTROLS A. As indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION . A. Verify location of existing utilities. B. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants, ground cover, and structures. B. Layout and stake locations of system components. C. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system. 3.03 TRENCHING A. Trench and backfill in accordance with Section 02317. � B. Trench to accommodate grade changes. C. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Connect to utilities. C. Set outlets and box covers at finish grade elevations. D. Provide for thermal movement of components in system. � E. Use threaded nipples for risers to each outlet. F. Install control wiring in accordance with Division 16 requirements. Provide 10 inch expansion coil at each valve to which controls are connected, and at 100 ft intervals. Bury wiring beside pipe. G. After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfilling commences, open valves and flush system with full head of water. H. Conduit: Provide PVC conduit for wiring below grade. Provide rigid metal conduit for wiring above grade. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be perFormed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Prior to backfilling, test system for leakage at main piping to maintain 100 psi pressure for one hour. C. System is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure occurs and system self drains during test period. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02810-3 HD ,lob No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required. B. Adjust head types for full water coverage as directed. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjusting of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02810-4 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library ' Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � � � � l� � L LJ L�1 � � � L�� L!1 � � � � SECTION 02820 WOOD FENCE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood Fencing and Accessories. . 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete footings at support posts. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Six foot high x eight foofi wide prebuilt wood panel fence attached to galvanized steel support posts. , 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of wood fence. 1.05 QUALI7Y ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a three year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS . 2.01 MATERIALS A. Prefabricated wood fence panels: Prefabricate wood fence panels in eight (8) foot sections for field erection.. 1. Wood pickets: 1x4 inch Western Red Cedar pickets; Grade 1. Space at 1/8 inch spacing. 2. Horizontal nailers: 2x4 inch Western Red Cedar; Grade 1, continuous wood nailers; Provide 3 horizontal nailers, equally spaced. B. Support posts:: Provide galvanized steel pipe vertical support posts in sizes indicated on drawings: Provide galvanized accessories for connections, post caps and miscellaneous accessories. � C. Concrete: Concrete for support post footings specified in Section 03300. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wood panel sections for field erection. 6 foot height x 8 foot width. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02820-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 F�rt Worth, Texas � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that property lines are identified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Space support posts at 8 foot on center. Set posts in concrete footings; minimum 1' diameter x 3'-4" depth. B. Attach fence panels to support posts as recommended by panel manufacturer. 3.03 COORDINATION � A. Maintain adequate clearance from adjacent property line. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES � A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 2 inches. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust panels to provide horizontal alignment between panels. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02820-2 � .� LI �I � � � L�1 O L�J � L�J SECTION 02874 BICYCLE RACKS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES . A. Prefabricated bicycle racks. 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Provide bicycle racks fabricated and ready for installation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Actministrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product literature illustrating conformance with requirements of this section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this• section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver bicycle racks to project site in manufacturers unopened protective shipping container. B. Store bicycle racks under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. AAA Ribbon Rack Co. � B. BRP Enterprises Inc. C. Columbia Cascade. � D. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PRODUCT � A. Ribbon Rack; Manufactured by AAA Ribbon Rack. 1. Length:5'. � B. Substitutions: Under provisions of section 01600. 2.03 MATERIALS � A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40. B. Coating: Hot dip galvanized after fabrication. � 2.04 INSTALLATION METHOD A. In-ground anchor mount. � I�J Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD ,lob No. 9s89 , Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 02874-1 � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that in-ground mounting method is compatible with substrate conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. � 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.04 CLEANING ' A. Clean bicycle racks . B. Protect installed bicycle racks from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION � � � � � � f� � � � � � � �t � � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 02874-2 � L."J � � � � � � � � L'J 1� �!' � O lJ � Isl L=�1 l�'J SECTION 02930 LANDSCAPING PART 1" GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Preparation of subsoil. B. Topsoil bedding. C. New trees, plants, and ground cover and lawns. D. Maintenance. E. Tree Pruning. • 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Topsoil material. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NAA (STDS) - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees; National Arborist Association; Edition date unknown. 1.04 DE�IVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. B. Protect and maintain plant life until planted. C. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist. 1.05 WARRANTY ' A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide one year warranty. � C. Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season; replace dead or unhealthy plants. D. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement. 1.06 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintain plant life for one year after Date of Substantial Completion. � B. Maintain plant life immediately after placement and until plants are well established and exhibit a vigorous growing condition. Continue maintenance until termination of warranty period. C. Maintenance to include: 1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. 2. Apptying herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides. 3. Remedy damage from use of insecticides. . 4. Irrigating sufficient to saturate root system. 5. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of pruned areas or other wounds. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02930-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 6. Disease control. 7. Maintaining wrapping, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires tight. Repair or replace accessories when required. 8. Replacement of mulch. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER A. Trees: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work. 2.02 SOIL MATERIALS A. Topsoil: Type as specified in Section 02316. 2.03 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS A. As indicated on drawings. 2.04 MULCH MATERIALS A. As indicated on drawings. � 2.05 TOP SOIL MIX A. As indicated on drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared subsoil are ready to receive work. B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage. C. Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. B. Remove foreign materials, we'eds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated subsoil. C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches where plants are to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil. D. Dig pits and beds 6 inches larger than plant root system. 3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches over area to be planted. Rake smooth. B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade. C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 02930-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L�J LJ � � �� LJ � � � � � O � t+�.l � D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage. E. Install topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to a minimum thickness of 6 inches. 3.04 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply after initial raking of topsoil. C. Mix thoroughly into upper 1 inches of topsoil. D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer. 3.05 PLANTING A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Architect. B. Set plants vertical. C. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix, at a minimum depth of 6 inches under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball. D. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full. 3.06 PLANT SUPPORT A. Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following: 1. Tree Caliper: 1 inch; Tree Support Method: 1 stake with one tie 2. Tree Caliper: 1- 2 inches; Tree Support Method: 2 stakes with two ties 3. Tree Caliper: 2- 4 inches; Tree Support Method: 3 guy wires with eye bolts and turn buckles 4. Tree Caliper: Over 4 inches; Tree Support Method: 4 guy wires with eye bolts and turn buckles 3.07 TREE PRUNING A. Prune trees to NAA Class 1- Fine Pruning. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pertorm field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400. B. Plants will be rejected if a ball of earth•surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged prior to or during planting. 3.09 MAINTENANCE � A. Neatly trim plants where necessary. B. Immediately remove clippings after trimming. C. Water to prevent soil from drying out. D. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacture�'s instructions. E. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 3.10 SCHEDULE - PLANT LIST A. Indicated on drawings. � Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 � Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 02930-3 � u � � L' � l�`J � � �� r� � l�] t!J � l�1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES SECTION 03051 CONCRETE COLOR ADDITIVE A. Requirements For Color Additive Used In: 1. Stamped pattern concrete paving specified in Section 03361. 2. Masonry specified in Section 04810 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast In�Place Concrete. B. Section 03361 - Concrete Stamping. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Colored sealants for joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 1997. B. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 1982 (Reapproved 1993). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Samples for Pigment Color Selection: Pigment manufacturer's color chart or sample chip set; indicate pigment number and required dosage rate. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Mock-Up: Provide full-scale mock-up to demonstrate methods of obtaining consistent visual appearance. � 1. Paving: 4 feet by 4 feet. 2. Retain samples of materials used in mock-up for comparison with materials used in remaining work. 3. Accepted mock-up constitutes visual standard for work. 4. Remove mock-up when no longer required for comparison with finished work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Pigments: Comply with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver pigments to site or batch plant in original, unopened packaging. Store in dry conditions. Halbach � Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 03051-1 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Plant-Mixed Concrete: Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. B. Concrete Paving: Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are applied. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow or frost is forecast within 24 hours. Protect fresh concrete from moisture and freezing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete Pigments: Prpvide products manufactured by Davis Colors, 7101 Muirkirk Road, Beltsville, MD 20705. (800) 800-6856. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COLORS A. Concrete Paving: 1. Color Additive: Color to be selected by Architect from Davis Colors subtle, standard, and premium color lines. 2. Sand: Locally available natural sand. B. Colored Mortar: 1. Cement: Gray. 2. Color Additive: Color to be selected by Architect from Davis Colors True Tone Sweet 16 color lines. 3. Sand: Locally available natural sand. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Colored Concrete Additive: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments especially processed for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C 979. 1. Base dosage rates on weight of portland cement, fly ash, silica fume, lime and other cementitious materials but not aggregate or sand. B. Admixtures: Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. C. Curing Compound for Colored Concrete: Davis Colors W-1000 Clear Cure & Seal; complying with ASTM C 309. 2.04 MIXES A. Concrete Mix: Mix pigments in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, until pigments are uniformly dispersed throughout mixture and disintegrating bags, if used, have disintegrated. Halbach � Dietz Architects ' Summerglen Branch Library 03051-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fo�t Worth, Texas � � � � � a L*�J � � � � � � � � � l*�J � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.09 FLOORS AND PAVlNG A. See applicable sections for additional requirements. B. Broomed Finish: Do not dampen brooms. 3.02 PATCHING CONCRETE A. Fill holes and defects in concrete surtace within 48 hours of form removal. B. Use the same patching materials and techniques that were approved on mock-up. C. Make patches with a sti�f mortar made with materials from the same sources as the concrete. Adjust mortar mix proportions so dry patch matches dry adjacent concrete. Add white cement to mortar mix if necessary to lighten it. 3.03 CURING CONCRE7E A. Maintain concrete between 65 and 85 F degrees during curing. B. Cure concrete using curing compound; apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 CLEANING MASONRY A. Use the least aggressive cleaning techniques possible. Comply with recommendations of masonry and pigment manufacturers. B. Do not use hydrochloric acid on colored masonry or mortar. 3.OS TOLERANCES A. Minor variations in appearance of colored concrete/mortar, which are similar to natural variations in color and appearance of nonpigmented concrete/mortar, are acceptable. END OF SECTION Nalbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 03051-3 D HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L�J LJ � �� 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.011 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 03100 CONCRETE �ORMWORK A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1- General Requirements apply to the work of this section 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to install formwork and � shoring for cast-in-place concrete, and installation into formwork of items furnished by others, such as anchor bolts, setting plates, bearing plates, anchorages, inserts, frames, nosings and other items to be embedded in concrete. � � � � �� L�J LJ 0 � � � B. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03200 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete - Section 03300 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. It is Contractor's responsibility to design and engineer formwork. B. Reference Standards: 1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. U.S. Product Standard for Softwood Plywood, Construction and Industrial PS-1. C. Allowable Tolerances: Except when close coordination and fitting of various trades' work precludes allowance of tolerance, maximum total permissible deviations from established lines, grades and dimensions shall be as stated below. See and maintain forms in such manner as to ensure completed work within specified tolerance limits. 1. Variation from plumb: ' a. In lines and surfaces of arrises: . In any 10 ft of length .............................................1/4 in. Maximum for the entire length ............................. .1 in. b. For exposed conspicuous lines: In any 20 ft of length ............................................ 1/4 in. Maximum for the entire length ............................. 1/2 in. 2. Variation in sizes and location of sleeves, floor and wall openings .......................... +/-1/4 in. 3. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of beams in thickness of,slabs Minus...................................................................1/4 in. Plus........................................................................1/2 in 4. Variation in location of anchor bolts unless provided with sleeves or other means of adjustment..1/4 in. . Halbach • Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library . 03100-1 Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas l,:J � C Max. deflection of form facing materials at concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of span befinreen structural members. � 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Diagram of proposed construction joints not indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.04 MATERIALS A. Forms: Wood, metal or other approved material that will not adversely affect surface of concrete and will provide or facilitate obtaining specified surface finish. 1 Wood: a. Unexposed Surfaces: 1. No.2 Common or Better Southern Yellow Pine lumber, sufficient thickness to sustain loads to be imposed, dressed to uniform smooth contact surfaces, readily removable, or: 2. Commercial Standard Douglas-Fir, moisture resistant, concrete form plywood, not less than 5 ply, at least 3/4" thick, one side smooth. b. Exposed Surtaces: Non-absorptive overlay plywood such as medium or high density overlay, Finn-Form or equal. B. Void form systems: moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, having an interior fabrication of a uniform cellular configuration. Capable of sustaining all vertical and lateral loads applied until loads can be supported by concrete structure. Strength capable of sustaining a working load of 1,000 psf. Properly void the circular edges of all drilled piers at the intersection with grade beams or structural slabs by using a premanufactured, non-field cut, sealed void form, with curved, radial, vertical edges adjacent to drilled piers. Acceptable products/manutacturer: Wa1lVoid and SlabVoid, as manufactured by Surevoid Products, Inc., Englewood, CO3 Phone: (800) 458-5444. C. Cylindrical Forms: 1. Non-permanent: Form round-section members with �ber tubes constructed or laminated plies, using water-resistant type with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide manufacturer's standard-lined interior units. 2. Provide forms with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by fresh concrete without deformation. D. Form Accessories: 1. Form ties: Bolt rods or patented devices having a minimum iensile strength of 3,000 pounds when fully assemb(ed. Ties shatl be adjustable in lengfh and free of lugs, cones, washers or other features which would leave a ho(e larger than 1" in diameter. Ties shall be of such construction that, when forms are removed, there will be no metal remaining within 1" of finished surtace. 2. Form Release Agent: Non-Staining, wax barrier type, Symons Corp., "Magic Cote" or equal. 3. Construction Joint Form: Burke Concrete Products "Keyed Kold JoinY' or equal. Ha(bach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Aublic Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas O � a LJ �wJ � L:� � � � 0 � � 03100-2 � � � -� �r � E�i l�'J L�J � � L�J � � � � � 0 � L�1 � l!i PART 3 EXECU710N 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Formwork Construction: 1. Construct forms tight to prevent loss of mortar. Use chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges on permanently exposed surtaces. 2. Camber formwork to compensate for deflections in formwork prior to concrete attaining design strength. 3. Adjust shores and struts to take up settlement caused by concrete placement. 4. Provide temporary openings in formwork to allow cleaning and observation. 5. Construct forms for beams and girders so that sides may be removed without disturbing bottom of form or its.support. 6. Clean contact and screed surfaces of hardened concrete and foreign materials prior to assembly. B. Form Coatings: 1. Apply specified form release agent; follow manufacturer's direction. 2. Do nat allow agent to puddle in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed. 3. Do not coat forms with materia( thaf will stain or disfigure exposed concrete surfaces; do not • use forms coated with such material. • C. Form Accessories: 1. Form Ties: Coat ties that are to be pulled from walls with cup grease or other approved material to facilitate removal. D. Construction Joints: 1. Locate and instaA construction joints, which are not shown on the drawings, so as not to � impair strength and appearance of the structure, and as acceptable to the Structural Engineer. 2. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in construction joints in walls and slabs; accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. 4. Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surtaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and � elsewhere as indicated. E. Installation of Embedded Items: 1. Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, � diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached the�eto. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 03100-3 F"( HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library I�1 Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � L�] k�i �� L�J � � �� lJ !� !�3 {� � L�J �� L�1 � I�f SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1- General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK . A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to fabricate and place reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete, including bars, welded wire fabric, ties and bar supports. B. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400 2. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100 3. Cast-in-place Concrete - Section 03300. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1.AC1 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 2.ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 3.ASTM A615, Specification for Deformed Biflet Steel Bars for Concrete. 4.ASTM A185, Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. 5.Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, Manual orStandard Practice. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Fabricating: a. Sheared length: Plus or minus 1" b. Stirrups and ties: Plus or minus 2". c. Members more than 8" but not over 2'-0" deep: Plus or minus 2". d. Members more than 2'-0" deep: Plus or minus 1". e. Crosswise of inembers: Space evenly within 2" of stated separation. f. Lengthwise of inembers: Plus or minus 2". 2. Maximum bar relocation to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or other embedded item: 1 bar diameter. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include complete bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and laps and rods, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing and accessories. Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library . 03200-1 Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 1.Show diagrammatic elevations of walls at scale large enough to clearly show position and erection marks of marginal bars, around openings, dowels, splices, etc., for these bars. 2. Show complete layout plan for each layer of reinforcing of structural slabs and beams showing number, arrangement, spacing, location, marking, orientation, etc., of reinforcement required for layer being described. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size, length and mark. B. Unload reinforcing carefully to prevent damage. Store above ground in dry, well drained area; protect from mud, dirt and corrosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, deformed billet steel bars, domestic manufacture, Grades 60 as indicated�on structural drawings. B. Metal Accessories: Include spacers, chairs, bolsters, ties and other devices necessary for properly placing, spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcement in place, conforming to requirements to CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". Metal accessories shall be galvanized where legs will be exposed in finished concrete surfaces. C. Tie Wire: FS QQ-W-461, black enameled steel, 16 ga. min. 2.02 FABRICATION A. In accordance with CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Cleaning: Before placing in work, thoroughly clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, dirt, oil and other coating which might tend to reduce bonding. Reinspect reinforcing left protruding for future bonding, or following delay in work, and reclean if necessary. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 03200-2 � �, ,-., � � � L�J � � � O � � � � � � � � � � l�J 3.02 iNSTALLATION A. Bar Placement: In accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318 and CRSI "Manual for Standard Practice". 1. Bending: Bend bars cold; do not heat reinforcing or bend by makeshift methods. Discard bent, kinked or otherwise damaged bars. 2.Splices: In accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. END OF SECTION � Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 � Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 03200-3 LJ ��I C L�J �� L' L� i � � � L■J l�J L!I � � �I t*I PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract apply to the work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required to provide cast-in-place concrete consisting of portland cement, fine and coarse aggregate, water and selected admixtures; combined, mixed, transported, placed, finished and cured as herein specified. B. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Concrete Formwork - Section 03100 2. Concrete Reinforcement - Section 03200 1.03 QUA�ITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ASTM C33, Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregate. 3. ASTM C94, Standard Specifications for Ready-Mix Concrete. 4. ASTM C150, Standard Specifications for Portland Cement. 5. ASTM C260, Standard Specifications for Air-Entraining. Admixtures for Concrete. 6. ASTM C494, Standard Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. B. Concrete Mix Design: Contractor shall employ and pay cost of a recognized independent Testing Laboratory to perform the following services: 1. Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 301. 2. For each concrete mix type proposed, make trial mix using aggregate proposed. 3. Determination of required average strength above specified strength shall be in accordance with ACI 301. 4. Make advance tests of trial mixes with proposed materials. Mold and cure in accordance with ASTM C31; test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C-39. Do not place concrete on project until laboratory reports and breaks of confirmation cylinders indicate that proposed mixes will develop required strengths. 5. Submit proposed mix designs to Architect for review min. 14 days prior to placing concrete. Show: a. Proportions of cement, fine and coarse aggregates and water. b. Combined aggregate gradation. c. Aggregate specific gravities and gradations. d. Water-cement ratio, design strength, slump and air content. e. Type of cement and aggregates. f. Type of dosage of admixtures. g. Type, color and dosage of integral coloring compounds, where applicable. h. Special requirements for pumping. i. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. Halbach • Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 03300-1 � j. Any special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product. 6. Mix designs based on record of past performance in accordance with ACI 301, method 2, may be submifted in lieu of mix designs required above, provided all necessary information is included. 7. Check mix designs and revise if necessary wherever changes are made in aggregates or in surface water content of aggregate or workability of concrete. Slump shall be minimum to produce workable mix. Laboratory shall prescribe maximum quantity of water. C. Test Cylinders: Make at least one (1) test of each day's pouring or each fifty (50) cu. yards, whichever comes first, on each different portion or section of the work. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31, and test in accordance with ASTM C39. Test cylinders shall be made and tested by the laboratory. Footings, walls, and floor systems constitute different sections. Each test shall consist of five (5) specimens: two (2) to be tested at twenfy-eight (28} days, two (2) to be tested at seven days, and one held in reserve. Determine temperature and air content for each set of test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C231. D, Field Quality Control: 1. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, in accordance with ASTM C143. 2. Monitor addition of water to concrete and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in truck. 3. Certify delivery tickets indicating class of concrete, amount of water added during initial batching, and time initial batching occurred. , 4. Monitor work being performed in accordance with ACI (American Concrete Institute) recommendations as a standard of quality. E. Source Quality Control: Periodically inspect and control concrete mixing and loading of transit mix trucks at batch plant at intervals as agreed to by Architect and laboratory personnel. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mix and deliver concrete to project ready-mixed in accordance with ASTM C94. Mix concrete min. 70 revolutions of transit mix drum at mixing speed. Min. 40 revolutions shall be at production plant. C C Schedule delivery so that continuity of any pour will not be interrupted for over 15 minutes. Place concrete on site within 90 minutes after proportioning materials at batch plant. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Weather Requirements: 1. Hot Weather Concreting: a. Follow ACI 301. � b. Provide retarding type admixture conforming to ASTM C494-Type A or D in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Cofd Weather Concreting: a. Follow ACI 301. � b. When ambient temperature at site is below 40 degrees F, or is expected to fall to that temperature within ensuing 24 hours, heat water and/or aggregates prior to adding to mix so that temperature of concrete will be between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F at time of placement. c. Maintain temperature of deposited concrete between 50 degrees F and 70 degrees F for min. 7 days after placing. 3. Temperature Changes: Maintain changes in concrete temperature as uniform as possible, but in no case exceed change of 5 degrees per hour or 25 degrees in any 25 hour period. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � I.i � � ,� . ��J � I�I �'#1 L�J � L"`J � � � � 03300-2 � � J �l '!I �� L�J � �I � � �. 4. Admixture intended to accelerate hardening of concrete or produce higher than normal strength at early periods wiff not be permitted untess specified or prior approval is obtained from Architect. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Concrete Mix Design. B. Delivery Tickets: Furnish duplicate delivery tickets for each load of ready-mix concrete delivered to site, in accordance with ASTM C94. Show batch weights on each ticket. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I. Type III may be used for cold weather concreting when approved by Architect. B. Aggregate: . 1. Fine: ASTM C-33, clean hard, durable, uncoated, natural non-staining sand free from silt, loam or clay. 2. Coarse: ASTM C-33, hard,durable, uncoated, crushed stone, gradation in accordance with size No.57, unless otherwise approved in mix design. Max. aggregate size in accordance with ACI 318. . C. Water: Clean and free from oil, acid and injurious amounts of vegetable matter, alkalies and other impurities. D. Admixtures: 1. Water-reducing or water-reducing/set-retarding; ASTM C494. 2. Air entraining agent: AS7M C260. � E. Curing Materials: 1. Waterproof Paper: FS UU-P-265a. 2. Polyethylene Sheeting: Minimum 0.004" thick, free from defects, uniform in appearance, white. � 3. Curing Compotands: L&M "CURE" by L& M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or approved equal, for interior concrete slab surfaces. Curing compound must be compatible with floor hardener and sealer. u �J F. Liquid Floor Hardener and Sealer: "Lapidolith" as manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products or approved equal. G. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1752, Type 1, non-asphaltic. H. Non-shrinking Cement Grout: U.S. GrouT Corp. "Five Star Grout" or equal. � 2.02 MIXES u � I] A. Strength: Concrete is classified and specified by ultimate compressive strength (fc) at age 28 days. B. Proportions: Proportions of cement, aggregate, and water to attain required plasticity and compressive strength shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Do not make changes in proportions without Architect's approval. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 03300-3 HD Job No. 9s89 � Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � C. Design concrete to yield the following characteristics: Min.28 day Min. Max. Slump Compressive Cement Cement Dry Limits Type Strength Type Content Density Min, Max. I 3000 psi Port-Type I 5* NA 3" 5" II 4000 psi Port-Type I 6'" NA 3" 5" "' sacks per cu. yd. D. Concrete Uses: Refer to structural drawings for type usage. E. Concrete permanently exposed to weather: Contain air-entraining admixture to produce 5% +/-1 % air by volume of concrete. F. Maximum Fly Ash content shall not exceed 10% by weight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Notify Architect and Testing Laboratory at least 24 hours prior to when each concrete operation is to begin. B. Allow various trades ample time to install anchor bolts, sleeves, conduit and inserts necessary for proper execution of their work. Accurately position in form. Do not cut reinforcing steel to facilitate installation of inserts or accessories. C. If power screeds are to be used, recess sleeves and cap in manner to prevent water and cement from entering, but so that they may be located after finishing. Otherwise, extend sleeves 9" above finish floor. D. Remove impounded water from forms and excavations before concrete is deposited. Close temporary drains by grouting or by other satisfactory means. Close openings left in forms for cleaning and inspection, after forms have been cleaned out, inspected and approved. E. Remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete before concrete is deposited. Before beginning placement, remove hardened concrete and foreign substances from inner surtace of mixing and conveying equipment. F. Provide runways, pumps, conveyors, etc. to convey concrete to point of deposit in order not to disturb forms or reinforcement or segregate concrete. Do not allow conveying equipment directly over reinforcement. ' G. Do not affow concrete to free-fa(I over 5'-0"; provide tremies, chutes or other approved means of conveyance when drop exceeds this amount. �!I ,� � "'J� ,� L�J � L�'J L'J � .�J �J � L�J Hafbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 03300-4 � � L�J I� � �. �l L�J � � L�J u � � I�J '�� 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Placing: Place concrete in accordance with requirements of ACI 301 and as modified herein. Deposit concrete rapidly from mixer to forms as nearly as possible in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Do not place partially hardened, contaminated or retempered concrete. B. Consolidation: Place concrete with aid of inechanical vibrating equipment unless otherwise approved by Architect. Apply vibration at point of deposit and in area of � freshly placed concrete. Vibrate enough to accomplish thorough compaction and complete embedment or reinforcement and fixtures. Supplement vibration by hand-spading in corners and angles of forms to prevent honey- combing. C. Bonding: Before deposiiing new concrete on concrete that has set, roughen and clean surface of set concrete of laitance, foreign matter and loose particles. Wet surface of set concrete just prior to placing new concrete. D. Protection and Curing: 1. Protect concrete from frost damage and moisture loss. 2. Provide artificial heat to maintain temperature of concrete above minimum required herein for duration of curing period. 3. Keep forms sufficiently wet to prevent cracking of concrete or loosening of form joints. 4. Cure surtaces of exposed concrete by means of curing compound or sheeting method, as applicable. E. Patching Formed Surfaces of Exposed Concrete: 1. After forms have been removed, inspect concrete surfaces and patch pour joints, voids, stone pockets, other defective areas and tie holes before concrete is thoroughly dry. Chip away defective areas to�depth of not less than 1" with edges perpendicular to surface. Wet areas to be patched and spaced at least 6" wide entirely surrounding it, to prevent absorption of water from patching mortar. Do not patch concrete in freezing weather. 2. Apply chemical bonding agent to surface in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, followed immediately by patching mortar. Make patch of same proportions as used for concrete except omit coarse aggregate. Add only enough water consistent with requirements for handling and placing. 3. Thoroughly compact mortar into place and screed off; leave patch slightly higher than surrounding surface. Leave undisturbed for one to two hours to permit initial shrinkage before final finishing. Finish patch to match texture and color of adjoining surtace. Completely fill tie holes left by withdrawal of rods and holes left by removal of end of ties. . For holes passing entirely through wall, force mortar through with plunger type grease gun. Cure all patches. F. Finishing Formed Surfaces: 1. As - Formed Finish. a. Provide at surFaces not exposed to view in completed work. b. Remove fins by stoning, otherwise leave texture imparted by forms. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 03300-5 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 2. Rubbed Finish: a. Provide at exterior vertical surfaces exposed to view in completed work. b. After removal of forms, patching and repairing, and while concrete is still green, spread slurry consisting of 1 part portland cement and 1-1/2 part damp, loose sand by volume, � over pre-dampened surtace. Apply using burlap pads or sponge rubber floats. Remove surplus materials, then rub with clean burlap. Water for completed surfaces for 7 days min. � G. Flafinrork: 1. Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screed strips accurately to produce designed elevations and contours in finished surtaces. Align concrete surface to contours of screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting type screeds. When formwork is cambered, set screeds to like camber to maintain proper concrete thickness. , 2. Floated Finish: Provide at slab surfaces to precede other finishes. Begin floating after concrete has been struck off, consolidated and leveled, surface water has disappeared and surface is sufficiently hardened to support power driven float. Finish surFace with impact type power driven float or hand float. Test surface with 10'-0" straightedge placed at min. 2 different angles; correct irregularities exceeding 1/4". Refloat repaired areas. 3. Trowel Finish: Provide at interior slab surFaces under carpet, vinyl composite floor tile and exposed concrete floors. 4. Light Broom Finish: Light broom finish under thin ceramic tile floors, ramps and steps. H. Liquid Floor Hardener and Sealer: 1. Apply hardener and sealer for all finished concrete floors that will be left exposed, not receiving additional finish. 2. Apply hardener and sealer in separate coats in accordance with manufacturer's directions and using the maximum quantity recommended. Surface to be treated must be clean and dry, with all work above the floor completed before the hardener and sealer is applied. Upon completion, concrete surFaces shall be clean, without discrepancies, discoloration, or traces of excess hardener left on the surtace. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 03300-6 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas l�' l�!' u SECTfON 03361 CONCRETE STAMPING PART1 GENERAL � 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Textured concrete slabs. � 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. � 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. � B. Product Data: Manufacturer's cataloc� data, detail sheets, and printed instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Mock-Up: Provide 4 foot by 4 foot mock-up to demonstrate methods of obtaining consistent visual appearance. 1. Construct at least one month before start of actual work, using materials and methods to D be used in actual work. 2. Locate mock-up on site. 3. Retain samples of materials used in mock-up for comparison with materials used in remaining work. 4. Accepted mock-up constitutes visual standard for work. a5. Remove mock-up when no longer required for comparison with finished work. B. Preconstruction Conference: Conduct a review of procedures required to produce results. LJ Li l�' u t�l LJ LJ LJ PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: L.M Scofield Company. 1. Substitutions: See Section 1600 — Prod�ct Requirements. 2. Provide all concrete stamping materials from a single manufacturer. 2.02 CONCRETE STAMPING SYSTEM A. Lithotex Pavecrafters System. B. Color Hardener: Color as selected from manufacturer'� full range. C. Color Release: Color as selected from manufacturer's full range. D. Decorative Sealer: Acrylic. E. Stamping Tool: Complete kit of urethane molded pattern with nylon straps for handling. 1. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. F. Cure and Seal Compound: Manufacturers recommended product. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 03361-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright1999 Fort Worth,Texas PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Plan pattern layout; coordinate slab dimensions and construction joint locations with stamping pattern dimensions where necessary. 3.02 INSTALLATION . A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions, B. Broadcast color hardener evenly over freshly screeded and floated concrete surtace; work color hardener into concrete surface, integrating color with the concrete. C. Broadcast additional material to intensify the final color appearance, if necessary, working material into the surface. D. Monitor concrete set time carefully. When concrete is set atlequately to support worker's weight, broadcast color release evenly over the slab surface at the rate of 3 pounds per 100 square feet. E. Begin stamping operation using stamping tool kit. Work quickly and continuously across entire pour. 1. Place each toof on s(ab surface, aligned with each other and slab edges as pattern requires. • 2. Step on back of stamping tool to create full depth impression in concrete. 3. Use special half tools and texture mats at slab edges, walls, and corners. 4. Broom texture surface where required. < F. Rinse residual release from surtace once slab has set. G. Apply cure and seal compound following manufacturer's directions. 0 Halbach � Dietz Architects HO Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fcrt Worth Public Library Fort Wo�th, Texas � � � � I� � L� '�!J � �■J � � � � . a � � � 03361-2 . . � � � � SECTION 04065 MASONRY MORTAR PART 1 GENERAL . � 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mortar for masonry. O1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of mortar. � 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 144 - Standard' Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 1997. DB. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1997. C. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 1991 (reapproved 1992). � D. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 1997a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS � A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include design mix based on Property specification of ASTM C 270. Also j� include required environmental conditions and admixture limitations. �, 1.05 QUALI7Y ASSURANCE � A. Comply with local applicable code requirements for masonry work. 1.06 DELIVERY, S70RAGE, AND HANDLING a A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ' QA. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. a B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. �' � LJ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type Type I— Normal. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. D. Water: Clean and potable. a Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 04065-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �w� E. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Iron or chromium oxides with demonstraied stability and colorfastness. 1. Colors: Match unit masonry color. F. Admixtures: Use of admixtures is specificatly limited to those approved in writing by the Architect. Admixtures containing calcwm chloride are prohibited. 2.02 MORTAR MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type N. 2. Exterior, non-foadbearing masonry: Type N. 3. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. 4. Pointing mortar: Type N. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match sample approved by Architect, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio. 2.03 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughl� mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C 270 and in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. F. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATlON A. Install mortar to requirements of Section 04810. END OF SECTION � � � r�"� � � LJ L�1 � ��J � ��-, �� L�J � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas • 04065-2 D � � � l�l � � � L�'J t�J � � LsJ � C� � u � � u �' SECTION 04092 MASONRY FLASHINGS PAR71 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) flashings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies. B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.03 REFERENCES ' A. ASTM D 832 - Standard Practice for Rubber Conditioning for Low-Temperature Testing; 1992. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, specifications, and installation recommendations. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: AFCO Products Inc. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Provide all masonry flashings from a single manufacturer. 2.02 POLYVINYLCHLORlDE (PVC) FLASHINGS A. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Flashings: AFCO Vi-Seal (Plastic Flashing), 30 mil thickness,non- reinforced homogeneous, waterproof, impermeable compound of elastomeric substances reduced to a thermoplastic state and extruded into a continuous sheet. 1. Stability: Suitable to resist exposure without physical deterioration of sheet when subjected to weatherometer testing per ASTM D 832 for a period of not less than 400 hours. 2. No signs of sheet cracking or flaking when, at a t�mperature of minus 20 degrees F, bent through 180 degrees over a 1/32 inch mandrel and over same size mandrel in the � opposite direction through 360 degrees. 2.03 FLASHING ADHESIVE A. Flashing Adhesive: AFCO Vi-Seal Adhesive, synthetic rubber-based, waterproofing cold setting mastic. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 04092-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 0 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMlNATION A. Examine and verify that surtaces to receive masonry flashings are reasonably smooth and free from irregularities. Notify the Architect in writing of any defective conditions encountered. B. Correct defective conditions before beginning work. Starting of work shall constitute acceptance of such conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION � A. Horizontal Surfaces: Lay masonry flashings in either a fresh bed of mortar above and below, or in a trowel coat of flashing adhesive. � B. Vertical Surfaces: Spot with flashing adhesive to hold flashings in place. C. Install flashings as indicated on drawings. D. Masonry Flashing Joints: Lap 4 inches minimum and cement with flashing adhesive, E. Cement polyvinylchloride flashings with flashing adhesive. � Halbach � Dietz Architeets HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library ' Fort Worth Public Library ' Fort Worth, Texas 04092-2 [�1 �, � � � � � � � l�l L�1 �*J l�l � l� � � � � SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES , A. Concrete Block. B. Reinforcement and Anchorage. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04065 - Mortarand Masonry Grout. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 1995. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 1995. C. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 1997. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 1995. E. ASTM C 129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 1997. F. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1997a. 1.04 SUBMInALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. C. Samples: Provide two samples of block units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. Architect will view samples at the project site. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALtTY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 04810-1 HD Job No. 9889 For� Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L�"J 1.06 MOCK-UP � A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 4 feet high, which includes � mortar and accessones. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanicat damage and contamination by other materials. Handle and store ceramic glazed masonry units in protective cartons or trays. Do not remove from protective packaging until ready for installation. 1.08 ENVtRONMENTAL REQUIF2EMEN7S A. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depth of 4 and 8 inches. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners and columns. 3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129. a. Both hollow and solid block. b. Type I: Moisture-controlled; normal weight. 4. Exposed face for 4 inch venee�: a. CMU 1: Texas Building Products; Splitface #3; "White Limestone". b. CMU 2: Texas Building Products; Splitface #42; "Mesa BIufP'. c. CMU 3: Texas Building Products; Smooth center scored #42; "Mesa BIufP'. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Mortar: As specified in Section 04065. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; fabricated with moisture drip; adjustable; ASTM A 82 steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. 1. Manufacturers: ' . a. AA Wire Products, L.L.C. b. Dur-O-WaI, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. C Veneer Wall Ties: Hohmann & Barnard DW-10HS anchor system or approved substitution. Size as required by cavity width. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece an�riors that perrriit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library , 04810-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �J ■ -1 C �� L� u � L�!J L*�J � � L�J u � � � LJ � 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Flashing Materials: Specified in Sections 04092 and 07260. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. B. C. D. E. F. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused jo�nts. . 1. Manufacturers: a. Dur-O-WaI, Inc b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. • d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I("No.15") asphalt felt; for use in control joints. Nailing Strips: Preservative treated softwood, as specified in Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. ' Weeps: Polyethylene tubing, 1/4 inch diameter. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. Mortar dropping protection: High density polyethylene open mesh configuration. Provide thickness suitable for use in masonry cavity. 1. Manufacturer: Mortar Net; MN10-04. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Specified in Section 04065. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of inetal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: As indicated on drawings. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortarjoint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: a. Concave joints unless noted otherwise. b. Raked joints at CMU 3 as indicated on drawings. Halbach s Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 04810-3 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. E. Interlock intersections and external corners. F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mo�tar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent brokeri masonry unit corners or edges. H Q Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as indicated. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. 3.05 WEEPS A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. . C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at vertical and horizontal spacings required by applicable governing code. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center. 3.07 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. B. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction 2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. 3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. Extend metal flashings�to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. C. Extend plastic flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. D. Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. 3.08 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. Size as indicated on drawings. � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 04810-4 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fo�t Worth, Texas l■1�, �i ��I �1 l*J � � � l�J � L] � 3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS ' A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. 3.10 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of inetal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing:� 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. 3.12 CLEANING aA. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. � C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. � 3.13 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which are subject to damage by construction activities. � � L�J � Halbach � Dietz Architects a HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 04810-5 r�� 0 � L�l � � �*J L�J L�� lsJ � �� I � LJ � LJ L`J SECTION 04852 LIMESTONE MASONRY VENEER PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cut stone veneer at exterior walls. B. Metal anchors and accessories. C. Setting mortar. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04065 - Mortar'and Masonry Grout: Setting mortar. B. Section 04092 - Masonry flashings. C. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings. 1.03 REFERENCES , . A. ASTM C 568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on stone units, mortar, and reinforcement. C. Samples: Provide ten stone samples illustrating minimum and maximum stone sizes, color range, texture, and markings. Architect will view samples at the project site. D. Samples: Submit mortar color samples. � 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type required by this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Construct a combination limestone and CMU wall mock-up, including colored mortar. Construct to a height necessary to show combinations of masonry materials. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work. � 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site. B. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation from forming on stone. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 04852-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to coordinate the instailation of stone work with installation of adjacent construction. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and ambient air at minimum of 40 degrees F(5 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of work. , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIMESTONE � A. Acceptable Quarries 1. Carroll's Stone and Rock Company. 2. Custom Stone Su�ply. 3. Substitutions: See Section 1600 — Product Requirements. B. Limestone:.Rectangular shape cut or sawn stone. 1. Type: Texas Hill Country Limestone; "Snake Rock" or "Rattle Rock". 2. Density: Medium to high density. 3. Color: Range of buff, pink or rust and as approved by Architect. 4. Surface Texture: Split face and as approved by Architect. 2.02 MORTAR A. Specified in Section 04065. B. Color: Match stone color and as approvPd by Architect. � 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Veneer Wall Ties: Hohmann & Barnard DW-10HS anchor system or approved substitution. Size as required by cavity width. B. Setting Buttons and Shims: Lead or plastic. C. Flashings: Type as specified in Sections 04092 and 07620. D. Weeps: Polyethylene tubing, 1/4 inch diameter. , E. Mortar dropping protection: High density polyethylene open mesh configuration. Provide thickness suitable for use in masonry cavity. 1. Manufacturer: Mortar Net; MN10-04. 2.04 STONE FABRICATfON A. Nominal Thickness: 4 inch. B. Nominal Face Size: Minimum size; 4 x 4 inch. Maximum size; 8 x 16 inch. C. Pattern and Coursing: Uncoursed / Roughly Squared pattern as indicated on drawings. D. Fabricate for 3/8 inch beds and joints. E. Bed and Joint Surfaces: 1. Cut or sawn full square for full thickness of unit. F. Backs: Sawn. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 04852-2 � � C� � L�' � L � LJ C' , � l�J LJ � � �J � � � L�J G. Form stone corners to irregularjoint profile. Clean jagged corners from stone in preparation for setting. H. Cut drip slot in bottom surface of work projecting more than' 1/2 inch over window frame. Size slot not less than 3/8 inch wide and 1/4 inch deep for full width of projection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section. B. Verify that items built-in under other sections are properly located and sized. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. B. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements which can mark or damage exposed surfaces. C. Clean sawn surtaces of rust stains and iron particles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back-up. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. � Cut stone at site to produce clean faces. Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions. D. Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar. E. Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and minimize visual variations, and provide a uniform blend of stone unit sizes. F. Provide setting and pointing mortar in accordance with Section 04065. 1. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper mortar only within two hours after mixing. 2. At ambient air temperature 80 degrees F and above, use mortar within two hours after mixing; at ambient air temperature below 50 degrees F, use mortar within two-and-one- half hours after mixing. G. Fill dowel holes in stone units with mortar. H. Arrange stone coursing in pattern indicated on drawings with consistent joint width. I. Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place horizontal joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of coursing. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 04852-3 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas E. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at vertical and horizontal spacings required by applicable governing code. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center. F. In addition, place wall ties at maximum 6 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings. 3.05 JOINTS A. Concave tooled joints. 3.06 ACCESSOR(ES � A. Install weeps in vertical stone joints at 24 inches on center, horizontally; immediately above horizontal flashings, above shelf angles and supports. Do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space. 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon completion of work. B. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 04852-4 m � C�J L*_J � l�J L�J LJ � � � � L�J � � l�i � �� J �_J � � � STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1- General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. Work Included: This section covers furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and services in connection with the furnishings, fabrication and erection of all structural steel work complete including: 1. Steel columns 2. Steel beams 3. Shelf angles 4. Bolts 5. Angle frames and openings 6. Leveling plates and anchor plates not cast in concrete or masonry. 7. Shop painting B. Include all supplementary parts and members necessary to complete the structural steel frame, regardless of whether all such parts are definitely shown or specified, and furnish all such bolts, gussets, plates, etc., as may be required for the proper assembly of all items. Workmanship shall be of the best quality known to the trade, and all work shall be carefully assembled, fabricated and erected true to the lines, elevations and designs shown on the Drawings. C. Related work specified in other sections: 1. Testing Laboratory Services : Section 01400 2. Metal Decking: Section 05300 3. Embedded metal assemblies: Section 03300 4. Miscellaneous Fabrications: Section 05500 5. Painting: Section 09900 6. Grouting structural steel: Section 03300 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings - June 1, 1989, with commentary. 2. Code of Standard Practices for Steel Buildings and Bridges - September 1, 1986 with commentary. B. American National Standards Institute (NASI)/American Welding Society (AWS): 1. ANSI/AWS D1.1-81 Structural Welding Code SECTION 05120 C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-81 a Structural Steel 2. ASTM A 325-81 High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 SummerglenBranch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 05120-1 3. ASTM A 490-81 Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 4. ASTM A 500-81 a Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 5. ASTM A 501-81 Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 6. ASTM A 572-81a High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Valadium Steels of Structural Quality. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for fabrication and erection omissions and errors and for conformance with the drawings and specifications relative to the various details. 2. ArchitecYs review will cover member sizes, methods of connections and general arrangements but not dimensions or quantities. The strength of the connections shall be the responsibility of the Structural Steel Fabricator, unless otherwise shown on sections and details. 3. Shop drawings shall indicate shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, thread fasteners and welds. A sealed letter from a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Texas shall be submitted by the Fabricator certifying that the shop drawings, including the design of all connections, have been produced under his direct supervision. Shop drawings submitted without the Fabricator's PE letter will not be reviewed. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Bolts and other anchorage devices to be embedded in concrete and masonry shall be delivered to the site before the start of concrete and masonry work. Furnish setting drawings and templates for the installation of anchor bolts. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: 1. ASTM A 572, Grade 50; wideflange beams and columns. 2. ASTM A36; plates and bars. B. Structural tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, cold-formed welded steel structural tubing. C � Pipe columns: ASTM A 501, hot-formed welded steel structural tubing High-strength threaded fasteners: ASTM A 325, Bearing Type bolts, nuts and plain hardened washers. Minimum bolt diameter shall be 3/4". E. Shop Paint: Fed. Spec. TT-P-86G. Provide Tnemec 10-99, modified alkyd, rust inhibitive metal primer with solids content not less than 55% by weight. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate structural steel in accordance with referenced specifications. 1. Drawings indicate the design, sections and weight of inembers. Make no substitutes except with the written permission of the Architect. Dimensions scaled from the drawings shall not Halbach • Dietz Architects SummerglenBranch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 05120 -2 � � � l* L�J L�� l�l L�J C� L�7 L*'J � � � � � L�l � � C be used for fabrication. Contractor shall, when necessary, measure and determine actual dimensions at the building. All existing building dimensions that might offset the fabrication of steel members shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. 2. Workmanship shall conform to the best practice in structural steel shops. Materials shall be clean and straight. Shop kinks will not be permitted. 3. Exposed steel, where in view, shall meet the requirements of the AISC Manual for "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel." Connections shall conform to the standard specifications of the American Institute of Steel Construction. All bolted connections shall be friction type. Punching: Shop-punch steel members for bolts and hanger rods needed to support wood nailers and other items. D. Marking: Components of high strength steel required to have a yield stress greater than 36 ksi shall be clearly marked with the ASTM designation over any shop coat prior to shipment from the fabricator's plant. E. Shop Painting: 1. Steel surFace to be welded shall not be painted. Clean this steelwork of oil and grease with solvent cleaner and remove dirt and other foreign matter by sweeping with brushes or with compressed air. 2. Steelwork shall be given one coat shop paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, except for members in crawl spaces below Ground Floor level, which shall receive a thickness of 3 mils. Clean this steelwork of loose mill scale, rust, weld, slag, dirt and other foreign matter. Clean welds of spatter, smoke and iron oxide film. Remove oil and grease with solvent cleaner. 3. Apply shop paint to dry surFaces thoroughly and evenly by brush, spray, roller coating or dipping at the election of the fabricator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erection of structural metal shall comply with the requirements of referenced codes and standards. 1. The use of a cutting torch for field connection of fabricating errors will be permitted only with the approval of the Architect. For each fabrication error the Contractor shall submit a drawing of existing conditions and the proposed correction for the ArchitecYs review. 2. Set column base plates to correct elevations and support temporarily on shims until the columns have been plumbed and grouted. 3.� Make field connections by electric arc welding or with friction type high strength bolts. B. Make high strength bolted connections in conformance with "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts" as approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints, August 14, 1980. 1. Prior to installation, clean bolts, nuts and washers, if required. Dirt and noticeable rust on bolts, nuts and washers will not be allowed. 2. Where long slotted holes are used, provide plate washers or bars in conformance with Article 3, paragraph (a) 3. of the above mentioned specification. C. Erect steel framing true and plumb and brace temporarily where necessary to handle all loads to which the structure may be subjected. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as required for Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 SummerglenBranch Library Fort Worth Public Library . Fort Worth, Texas 05120-3 safety, and finally shall be removed by the Contractor as part of his equipment. Securely connect all work to take care of dead load, wind and erection stresses. D. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, field connections and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same materials as used shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, equal to that of the original shop coat. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following testing and inspection: (Prior to placement of steel deck). 1. Check temporary bracing of steel frame. 2. Check location and.condition of anchor bolts. 3. Check plumbness and tolerance of steel frame. 4. Visually inspect common bolts. 5. Inspection of high-strength bolting: a.Visually inspect connections. b.Check tightness of at least 33% of connections. c. Check at least two bolts of each girder to column connection. 6. Visually inspect field and shop welds. 7. Ultrasonic or X-ray testing of full penetration welds when requested by the Architect or Structural Engineer. 8. Re-inspect corrective measures required at expense of Contractor. 9. Verify that no members are damaged. 10. Certify that materials and installation are according to Contract Documents and industry standards. B. Correction: The fabricator or erector shall correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspection and test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with the specified requirements. Perform all additional tests required to reconfirm non-compliance of the original work and to show compliance of corrected work. C. Verify that all welders employed during erection of structural steel are certified for type of base materials and positions encountered. Certification testing to be pertormed at Contractor's's expense. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects SummerglenBranch Library HD Job No. s889 � Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 05120-4 Q � i� u � LJ L�J � � LJ �� LJ l�J � f�� ' �� l�l SECTION 05210 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment in connection with the furnishing, manufacture and erection of steel joists, including: 1. Bridging. 2. Ceiling extensions. � 3. Bearing plates. 4. Side wall anchors. , 5. Extended ends. B. Related Sections: 1. Testing Laboratory Services - Section 01400 2. Structural Steel - Section 05120 3. Steel Deck - Section 05300 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in conformance with Section 01340, shop and erection drawings to include mark, number, type, location and spacing of joists; details of bridging, extended ends and attachment of supports. B. Certified mill tests reports, evidencing conformance with the requirements of the ASTM and SJI Specifications, shall be submitted in quadruplicate. C. Special steel joists marked "SP" on the drawings shall be designed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Texas on behalf of the steel joist supplier. Sealed structural calculations for said special joists shall be submitted together with the shop drawings for the review of the Structural Engineer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Steel Joists shall be manufactured by an approved manufacturer who is a member of the Steel Joist Institute. � 2. All fabrications, handling, erection and connections of steel joists shall be in conformance with the latest edition of the Specifications of the Steel Joist Institute and the governing Building Code. In cases of conflict, the more stringent shall govern. B. Refer�to Section 01410. Testing Laboratory Services. 1. Testing for this Section shall be included under the applicable testing requirements for Section 05120 - Structural Steel PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS STEEL JOISTS A. Materials shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Steel: Steel bearing plates, bridging, wall anchors, etc. shall conform to ASTM A36 Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library FoR Worth, Texas 05210-1 2. Bolts: Bridging bolts shall conform to ASTM A307. 3. Welding Electrodes: Welding electrodes shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of A.S.T.M. Designation A233 with series #E70 of AWS 5.5 electrodes of submerged ARC Grade SAW-2. 4. Steel Joists: As required by the S.J.I., with sizes and types as shown on the Drawings. 5. Paint: Manufacturer's standard iron oxide primer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. B. C. Contractor alone shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fitting of joists. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning, nor will burning of unfair holes in shop or field be permitted. Scale, rust or other deleterious materials shall be removed from fabricated joists before shop coat of paint is applied. D. Accessories: Provide all necessary sag rods, bridging, extended bottom chords and top chords, side wall anchors, wall connectors, headers and ceiling extensions. E. Shop Paint: After fabrication, clean joists, bridging, anchors, etc. of rust, all mill scale, dirt or other foreign material by approved methods. Remove grease or oil with benzine or similar volatile cleaner. After cleaning joists, bridging, etc., give one (1) dip or airless pressure spray coat of specified paint not less than 1.5 mils thick. F. Extended Ends: 1. Provide extended ends for top chords where indicated. Extension members shall be designed as cantilever beams with their reactions carried back at least to the first panel point of the joist. Extended ends shall have a load capacity at least equal to that of the joist unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. G. Design: Where the applicable Ioading or span configuration is other than a uniformly loaded simple span condition as covered by the Standard Load Tables adopted by the SJI, the joist manufacturer shall design the joist for the specific condition and submit complete design computations with the shop drawings. Computations shall be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Texas. Deflection of cantilever joists shall be limited to 1/500 of the cantilever length. 3.02 ERECTION A. n Replace joists damaged by bending or warping during handling and erection. Bridging shall conform to SJI Specifications unless detailed otherwise on the Drawings. C. Minimum bearings and anchorage shall conform to SJI Specifications and/or the Drawings as related to particular type of support. D. Set joists to lines, levels and spacing as indicated. Provide bearing plates as indicated or required to carry out structural requirements. Execute general handling and erection in accordance with SJI Specifications. E. Joists shall be permanently fastened to supports and all bridging and anchorage completely installed before any construction loads, other than workmen, are placed on joists. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 05210-2 H� Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � �� 'J � Li 0 C�i � � � 0 � � � �� 0 � F. Execute welding in accordance with "Code of Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society as amended to date, and only by welding operators who have been certified within the previous six months. G. After erection, field connections and all abraded places of shop paint shall be touched up with same kind of paint as shop coat. , H. Bottom chords of inembers shall not be welded until the full dead load of the roof is applied. Comply with all requirements for temporary safety and stability of the structure as required by OSHA guidelines. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 05210-3 l�1 �' � l!J � � � 1�J � � � �� l�7 � � � � C�I l!!J SECTION 05300 METAL ROOF DECK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS � A. Drawings, Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract and Division 1- General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Roof Decking 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 05210 - Steel Joists 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Welders and welding procedures shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code. . 1.05 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Welding Society (AWS): 1. ANSI/AWS D1.1-81 Structural Welding Code. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Building Materials List January 1983 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01340. Indicated type of deck, gage of metal, finish and shape and size of special pieces and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Roof Decking: Provide 1-1/2" deep wide rib deck units with ribs spaced 6" o.c. Deck plate shall have a flat surface, �ribbed top flange is not acceptable. Product/Manufacturer, one of the following: Profile B Roof Deck (F16RD) 20 gage by Rollform Products, Inc.; Type 1.5 B Roof Deck 20 gage by Vulcraft, a Div. of Nucor Corp.; Type B Roof Deck, 20 gage by Wheeling Corrugating Co. B. Finish: 1. Roof decking units shall have a baked shop coat of acrylic primer. Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Wotth, Texas 05300-1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Placement: Place steel deck units on the supporting steel framework and adjust fo final position before fastening permanently. Bring each unit to proper bearing on the supports. Place units in straight alignment and with a minimum of clearance between ends of abutting units. Deck units shall be continuous over at least three spans. B. Fastening: Weld units to steel framework at ends and at intermediate supports with 5/8" diameter fusion welds. Space welds approximately 6" on center on roof deck. 1. Fasten side joints of roof decking together at 6" intervals with No.12 selt-tapping screws. C. Openings: As the steel•deck units are erected, cut and form the holes and openings which are located and dimensioned on the drawings. Holes required for the work of other trades will be cut by the trades requiring them. Provide deck reinforcing for openings as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Where interior partitions are indicated to extend to the underside of roof inetal deck, provide manufacturer's standard rubber closure installed to fill all voids between top of partitions and underside of inetal deck. E. Furnish sump pans for roof drains, per manufacturer's standards. F. Heavily damaged roof deck coating shall be wire brushed, cleaned and recoated with the same enamel paint as factory applied. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. sss9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 05300-2 �� L�1 �' t�J �� IL�J L�J I� SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Steel stud exterior wall framing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04816 - Masonry Veneer: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing. 8. Section 04851 - Stone Masonry Veneer: Stone veneer supported by wall stud metal framing. C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Cu�bing: Rough wood blocking. D. Section 07292 - Board and Batt Insulation: Insulation within framing members. E. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing. 1.03 REFERENCES � A. ASTM A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized} Coatings on Iron and Stee! Products; 1989a. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or � Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1996. C. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products � and Metal Plaster Bases; 1996a. D. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 1996. � E. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type !I, ",Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 1991 (Part of Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. Two). 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION �J � �� A. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/600 span. B. Pravide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. C. Accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS � A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. � C. Shop Drawings: Indicate component detai(s, framed openings, anchorage, and type and location of fasteners , and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for other framing connections. � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 05400-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI SG-673. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. , 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with the placement of components within the stud framing system. ' PART 2 PRODUC7S 2.01 FRAMING MATERIALS ' A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width. 1. Gage: 16 gage. 2. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 3. Galvanized finish in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M: G90/Z275. 2.02 ACCESSORIES , A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. B. Plates, Gussets, CliPs: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I- Inorganic. 2.03 FASTENERS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 123, hot dip galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq ft. B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. 2.04 FABRICATION • A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation. 0 Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 05400-2 C�� l�! � l�!J � l�J [�'1 � O � ��J � � � O Ll � � PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches oc. C. Place studs at 16 inches on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method. D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs. E. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements. G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non- load bearing framing. J. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of inechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. L. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surtaces with primer. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch. 6. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 05400-3 � � � LJ � l�J LJ � � C�� O � � � �� l�J � SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. . Shop fabricated steel items. ' 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of inetal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies. Placement of inetal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1996. 6. ASTM A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 1997. C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 1997a. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 1995. E. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 1993a. F. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 1997. , G. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 1993. H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 1996. I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. J. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 1996. K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Paint; Society for Protective Coatings; 1991 (Part of Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. Two). L. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 1991 (Part of Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. Two). Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 05500-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design load bearing steel components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M for galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I- Red Oxide. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surtaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I- Inorganic. 2.02 FABRICATION � A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 05500-2 HD Job No. 9889 ' Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas l� � LJ � � � � � � � �, � L*�] � �� 2.03 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. . 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Prime Painting: One coat. D. Galvanizing of Structural and Non-structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication io ASTM A 123/A 123M. Provide minimum 1.3 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. 2.04 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. � E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTlON 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATlON A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Suppty setting temp(ates to the appropriate entities for steef items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. lnstall items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. � B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, �rime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOl.ERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 05500-3 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �� '� � l�] � � � l!'1 t*JI l�J � O � L!�J O � � l�J PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES WOOD BLOCKING A. Blocking in wall openings. B. Wood furring and grounds. C. Preservative treatment of wood. D. Telephone and electrical panel boards. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timbers, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties--Preseravtive Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 1991. B. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber--Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 1991. C. PS 1- Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 1994. E. SPIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine L,umber; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 1994. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: SPIB. 2. � Lumber of other species or grades, or graded by other agencies, is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified. B. Plywood: Comply with PS 1. Halbach � Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 � SECTION 06114 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 06114-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. � 2.02 CONSTRUCTION PANELS " A. Miscellaneous Panels: 1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-D Plugged, exterior grade; 3/4 inch thickness. 2. Exposed Plywood: PS 1, C-D, interior grade; 3/4 inch thickness. 2.03 ACCESSORfES � A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Treatment C2 using waterborne preservative to 0.25 percent retention. 1. Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete. , PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set members level and p(umb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members with crown side up. C. Space framing and furring members 16 inches o.c. D. Provide misce(faneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 06114-2 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � �� LI � � � l�J L�J � � � � � a � � 3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatibie with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. � Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 � Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library FoR Worth, Texas 06114-3 l*9 .'�J l�l � ' �J � L�J � �u � '�i , L�J l�'] `�J SECTION 06131 HEAVY TIMBER FRAMING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A, Heavy structural timber for posts, beams, joists and purlins, B. Connection hardware. 9,02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metaf Fabrications: Steei support fabrications. 1.03 REFERENCES ' A. AITC 108 - Standard for Heavy Timber Construction; American Institute of Timber Construction; 9 993. B. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, wood species and grades, component profiles, drilled holes, fasteners, connectors, erection details and sequence. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Product Data: Submit data on proprietary connection devices. D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALlTY ASSURANCE A. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by American Lumber Standards Committee. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of heavy timber framing with five years minimum experience. � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Douglas Fir. � 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Connectors: weldable steel. � B. Solts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, and Screws: Medium carbon steel; unfinished; size and type to suit application. � ' Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 06131-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components in accordance with AITC 108, with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth. PART 3 EXECUTlON 3.01 ERECTION � A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Make provisions for erection laads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Do not field cut or alter Structural members without approval of Architect. � D. After erection, touch-up primed surfaces with primer. END OF SECTION Halbach s Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 06131-2 � . � � � l�.l L_11 �J � CJ � [�J � � L�J � � '�J �J � � SECTION 06150 W04D DECKING PART1 GENERAL 9.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Softwood lumber structural wood decking. B. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06131 - Heavy Timber Framing. B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field finishing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Presenrative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Associafion; 1997. 9.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administraiive Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and framed openings. D. Samples of Wood Deck Exposed To View: Provide two samples, 12 x 48 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish. Architect will view samples at the site. 1.05 QUALI7Y ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following: 1. Lumber Inspection Agency: Any agency with rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee, B. !n lieu of grade stamping exposed to view lumber, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products conform to specified requirements. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. D. Installer: Company specializing in perForming work of the type specified in this section with minimum five years of experience. PART 2 PRODUGTS 2,01 MANUFACTURERS ' 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber Decking: Stress Group A, Douglas Fir species, 19 percent maximum moisture content; bevel edges, single tongue. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 06150-1 J"'� HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library i� Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, 7exas � 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized sieel for high humidity and treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugte head, hardened steei, power driven type, length three times thickness of decking. Non-exposed conditions. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. 2.04 WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C2 using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. PART 3 EXECUTION . 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of support items. 3.03 INSTAL�ATlON - LUMBER DECKlNG A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. C. Secure to each supporting member with fasteners at maximum 12 inches on center. Side spike planks together, through pre-drifled ho�es. D. Maintain decking joint space of 1/16 inch maximum. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. ' Surtace Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTtON � 0 � LJ � � �� LJ L�J �� L�1 L" � �� u Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, 7exas 06150-2 E�° � � � l�� SECTION 06181 GLUED-LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL � 'l.01 SECTION INCLUDES . A. Glue laminated wood beams and puriins. �] B. Preservative treatment of wood. �� C. Steel hardware and attachment brackets. � 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09900 - Paints �nd Coatings: Field Finishinc�. � 1.03 REFERENCES A. AITC 117-DESIGN - Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species; American Institute of Timber Construction; 1993. � B. AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 1992. � C. ASTM A 36IA 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1996. D. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Stren�th; 1997. � E. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specificat�on for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 1993. � F. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 1996. G. ASTM A 563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric); 1996. � H. ASTM D 2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions; 1992 (Reapproved 1996). I. • AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure � Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 1997. J. AWPA C28 - Standard for Preservative Treatment of Structural Glued Laminated Members and Laminations Before Gluing of Southern Pine, Coastal Douglas-Fir, Hemfir and Western � Hemlock by Pressure Processes; American Wood Preservers' Association; 1995. K. SPIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 1994. � � 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and laminate members in accordance with AITC 117-DESIGN. �1.05 SiJBMITTALS t,,.� A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. � B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique and resultant performance infarmation. � Halbach � Die� Architects Summerglen Branch Library 06181-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of inembers, loads and cambers, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing and framed openings. . 1. Submit design caiculations. D. Certification: Submit certification indicating glued laminated timbers comply with requirements of AITC 190.1. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Fabricator: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units with three years of documented Pxperience, qualified to apply the AITC "Quality Inspected" mark, and certified by AITG in accordance with AITC A190.1. B. Design structural members under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located Comply with provisions of AITC 117. C. Factory mark each piece of glued laminated structural units with AITC Quality Inspection Mark. Place AITC mark on lumber surfaces not exposed in completed work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Prior to shipping or exposure to exterior conditions, individually wrap each member with manufacturers standard opaque, durable, water resistant, plastic coated paper covering. Provide water resistant seams. A. Keep glued laminated structural units dry during delivery, storage, handling and erection by maintammg factory applied protective covering in weather tight and light proof condition. Maintain protective covering until building enclosure is completed to extent necessary for protection of work. Do not store units in areas of either excessively high or low relative humidity. Deliver, store and protect units in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. B. Time delivery and installation of units t� av�id pxtended on site storage. Avoid delaying other trades whose work must follow erection of units. C. Store units above ground with individual members separated for air circulation. Provide drainage of accumulated water from protective wrappings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Georgia-Pacific Corp. 2. Louisiana-Pacific Corp. 3. Trus Joist MacMillan. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Lumber: Softwood lumber conforming to SPIB grading rules with 12 percent maximum moisture content before fabrication. Design for the following values: • 1. Bending (Fb): 1600 psi. 2. Tension Parallel to Grain (Ft): 1000 psi. 3. Compression Parallel to Grain (Fc): 1550 psi. 4. Compression Perpendicular to Grain Fc1): 560 psi. 5. Horizontal Shear (Fv): 200 psi. 6. Modulus of Elasticity (E): 1,400,000 psi. C. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A 36/A 36M weldable quality, prime components except where cast in concrete. . D. Hardware: ASTM A 307 steel bolts, lag bolts, nails and other standard fasteners as required for installation. Halbach � Dietr Architects Summerglen Branch Library 06181-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas l�J �i � l�l � � � � � � � � � � � [+�J O � � SECTION 06650 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops. B. Windowsills. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets. 1.03 REFERENCES • � A. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile; 1992. B. ANSI Z124.6 - American National Standard for Plastic Sinks; 1997. C. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics; 1993a. D. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1995. E. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 1996. F. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C; 1991. G. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 1996a. H. ASTM D 1499 - Standard Practice for Operating Light- and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) for Exposure of Plastics; 1992a. I. ASTM D 5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact); 1996. J. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surtace Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1997a. • K. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 1996. L. ASTM G 22 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria; 1976 (Reapproved 1996). M. FS VWV-P-541E/GEN (1) - Plumbing Fixtures (General Specification); 1980 (Amd.1990). N. NEMA LD 3- High Pressure Decorative Laminates; 1995. ' 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information, and compliance with specified pertormance requirements. Halbach � Dietz Architects Far North Branch Library ' 06650-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort WoRh, Texas C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions, and coordination requirements with adjacent work. D. Samples: Submit minimum 2 inches by 2 inches samples. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. Approved samples will be retained as standards for work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer of solid polymer manufacturer 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation. Store components indoors prior to installation. B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surtaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical dama�e or staining following installation for duration of project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: DuPont Corian Wilsonart Gibraltar Formica Surell B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Provide all solid polymer fabrications from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials indicated are based on products manufactured by DuPont and are intended to establish a standard of quality for materials of this section. Substitutions are permitted under provisions of section 01600. B. Solid Polymer Material: Homogeneous filled acrylic meeting ANSI Z124.3 and Z124.6, Type Six, and FS WW-P-541 E/GEN (1); not coated, laminated, or of composite construction. 1. Tensile Strength: 5000 psi minimum, per ASTM D 638. 2. Tensile Modulus: 1000000 psi minimum, per ASTM D 638. 3. Flexural Strength: 7000 psi minimum, per ASTM D 790. 4. Flexural Modulus: 1000000 psi minimum, per ASTM D 790. 5. Elongation: 0.3 percent minimum, per ASTM D 638. 6. Hardness: 90-Rockwell "M" scale minimum. � 7. Thermal Expansion: 1.95 x 10^6 inch/inch/F degree maximum, per ASTM D 696. 8. Color Stability: No change, 100 hours minimum, per NEMA LD3-3.10. 9. Wear and Cleanability: Passes ANSI Z124.3. 10. Abrasion Resistance: No loss of pattern, maximum weight loss {1000 cycles) equal to 0.9 g, per NEMA LD3-3.01, ANSI Z124.3 11. Boiling Water Surface Resistance: No change, per NEMA LD3-3.05. 12. High Temperature Resistance: No change, per NEMA LD3-3.06. 13. Impact Resistance: a. Notched Izod: 0.24 foot-pounds minimum, per ASTM D 256, Method A. b. Gardner Ball Drop: 9.0 foot-Qounds minimum, per ASTM D 5420. c. 1/4 inch Sheet: 36 inches minimum, 1/2 pound ball, no failure per NEMA LD3-3.03. d. 1/2 inch Sheet: 140 inches minimum, 1/2 pound ball, no failure per NEMA LD3-3.03. e. 3/4 inch Sheet: 200 inches minimum, 1/2 pound ball, no failure per NEMA LD3-3.03. 14. Stain Resistance: Passes ANSI Z124.3. 15. Weatherability: No change, minimum 1000 hours, per ASTM D 1499. 16. Fungi and Bacteria: No attack, per ASTM G 21 and G 22. 17. Specific Gravity: 1.6 minimum. Halbach � Dietr Architects Far North Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 , Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 06650-2 � � � � � L"J �� 18. Water Absorption by Weight: Maximum percent, per ASTM D 570. a. 24 hours, 1/4 inch: 0.05. b. 24 hours, 3/4 inch: 0.10. c. Long term, 1/4 inch: 0.50. d. Long term, 3/4 inch: 0.90. 19. Flammability: 25 flame spread, 30 smoke developed, Class 1, per ASTM E 84. 20. Superficial Damage 0.010 Inch Deep: Repairable by sanding and polishing. C. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints, with chemical bond. D. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant, FDA/UL recognized silicone sealant in color-matching or clear formulations. 2.03 SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS A. Countertops: Solid polymer material, backspiash of size shown, and edge details as shown on drawings. � 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. B. Windowsiils: Solid polymer material; adhesively joined with inconspicuous seams, edge details . as shown on drawings. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. F��Il�13;�L�Y�L�1, I A. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and solid polymer manufacturer requirements. B. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive, joints inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Attach 2 inch wide reinforcing strip of solid polymer material under each joint. C. Provide holes and cutouts for plumbing and bath accessories as indicated on the drawings. D. Rout and finish component edges to a smooth, uniform finish. Rout all cutouts, then sand all edges smooth. Repair or eject defective or inaccurate work. E. Finish: Uniform on all surfaces. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Variation in Component Size: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Location of Openings: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from indicated location. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation details. B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands clean when making joints. C. Provide backsplashes and endsplashes as indicated on the drawings. Adhere to countertops using manufacturer's standard color-matched silicone sealant. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 Far North Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 06650-3 D. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants, and other stains. Components shall be clean on Date of Substantial Completion. E. Protect surFaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. Repair or replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to architect's satisfaction and invoice for the cost of repairs; before repairs are made, cost estimates are subject to architect's approval. F. Provide a Commerciai Care and Maintenance video, review maintenance procedures and warranty details with the director of maintenance upon completion of project. END OF SECTION Halbach � Die� Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 Far North Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 06650-4 feo� � L�J l*J � � � � � �� SECTION 07212 BATT �NSULATlON I i PART 1 GENERAL � 9.01 SECTION INCLUDES I . A. Batt insulation in exterior wall constru�tion. B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter wintlow and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wal( and roof. � 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS � A. Seciion 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES � I A. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specificatiqn for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactu�ed Housing; 1995. B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surtace Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1997a. I I 1.04 SUBMI7TALS � A. See Section 0130� - Administrativ� Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on prQduct characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. � 1.05 SEQUENCING I A. Sequence work to ensure firepro�fing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work of this section. I PART 2 PRODUCTS � I 2.01 MANUFACTURERS � I A. lnsulation: 1. CertainTeed Corporation �� . 2. Johns Manvi(le 3. Owens Corning I 4. Substitutions: See Sectio� 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BATT INSULATfON MATERtALS i A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; �preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance: Mir�imum R-value of 19. 2. i'hickness: Minimum 6 irtch. 3. Facing: Faced on one si�de with aluminum foil. 4. Flame/Smoke Propertie�: 75/150 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2,03 ACCESSORIES I I A. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; lelectroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application. I I `I Halbach � Dietz Architects i Summerglen Branch Library 07212-1 HD Job No. s8s9 � Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 � Fort Worth, Texas � �,+` PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and fhat substrates are ready to receive insulation. 3.02 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscelianeous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of inechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulatian. E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of inembrane between framing members. F. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches on center. G. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. H. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. I. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION u Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 FoR Worth, Texas � �� !.�+' � 07212-2 ''� � � � � �� L: �� l�'! �� 'I METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preformed corrugated wall panels for parapet protection. B. Flashings, fasteners, and accessories as required for weatherproof installation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior stud wall framing system. B. Section 07525 - Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealled) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1997. B. ASTM A 755/A 755M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's current product specifications and installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required for this project, with not less than 2 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING � A. Coordinate delivery schedule with installation schedule. Do r�ot deliver materials of this section to project site until suitable facilities for storage and protection are available. B. Protect materials from damage during transit and at project site. Store under cover but sloped � to provide positive drainage. Do not expose materials with strippable protective �Im to direct sunlight or extreme heat. ��. � l#J � � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS SECTI'ON 07410 A. Precoated Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 755/A 755M; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33 (230), G90/Z275 Coating Designation, precoated with fluoropolymer coating specified below. B. Fluoropolymer Coating: Provide multi-coat PVDF; Kynar 500 finish system on exposed metal surfaces. C. Configuration: Corrugated; nominal 1 inch height. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07410-1 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Provide formed accessories of same gage and finish as the primary panel system, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Sealants: As specified in Section 07900. � C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for project conditions and panel type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Panels: Factory-fabricate all panels. B. Accessories: Factory-fabricate trim and flashing components in standard 12 foot lengths. C. Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect substrates to verify that they are in proper condition, spaced correctly, plumb, and are ready to receive panels and accessories. 1. Do not proceed with installation until substrates are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install metal panels and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. C. Fasten panels to structural support with fasteners provided or approved by panel manufacturer Install panels plumb, level, and true to line. D. Fully interlock panels with adjacent panels; apply sealants as recommended by panel manufacturer to achieve weathertight installation. . E. Do not allow shavings, metal dust, or chips to fall on panels. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove protective masking from panels immediately after each panel is installed. B. Touch up minor abrasions with matching paint provided by panel manufacturer. Remove and replace panels that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. C. Upon completion of installation, remove scraps and debris from project site. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Provide protection as required to assure that completed work of this section will be without damage or deterioration at date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07410-2 � � �� I�� L!.J � � � � � � � � SECTION 07525 MODIf1ED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING PART 1- GENERA� 1.01 RELA'iED SECTIONS A. Section - Sheet Metal Work. B. Section - Caulking and Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES ' A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM D 41 "Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp-proofing and Waterproofing". 2. ASTM D 312 "Asphalt used in Roofing": 3. ASTM D 4601 "Asphalt Impregnated Glass (felt) Mat Used as a Base Sheet in Roofing and Waterproofing". 4. ASTM C 728 "Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. B. Federal Specification (FS). 1. FS-HH-I-529B "Insulation Block, Thermal (Mineral Aggregate)". 9.03 CONFORMANCE STANDARDS A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). � 1. Fire Classification Rating: "Class A". B. Factory Mutual (FM). 1. Wind Up(ift Rating: "Class I-90". 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide written proof of Manufacturer's approved applicators status for required warranty. Contractor shall submit certification with bid. B. Upon completion, provide an inspection by Manufacturer to assure installation is in accordance with requirements for the warranties. Manufacturer's representative shall provide a written inspection report certifying that the roof system has been installed in accordance with manufacturer's accepted procedures and is warrantable for the specified warranty period. 1.05 WARRANTY AND CERTIFICATION A. General: All warranties are ca(culated from the date of final acceptance by the City. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the work until date of final acceptance. B. Provide Manufacturer's No Dollar Limit (NDL), Total System Repair or Replace, non- prorated twenty (20) year warranty covering materials and workmanship. C. Provide Roofer's two (2) year unconditional total system warranty for all components including flashing and sheet metal. Halbach � Dietz Architects . Summerglen 8ranch Library 07525-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas D. Certification of Owner's Maintenance Forces: Manufacturer shall provide, at their expense, adequate training on the repair and modification of modifled bitumen, torch down roofing at a location within the DFW metroplex in order to certify the Building Maintenance Division of the Transportation and Public Works Department for warranty repairs and modifications of the manufacturer's roof systems. The City of Fort Worth will pay for travel and per diem costs incidental to the training. If training is required outside of the Metroplex for the purpose of certification, the Contractor shall pay travel and per diem necessary for the certification. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. F. Receive final written authorization for substitutions, if any. Submit three (3) inch by five (5) inch samples of roofing membrane and accessories with manufacturer's identification labels attached. Submit manufacturer's application procedures which describe completely the preparation of surfaces and application of specified materials. Submit shop drawings showing details, fabrication and fastening devices for each condition encountered. Submit samples of each type of inechanical fastener and stress plate. Submit samples of insulation board. G. Submit sample manufacturer's warranty. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Prior to ordering materials and commencing roofing, a pre-installation conference to discuss the specified roofing system and its proper application will be conducted. Notify the local Manufacturer's representative when the pre-installation conference is scheduled. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING �'j� A. ' Deliver roofing materials, insulation, and accessories in manufacturer's original protective tii containers with labels intact and legible. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for storage and handling. � B. C. D. Store materials in dry protected areas, on clean, raised platforms with securely anchored weather protective covering. Store flammable products away from sparks or open flames. Store roofing materials at a minimum of forty-five (45) degrees Fahrenheit prior to use as recommended by the manufacturer. Protect materials from freezing. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTA! REQUIREMENTS � Q Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not exceed temperature limitations recommended by the manufacturer. Do not begin roofing work (removal or installation) when weather forecast is greater than 20% chance of rain. �■J � �� J Halbach � Dietz Architects ' Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 07525-2 � LJ I � � Ll PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF INSULATION A. Perlite Insulation Board: Equal to USI intec Inc. Board Roof Insulation. 1. Homogeneous Board of expanded perlite. 2. Insulation to comply with ASTM C 7283 and FS-HH-I-529B. 3. 3/4" thick, thermal resistance "R" value 2.08. . � � � � 2.02 � L:ey � � � � �� L�J � � L'*J l�J l� B. Isocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid isocyanurate foam, ASTM C 1013; faces finished with glass fiber, with the following characteristics: 1. Board Size: 48 x 48 inch. 2. Board Thickness: .2.7 inches. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Manufacturers:Roofing system manufacturer or others when approved by roofing manufacturer. 5. Thermal Conductance ( C): Minimum 05. 6. Thermal Fesistance ( R): Minimum 20.0. C. Tapered Board: Perlite Insulation Board. Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 1/4 inch; fabricate of fewest layers possible. ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM A. Approved manufacturer: Equal to U.S. Intec, Inc. B. Approved System: Specification No. GB-63SP-RI. C. Modified Bituminous Membrane: Equal to Intec GBSP-4. 1. Compound: Atactic Polypropylene (APP) Modified Asphalt. 2. Reinforcement: Non-woven Polyester; Orie hundred seventy (170) grams per square meter (min). 3. Weight: One hundred five (105) pounds per roll. � 4. Thickness: Four and one-half (4.5) mm. 5. Application: Torch. 6. Surfacing: Mineral Granule. 7. Color: Tan. D. Inter-ply Membrane: Equal to Intec SP-4. 1. Type: Atactic Polypropylene (APP) Modified Asphalt. 2. Reinforcement: Non-woven Polyester; One hundred seventy (170) grams per square meter (min). 3. Weight: Eighty-eight (88) pounds per roll. 4. Thickness: Four (4) mm. 5. Application: Torch. E. F. Base Sheet: Equal to Intec Ultra Base. 1. Type: Asphalt saturated glass mat conforming to ASTM D 4601. 2. Weight: Sixty-seven (67) pounds per roll. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41. G. Asphalt: ASTM D 312 Type IV, steep asphalt. Use only that asphalt which has all of the following information printed on the asphalt packages or on the bills of lading covering bulk asphalt. 1. Softening point range: The temperature ranges of the asphalt determined in accordance with ASTM D 312 and ASTM 36. 2. Equiviscous temperature range: The temperature range, plus or minus twenty- five (25) degrees Fahrenheit, at which a viscosity of one hundred twenty-five (125) Centistokes is attained. 3. Finishing blowing temperature: The temperature at which the blowing of the asphalt has been completed. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07525-3 2.03 FLASHING SYSTEMS A. Flashing: Equal to products listed, Intec GBSP-4 flashing, Intec SP-4 flashing and Mini Intec flashing as recommended by the manufacturer to suit each condition. 2.04 PROTECTION BOARD A. Equal to Intec Walkboard: Thirty-six (36) inches long by thirty-six (36) inches wide by point three one four (0.314) inches thick. Color: White (to contrast tan membrane. 2.05 CANTS A. Perlite Cant Strip: Four (4) inch. 2.06 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. Fasteners for Metal Deck: Equal to Drill-Tec "Coated Drill Point (CDP)" Fasteners, manufactured by 11. S. Intec, Inc. conforming to Factory Mutual No. 4470. 1/4" hex head of sufficient length to penetrate the metal deck a minimum of one (1) inch. 1. Drill-Tec Stress Plates: Three (3) inch metal conforming to Factory Mutual No. 4470, Galvalume 3.16 inch diameter, center hole .25 inch. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. B. C. Verify securely supported and attached deck, free of depressions, waves or projections. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of moisture in any form. Verify proper placement of roof openings, pipes, curbs, sleeves, ducts, vents, drains and other penetrations. D. Verify proper securing of penetrating or roof mounted equipment. 3.02 JOB AND WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Suspend all application and installation activities during inclement weather. B. Remove debris from roof deck and site on a daily basis and dispose at an approved disposal site. C. Protect roof deck and insulation from moisture by providing water cut-offs at the end of � each day's work or when the weather is threatening. Failure to protect the deck and roofing from moisture will result in the removal of damaged materials or materials containing excessive moisture. Remove water cut-offs prior to start of new work. D. Protect building and adjacent surtaces from bitumen spillage. E. Do not permit traffic or material storage on completed roof surtaces. 3.03 ASPHALT A. B C. D. Provide kettle or tanker with clearly visible operating thermometer. Do not heat asphalt above flash point and EVT recommendations. Application of asphalt: Uniformly applied applications without voids as recommended by roofing manufacturer. Type of asphalt. 1. Roofing base sheet to insulation: Steep, Type IV. Halbach � Dietz ArChitects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 07525-4 � LJ l'*J � 3.04 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION � � �� A. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for preparation of substrates to receive sheet roofing. Prior to priming, clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to roofing work. 3.06 ROOF INSULA710N A. Attachment of Insulation: Attach perlite, isocyanurate and tapered insulation board to metal deck in accordance with manufacturer's mstructions and FM Class I-90. B. Neatly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers. Fill all gaps greater than one- quarter (1/4) inch wide with insulation. Do not leave membrane unsupported in an area greater than one-quarter (1/4) inch. C. Verify wood nailers are identical thickness of insulation. D. Install no more insulation than can be covered with roofing membrane and completed before the end of the day's work, or before the onset of inclement weather. E. Set insulation with long joints continuous and short joints staggered in one direction. F. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of preceding layer. G. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. I. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. J. At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18 - inches. � K. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.07 BASE SHEET � �T �� '�7 � ��J � I�1 A. Install one (1) ply of base sheet over perlite insulation system in a full and uniform coating of asphalt, applied at the rate of twenty-five (25) pounds per square. B. Laps: Two (2) inch side laps and four (4) inch end laps. 3.08 INTERPLY MEMBRANE A. Heat weld one (1) ply of interply membrane perpendicular to base sheet. B. Laps: Three (3) inch side laps and six (6) inch end laps. 3.09 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE A. Heat weld one (1) ply of modified bituminous membrane perpendicular to interpl"y membrane. B. Laps: Three (3) inch side laps and six (6) inch end laps. 3.10 FLASHINGS A. Prime metal and masonry surfaces prior to flashing application at the minimum rate of one (1) gallon per one hundred (100) square feet. B. Securely attach flashings using torch application over base sheets as recommended by the manufacturer. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library FoR Worth, Texas 07525-5 L�J 3.11 PROTECTION BOARD A. Install torch applied walkboards where indicated. 3.12 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. B. Statement of Practical Treatment: In case of skin contact with molten bitumen or flame from torching device, apply ice. Get medical attention immediately. In Case of Fire: Use ABC-rated fire extinguisher and get assistance from fire department immediately. General Precautions: 1. Read and understand manufacturer's roofing manual before starting application. Follow all precautions and directions. 2. Thoroughly train personnel in recommended safety procedures for use of torching device and for application of product. 3. Fire prevention inspections should be conducted periodically during installation, with a final inspection being conducted upon completion of that day's work. 4. Wear personal protective gear as required. Including use of approved safety hard hat, goggles, heavy duty gloves, snug-fitting clothing (long pants and long - sleeved shirt), and boots. 5. Thoroughly train personnel on preventing and extinguishing fires. 6. Thoroughly train personnel in first aid procedures. 7. Never allow contact befinreen the hea#ed surface of the product or the torching device and hair, skin or clothing. 8. Comply with all applicable OSHA safety standards and applicable fire codes. 9. Avoid physical contact with product for at least one hour after application. 10. Never apply modified bitumen products directly over exposed conduits or pipes laying on the roof deck. 11. Provide in the immediate work area at least one (1) ABC-rated fire extinguisher for each torching device. ' 12. Use extreme caution when working around equipment, such as gas lines or HVAC units, which have electrical connections. D. Torching Device: " 1. Do not allow torching device to come in contact with flammable materials. Roofing surtace, walls, abutments and surrounding surfaces must be inspected prior to utilization of torching device so that necessary precautionary measures may be taken. 2. Keep torch flame moving at all times; failure to do so may result in ignition of surface and/or underlying materials. 3. Avoid prolonged contact with heat sensitive metals such as lead, as overheating of these metal surtaces could ignite underlying flammable surfaces. 4. Never use propane except in well-ventilated areas. 5. Manufacturer's safety and operating instructions provided with the torch system must be followed strictly. 6. Check all fittings and other equipment on the application equipment for leakage. , NEVER USE A FLAME TO CHECK FITTINGS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT. 7. Propane tanks are pressurized. Do not puncture. Do not expose to extreme heat. Tanks must be maintained a minimum safe distance away from torch flame. 8. Containers which contain or may have contained flammable material must be kept clear from the torch or other heat source. 9. Use base sheet recommended by manufacturer's roofing manual. Failure to do so is extremely hazardous as the base sheet provides a protective covering for underlying combustibles. 10. Cant strips used at roof/wall abutment must be composed of fire retardant material or protected from direct contact with torch flame. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L� �� J O � � � � � � � ��J � �� 07525-6 � � � � �� lJ 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Application personnel must remain on the job site for a minimum of one hour after completion of installation to inspect for any possible smoldering combustible material. Since fires can result hours after completion of work, periodical inspection thereafter must be made, the time and nature of which will vary depending on the size of the job and the nature of the application surface and abutments. Never place hot torching device on roof surface, insulation or any other surface or object, other than acceptable stand or holder or fireproof surface. Never leave a li�hted torching device unattended. Never use torching device to apply any material other than APP modified bituminous membrane. Allow torching device to cool completely to room temperature before removing it from roof. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide on-the job inspections, technical assistance and membrane application guidance as may be necessary to complete the roofing membrane application in accordance with manufacturer's warranty requirements. � 3.14 JOB COMPLETION �� , � � � � � � ''� C�J l�J �� L�J A. B. C. D. E. Inspect completed roofing and correct all defects to meet the specification requirements. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect the completed roofing system and notify the Contractor and Architect of any defects in the application. Clean up all debris, excess materials and equipment and remove from site daily. Clean any drips or spills of asphalt or primers. Restrict construction traffic and equipment movement on the completed roofing to only essential personnel. Provide appropnate protection against traffic and construction activities on completed roofs. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects HO Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07525-7 �*' � L:'d L�J L� �� J LJ � � �� 1�9 � � � LsJ � �� I� SECTION 07615 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY . A. Section Includes: Standing seam metal roofing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the standing seam metal roof system and includes the panels, panel clips, flashing, panel splices, ridge material, fascias, and all necessary fasteners for the above. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements: Procedures for submittals. 1. Shop Drawings: Erection/shop drawings for each product specified showing all erection procedures and accessories required. Field measure and verify dimensions prior to fabrication of inetal roofng. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. VicWest Steel. B. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements: 2.02 STANDING SEAM ROOF A. Product indicated is manufactured by VicWest Steel and is intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600. B. Product: Architectural Standing Seam as manufactured by VicWest Steel: 1. Pattern: Standing Seam. 2. Seam Height: 1-1/2 inches. 3. . Panel Width: 14 inches. 4. Panel Length: Continuous. 5. Gage: 24 gage. C. Exterior Finish: 1. Finish Material: Kynar 500; 30% silicone modified polyester. 3. Finish Color: Evergreen. D. Fasteners: Non-corrosive, concealed, as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. E. Sealant: As recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07615-1 F. Trim and Flashing: 1. Gable, eave and parapet wall flashing details matching metal roof panels as recommended by panel manufacturer, and as per approved shop drawing. 2. Provide flexible membranes, as recommended by the panel manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION � A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in conformance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Remove any strippable protective coating on the panels and flashings prior to installation and in any case do not allow the strippable coating to remain on the panels in extreme heat, cold, or in direct sunlight or other UV source. C. Caulk, seal and fasten so as to provide as complete weathertight installation. D. Install starter and edge flashings prior to panels. E. Install panels with true and level horizontal lines and plumb verticals. - F. Do no allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar metals. G. Do not expose edges of roof panels. 1. Provide caps, fascia, and trim as indicated and as per approved shop drawings. . H. Space clips on panels at 18 inches o.c. • I. Touch up minor scratches and abrasions. Replace defective material with good material. 3.03 CLEAN UP A. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. B. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding areas and grounds. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspections indicate are not in compliance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 07615-2 � � � � � � � � D � � � � a � � � .a � � � SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL � 1.01 SECTION 1NCLUDES � A. Flashings, counterflashings and fabricated sheet metal items. B. Reglets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09900 - Paints �nd Coatings: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Ptocess; 1997. B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 1996. C. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 1995. D. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1997a. E. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 1993. F. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 5heet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1993, Fifth Edition. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Meta1 Manual requirements, except as otherwise indicated. B, Maintain one copy of document on site. C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with three years of documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07620-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; 0.02 inch thick steel. B. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; mill finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES � A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Underlayment: ASTM D 226, organic roofing felt, Type I("No. 15"). C. Primer: Zinc chromate type. D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. E. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 2.03 FABRICATION � A. Comply with standards and details for sheet meatl flashings described by SMACNA in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked, seams. F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents thro.ugh roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surtace mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 07620-2 � ,� � � � � � � � � a 0 0 D a � a 0 � � � 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Seal metal joints watertight. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. • END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07620-3 � G�J C�� L�J � ��J l�J LJ PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated roof hatches, with integral support curbs, operable hardware, and counterflashings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. B. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Qirectory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on unit construction, sizes, configuration, jointing methods and locations when applicable, and attachment method. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation criteria, interface with � adjacent components. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUfREMENTS � A. Conform to applicable code for UL requirements as applicable to fire rated roof hatches. . B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of fire rated units. l� � � � � � L�J � 1�1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof Hatches: 1. BilcoCo. 2. Dur-Red Products. 3. Milcor LP. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ROOF HATCHES AND VENTS A. Products scheduled are those manufactured by The Bilco Company. The scheduled products establish an acceptable standard of quality. SEC710N 07724 ROOF HATCHES B. Roof Hatch Unit: Single leaf type. 1. Product: Bilco; Type "S". 2. Size: 2.5 feet x 3 feet. 3. Integral Steel Curb: 14 gage prime painted steel with 1 inch rigid glass fiber insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing; extended flange for mounting. 4. Flush Steel Cover: 14 gage prime painted steel; 1 inch glass fiber insulation; 22 gage steel interior liner; continuous neoprene gasket to provide weatherproof seal. 5. Pull up grab bar Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07724-1 5. Hardware: Cadmium piated finish: a. Compression spring operator and shock absorbers. b. Steel manual pull handle for interior operation. c. Steel hold open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release. d. Padlock hasp on interior. e. Hinges: Manufacturer's recommended type. 2.03 FABRICATION . A. Fabricate components free of visual distortion or defects. Weld corners and joints. B. Provide for removal of condensation occurring within components or assembly. C. Fit components for weather tight assembly. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings for weather tight installation. C. Apply bituminous paint on surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. D. Adjust hinges for smooth operation. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 07724-2 � � � � � L�J �•;. CI PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping materiais. SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING B. Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM E814 - Standard 7est Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. � B. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual. C. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. aD. WH (CERT) - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey. 1.03 SUBMITTALS u L�J � L�J L�J L�J LJ C'� C�� '� � � A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration. List manufacturer's product used and applicable rating for each penetration. List approval number for UL, FM or WH testing applicable to each penetration where firestopping is used. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the specified fire ratings in accordance with the following agency testing methods: 1. Listing in the current classification or certification books of UL, FM, or WH will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in pertorming the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for (03) three days after installation of materials. B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements of individual firestopping requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system Listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 07840-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas ' � B. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Hilti 2. Specified Technologies Inc. 3. 3M Company. C. Substitutions: Not permitted. D. Supply all products of this section from a single manufacturer. 2.02 SCHEDULE OF MATERIALS A. Products scheduled are those manufactured by Specified Technologies Inc. The scheduled products establish an acceptable standard of quality. B. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 1. Manufacturers: ' � a. Specified Technologies Inc.: Product; Pensil 300 Sealant. C. Foam Firestopping: Single component foam compound. 1. Manufacturers: a. Specified Technologies Inc.: Product; Pensil 200 Foam. D. Firestop Devices: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and collar. 1. Manufacturers: a. Specified Technologies Inc.: Product; SpecSeal Collar. E. Intumescent Putty: Compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 1. Manufacturers: a. Specified Technologies Inc.: Product; SpecSeal Putty. F. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cfean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond. . 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction. C. Adjacent to each penetration, indicate the agency approval number for UL, FM or WH testing applicable. Paint approval numbers in red letters, 3 mches high, stencil formed. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION . A. Clean adjacent surtaces of firestopping materials. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 07840-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � L�J l�! C�� L�J �� I l�J C�� LJ � � SECT(ON 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. C. Hollow gaskets. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. ' 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements; Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. . 1.06 WARRANTY � A. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART Z PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; multi- component. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturers standard range of colors. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in concrete. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints befinreen metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 07900-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � B. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Buty( or po(yisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. C. Generat Purpose (nterior Seafant: Acrytic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Interior waN and ceiling control joints. � b. Joints between door and window frames, millwork and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. d. Joints befinreen millwork and wall surtaces. D. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surtaces. b. Joints befinreen kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. � C•I u L�J � � B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; � compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatibfe with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTlON 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Pr.otect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. PerForm work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surtaces and material installation instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. C. ,i] Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. Halbach � pietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9s89 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas r�� J L�'J I� � L�'J r�J i � L�J 07900-2 a � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature rahges. F. Tool joints concave. G. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surtace. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Wo�th, Texas 07900-3 L�J � �, � SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL � 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES � A. Hollow metal doors, frames, and accessories. � 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors (`j and Hardware Reinforcings. �'� B. ASTM A 366/A 366M - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. � C. ASTM A 569/A 569M - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot- Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. j'j D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or U Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. E. ASTM B 117 - Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Apparatus. � F. ASTM D 1735 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using Water Fog Apparatus. � G. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. H. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. aI. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS � A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Include: , 1. Door and frame elevations and sections. � 2. Listing of all openings with description and locations. 3. Details of construction, including gages and anchors. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience installing products specified in this section. Q 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove wraps or covers from doors and frames upon delivery at the building site; clean and touch-up scratches or disfigurement caused by shipping or handling promptly with rust a inhibitive primer. B. Store units on planks or dunnage in a dry location; store doors in a vertical position spaced by blocking. � C. Store units covered to protect them from damage but in such a manner as to permit air circulation. � •' Summer len Branch Libra 08111-1 Halbach Dietz Architects g ry HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS - DOORS AND FRAMES A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Steelcraft 2. Republic 3. Kewanee 4. Ceco. B. Products scheduled are those manufactured by Steelcraft. The scheduled products establish an acceptable standard of quality. C. Doors 1. Steelcraft; Product: L Series. D. Frames 1. Steelcraft; Produc#: F Series. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01630. F. Supply products specified in this section from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MA7ERIALS A. Steel Sheet: One of the following: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quality. 2. Hot-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 569/A 569M, pickled and oiled, commercial quality. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, minimum A60 zinc coating. C. Primer: Withstand ASTM B 117 salt spray for 150 hours and ASTM D 1735 water fog test for organic coatings for 200 hours without deterioration. 2.03 DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES A. Door Construction: A standard 3 feet by 7 feet door shall meet requirements of ANSI A250.4 procedure for level A doors for 2,000,000 cycles and twist test of 300 pounds; provide test reports. , B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80; constructed as tested in accordance with NFPA 252 for specified fire resistance ratings. 1. Listed or classified by UL and bearing the fire rating label or seal of that agency. 2. Fire resistance rating: Indicated on drawings. 2.04 DOORS A. Doors: 1-3/4 inches minimum thickness, with steel face sheets of minimum 16 gage thickness. 1. Sizes: Indicated on drawings. B. Face and Core Fabrication: Visible seams on face sheets not permitted. 1. Manufacturers standard honeycomb core construction. C. Vertical Edge Fabrication: Join face sheets at vertical edges by continuous welding. 1. Single acting swing doors: Bevel each vertical edge 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 2. Continuous welding: Join door faces by continuous weld on each edge, extending full door height; grind, fill, and dress welds to provide smooth flush surface. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 08111-2 � � i � � l�' � I� � � � � u L�J � L!J � L�1 � � L�J D. Horizontal Edge Fabrication: Close top and bottom edges of doors with continuous steel channels, 16 gage minimum; spot-weld channels to both door faces. 1. Exterior doors: Provide openings in bottom closure to permit escape of entrapped moisture. 2. Doors to receive weatherstripping: Provide additional flush closing channel at bottom edge; spot-weld channel to both door faces. E. Hardware Preparation: 1. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors at factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and supplied templates. 2. Provide reinforcing plates at locations of surface-mounted and non-templated hardware. 3. Provide hardware reinforcing plates as follows: a. Full mortise hinges and pivots: 7 gage minimum. b. Lock face and flush bolts: 12 gage minimum. c. All other surface mounted hardware: 14 gage minimum. 4. Provide conduit, junction boxes, hardware enclosures, and access plates for doors to receive electro-mechanical operating hardware; access plates to be same material and gage as door, fastened with minimum of 4 Number 8-32 machine screws or Number 6 self-tapping sheet metal screws at maximum spacing of 12 inches on center. F. Moldings and Stops: Same material as door face material, minimum 20 gage, with butt corner joints. G. Louvers: Louver inserts of welded blade construction, minimum 20 gage metal thickness, inverted "V" profile, concealed fasteners. 1. Provide for doors specified or scheduled to have louver openings. 2. Sizes: As indicated on approved shop drawings. 2.05 FRAMES A. Frames: Welded type of galvanized steel sheet, minimum 16 gage thickness. 1. Si�es and Profiles: Indicated on drawings. B. Fabrication: Form frame members straight, and of uniform profile through length, with integral trim, of sizes and profiles indicated. 1. Welded frames: Miter perimeter trim faces and weld continuously; butt interior joints; butt stop joints. a. Weld contact edges of joints closed tight. b. Provide temporary steel spreader welded to jamb feet for bracing during shipping and handling. c. Provide rubber silencers at door to frame interface. 2. Stops: Minimum 5/8 inch in depth. 3. When shipping limitations so dictate, fabricate frames for large openings in sections designed for assembly in the field; install alignment plates or angles, of same material and gage as frame, at each �oint. C. Hardware Preparation: 1. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames at factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in accordance with approved hardware schedule and supplied templates. 2. Provide reinforcing plates at locations of surtace-mounted and non-templated hardware. 3. Provide hardware reinforcing plates as follows: a. Full mortise hinges and pivots: 7 gage by 1-1/4 inches by 10 inches minimum. b. Strikes: 16 gage minimum. c. Flush bolts: 12 gage minimum. � d. Closers: 12 gage minimum. e. All other surface mounted hardware: 12 gage minimum. D. Floor Anchors: Same material as frame material; minimum 18 gage. 1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for floor anchorage. Halbach � Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 08111-3 E. Jamb Anchors for Welded Frames in Stud Partitions: Same material as frame material; minimum 18 gage. 1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for wall anchorage of interior doors. 2. Thru-bolt anchors at each jamb for wall anchorage of exterior doors. 2. Provide the following minimum number of anchors, each jamb for indicated frame heights: a. Up to 60 inches: 3 anchors. b. Greater than 60 inches to 90 inches: 4 anchors. c. Greater than 90 inches to 96 inches: 5 anchors. . d. Greater than 96 inches: 5 anchors, plus one for each 24 inches, or fraction thereof, over 96 inches, spaced at 24 inches, maximum, on center. 2.06 FINISHING A. L:� After fabrication, fill and sand tool marks and surface blemishes on both faces and both vertical edges smooth and free from irregularities. Shop Prime: Apply primer to exposed surfaces; allow to cure prior to shipment. 2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Frames: 1. Width, measured between rabbets at the head: Nominal opening width plus 1/16 inch, minus 1/32 inch. � 2. Height (total length of jamb rabbet): Nominal opening heights plus or minus 3/64 inch. 3. Overall frame depth: Cross sectional profile dimensions: Plus or minus 1/32 inch. 4. Face: Plus or minus 1/32 inch. 5. Stop: Plus or minus 1/32 inch. 6. Rabbet: Plus or minus 1/32 inch. 7. Depth: Plus or minus 1/32 inch. 8. Throat: Plus or minus 1/16 inch; frames overlapping walls to have throat dimension 1/8 inch greater than dimensioned wall thickness to accommodate irregularities in wall . construction. B. Doors: 1. Width: Plus or minus 3/64 inch. 2. Height: Plus or minus 3/64 inch. 3. Thickness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 4. � Hardware cutout dimensions: Template dimensions plus 0.015 inch, minus 0. 5. Hardware location: Plus or minus 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Clearances: . 1. Befinreen doors and frames at head and jambs: 3/16 inch. � 2. Between edges of pairs of doors: 3/16 inch. 3. At door sills where a threshold is used: 3/8 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 4. At door sills where no threshold is used: 3/4 inch from bottom of door to finished floor. 5. Between door bottom and nominal surface of floor coverings at fire rated openings, as provided in NFPA 80, Paragraph 2.5.5: 1/2 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Prior to installation, check and correct frames for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist and plumbness. B. Verify openings are in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION � I:3 Install units in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation fl instructions. Install fire-rated assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08111-4 HD Job No. 9889 . Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � �� L�' � C. Finish surfaces having abrasion damage smooth; touch-up with rust inhibitive primer. D. Installation Tolerances: Do not exceed the following: � 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on a line, 90 degrees from one jamb, at the upper corner of the frame at the other jamb. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to the plane of the wall. � 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at face corners of jambs on parallel lines perpendicular to the plane of the wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or mmus 1/16 inch measured on the jamb at the floor. � 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed doors for correct swings and site tolerances. � END OF SECTION L•J �� L�f � �J l#1 L�J l#J � � �� Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library DCopyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 08111-5 ��. ■�-, L�, SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL � 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated. a1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. � B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Site finishing of doors. � 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork � Institute; 1997, Seventh Edition, Version 1.0. B. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1995. � C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS � A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. � aC. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, s�ecial beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory " finishing criteria, identify cutouts for louvers. � D. Samples: Provide finro samples of door veneer, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. Architect will view samples at project site. � E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.05 QUALI'TY ASSURANCE � A. Perform work in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1300, Custom Grade. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. � 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252. a 1. Listed and classified by UL' as suitable to for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. � � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08211-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library (� Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �.i 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1300. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.09 WRRRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide warranty for the following term: 1. Interior poors: Life of installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Veneer poors: 1. Eggers Industries. �. Southwood Door Company. � 3. Weyerhaeuser Architectural Doors. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOOR TYPES A. Flush Interior poors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction. 2.03 DOOR CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: AWI P-200, Section 1300, Type PC - Particleboard. B. Fire Rated Doors: AWI P-200, Section 1300, Type FD, hourly ratings as indicated. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Interior poors - Veneer: Custom grade wood veneer, Red Oak species, rift cut, with slip matched grain, for transparent finish. B. Stain color: Match Owner provided furniture. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Louvers: 1. Material and Finish: Roll formed steel; pre-painted finish to selected color. 2. Louver Blade: Inverted V blade, sight proof, light proof. 3. Frame: Radiused edge style with concealed fasteners. B. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08211-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � L�J C�� L'� � � � �*J � � L�J � LJ L�J � � � I�'J 2.06 FABRICATION � A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements. B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door. � C. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge. . D. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, 7 shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge, specifically for double doors. , E. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 1. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware. F. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles - Veneer Faces: Of same species as veneer facing. G. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. H. Bond edge banding to cores. I. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surtace hardware. J. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. K. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1600. 2.07 FINISH A. Site finish doors in accordance with Section 09900. Transparent finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWI P-200 requirements. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with and NFPA 80 requirements. B. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. C. Machine cut for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08111 and hardware specified in Section 08710. E. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. F. Install door louvers plumb and level. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 08211-3 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI P-200, Section 1300 for maximum diagonal distortion. B. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area. � C. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area. 3.04 ADJUSTING � A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 08211-4 � � l�' � C�� C�J �� 4sJ l�J lJ LI �1 � SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES � A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall locations. 1.02 REFERENCES A. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated access doors. 1. Provide access doors of fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to be installed. B. Provide products listed and labeled by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 MANUFACTURERS . A. Access Doors: � 1. Acudor Products Inc. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor. � B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ACCESS DOOR UNITS - WALLS AND CEILINGS � A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel. 1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel. 2. Door panels: 0.070 inch double sheet with integral non-combustible insulation filler. 3. Size: Ceiling;24 x24 inch. Wall; minimum 8 x 8 inch. � ' 4. Hardware: . a. Hinge: Concealed constant force closure spring type. b. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock. 5. Prime coat with alkyd primer. � l�J Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 . Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 08310-1 2.03 FABRICATION A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure�flush and square unit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION , A. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provid'e convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08310-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas L�J C�� ls] � u l�J � l�!' � LI � L# I � � � � � � 1�� { �1 SECTION 08410 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass and glass. B. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. B. Section 08462 - Automatic Sliding Doors. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1997. B. AAMA 605.2 - Voluntary Specification for High Pertormance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. C. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 1996. D. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 1995. E. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 1996. F. ASTM B 221 M- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional limitations. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08410-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Company, Inc. B. United States Aluminum Corp. C. Vistawall Architectural Products. D. Tubelite. E. Howmet. F. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 COMPONENTS • � A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Base Bid Finish: Class I Natural Anodized. 2. Alternate No. 3 Finish: Kynar 500. 3. Alternate No. 3 Color: Green; selected from manufacturers standard colors. B. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Flush. 3. Cross-Section: 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inch. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M). B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM 6209 (ASTM B209M). C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Perimeter Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900. E. Glass: As specified in Section 08800. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08410-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � �� LJ �I � L� C u � � � F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08800. 2.04 FINISHES A. Base Bid: Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611. Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. B. Alternate No. 3: High Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 605.2; multiple coats, thermally cured fluoropolymer system. Green color as selected from manufacturers standard colors. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. • D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. � B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. � 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. � B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. � D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. � E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. � G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08410-3 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library • Copyright 1999 �ort Worth, Texas I. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve pertormance criteria. J. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. • 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of�Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION • A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surtaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. E. Protect finished work from damage. END OF SECTION �� Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08410-4 . HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � C�� C�� L�J L� � �� L�J � C� L�J � L] � l�J SECTION 08462 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum sliding doors and frames. B. Automatic door operators, actuators, and safeties. C. Sidelights and transoms. D. Door signs. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS • A. Division 15 - Electrical: 115 VAC, single-phase wiring in conduit between operator enclosure and building power supply and low voltage wiring between enclosure and actuators and safeties. B. Division 15 - Electrical: 115 VAC, single-phase wiring in conduit between operator enclosure and remote switch station. 1.03 REFERENCES A. BHMA A156.10 - American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 1991 (ANSI/BHMA A156.10). B. UL 325 - Standard for poor, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1995. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of doors, operators, and interface with other products. D. Samples: Color charts or samples, for selection of inetal finishes. E. Operating and Maintenance Data: Operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists, and wiring diagrams. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Factory-trained, with minimum 3 years experience. 1.06 WARRANTY - A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. . B. Provide manufacturer's warranty for roller track for five years from date of completion. n Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library FoR Worth, Texas 08462-1 L+`J PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Stanley B. Efco Corporation. C. NT Dor-O-Matic. D, Horton Automatics. . E. Nabco Entrances; Gyro Tech. F. Products shown in this section are manufactured by NT Dor-O-Matic. The use of proprietary products is intended to estabfish a standard of quality f4r products specified in this section. Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer r�ot named. G. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. H. Provide all door operators from a single manufacturer. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Automatic Sliding Doors: Heavy duty extruded aluminum header and jambs, with interlocked sections and thru-rod bolted connections; complete with doors, sidelights, transom, and all hardware and accessories; complying with BHMA A156.10 and UL 325. 1. Door Type: Dor-O-Matic Astro-Slide, bi-parting sliding door system. 2. Doors sliding on outside of fixed sidelights. 3. Actuators: Motion detector, both sides. 4. Safety: Overhead-mounted infrared pre�ence detector and safety beams in door opening. 5. Base Bid Finish: Class I Natural Anodized. 5. Alternate No. 3 Finish: Kynar 500 coating; color as selected by Architect. 6. No exposed fasteners. B. Header: Completely enclosing track, operator, and belt drive, with anti-riser stops. 1. Track: 1l2 inch (13 mm) wide stainless steel-capped roller track. 2. Header Dimensions: 6-3/4 inches (171 mm) high by 4 inches (102 mm) wide; full width of rough opening. 3. Provide access door on bottom of enclosure for access to controls and removable components without removal of door or operator. C. Doors: Sliding panels with pressure adjustable emergency swing out operation (breakaway) to 90 degrees at any position in opening cycle. 1. Door Panels: Gfazed extruded aluminum, with thru-bolted connections, matching header and jambs. a. Glass: 1/4 inch, tempered. (1). Base Bid: Bronze tint on door # 01, clear on door # 02. (2). Alternate No. 3: Green tint on door #01, clear on door #02. b. Rail Height: 5 inches (127 mm); top rails 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). c. Meeting stile weatherstripping: Dual nylon pile. d. Overlapping stiles of doors and sidelights: Single nylon pile weatherstripping. 2. Door Suspe�s�on: 1-3I4 inch (4h mm) diameter nylon rollers, mounted over centerline of door, with steel corner support at hinge stile pivot to prevent sag. 3. Locking: Manual lock with interior thumbturn release. 4. Latching of Breakaway Panels: Magnetic latches. 5. Breakaway Closer: Provide mechanical spring closer to return swing out panel to normal sliding position. 6. Limit Arm: Provide limit arm to prevent swinging to more than 90 degrees. 7. Weatherstripping: a. Bottom: Ad�ustable nylon sweeps. b. Carrier and header contact surfaces: Single weatherstripping. LI � L#J � � � � � L�' �� l�J lRJ �LJ tJ � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08462-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � C:"J � D. Security Limited Access Hardware: Exit device mounted on breakaway panel, electric locking system, and controls. 1. Exit Device: Concealed verticai rod type, mid-panel with muntin in door, or push pad; requiring not more than 8 pounds (35 N) pressure to open; 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) bar travel. 2. Electric Lock: 5/8 inch (16 mm) steel bolt in header engaging sliding panel carrier; solenoid operated. � 3. Two Position Switch: Switch between day and night control options. 4. Day Operation: Normal operation using actuators. 5. Night Operation: a. Outside: Actuators deactivated; electric lock prevents forcible entry by positively � locking sliding panels. b. Inside- at door: Normal actuators deactivated; exit device operates breakaway, complying with NFPA 101 and local codes; swinging panels close and relock after . exit. � c. - Inside - remote operation: In addition to above, remote station open/close switch operates electric lock and door; doors reclose ar�d relock. 6. In case of power failure, doors are unlocked. E. Sidelights: Same construction as doors. � 1. Doors Sliding on Outside of Sidelight: Provide fixed sidelights; provide doors with side guides using roller bearing pivot assemblies, within sidelight area only. 2. Locking function: When doors are closed and locked, sidelights will not swing out. 3. Glass: 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick sealed insulating units. � (1) Base Bid: Tempered bonze tint on door #01, tempered clear on door #02. (2) Alternate No. 3: Tempered green tint on door # 01, tempered clear on door #02. I�� I� � �� r�� !° L..J �� L�J �� L�] � �� F. Door Operators: Completely electro-mechanical, DC motor powered, with positive pulley and cog belt drive in both opening and closing cycles; comply with BHMA A156.10. 1. Provide microprocessor control; do not use rotary cam mechanisms or door position switches in header. a. Adjustable opening and closing speed. b. Hold-open time adjustable from 1 ta 30 seconds. c. Adjustable safety reverse: If object is encountered during closing cycle, re-open door; if object is encountered during opening cycle (in sidelight area), stop door and slowly reclose. 2. Provide positive backcheck and latching by pre-set forces that drive the door fully open and closed. 3. "On-Off-Hold Open" switch: Three-position toggle or rocker type. 4. Energy Conservation Switch: Manual switch that reduces door opening width. 5. Service conditions: Satisfactory operation betw�en minus 30 degrees F(minus 34 degrees C) and 160 degrees F(71 degrees C). 6. Power supply required: 115 VAC. 2.03 ACiUATORS A. Motion Detectors: Dor-O-Matic "Astro-Scan". 1. Operation: Detect movement within adjustable zone near door and activate operator; deactivate operator upon no movement. 2. Adjustable sensitivity and time delay. 3.. Housing: Black anodized aluminum. 4. Lens: Black Lexan, screwed on; sealed to provide weather- and dust-proofing. 5. Mounting: Flush against headerlwall. 6. Operating unit: Gimbal-mounted oscillator allowing pattern adjustment. 7. Electronics: Removable printed circuit �oard with gold-plated contacts; unaffected by radio frequency interterence, normal police, fire, and ambulance frequencies, and other two-way radio frequencies; designed to eliminate line noise and surge current. 8. Service conditions: Satisfactory operation befinreen minus 30 degrees F(minus 34 degrees C) and 160 degrees F(71 degrees C); unaffected by humidity or moisture. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 08462-3 i� � Overhead-Mounted Infrared Presence Detector and Safety Beams: Dor-O-Matic "Look-See" system with 2 safety beams, interconnected with actuators. 1. Housing: Mounted in door frame (header). 2. Detection (safety) zone: Elliptical shaped, full width of door opening by 30 inches (760 mm) deep, centered on door opening. 3. Controls: Microprocessor. a. Detector or Safety Beam Inoperative: Prevent open door from closing. b. Ob�ect detected in safety zone during door closing: Re-open door. c. Ob�ect detected in safety zone, door open: Continue to hold door open. Signs: Provide signs complying with ANSI A156.10 and applicable codes; white letters on red background. 1. Outside: "AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOOR." 2. Inside (push side for breakaway): "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that door openings and doors are properly installed and ready for installation of automatic door equipment. B. Verify that electrical service is available, properly located, and of proper type. 3.02 INSTALLATION � A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; comply with BHMA A156.10. B. Grout recess around track. C. Verify that electrical connections are made correctly. 3.03 ADJUS7 AND CLEAN A. Adjust doors and operators for proper operation, without binding or scraping and without excessive noise. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08462-4 HD Job No. 9889 • Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � L`J � SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE � PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ry A. Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors. �} B. Hardware for fire-rated doors. � C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. D. Thresholds. . � E. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. � 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS � A. Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. � C. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same. 1.03 REFERENCES A. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors � and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 1990. B. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993. � C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1995. D. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire � Protection Association; 1997. E. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Associaiton; 1995. � F. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS � A. See Section 01300 -'Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: � 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists arid templates. � C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key � code. E. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. � Halbach � Dieiz Architects � Summerglen Branch Library 08710-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 0 F. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. � 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pertorm work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. NFPA 101. 2. NFPA 80. 3. NFPA 252. 4. Architectural Barriers Act Article 9102, Texas Civil Stautes. B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with ten years of experience. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Conform to Architectural Barriers Act Article 9102, Texas Civil States for handicapped accessibility. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. � 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections inv4lving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS � A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance taols and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. Halbach � Dietr Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 0871 �-2 � � L*'J � � � �L*'J `�J � � l*� LY EJ r , �J � � lJ ��J � L�J 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide ten extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide components from manufacturers listed below. All components listed may not be required. Existing hardware in use in adjacent areas of the project are to be used as the required standard of quality for hardware. Select hardware components from the following manufacturers. B. Hinges: Continuous Hinges. , 1. Markar Products inc. 2. Select. 3. Roton. � 4. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Hinges: 1. Bommer Industries, Inc. 2. Hager Companies. 3. Stanley Commercial Hardware. 4. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. D. Kickplates - Push/Pulls: . 1. Ives. 2. Rockwood. 3. Trimco. 4. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. E. Interchangeable Cores: . 1. Corbin Russwin. 2. Best Corporation: 3. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. F. Locksets: . 1. Best Lock Corp. 2. Arrow. 3. Yale Security, Inc. 4. Corbin Russwin 5. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. G. Electric egress. 1. Rixson Firemark. 2. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. H. Exit Devices: . 1.. Von Duprin, Inc. 2. Corbin Russwin. 3. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. I. Closers: . 1. LCN Closers. 2. Corbin Russwin. J. Overhead Stops: . 1. Corbin Russwin. 2. Rixson. 3. Dorma. 4. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. Halbach � Dietr Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08710-3 HD Job No. 9s8s Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 6 rl K. Weatherstripping: . 1. National Guard Products, Inc. , 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co. 3. Zero International, Inc. 4. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. L. Kick Down Stops / Silencers: . 1. Ives. 2. Glynn Johnson. 3. Rockwood. 4. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600�- Product Requirements. M. Wall Stops: . 1. Ives. 2. Rockwood. 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co., Inc. 5. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. N. Pry Guard 1. Rockwood. 2. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements 2.02 KEYING A. Construction Keying: 1. Furnish exterior door lock sets with keyed alike rerriovable construction core cylinders for use during construction. 2. Restrict distribution of construction keys. Maintain record of persons who have received keys and deliver copies of record to Owner upon request. 3. Provide permanent cores to Owner prior to substantial completion. At substantial completion, remove construction cores and replace with permanent cores. Provide keys to Owner and return construction cores to manufacturer. B. Permanent Keying: 1. Grandmaster to open all doors. 2. Coordinate other keying requirements with Owner. 3. Provide 15 master keys and 5 grandmaster keys. 2.03 FINISHES A. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section. PART 3 EXECUTION c � �}FTi'�II.G�iL�I► A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. � 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. . Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library . 08710-4 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � lJ � � � � � � �� l�l� �I � D. Opening Force: The maximum opening force for pushing or pulling open doors other than fire doors: 1. Interior hinged doors: 5 Ibs. 2. Sliding or folding doors: 5 Ibs. 3. Fire doors; Minimum force allowed by applicable governing codes. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. 3.04 ADJUSTING ' A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. The hardware supplier will be required to construct a complete hardware schedule. Complete sets of functioning hardware for each door, in compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act and all other applicable codes is required, even when not specifically shown in the following schedule. MANUFACTURES CODES: CR CORBIN RUSSWIN HA HAGER NG NATIONAL GUARD RX RIXSON TR TRIP�ICO RW ROCKWOOD SCHEDULE Hardware 1 Exterior & Vestibule Sliding Glass Doors: Doors: 1, 2 2 ea Cylinders 1000-118-613-MKD Balance of hardware by door manufacturer Hardware 2 Pair With Exit Device Doors: 3 6 ea Hinges � 2 ea Exit Device 2 ea Cylinder 1 ea Door closer/Stop � � L*'; lJ Hardware 3 Public Restroom Doors: 4, 5 3 ea Hinges 1 ea Pull 1 ea Push 1 ea Closer 1 ea Kickplate Halbach � Die� Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 X US10B X NRP ED 5400W x M55 x N955 X 613 3000 x 613 X GMKD DC 221 A X 690 x A2 CR HA CR CR CR SB1279 4.5 X 4.5 X US106 1975-2 X 613 1975-2 X 613 DC 2210 X 690 1025 x 613 ' HA TR TR CR TR Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 08710-5 Hardware 4: Passage Set Doors: 6, 3 ea Hinges 1 ea Passage Set 1 ea Fioor Stop 12794.5X4.5X613 �L3310 x NSD x 613 1210 Series 613 Hardware 5: Office/Storeroom ' Doors: 7, 8, 9, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 22 3 ea Hinges 1279 4.5 X 4.5 X 613 1 ea Office Lock CL3351 x NSD x 613 1 ea Wall Stop 1274 Series 613 Hardware 6 Delay Egress Exterior Door: 11 ' 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ea ea ea ea ea ea ea ea ea set ea ea ea Hinges Electric Hinge Magnetic Lock Door Control Unit Key Switch Alarm Sign Door Closer Threshold Weather-strip Drip Cap Door Sweep Pry Guard BB11684.5X4.5X613XNRP ED 5200S X M92 X 613 1710 X 24VDC X Mounting Bracket 3631/24 X 3600NFPA X 36001RDR X ZER24 9235 X L2 3272 3292-15 DC2210X689XA4 896 DKB V 155V DKB 16AD 200N DKB 320 x 32D HA CR TR HA CR TR HA RX RX RX RX CR NG NG NG NG RW OPERATION From inside, pushing the security exit device will retract the latch bolt but egress will be delayed by the magnetic lock. When the touch bar is depressed an irreversible process will be initiated that will immediately sound a local alarm and then release the magnetic lock within 15 seconds. The key switch indicating condition with 2 different colore� L.E.D.'s will allow authorized egress by shunting the alarm and releasing the magnetic lock for a period of time, field adjustable up to 30 seconds. The key switch will be used to set or reset the system. The system is controlled by the Door Control Unit which is typically mounted above the opening. Electrician and fire alarm contractor must interface with this system and must coordinate with the door hardware supplier. It shall be the electrician or security system installers responsibility to make final electrical connections. A sign complying with NFPA 101-1994 section 5-2.7.1 (d) shall be placed on the door adjacent to the device to read: "EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY. SALIDA GE EMERGENCIA. This door will open in 15 seconds. Alarm will sound. La puerta se abria en 15 segundos. La alarma va a sonar." � Hardware 7 Exterior Exit Doors: 12, 21 3 ea Hinges 1 ea Exit Device 1 ea Cylinder 1 ea Door Closer/Stop 1 ea Threshold 1 set Weather-strip 1 ea Drip Cap 1 ea Door Sweep 1 ea Pry Guard Door 12 only: 1 ea View Hole Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 6611684.5X4.5X613XNRP ED 5200S X N955 X 613 3000-178 X 613 X MKD DC2210X689XA4 896 DKB V 155V DKB 16AD 200N DKB 320 x 32U [:�'� Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas HA CR CR CR NG NG NG NG RW RW � 08710-6 � � � � a � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � Hardware 8 Storeroom Doors: 19 3 ea Hinges 1 ea Classroom Lock 1 ea Wall Stop Hardware 9 Book Drop Door: 20 3 ea Hinges 1 ea Office Lock 1 ea Closer 1 ea Wall Stop 1 ea Smoke Seal Hardware 10: Privacy Door: 14 3 ea Hinges 1 ea Privacy 1 ea Wall Stop Hardware 11: Double-Acting Door: 10 1 ea Floor Closer 1 ea Kickplate 1 ea Pull 1 ea Push 1 ea Deadbolt Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 1279 4.5 X 4.5 X 626 CL3357 x NSD x 613 x MKD 1274 Series 1279 4.5 X 4.5 X 613 Steel Base CL3351 x NSD x 613 DC2210 X 690 1274 Series 613 420 DKB 12794.5X4.5X613 CL3320 x NSD x 626 1274 Series W5023 X US1Q6 1025 x 613 1975-2 X 613 1975-2 X 613 DI3013 x 613 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas HA CR TR HA CR CR TR NG HA CR TR HA TR' TR TR CR 08710-7 �� l�J ,� � � � � 1�' � L�'! � � � � L�1 I�J � �I 4� �' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. SECTtON 08800 GLAZING B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors. B. Section 08305 - Sliding Glass Doors. C. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 1991 (Reapproved 1997). B. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 1992. C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 1991 (Reapproved 1995). D. ASTM E 330.- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1996. E. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997. F. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997. G. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1997. H. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with applicable local code. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas ODUOO-1 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit one sample 12 x 12 inch in size of glass units, showing coloration. E. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in pertorming the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Guardian Industries, Falconer Glass Industries. 2. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. . 3. Visteon, Ford Motor Co., Glass Div. 4. PPG. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Clear Float Glass (Type A): Clear, annealed. � 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select. 2. Thickness as required to meet performance requirements of this section.. C. Tempered Glass (Type B): Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1, Quality q3 glazing select. 2. Thickness as required to meet performance requirements of this section.. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 08800-2 . � �� LJ i� � � � � l�J � � l� LJ O �� 2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: � 1. Guardian Industries, Falcone� Glass Industries. 2. Interpane Glass Co. 3. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc. 4. PPG. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Base Bid; Insulated Glass Units Type C: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. Bronze color at outboard pane. Clear inboard pane. 1. Place low E coating on outboard surface within the unit. 2. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773. 3. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 4. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. 5. Outboard lite visible light transmittance: 4 percent. 6. Solar Energy Transmittance; 2 percent C. Base Bid; Tempered Insulated Glass Units Type D: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. Bronze color at outboard pane. Clear inboard pane. , 1. Place low E coating on outboard surface within the unit. 2. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773. 3. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 4. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. 5. Outboard lite visible light transmittance: 4 percent. 6. Solar Energy Transmittance; 2 percent D. Alternate No. 3; Insulated Glass Units Type E: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. Green color at outboard pane. Clear inboard pane. 1. Place low E coating on outboard surface within the unit. 2. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773. 3. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 7. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. 8. Outboard lite visible light transmittance: 6 percent. 9. Solar Energy Transmittance; 2 percent E. Alternate No. 3; Tempered Insulated Glass Units Type F: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. Green color at outboard pane. Clear inboard pane. 1. Place low E coating on outboard surface within the unit. 2. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773. . 3. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 7. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum. 8. Outboard lite visible light transmittance: 6 percent. 9. Solar Energy Transmittance; 2 percent 2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Pecora Corp. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 5. Provide glazing compounds as recommended by frame and glass manufacturer to accommodate specific installations. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08800-3 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Norton Pertormance Plastics Corp. 2. Pecora Corp. 3. Tremco, Inc. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 5. Provide glazing compounds as recommended by frame and glass manufacturer to accommodate specific installations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surtaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in �ccordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION � A. Install glass using methods and components recommended by the frame and glass manufacturer to accommodate specific installations. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. � B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surFaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. . END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 08800-4 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas l�J � l+!�f O � l�� L�J � � � � � l�J � [�f � SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall•framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Acoustic insulation. D. Gypsum sheathing. E. Gypsum wallboard. ' F. Joint treatment and accessories. � G. Textured finish system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS. A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of wall-mounted equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES � A. ASTM C 36 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 1997. B. ASTM C 79/C 79M - Standard Specification for Treated Core and Nontreated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board; 1997. C. ASTM C 475 - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsu�n Board; 1994. D. ASTM C 630/C 630M - Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board; 1996a. . E. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 1995. F. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 1997. G. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 1996. H. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases; 1996a. I. GA-201 - Using Gypsum Board for Walls & Ceilings; Gypsum Association; 1990. J. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 1996. 1.04 SUBMlTTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 09260-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Board: 1. G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. National Gypsum Co. 3. United States Gypsum Co. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product requirements. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel; depth and spacing as indicated on drawings; maximum deflection V120 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: C shaped with knurled faces; 25 gage. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: 1-1/2 inch x 9/16 inch cold formed, U-shaped, fabricated from not less than 16 gage zinc-coated, cold rolled steel sheets. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 3/4 inch. Screw type, fabricated from 25 gage steel with manufacturers standard protective zinc coating. � � l'J �� i�� O � � B. Exterior Non-Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section � 05400. . C. Ceiling hanger wire: 8 gage. D. Channel tie wire: 16 gage. 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: 5!8 inch. ,. 2. Edges: Tapered. B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; Type X, �L or WH rated; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Edges: Tapered. C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. , 2. Edges: Tapered. . D. Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 79/C 79M; moisture resistant and fire resistant type; sizes to minimize joints in place; water repellent paper faces; ends square cut. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Edges: Tongue and grooved. . 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: 2 inch . B. Corner Beads: Galvanized steel. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 09260-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � � :�J � l.��J C. D. E. F. G. Trim: ASTM C 840; Bead type as detailed. ' s � Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. , Textured Finish Materials: Vinyl-based compound; plain. . Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-drilling type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in p�ace. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION _ . e . ' � � A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION � A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. � � 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. '�' C. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard. 1. Extend stud framing throt�.gh ceilmg. Extend stud framing to structure above only where j'"� indicated. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection � j, transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. D. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures. Comply with Section 06114 for � wood blocking. 3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES (NSTALLATION !� LJ �� L'.1 �� , � � A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 3.04 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. 8ingle-Layer Fire-Rated: Install gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. � D. Double-Layer Installation: Use gypsum backing board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framin� or furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions and ceilings. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. E. Gypsum Sheathing: Install horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board except face layer of non-rated double-layer assemblies, which may be installed by means of adhesive lamination. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library ° Fo�t Worth Public Library ' Fort Worth, Texas 09260-3 � B. Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tile: ANSI A137.1, conforming to the following: 1. Size: 12 x 12 x 1/4 inch. 2. Shape: Square. 3. Edge: Cushioned. 4. Surface Finish: As selected by Architect. - 5. Color: As selected by Architect. '� C. Ceramic Mosaic Wail Tile: ANSI A137.1, conforming to the followingr .. = 1. Size: 2 x 2 x 5/16 inch nominal. 2. Shape: Square. � . 3. Edge:, Cushioned. � ' 4: Field Tile Finish: Ungiazed '` 5. 2 Accent Tile Finisi�es: Glazed 6. Color: Three separate colors as selected by Architect: • - . i D. Base: Porcelain Cera�nic floor tile for moisture absorption, surface finish, and color: 1. Size: 4 x 12 inch. . � 2. Top Edge: Bullno�ed or square as suitable to installation. " 3. Internal Corner: Coved. 4. External Corner: Bullnosed. 5: SurFace Finish: Match floor tile. - �- � 6. Color: Match floor tile. ' E. Wainscot Cap: Match wall tile for, surface finish, color and size. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Manufactiarers: . 1. American Olean. . � ' � 2. W.R. Bonsal Company. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. C. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: Latex-Portland cement type; ANSI A118.4. D. Color as selected by Architect 2.03 GROUT MATERIALS . A. Manufacturers: 1. American Olean. . ' 2. W.R. Bonsal Company. . B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. . �• C. Standard Grout: Latex-Portland cement type as specified in ANSI A118.6. 1. Color: as selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION , , , 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, and are ready to receive tile. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of floor conditions. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances speci�ed in Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of wall conditions� C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust�free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surtaces. Halbach � Die1z Architects Summerglen Branch Library - 09300-2 HD Job No. 9889 , Fort Worth P.ublic Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � a.i � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � L�1 � � � fJ � � 1!J � � [� � O LI f� � D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. • 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. � C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. � D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.10, manufacturer's instructions, and referenced TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Place thresholds at exposed tile edges. D. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tife, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. F. Form internal angles square and external angles bullno�ed. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. I. Grout tile joints. J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimitar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS ' A. Over interior concrete substrates. Install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113-98, Latex-Portland cement, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 INSTALLATION - WALLS A. Over cementitious backing board. Install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W243-98, Latex-Portland cement, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 CLEANING � A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. � Halbach � Die� Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 09300-3 L�J �' L�1 � � 1� '.#1 l�'J � � � � u O � l�J C�J � PART1 GENERAL SECTION 09442 EPDXY THIN-SET TERRAZZO FLOORING SYSTEM 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floor preparation and installation of 1/4-3/8 inch epoxy thin-set terrauo. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast In Place Concrete: Building structural flooring surFaces. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Epoxy Thin-Set Terrazzb, 1/4-3/8 inch in thickness, comprised of the following components: 1. Epoxy Terrazzo Matrix.binder resin. 2. Epoxy Filler. 3. Marble chips, sized for finished thickness. 4. Divider strips of brass. 5. Epoxy Terrazzo Grout and Grout Filler. 6. Seal coat. B. Completed system shall comply with the following minimum performance requirements: 1. Hardness, Shore D, per ASTM D 2240: 75. 2. Compressive Strength, perASTM D 695: 11,000 psi. 3. Tensile Strength, per ASTM D 638: 6,000 psi. 4. Flexural Strength, per ASTM D 790: 10,000 psi. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications on cured system and individual components, including physical and pertormance properties, test results, and Material Safety Data Sheets. C. Color Chart: Provide manufacturer's standard color chart for color selection. D. Samples: Provide cured samples not less than 6 by 6 inches for verification of color selection and finish texture. Include 6 inch length of divider stnp. Architect will view samples at project site. E. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout and spacing of divider strips and control joints. Provide details of terrazzo termination and transition to other flooring. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include special procedures such as installation of control and expansion joints, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, requirements for preparation of substrate, and final finishing and protection. Halbach � Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 09442-1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Quali�cations: Obtain all resinous components for flooring system from a single company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section and with not fewer than S years of documented experience. B. Installer's Qualifications: A company certified in writing by the flooring system manufacturer, having skilled mechanics with not fewer than three years of satisfactory experience in � installation of flooring systems of the type specified in this section. 1. Furnish a list of similar flooring projects installed within the previous 5 years. Include project name, area of terrazzo floonng actually installed, and contact information. 2. Furnish resumes of key project personnel, detai(ing relevant experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Defiver materiafs in manufacturer's undamaged, unopened containers clearly marked with the following information: 1. Product name and �number. � 2. Manufacturer name and contact information. 3. Component designation. 4. Product mix ratio. 5. Health and safety information. Q C Promptly inspect delivered material to verify quantities, conformance to requirements, and undamaged condition. Handle materia(s using methods that will prevent damage. D. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, keeping seals and labels intact and Isgible. Maintain temperatures within allowable range. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer's maximum recommended sheif life. � 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not begin installation until slab temperatures have been brought to a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F. Maintain that temperature during installation and for not less than 72 hours after installation has been completed. B. Do not begin installation until buildin�'s permanent lighting system has been completed and is operational. Maintain lighting at a minimum uniform level of 50 footcandles in areas where the epoxy terrazzo flooring system is being installed. C. Provide adequate ventilation during installation to prevent accumulation of toxic volatile compounds. 1.08 WARRANTY A. � See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide warranty signed by manufacturer for material and installer, agreeing to repair or replace defective materials within a period of one year after Date of Substantial Completion. Defective materials shall include epoxy terrazzo that has lost bond to substrate and areas that have worn through to substrate with normal use. Nalbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 09442-2 � t�J � �� O O � � � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. General Polymers Corporation. B. Harris Specialty Inc C. Master Builders, Inc D. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Products and systems indicated are those of General Polymers Corporation. Products and systems shown are intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions permitted tinder provisions of Section 01600. B. Primer: 3577LV Low Viscosity Low Modulus Epoxy. C. Binder Resin: 3520 Epoxy Terrazzo Matrix. D. Filler: 5270 Epoxy Filler. E. Aggregate: #0, #1, and #2 marble chips. F. Grout Coat: 3520G Epoxy Terrazzo Grout, with 5290 Grout Filler, mixed with grout or 5270 Epoxy Filler, broadcast into wet grout. G. Seal Coat: 4501 Acrylic Sealer. , H. Divider Strips: Zinc coated steel bottom strip with anchoring features or plastic strips, overall depth to conform to finished thickness of terrazzo, and exposed portion as follows: 1. Material: Brass. 2. Width: 1/8 inch nominal. 2.03 COLORS A. Match approved samples. PART 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are in proper condition to receive thin-set epoxy terrazzo. � B. Test concrete substrates to verify that moisture content does not exceed levels recommended - by manufacturer of epoxy terrauo materials. � 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare concrete substrate to receive thin-set epoxy terrazzo by removing laitance and ' opening surtace. � B. Achieve surface profile of concrete similar to medium grit sandpaper, free of bond-inhibiting contaminants, by means of light brush grit blasting. � C. Repair non-moving cracks in substrate with semi-rigid epoxy, complying with General Polymers Concrete 102. � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 09442-3 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � D. Prepare edge conditions in accordance with approved shop drawings. E. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATiON A. Apply each component of the epoxy thin-set terrazzo flooring system in strict compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adhere strictly to manufacturer's published mixing methods and comply with limitations on recoat windows, cure times, and environmental conditions. C. Install primer and/or membrane over prepared substrate in strict compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. D. Install divider and control joint strips in locations indicated and at proper elevation. E. Place terrauo mix over'primed substrate or membrane to achieve thickness indicated on drawings � . F. Cure thin-set epoxy in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, taking care to prevent contamination. 3.04 FINISHlNG A. Produce final surface to match approved samples. B. Grind terrazzo surtaces with power disc machine, sequencing from coarse to fine grit abrasive, using a wet method. C. Apply grout mix matching mortar to fill honeycomb exposed during grinding process. Remove patch mix by grinding with fine grit abrasive. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Scrub and clean epoxy terrazzo surfaces with cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Immediately after drying, apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 PROTECTION � A. Do not permit traffic over finished terrazzo surfaces. END OF SECTION � �� CJ . � � � '�7 ,� � � � . � � �1 � � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 09442-4 � � � � � � � � � � � � l�J � � � O � SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES � A. Suspended me#al grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS • A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant. B. Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels: Access panels. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 1995. B. AS7M C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 1996. C. ASTM E 580 - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint; 1996. D. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1996. E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resisiance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistive Assemblies: Complete assembly listed and classified by UL for the fire resistance indic�ted. B. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen 6ranch Library 09511-1 HD Job No. 9889 • Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat and cooling is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide ten percent extra acoustical units of each type unit specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: � 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E 1264, Class A. 1. Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and classified for the fire- resistive assembly the suspension system is a part of. C. Products scheduled are those manufactured by Armstrong World Industries. The scheduled products establish an acceptable standard of quality. D. Base Bid; Acoustical Tile: Armstrong Fissured 705. 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Edge: Tegular. 4. Surtace Color: White. � 5. NRC: 0.55. E. Alternate No. 6; Acoustical Tile: Type; Armstrong Cirrus Tegular 549: 1. Size: 24 x 24 inches. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 3. Edge: Tegular. 6. Surface Color: White. 7. NRC: 0.65. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2.� Chicago Metallic Corp. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled, with painted finish; Intermediate-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White to match ceiling tile. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Wo�th, Texas 09511-2 � � � `'"�J � L61 O l' �: � I� � � � � � � i� � l;l � ' 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. - F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrymg channels to span the extra distance. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and nvet corners. K. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 1 inch movement. Maintain visual closure. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. Halbach � Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 09511-3 E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. G. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system; comply with fire rating requirements. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library ND Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 09511-4 � '�J � � `�� O � C�� L"J l�J O PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vinyl composition tile flooring. B. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1997a. B. ASTM E 662 - Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; 1995. C. ASTM F 1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 1995a. D. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 1998. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire performance ratings as follows: 1. Flame spread: Maximum 75, per ASTM E 84. 2. Smoke developed: Maximum 450, per ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke density: Maximum 450, per ASTM E 662. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.06 ENVlRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F(13 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (72 degrees C). B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F(21 degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F(13 degrees C). 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide ten percent extra material, of each type and color specified. Halbach � Dietz Architects � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 09650-1 PAFtT 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: ASTM F 1066: 1. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Pattem: As selected by Architect. 4. Manufacturer: a. Mannington "Essentials". b. Armstrong Industries. c. Azrock. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS - BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set , straight and cove, and as follows: 1. Height: 2-1/2 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Satin. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 7. Manufacturers: " a. Jonsonite, Inc. b. Burke Industries c. Roppe Corp. d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Rubber. D. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surtaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03300 and are ready to receive resilient flooring. � B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 09260, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. C. Verify that sub-floor surFaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 09650-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � � � � � � � � � �' � � a � l�f 3.04 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. � F. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. G. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. ' 3.05 INSTALLATION - BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. � Halbach � Dietz Architects� � HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 09650-3 i � 1� r--� �� i .) ti�, � � � r- � ►� �- •, � �" �� i �; r� � � `� ' Y7 a�{ �� -. � r L � ' . .� F � � ;� � � t i a � � SECT(ON 09680 � , CARPET � PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES � A. Carpet, stretched-in, with cushion underlay. B. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS � , A. Section 09685 - Carpet Tile. '' 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' � . A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. , B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning: 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE . , . , A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manu,facturing specified carpet with minimum ten years documented experience. . B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum five years experience. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after installation. � C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS - - A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Provide ten percent extra material of each type, color, and pattern specified. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summe�glen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 09680-1 � � � � � � � � � . . � � L:J � � O �� 0 � � PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTtON INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. � 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09680 - Carpet: Broadloom carpet. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for SurFace Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1997a. B. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 1997. C. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 1995. 1.04 SUBMII?ALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. B. Provide 10% extra material of �ach type, color, and pattern specified. SECTION 09685 CARPET TILE 0 Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 09685-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mannington Commercial. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PRODUCT A. Products indicated are manufactured by Mannington Commercial and are intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions are permitted under provisions of Section 01600. B. Modular with enhanced back, manufactured by Mannington Commercial, Basics 20; conforming to the following criteria: 1. Tile Size: 18 x 18 inch, nominal. 2. Color: As selected'by Architect. 3. Pattern: As selected by Architect. 4. Construction: Graphics Loop Pile 5. Dye Method: 66% Solution, 34% Yarn 6. Gage:1/10. 7. Stitches: 9 per inch. 8. Pile Thickness: .121 inches 9. Tufted Yarn Weight: 20 Ounces 10. Primary Backing Material: 100% Woven synthetic 11. Secondary Backing Material: Macro-Tec Reinforced Composite C. Modular with enhanced back, manufactured by Mannington Commercial, Appointments; conforming to the following criteria: 1. Tile Size: 18 x 18 inch, nominal. 2. Colors: Two colors as selected by Architect. 3. Pattern: As selected by Architect. 4. Construction: Graphics Loop 5. Pile Fiber & Type: 100% Dupont Antron Lumena Type 6.6 BCF Nylon with Dura Tech; Soil Resistant Technology, Anti-Microbial Processing and Permanent Static Control 6. Dye Method: Solution Dyed 7. Gage:1/10 8. Stitch Rate: 13 per inch 9. Pile Thickness: 1.19 inches 10. Tufted Yarn Weight: 26 ounces per square yard 11. Average Density: 7866 ounces per cubic yard 12. Primary Backing: 100% woven synthetic 13. Primary Precoat: 100% vinyl non-aqueous closed cell polymer 14. Cushion Backing Structurel: Macro-Tec Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer with Microban Anti-Microbial Treatment D. Enhanced Back: 1. Density: Minimum 14 pounds. 2. Thickness: Maximum 3/8 inches. 3. Compression Force Deflection: At 25%, not less than 4 psi; at 65%, not less than 10 psi. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Edge Strips: Rubber, color as selected. B. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material, releasable type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03300 and are ready to receive carpet tile. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 09685-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � �� ' � L�! �� O � [J �I il� �f �� B. Verify that sub-floor surFaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fiil minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surtace. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install carpet tile �in accorctance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surFaces without gaps. D. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. E. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING . A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 • END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas , 09685-3 � D. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. E. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. G. Comp(ete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surtaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION L^l � �� 0 �� !I� � � �J u � W Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 09685-3 � � i� � ��1 �� L*1 `� � � `� L:J � 1`!1 �� SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 9 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Fie(d application of paints and coatings. C. See Schedule - Surfaces to be finished at end of Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. PDCA (MAN) - Architectural Specification Manual; Painting and Decorating Contractors of America. i 1.03 DEFINIT(ONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.04 SUBMITTQLS � A. See Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements; submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, inclu�ing VOC and MSDS product data. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surFace prep�ration procedures. 9.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE I �A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in ma�ufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experi nce. B. Applicator Quali�cations: Company specializing in perforriiing the work of this section with mirnmum �ve years experience. � 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating r�quirements for products and finishes. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION ( A. � C. � Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers;� inspect to verify acceptability. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of p�aint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. � . J Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature'of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manuf�cturer's instructiorts. � 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surtace and ambient temp�ratures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. _ � B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-hei�ht at substrate surface. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Lib ary 09900-1 �j ND Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Libr�ry I I Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, 7exas u 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. B. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers - Paints, Primers, and Sealers. 1. Kelly-Moore Paint Co.. 2. Sherwin Williams Company. 3. Pittsburgh Paints. 4. Jones Blair. 5. Benjamin Moore. 6. Polomyx. (Three color). B. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Coating designations are shown for Kelly-Moore products. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Acrylic, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with zinc chromate primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel; 1250 Acryl-Lustre. C. Galvanized Metals, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer. 2. Low Sheen: Two coats of acrylic enamel; 1245 Acryl-Velvet. � E. Wood, Semi-transparent stain; two coat: 1. Two coats; 1285-600, Acry-Shield Stain Base. Pavement Markings: 1. Two coats of color to match existing; 2130 Traffic Line Finish; white color. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Coating designations are shown for Kelly-Moore or Polomyx products. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600 - Product Requirements. B Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Acrylic 3 Coat: 1. One coat of alkyd primer; 1725 Kel-Guard 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel; 1685 Dura-Poxy. C. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. Touch-up with acrylic primer; 1725 Kel-Guard. 2. Semi-gloss: Three coats of acrylic enamel; 1685 Dura-Poxy. D. Galvanized Metal, Acrylic, 3 Coat: 1. One coat galvanize primer; 1722 Kel-Guard. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of acrylic enamel; 1685 Dura-Poxy. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 09900-2 � � � � I� �J L� �� . �' � � �=1 � LI � � O � � E. Gypsum Board, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of latex primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; 1640 Acry-Plex. F. Gypsum Board, Multicolor Specialty Coating; water based: 1. Manufacturer recommended number of coats for gypsum board surfaces. 2. Provide products manufactured by Polomyx. . 3. Colors and pattern: 3 color as selected by Architect 4. Water Based 5. Substitutions: Not permitted. G. Wood - Transparent: 1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only). 2. One coat of stain; 1286-600 Waterborne Wiping Stain. 3. �One coat sealer; 4183 Kel-Lac Ultra Solids Sanding Sealer 4. Finish: One Coat; Eggshell 4187 Kel-Lac Ultra Solids Satin Lacquer. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. , PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 3.02 PREPARATION A. B. Surtace Appurtenances: Remove or mask electric�l plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Surtaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surFace finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Concrete Surtaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. F. Gypsum Board SurFaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. Halbach s Die� Architects Summerglen Branch Library 09900-3 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas IL^J �J G. Gaivanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld spiatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surFaces. K. Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. 3.03 APPLICATION A. B. C, D. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. B. C, D. Paint shop-primed equipment, where indicated. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01400 — Quality Requirements fn� general requirements for field inspection. 3.06 CLEANING A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. , 3.07 SURFACES NOT FINISHED A. Do not paint or finish the following items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3. Stainless steel items. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas u l�'J � � ,� �I 1� �. � O � 0 � O L"J 09900-4 � � i� I *", I�I � � � i�J � � � � � l�J [�I. � L�! L�J � � SECTION 10160 • METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL � 1.01 SEC710N INCLUDES A. Metal toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. B. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. C. FS RR-P-1352 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete. _ 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan,�elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, doorswings. C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS . A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Accurate Partitions Corporation: Product; Concord. � B. Ampco Products: Product; Overhead Braced. C. Flush-Metal Partition Corp.: Product; Flushite. D. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 zinc coating. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. 7oilet Compartments: FS RR-P-1352; Baked enameled steel, floor-mounted headrail-braced. B. Doors, Panels, and Pilasters: Sheet steel faces, pressure bontled to sound deadening core, formed and closed edges, mitered and welded corners ground smooth. 1. Panel and Door Faces: 20 gage. 2. Pilaster Faces: 20 gage. Halbach � Dietz Architects Far North Branch Library 10160-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas C. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. , � 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch, out-swinging. D. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch thick, of sizes required to suit compartment width and spacing. E. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with finro panel brackets, and floor-to-ceiling vertical upright consisting of pilaster anchored to floor and ceiling. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666 Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 inch high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow stainless steel tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size, with cast socket wall brackets. C. Brackets: Satin stainless steel. D. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. E. Hardware: Polished stainless steel: 1. Pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; two per door. 2. Strike keeper and throw latch: Provide rotating bar type latch and strike. 3. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 4. Provide door pull for outswinging doors. I��1\'Ih]ILI►��J A. Baked Enamel Steel Compartments: Clean, degrease, and neutralize. Follow immediately with a phosphatizing treatment, prime coat and two finish coats baked enamel. B. Color: As selected by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify correct spacing of and befinreen plumbing fixtures. D. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Attached panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. • E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged enamel finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. Halbach � Dietz Architects Far North Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 � Fort Worth, Texas 10160-2 � � � � �` � � � O � � � . � � l�l r I�, L'�J L� ��J � �� 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. , B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out swinging doors to closed position. - C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Far North Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 10160-3 L�J � � � � l�J � � � � I�I � � � LJ LJ � �J � PART 1 GEtVERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES � . A. Surface-mounted acrylic / PVC corner guards. � B. Mounting hardware, accessories, and trim. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.04 SUBMITTALS • - A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's complete and current product data for each product required, including complete installation requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Koroseal Wall Protection Systems. � B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requi�ements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Rigid high impact acrylic/PVC. 2.03 SURFACE MOUNTED CORNER GUARDS A. Product indicated is manufactured by Koroseal Wall Protection systems and is intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600. � A. Product: Koroseal "Korogard" Thermoformed Corner Guards. 1. Size: 1%z' x 1%Z". 2. Edges: Beveled. 3. Mounting: Adhesive installation. 4. Color: As selected by Architect 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Provide appropriate fasteners and accessories as required to properly complete corner guard installation. SECTION 10263 CORNER GUARDS PART 3 EXECUTION . 3.01 EXAMINATION , A. Verify that walls are in proper condition to receive installation of corner guards. � 1. Surface mounted corner guards must be installed after wall finishes have been completed. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 10263-1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install corner guards in full compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Surface Mounted Corner Guards: Fasten directly to finished wall surfaces using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING . A. Verify that corner guards are plumb and rigidly secured to substrate; make any adjustments required. . B. Clean corner guards and immediate areas of installation, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. Remove from project site packaging and debris caused by installation. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 10263-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � �J L�J � � L!' � LJ L�' � L■'J I�I � SECTION 10267 PROTECTIVE WALLCOVERiNG PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION fNCLUDES , A. Protective wallcovering. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide Submit manufacturers product data including installation instructions. C. Samples: Submit two ,•7 x 9 inch in size, illustrating thickness, pattern and color. D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions for protective wallcovering. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing �in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. � 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION � A. Deliver to project site in original unopened containers and packaging with labels clearly indicating material and manufacturer. B. Store protective wallcovering under cover and elevated above grade. Maintain storage temperature above 50 degrees F. Store materials flat. Do not stand rolls or sheets on end. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain constant minimum air temperature of 65 degrees for a minimum of 48 hours before and during installation. B. Maintain wa11 temperature between 65 and 68 degrees F during instalfation. C. Do not expose walls to direct sunlight during or after installation. D. Do not install if relative humidity is greater than 80°!0. � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTUR�RS � A. Koroseal Wall Protection Systems B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. � ' �� L�l Halbach � Dietz Architects Far North Branch Library HB .lob No. 9889 � Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 10267-1 2.02 PROTECTIVE WALLCOVERING ` A. Product indicated is manufactured by Koroseal and is intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions are pei mitted under provisions of Section 01600. B. Koroseal "Korogard" Protective Wallcovering: Rigid high-impact acrylic / polyvinyl chloride sheet. . � 1. Fire Rating: Class A. 2. Thickness: .080 inches. 3. Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard textures. 4. Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturers standard patterns and colors. 2.03 ADHESIVES A. Furnish adhesives approved for use by protective walicovering manufacturer. 2.04 ACCESSORIES ' A. Accessory moldings and caulk: Provide moldings and caulk by walicovering manufacturer, specifically manufactured to ensure coordinatian with walllcovering. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect wall surfaces to receive protective walicovering. Notify the Architect in writing if wall surfaces are not acceptabie. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare walls in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. B. Remove dust, dirt, grease, oil, loose paint, and scale. C. Seal walls with white prime seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install protective wallcovering to walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow protective wallcovering and adhesive to precondition for a minimum of 24 hours at a temperature between 65 and 85 degrees F before installation . C. Install sheets with texture running in�the same direction for uniform appearance. 3.04 CLEANING � A. Clean protective wallcovering in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Remove excess adhesive and lay-out marks. � �.TZ�T��X��C�1►i Halbach � Dietz Architects HB Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Far North Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 10267-2 L�l � � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flagpoles: Flagpoles provided by Owner. PART 1 GENERAL D1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum Flagpoles. � 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01100 - Summary: Owner furnished items. � u � L�J � � � L�J LeJ � � L�J � � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat metal sleeve surtaces below grade and surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials with asphaltic paint. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Electrically ground flagpole installation. C. Fill foundation tube sleeve with concrete specified in Section 03300. D. Install foundation plate and centering wedges for flagpoles base set in concrete base and fasten. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 inch. 3.05, ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating devices so that halyard and flag function smoothly. SECTION 10350 FLAGPOLES END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects HB Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 10350-1 � L�J l�l � L�1 L�] LJ � l�J � L!J L�J � � � ��J SECTION 10450 CAST METAL LETTERS AND PLAQUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION 1NCLUDES � A. Cast aluminum letters. B. Cast bronze plaques. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide'product data indicating letters to be provided; include letter sizes and attachment method. Provide product data indicating plaques to be provided; include plaque size, copy {ayout and attachment method. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of dacumented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store cast letters and plagues under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. ASI Sign Systems. B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2,Q2 PRODUCT A. Products indicated are manufactured by ASI Sign Systems and are intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Subst�tutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600. B. Cast Letters: LC Series; Cast Aluminum Letters. 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Height: As indicated on drawings. 3. Finish: As selected by Architect. C. Cast Plaques: Cast bronze plaque; ASI Sign Systems. 1. Thickness and size: As mdicated on drawings. 2. Copy layout: Supplied by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I�i � Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 10450-1 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean cast letters and plaques following installation.. B. Protect installed cast letters and plaques from subsequent construction operations. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Provide number of letters and type as shown on drawings. B. Provide one cast plaque at location indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 10450-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 7999 Fort Worth, Texas l�'; L� aPART 1 'GENERAL SECTION 10500 LOCKERS ['� 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES u A. Locker units with hinged doors. � B. Metai bases and tops. � 1.02 REFERENCES � A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1997. 1.03 SUBMITTALS � A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories. DC. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION pA. Protect locker finish and adjacent surFaces from damage. C�� l�J � ��' Lil CI�' LJ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lockers: 1. Lyon Metal Products. 2. Penco Products, Inc. 3. Republic Storage Systems Co. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS , A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 33 (230), G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled; to the following minimum thicknesses: 1. Body and Shelf: 24 gage 0.024 inch 2. Door Outer Face: 18 gage 0.048 inch 3. Door Inner Face: 20 gage 0.036 inch � 4. Door Frame: 16 gage 0:060 inch 5. Hinges: 14 gage 0.075 inch 6. Base: 20 gage 0.036 inch 7. Sloping Top: 20 gage 0.036 inch 8. Trim: 20 gage 0.036 inch 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. For Each Locker: Two single prong wall hooks, coat hanger bar. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 10500-1 2.04 FABRICATION A. Locker Units: B. Width: 12 inches. � C. Depth: 12 inches. D. Height: 72 inches. � E. Configuration: single tier. F. Mounting: Surface mounted. G. Base: Metal base. 1. Base Height: 4 inch. H. Top: Sloped metal with closures. I. Locking: Equipped for combination locks. J. Ventilation Method: Door louvers. K. Class: Quiet. L. Locker Body: Formed and flanged; with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded. M. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gaskets and latching for quiet operation. N. Doors: Hollow sandwich construction, 1 3/16 inch thick; welded construction, channel reinforced top and bottom with intermedia�e stiffener ribs, grind and finish edges smooth. O. Hinges: Two for doors under 42 inches high; three for doors over 42 inches high; weld securely to locker body and door. P. Locking device supplied by Owner. Q. Number Plates: Provide rectangular shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 1/2 inch high of block font style with ADA designation, in contrasting color. R. Provide ventilation openings at top and bottom of each locker. S. Form recess for operating handle and locking device. T. Finish edges smooth without burrs. U. Fabricate sloped metal tops, ends and closure pieces. 2.05 FINISHING � A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with one coat of baked enamel. B. Paint locker units 1 color, as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION � A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. B. Verify bases and embedded anchors are properly sized. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library � 10500-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas U D � � a � � � a � a a 0 a 0 D � � � 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers plumb and square. C. Place and secure on prepared base. D. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. E. Install end panels, filler panels, and sloped tops. F. Install accessories. . G. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surtaces. END OF SECTION � Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 , Fort Worth, Texas 10500-3 Ll � � SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS � PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES a B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. - 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS � A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking: Wood blocking and shims. 1.03 REFERENCES , A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association; n 1998. l,.1 B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protect�on Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current � edition. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS � A. Conform to NFPA 10. B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated. � 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. � B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. � D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS aA. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. . I� �� I��J Ll IL�J PART 2 PRODUCTS 2:01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. B. Substitutions: Section 01600 — Product requirements. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Product indicated is manufactured by Larsens Manufacturing Company and is intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600. B. Product: MP 10, Multi-Purpose Series Dry Chemical. Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort WoRh, Texas 10523-1 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Product indicated is manufactured by Larsens Manufacturing Company and is intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600. B. Product: Model Number SS 0-2409 with Vertical Duo Door. C. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. D. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Anodized to clear color. E. Finish of Cabinet Interior: Match exterior. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION � � A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. 1�►UZ�7�9X��[�7►1 ti Halbach s Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 10523-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library " Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � l�1 �� 1�' l�J � l'#1 SECTION 10557 BOOK RETIlRNS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prefabricated book returns. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product literature for book returns indicating; product proposed, physical dimensions and manufacturers installation instructions. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. � 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver book returns to project site in unopened containers suitable for shipping to project site. B. Store book returns under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS � 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Highsmith. � B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 BOOK RETURNS � A. Products indicated are manufactured by Highsmith and are intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600. � B. Book return for exterior applications: Highsmith No. L98-65514. 1. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufactureres standard colors and finishes. C. Book return for interior applications: Highsmith No. L98-65473. j� 1. Finish: Clear powder coat finish. �� 2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. � � � l�J � PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION � A. Verify that walls receiving book returns are complete and ready for installation of book returns. Halbach � Dietz Architects Far North Branch Library 10557-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas ' 3.02 INSTALLATION A. InstaA in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust book returns for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean book returns in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Protect installed book returns from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Far North Branch Library 10557-2 HD Job No, 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, 7exas r�� C � � � l�!J PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 10810 TOILET ACCESSORIES 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Toilet Room Accessories. B. Utility Room Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels; 1997a. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data for products specified, indicating selected options and accessories. C. � � E. Closeout Submittals: Warranty documents, issued and executed by manufacturer of products of this section, and countersigned by Contractor. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND NANDLING � � ��J L�J � � � � A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing of products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging. B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation. 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Shop Drawings: 1. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. 2. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. 3. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section. Quality Assurance Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each specified product. A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc. C. Substitutions: Section 01600 — Product Requirements. Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 10810-1 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 18-8 alloy. 2.03 PRODUCTS A. Refer to Schedule at end of section. PAR7 3 EXECUTION � 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings. 2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with shop drawings. B. Installer's Examination: 1. Have installer of this section examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed, then submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable. 2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect within 24 hours of receipt. 3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited. 4. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before final inspection. B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities. B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged finishes caused by subsequent construction activities. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Products shown are manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Co. and are intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions are permitted under provisions of Section 01600. Accessory Description Manufacturer No. Manufacturer Towel Dispenser / Waste Receptacle B-3961 Bobrick Soap Dispenser B-2112 Bobrick Sanitary Napkin Disposal B-270 Bobrick Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 10810-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �� i � � � � � r � � � � � � f � � � � Toilet Tissue Dispenser Mop and Broom Holder Baby Changing Station End of Schedule n Halbach � Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright1999 B-4288 B223X36 62210 END OF SECTION Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas Bobrick Bobrick Bobrick 10810-3 � � �� LJ lJ C � � � � � L�J lJ [fJ L1 L�J SECTION 11050 WALL SAFE PART 9 GENERAL 1.01 SECT(ON INCLUDES A. Prefabricated wall safe. 1.02 SUBM(TTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product data illustrating conformance with provisions of this section. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AWD PROTEC710N A. Deliver wall safe to project site in manufacturers unopened protective shipping container. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mosler Inc. 2.02 PRODUCT A. PROTECTALL W910 Wall Safe; manufactured by Mosler Inc.. B. Other manufacturers may offer equivalent products: Substitutions permitted under provisions of Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATlON A. Verify that wall surtace and stud arrangement are suitable for wal! safe installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION - A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 ERECTfON TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING . A. Adjust wall safe for smooth operation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wall safe from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Halbach � Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 11050-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas u �� SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 GENERAL � 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES . A. Automatic electric projection screen. � � 1.02 REFERENCES A. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. � 1.03 SUBMtTTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. � B. Product Data: Provide product literature indicating projection screen size, surface finish, border type, motor characteristics and screen housing. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate installation procedures including required electrical connections and Delectrical characteristics. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the � purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION � A. Deliver projection screens to project site in manufacturers unopened protective shipping cartons. , B. Store projection screens under cover and elevated above grade. � 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS ` A. Coordinate projection screen installation with size, location and installation of electrical service ('� utilities. u 6. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. � � � � � � PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Da-Lite Screen Company Inc. B. Draper. C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Far North Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 11132-1 2.02 PROJECTION SCREEN A. Product indicated is manufactured by the Da-Lite Screen Company and is intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions are permitted under provisions of Section 01600. B. Projection Screen: Boardroom Electrol 1. Screen Size: 70 x 70 inches. 2. Viewing Surface: Matte White. � 3. Electrical characteristics: 120 volt; 60 Hz; 1.0 amp. 4. Screen fabric: Fiberglass; flame and mildew resistant. 5. Borders: None. 6. Case: Wood with metal lined wiring compartment. � 7. Access door: Hinged; automatic operation with raising and lowering of screen. PART 3 EXECUTlON 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that space above ceiling is ready for installation of screen and electrical connections are in place and of the proper characteristic. 3.02 INSTALLATION , A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. 3.03 ERECTlON TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND OPERATION A. Adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances. B. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative. 3.08 PROTECT(ON A. Protect installed projection screens from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Far North Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 11132-2 � LJ � � l�] � LJ �� J � l'!'J L*J � L�J SEC710N 12496 VERTICAL BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually-operated vertical blinds and accessories for sun/glare/heat control and room darkening. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, product descriptions, installation instructions, detail sheets. • C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color chart or sample set. D. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions and interFace with other products. � 1. Room schedule including field-verified dimensions of each opening to receive window shade systems. 2. Indicate System Series, operator, fabric selection, and mounting type. 3. Indicate control type. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Installer: Approved by manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original cartons. B. Individually package and mark shades with room number and opening number. C. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. D. Store and handle shades to prevent damage to finishes, and operators prior to installation. Q PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Q A. LouverDrape. B. Shade Techniques, Inc. � C. Springs Window Fashions. D. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. n E. Provide all window shade systems from a single manufacturer. W � L�J L.l Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 Summerglen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 12496-1 2.02 VERTICAL BLINDS A. Product indicated is manufactured by Springs Window Fashions and is intended to establish a standard of quality for products of this section. Substitutions permitted under provisions of Saection 01600. B. Product: Graber G-85 Dura-Vue Vertical Blinds. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Headrail: 0.027 inch thick phosphate treated steel with baked enamel finish. 1-1/2 inch wide x 1-1/4 inch high. , B. Carriers: Molded nylon with detachable louver stem, molded in clear, non-yellowing, high impact-resistant nylon. Louver stem to be replaceable without demounting headrail. Carriers to traverse on wheels and have stems positioned in the center, making track reversible. C. Rotation control: No. 6' nickel-plated bead chain equipped with two tassels to rotate a gear assembly that drives an extruded aluminum pinion rod that rotates carrier stems. D. Louvers: 3-1/2 inch wide PVC louvers. Provide bottom chain. 1. Color and pattern for louvers: As selected by architect from manufacturers standard color range. • ° E. Controls: One way draw. Stack as approved by Architect. F. Accessories: As recommended by blind manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install window shade systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications. B. Verify field dimensions and mounting surfaces. C. Adjust window shade systems for proper operation. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summerglen Branch Library 12496-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � L!'`� L�J � L�� 1 �i � I�� r�L� O I� L"1 � l�1 SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions and any Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in fuil, and the Contractor shall observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicabie to his work. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish all skilled mechanics, craftsmen, labor, supervision, equipment, materials, tools, costs and services necessary to completely install all mechanical work called for on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. It is the intent and meaning of the Contract Documents that the Contractor shall provide a mechanical installation that is complete with all items and appurtenances necessary, reasonably incidental, or customarily included, even though each and every item is not specifically called out or shown. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. Etectrical: Division 16 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/ Engineer for approval, layout drawings and lists of materials, fixtures, and equipment to be incorporated in the woric. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed "necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures, including changes in related portions of the project and the reasons therefor, shatl be submitted with the drawings. Where such departures require piping or equipment to be supported otherwise than shown, the details submitted shall include loadings and types and kinds of frames, brackets, stanchions, or other supports necessary. Approved departures shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. The lists of materials and equipment shall be supported by sufficient descriptive materiat, such as catalogs, cuts, diagrams, and other data published by the manufacturer, as well as evidence of compliance 'with safety and perfoRnance standards, to demonstrate conformance to the �pecification requirements; catalog numbers alone shall not be acceptable. The data shall include the name and address of the nearest service and maintenance organization that regularly stocks repair parts. 1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect/Engineer one set of drawings neatly and clearly marked in red to show variations between the construction actuatly provided and that indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. 1.06 CODES AND STANDARDS � A. Materials and workmanship shall comply with the Contract Documents and applicable codes and standards. In case of any difference between applicable codes and standards and the Halbach • Dietr Architects . Summer Glen Branch Library 15010-1 o HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort WoRh, Texas Contract Documents, the Contractor shail promptly notify the ArchitecVEngineer in writing of such difference. Should the Contractor pertorm any work that does not compiy with the requirements of applicable codes and standards, he shall bear all costs arising in coRecting such deficiencies. Applicable codes and standards shall include all ordinances, utility company regulations, and applicable requirements of nationally accepted codes and standards. � B. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. Air Moving and Conditioning Associatior� (AMCA) 2. American Gas Association (AGA) 3. American lnstitute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (AIEEE) ' 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 5. American Refrigeration Institute.�(ARI) 6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 7. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 8. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 9. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 10. Factory Mutual (FM) , 11. Industrial Risk Insurers 12. Local Building Codes 13. National Electrical Code (NEC) 14. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) 15. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 16. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'�National Association, Inc. (SIVIACNA) 17. Undervvriters' Laborafories (UL) . 18. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 19. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC) 20. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) 1.07 COORDlNATION OF WORK A. The Contrac�or shalt compare the Mechanicat Drawings and Specifications with the drawings and specifications for other trades and report any discrepancies between them to #he Architect/Engineer and obtain from him written instructions for changes necessary in the mechanical work. The mechanical work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, the Contractor shalt make p,roper provision to avoid interterences. The Contractor shall determine the electrical, plumbing, or other requirements of his work and coorciinate these requirements with other trades. Changes required in the work of the Contractor caused by his neglect to do so shall ,be made by him at his own expense. � B. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate location of air devices with Fire AIaRn Contractor to prevent interterence with Fire Alarm System by air devices. C. The Mechanical Contractor shall cooMinate the providing and installation of smoke detectors and fire smoke dampers with the G�neral Contractor. � 1.08 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS A. The Cont�actor shatl visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the feld, and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancy before- pertorming any work. The Contractor shall be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building stnacture and to the work of all trades. Halbach • Diefiz Architects Summer Glen Branch Ubrary � � 15010-2 HD ,lob No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 19A9 Fort Worth, Texas �L�"�l L'"7 � L�J � � � � l�J I�� 1.09 INTERFERENCES A. The plans are generally diagrammatic, and the Contracto"r shall harmonize the work of the different trades so that interterences between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work shaii be avoided. Each Contractor shall provide ail necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install his work. Exposed work must be kept as close as possible to walis, ceilings, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of space. All offsets, fittings, etc., required must be fumished and installed by the Contractor without additional expense to the Owner. B. Offsets, transitions and changes in diredion in piping and ducts shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the Drawings. Th� Contractor shall fumish and install all necessary traps, air verrts, sanitary verrts, etc., required as a result of these offsets, transitions and changes in direction. 1.10 SPECIAL INSPECTION BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER A. The Architect/Engineer shall inspect all systems when each is ready for testing. The Contractor shall notify the Arc�itect/Engineer 24 hours prior to this time so that the Architect/Engineer can make inspection and give notice to proceed or indicate corrective action before systems are concealed. If any systems should be covered without this inspection, they must be uncovered for observation and the covering replaced, all at the Contractor's expense. 7.11 UTILITIES, REGULATORS, METERS A. Locations and efevations of utilities have been obtained from utility maps or other sources � and are offered as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. The Contractor shall verify the tocation and elevation of utilities.and their relation to the work before entering into a Contract. lJ � � L'�J B. The Contractor shall field verify the locations and elevations of existing underground utilities before installing any new services. Piping installed before such verification that has to be relocated due to interterences shall be done at the Contraator's expense. C. The Contractor shall arrange with authorities and utility companies for service connections, verifying locations and amangement and paying all charges, inctuding arrangements for cutting and patching pavements, sidewalks, connection fees, tap fees, other utility company charges, etc. D. Contractor shall verify with local water department domestic water system pressures and provide water pressure reducing devices if water pressures exceed 60 psi. E. !n the event conflicts occur between proposed and existing utilities, Contractor shall notify � Owner's representative to coorciinate adjustment of proposed utility. Proposed utility lines may be adjusted horizorrtally or vertically to avoid conflicts. No extra cost shall be allowed for adjustment of proposed lines around existing utilities. l� lJ � L�J F. Contractor shall maintain as-builts and documentation for existing and p,�oposed improvements. Any existing line field verified shall show location and depth. 1.12 CONTROLS A. Provide all necessary valving, dampers, controls, relays, etc. required for complete working systems and to allow for the testing and balancing of each system. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15010-3 HD Job No. 9869 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless�specifically noted otherwise, and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trademark and ASME, UL and/or other labels in every case where a standard has been established for the particular item. Equipment shall be the latest approved design of the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment, and shall be supported by a service organization that is, in tf�e opinion of the ArchitecUEngineer, reasonably convenient to the site. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that items fumished fit the space availabie with adequate room for proper operation and maintenance. He shall make field measurements to ascertain space requirements, including those for connections, and shall fumish and instaii such sizes and shapes of equipment that, in the final installation, wili suit the true intent and meaning of the drawings and Specifications. 2.02 EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES A. The Contractor sfiall fumish and install all equipment accessories, connections and incidental 'items necessary to complete the work, ready for use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. 2.03 NAMEPLATES AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Each major item of equipment shaii have the manufacturer's name, address, � serial and model number on a plate securely attached to the item. B. Equipment Identification: Unless othervirise specified, all items of equipment, except thos� in finished areas such as plumbing, fixtures, etc., shall be identified as to number, name, function,� capacity and other pertinent data with sec�rely attached laminated plasfic name tags of aR:appropriate size with white letters and black t�ackground." Generally, the number and name shall be at least one-fourth inch (1/4'� high and other data at least one-eighth inch (1/8'� high. Identification tags on items in fnished areas, such as special switches, etc., shall be securely attached on, or in the immediate vicinity of, the item. The Contractor shall submit, for approval, a schedule of name tags detailing all appropriate data. 2.04 SPARE PARTS DATA A. As soon as practicable and, if possible, not later than finro months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy, the Contractor shall fumish a complete list of parts and supplies for each item of equipment with current unit price and source of supply. � 2.05 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Wiring: . 1. Electrical wiring�for mechanical equipment is separated into two main wiring divisions: "Power Wiring" and "Control Wiring." 2. Power wiring shall be the energy source and includes circuit protective devices, motor starters or controllers, conduit, wiring and safety disconnects beginning at the Power Supply and terminating at the motor or terminals on equipment. Refer to "Motor and Equipment Control" below. � 3. Control wiring is comprised of conduit and wiring not included in "Power Wring" including automatic temperature control wiring, interlock wiring, pilot light and signal wiring, etc., that is not included as a part of pre-wired equipment but necessary forthe Halbach • Dietr AfChiteCts � Summer Glen Branch Library 1501013 HD .1ob No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas L': � L�J � � � � L+�J � l!'] � � � L� � proper operation or safety of the equipment. All exposed wiring shall be installed in conduit. Installation shall be per the Electrical Specifications. 4. Unless otherwise noted, "Power Wiring" shalt be done by the Electrica( Contractor in accordance with the Electrical portions of the Specifications and under the supervision of the equipment supplier, and "Control Wiring" shall be done by the Contractor fumishing the equipment in compliance with the electrical section of these Specifications. 5. Contractors furnishing equipment not specifically shown on the plans but necessary to the operation of the systems installed shall be responsible for obtaining and installing any related electrical power, water, gas, etc., requirements necessary for proper operation of the equipment. Examples include, but are not limited to, control air compressors, control dampers and valve operators. B. Electrical Motors: 1. Motors shall have copper windings, be of recognized American manufacture and conform to the latest standards of manufacture and performance of NEMA and AIEEE. 2. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty at 100 percent of their rated capacity, and temperature rise shall be 65 degrees Centigrade nominal with an 80 degree rise for maximum hot spot temperature, above an ambient of 40 degrees Centigrade. 3. Unless othervvise required, integral horsepower polyphase motors shall be Class B, general purpose, squirrel cage, open type induction motors. 4. Motors rated one-half (1/2) horsepower or less shall have integral overcurrent protection. 5. Motors inside buildings shall be �open type drip-proof. Motors exposed to the weather shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled. 6. Responsibility for Motor Size Changes: Any change in motor size brought on directly or indirectly by substitution of equipment having characteristics peculiar to itself requiring such change shall be the responsibility of the Contractor fumishing the motor, unless the substitution was initiated by the Owner. 7. Responsibility for Electrical Changes: The responsibility of the Contractor as mentioned above shall include the fumishing and installing of the proper size motor and drive, subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer and free of any additional cost to Owner. It shall also include responsibility for any increase in electrical equipment and instaltation costs, over and above that required to comply with the original design. C. Motor and Equipment Control: 1. Each motor, electrical equipment or group of motors and equipment shatl be provided with controllers and pilot devices that will pertorm the functions as specified. Controllers and pilot devices shall conform to NEMA Standard ICL and UL Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. Control voltage shall be 120 volts. Control voltage shall be obtained from a control power transformer located within the motor controtler. 2. Manual starters shall be provided for manually started single phase motors under one- half (1/2) horsepower or as noted on the drawings. StaRers shall be single or two pole with selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights and locking attachments as required. � Contactors may be used instead of manual starter if the motor has integral overtoad protection. 3. Magnetic starters shall be provided for single phase motors one-half (1/2) horsepower and farger, integral horsepower motors, all three-phase motors, and motors started by pilot devices. Starters shall ,be provided with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches in cover and three interlocking contacts. 4. Controllers shall have overload retays in all ungrounded conductors. Overload relays shall be sized to protect the motor, with consideration given to ambient temperature of the motor and controller. 5. Starters, motor controllers, push-button stations, selector switches, pilot lights, relays, automatic temperature controllers, safety devices, solenoids, and similar devices that are not a�part of the motor control center or switchgear shall be fumished and installed by the Contractor fumishing the equipment, except starters and motor controllers only shall be fumished to the Electrical Contractor for his installation. Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15010-5 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library coPyr�9nc �sss Fort wortn, T�S 6. Disconnect switches, except where fumished factory mounted, shall be supplied and instalied by the Electricai Contractor. 7. Starters, pilot lights, controilers, push buttons, and similar devices located in finished spaces shail be flush mounted and surface painted to match the surrounding finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.d1 SUPPLEMENTAL EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND PIPING SUPPORTS A. The Mechanicai Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary supports required to install the equipment, piping, or ductwork fumished for the project. The Contractor is responsible for proper support connectors to the building structure. Securing pipe, duct or equipment hangers from metal roof deck shali not be permitted. 3.02 PROTECTIVE COATING AND PAINTING A. Exterior surtaces of pipes, ducts, louvers, hangers and other metat accessories run in or through concrete floor, underground, or in crawi spaces, and surfaces in contact with masonry or mortar shatl be painted with finro coats of acid-resisting bituminous base paint. B. Unless othe�wise specified, job finish painting shall be pertorrned under the Painting Section. � Mechanical equipment shall have a baked enamel finish. The Mechanical Contractor shall restore damaged painted surfaces of inechanical equipment to their original condition. ' 3.03 REFRIGERANT A. The Contractor shall provide all refrigerant for the operation of aIl equinment until acceptance and shall replace all refrigerant lost to the atmosphere as a result of faulty equipment or poor workmanship during the one-year warranty period. . 3.04 CATALOG pAtA FOR OWNER A. The COrrtractor shall provid� in loose-leaf binders a compilation of catalog data of each manufadured item of equipmerrt used in the mechanical work and shall preserrt this oompilation to the Archited/�ngineer for transmittal to the Oumer before final paymertt is made. Descriptive data and prirrted installation, operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipmerrt shatl be inGuded. A comptete double index shall be provided as follows: 1�. Listing the products alphabetically by name. 2. Listing the names of manufacturers whose products have been incorporated in the work alphabetically together with their addresses and the names and addresses of the local sales repre'sentative. 3.05 FILTERS A. At the time of construction and until finat accept�nce by Owner, all filter frames shall be loaded with filter media, full thickness of frame in which installed at all times to fully protect all coils and air distribution systems from dirt and debris. No unit is to be r�n without filt�rs. Also replace such filters as directed by the Architect/Engineer during the construction period. Install new specified filters for final acceptance at the time directed by th'� Architect/Engineer, and remove all filter media from premises. 3.06 SEALING AT WALL, CEILING OR FLOOR`PENETRATIONS A. Provide 3M CP-25 fire retardant caulking or approved equal around all pipe or duct penetrations through fire rated walls, floors or ceilings and at all pipe or duct penetrations through walls, floors, or ceilings separating„conditioned and nonconditioned spaces. Halbach • Dietz Architec4s Summer Glen Branch Library 15010-6 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library CopyrigM 1969 Fort Worth, Texas � u � 3.07 EXTERIOR PIPE SLEEVES � L�J LJ L�J I�1 � C�I �� L�'J � � I'� L�J � � A. All water lines under drives �nd walks shall be sleeved with Schedule 40 PVC pipe at least twice the size of the line. 3.08 WARRANTIES A. in addition to factory warranties on the individual items of equipment, the Contractor shall warrant equipment and work pertormed under this Contract to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of substantial completion by the Owner. Refer to the appropriate sections for additional warranties on bumers and compressors. 3.09 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel during start-up and separate operating tests of each major item of equipment including pumps and fans and shall provide operating sessions as required by the General Conditions of the Specifications. During the operating tests, the Contractor shall prove the operation of equipment to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. At least seven days' notice shall be given to the ArchitecUEngineer of equipment start-up and operating tests. The following items of equipment shall be started under the supervision of a� factory representative, who shall certify that the equipment is installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and is operating properly. These items are: 1. Roof-Top Air Conditioning Units END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Clen Branch Library 15010-7 � HD .lob No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort wortn, Texas L'�1 � L7 I� I��I � �W [�1 '�� I �� u l'�J � L�] � SECTION 15011 - PREFABRICATED CONVENTIONAL ROOF CURBS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS A. The Generat Conditions and any Suppiementary or Speciai Conditions or Frovisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in full, and the Contractor shall observe ali the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicabie to his woric. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shali fumish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all roof curbs and supports for mechanical equipment as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Prefabricated metal roof curbs and supports shall be used at all roof penetrations including but not limited to HVAC units, pipe penetrations, and exhaust fans. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 - Mechanical - General Provisions B. Section 15820 - Ductwork and Devices C. Section 15851 - Fans D. Section 15852 - Packaged Roof-Top�Air Conditioning Units 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFABRICATED METAL ROOF CURBS A. Prefabricated metal roof curbs and supports shall be provided by one of the following: 1. Custom Curb, Inc., 3005 South Hickory Street, Chattanooga, Tennessee 2. Roof Products and Systems Corp., 484 N. Thomas Drive, Bensenville, Illinois 3. THY Curb Corp., 2305 Belt Line Road, #180, Carroltton, Texas 3.01 INSTALLATION PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Curbs and supports shall be constructed using minimum 18 gauge gatvanized steet, (14 gauge for curbs supporting HVAC units), with fully mitered and welded comers, 3" integral cant (except style #3 8� #5), integral�base plates, intemal(y reinforced with 1" X 1" X 1/8" steel angle (curbs with any side longer than 3'-0'�. B. Curbs shall be factory insulated with 1-1/2" thick three-pound density fiberglass insulation. Curbs shall have factory installed pressure treated wood nailers. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15011-1 HD .lob No. sse9 Fort Worth Public Library copyri9nt ��s Fort wortn, T�S C. Minimum height of curb shall be as detailed above finished roof but in no case less than 8" from top of curb to surtace o.f roof. D. Curbs shall be constructed to match slope of roof and provide a level top surtace for mounting of inechanicai equipment. E. Curbs shall be inStalled in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and as detailed on the drawings. � F. Size of curbs and required options shall be coordinated by curb manufacturer, �eneral Contractor and Mechanical Contractor prior to fabrication. G. Roof curbs shall be guaranteed to be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for a period of five years. Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SEGTION Summer Glen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 15011-2 � � � Ll � IJ LJ � LJ I�� L*J � I� �� l'J �� PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS SECTION 15180 - INSULATION A. The Generat Conditions and any Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in full, and the Contractor shall observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicable to his work. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shatl fumish all equipment, materials, �abor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the insulation of the mechanical systems as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. � B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the Specifications ezcept that the insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of the materiats herein specified for similar service. � C. Refer to Section 15820 - Ductwork and Devices, for duct tiner specifications. D. The following systems shall be insulated: 1. Piping - Fiberglass Insulation: a. All above ground domestic hot and cold water piping. b. All traps and tailpieces of drinking fountains. c. All above ground roof drains and piping. d. All above ground auxiliary roof drain (overflow) piping. e. All drains handling only cooling coil condensate. 2. Duchn►ork: a. Intemally Applied: Refer to Section 15820: b. Extemally Applied: All round or oval supply air and retum air ductwork. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 - Mechanical - General Provisions B. Section 15401 - Piping and Accessories C. Section 15820 - Ductwork and Devices 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. Local Building Codes I 3. Master Insulation Contractors' Association 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) I 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' �lational Association, Inc. (SMACNA) � � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Libra . 15180-1 HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Librar�y CopyrigM 1969 Fort Worth, Texas � O 6. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 7. Uniforrn Mechanical Code 8. Uniform Piumbing Code PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS A. General: 1. Thermal conductivi#y shaii not exceed 0.26 Btu/(hour)(sq. ft.)(degree F� at 75 degrees F. 2. Composite fire ratin� of aii above ground insulation, including jackets, adhesives, coatings, mastics, etc., shall not exceed 25 flame spread or 50 smoke developed under ASTM Specification E-84 procedure. 3. insulation shail be v�rmin resistant. ' 4. Duct insulation shali comply with fire hazard ciassification of NFPA 90A and 90B. Duct insulation shall have a minimum R value of 7. � � B. Pipe Insulation - Fiberglass: Owens Coming Fiberglass ASJ, Johns-Manville type ASJ, CSG � type ASJ, or approved equal. C. Duct Extemal Insulation (Flexible): Owens Coming Fiberglass All Service Duct Wrap with foil kraft reinforced facing, three-fqurths pound density, or approved equal. 2.02 INSULATION THICKNESS A. Piping - Fiberglass: Domestic cold water, domestic hot water, downspouts, roof drains, auxiliary roof drains and piping, condensate drains, and drinking fountain pipe insulation shall be one inch (1'� thick, except for individual plumbing fixture runouts in pipe chases, which shall be one-half inch (1/2"� thick. 6. Ductwork: 1. Intemal Duct Liner. Refer to Section 15820 - Ductwork and Devices.. � 2. Extemal Duct Insulation: All supply and return duct insulation shall be one and one-half inches (1-1/2'� thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The installation of all insulation shall be pertormed by experienced craftsmen in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for the service intended, as interpreted by the Architect/Engineer. B. All adhesives used in conjunction with insulation shall be vermin-proof and mildew resistant. . C. All penetrations of insulation for v�lve handles, damper operators, etc., shatl be sealed with white mastic to protect the insulation from damage. 3.02 PIPE�INSULATION A. Insulation shall be the full specified thickt�ess, continuous through walls, floors, ceilings, etc. Reducing thickness or cutting back of insulation to pass obstructions or through sleeves shall not be permitted. B. Valve and fitting insulation shall be built up to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation or may be factory prefabricated units where the Contractor so desires. � Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15180-2 HD Job No. �889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas L�] � L�J � C. No part of any system shali be insulated until all required tests have been completed. D. Ali insulation shali be installed so that it does not interfere with the functions of thermometer welis, gauge connections and/or cocks, unions, access paneis, hand holes, manholes, sight glasses, etc., or obscure Serial numbers or other namepiate data. E. Insulation shall be extended to inciude stiffleg supports as required to prevent sweating. F. Comptete vapor barriers to preverrt sweating shall be instalied on all cold systems and equipment. AII laps, edges and abutments shail be sealed, waterproof and vaporproof. l� � !�1 � l!'J L; [�'1 � G. After finish painting, any insulation showing splits or other signs of coming loose shall be replaced. H. Piping Supports: 1. Piping supports shall pass completely around the exterior of the finished insulation. Rigid blocks of insulation material similar to Buckaroo saddle supports shall be provided at all support points. In addition, zinc-coated sheet metal saddles shall be�provided at support points in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size Gauqe Metal Saddle Lenqth Up to 2-1/2" 18 6" 3" - 5" 16 10" 6" 16 14" 2. Saddles shall cover the bottom of the insulation, and saddle edges shall be hemmed or suitably covered to prevent damage to the insulation material. 1. The vapor bamer and finish shall be continuous at alI support points. 3.03 DUCT INSULATION A. Extemal Duct Insulation: 1. Extemal flexible insulation shall be butted tightly at joints, and the vapor barrier facing shall be overlapped a minimum of two inches (2'�. All seams shall be stapled six inches on center with outward clinching staples and sealed with a foil vapor barrier tape or vapor ba►rier mastic. � 2. Seal extemat duct insutation edges at all taps to lined sheetmetal ducts and at all air devices. Use foil vapor barrier tape or vapor bamer mastic. END OF SECTION I�J � �� Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15180-3 HD Job No. 968s Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � �' i �� *J PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions and any Supplementary or Speciai Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in full, and the Contractor shall observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicable to his work. 1.02 SCOPE � A. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services �necessary for or incidenfal to the instaltation of all plumbing fixtures as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. �1 u I' � � � � LJ L�J � � B. Systems Included: 1. Domestic Hot and Cold Water System Fixtures 2. Domestic Water Heaters 3. Sanitary Waste and Vent System Fixtures 4. Storm Drainage System Fixtures 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 - Mechanical - General Provisions 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. B. Faucets shall meet ADA, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) of the Architectural Barriers Act Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes and CABO/ANSI A117.1 - 1992 American National Standarcl Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. Faucets shall require a maximum of 5 Ibf to operate. C. �.7 All plumbing fixtures shall meet the state standards for water flows and shall have been listed for use in Texas. The Contractor shall certify that all fixtures are lead-free. E. Flush handles shall be installed so that the handles are located on the fixture access side. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, confonn to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the fo�lowing standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) � 4. Local Building Codes 5. National Fire P�otection Association (NFPA) 6. National Plumbing Code 7. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDt) � 8. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15400-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 9. Uniform Plumbing Code PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Plumbing fixtures and equipment shall be furnished and instalied complet� with trim and all other appurtenances required to connect to rough-in piping at floor and wall; unless specified otherwise. B. Chair carriers shall be fumished with all wall mounted fixtures. C. Supplies shail be chrome piated IPS brass. Exposed finish metai parts shall be chromium plated; rough bodied parts shail be heavily nickel plated. Provide loose key stops such that supply can be shut off for maintenance without affecting other fixtures as specified or as required. Suppties sha�ll be roughed in, in accordance with manufacturer's rough-in drawings, and shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner or corrected at the Contractor's expense. D. Traps for lavatories and sinks shall be three-piece chromium plated cast brass with cleanout, tPS tailpiece, chromium plated nipple to wall, or as specified. E. Escutcheons on supplies and waste shall be chromium plated heavy cast brass set screw type. F. Trim shall be first line quality, and shall be clearly marked for c�rroborative identification. Trim, unless otherwise noted, shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the respective fixture. Trim shall be submitted for approval. � G. If installed before completion of the project, fixtures sh�ll be•protected with not less than two thicknesses of tough building paper, pasted on, .and fully covering surtaces, using paste as recommerided by the fixture manufacturer. The job must be tumed over to the Owner with fixtures clean and free from damage. . H. Exposed Pipes and Surfaces at Handicapped Fixtures: Hot water and drain pipes under handicapped fixtures shall be insulated or otherwise configured to protect against contact. There shall be no sharp or atirasive surtaces under lavatories. Provide all floor dr�ains, floor sinks, hub drains, etc. with trap seal primers. Run water line from nearest suitable plumbing fixture. 2.02 FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A. Plumbing Fixtures: Fixtures shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Acceptable manufactur�ers shall be Kohler, American Standard, Eljer and Elkay. Faucets shall meet ADA, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) of the Architectural Barriers Act Artide 9102, Texas Civil Statutes ar� CABO/ANSI A117.1 -1992 American National Standard Accessible and Usable Buildings and Faalities. Fauoets shall require a maximum of 5 Ibf to operate. B. Hose Bib: Exterior wall hose bibs shall be Woodford Model B 65, or approved equal. C. Floor Drain .(FD): Cast iron, bottom outlet, Josam 30,000 A, or approved equal. D. Hub Drain (HD): Cast iron, bottom outlet, satin bronze top, Josam 30000-7E2, or approved equal. Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch �Libracy 15400-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Wo�th Public Library � Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas �l 'ul' �� !sl � I'_'J L�J �' � '�J �}.� [�J � � E. F. Roof Drain (RD): Cast iron, bottom outlet, high bronze dome, vandal-proof screws, with under deck clamp, Josam 21500-23-1-30, or approved equal. Overflow Drain (OD): Cast iron, bottom outiet, high bronze dome, vandal-proof screws, with under deck clamp, intemal adjustabte water guard - Josam 260d0 or approved equai. G. Cleanouts: � 1. Waii Cleanout: Cast iron with cast iron plug and stainiess steei round flat access cover, Zum Z-1445-1, Smith 4530, Josam 58790 or equal. 2. Grade Cleanout: Cast iron with serrated cut-off sections, cast iron intemal plug with lead seal, loose heavy duty scoriated cover, Zum Z-1420-27, Smith 4244, Josam 56040 or equal. 3. Floor Cleanouts: a. Cleanouts for nonfinished areas such as mechanical room with bare concrete floor shall be Josam Series 56000 or equal with secured rim and scoriated cover with "C.O." cast in. Cleanouts shall be line size. b. Cleanouts for tite floors shall be Zum Number Z-1325-6, Josam 56020-12 or equal, square top recessed for tile. Cleanouts shall be line size. 4. Stack Cleanout: Cast iron with inside caulk body and brass threaded plug, Josam 58510, or approved equal. H. Access Doors: Access doors shall be stainless steel, recessed, with trim piece. Access doors shall be a minimum of twelve inches by twelve inches (12" X 12"). Trap Seal Primer Valves: Josam Series 88250 or equal. 2.03 DOMESTIC WATER EXPANSION TANKS A. B. C. Fumish and install approved expansion tank of the size indicated. Tank interior shall be FDA 61 approved. Provide all necessary shutoff and charging valves. 2.04 WATER HEATER (ELECTRIC) A. The wate� heater(s) shall be by the scheduled manufacturer, or an approved equal. Heater(s) shall be listed by Undervvriters' Laboratories. Tank(s) shall be factory fired with glass lining with 150 psi working pressure and equipped with extruded high density magnesium anode. Electric heating element(s) shall be medium watt density with zinc plated copper sheath, with screw-in design. Element operation shall be single element or double element-simuttaneous. The controls shall include a thermostat with each element and a high temperature cutoff. The jacket shall provide full size control compartments for perFormance of service and maintenance through front panel openings and shall enclose the tank with insulation. The drain valve shall be located in the front for ease of servicing. Outer jacket shall have a baked enamel finish. Heater(s) shall have a three-year limited warranty. A fully illustrated instruction manual shall be included. Energy savers must meet ASHRAE Standard 90A-1980 for energy efficiency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fixture and Equipment Supports: All fixtures and equipment shall be adequately fastened and supported. Wood screws shall extend into solid wood, such as wood inserts, floor joists, studs, or solid pieces set between studs. Through bolts shall be provided with washers at Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15400-3 HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Wotth, Texas back, set so that heads, nuts and washers shall be concealed. Bolts and nuts shall be hexagon. Exposed bolts, nuts, Cap nuts, and screws shall be chromium plated and p�ovided with chromium-piated brass washers. B. Access doors shall be provided for concealed items (including, but not limited to: shut-off valves and trap seai primer valves). C. Trap seal primer valves shall be instailed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the drawings. D. Fixtures shall be mounted as shown on the architectural plans or as required by TAS and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). E. Provide caulking around all fixtures. Coorciinate colorwith the Architect. F. Provide a temperature�and pressure relief valve at each water heater piped to the nearest drain. Provide shut-offs to each water'heater on the cold waterMsupply. END OF SECTION G Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch L(brary 15400-4 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas` � � �� PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 15401 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS � A. The General Conditions and any Supplementary or Speciai Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Corttract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written � herein in fufl, and the Contractor shall observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are � applicable to his work. 1.02 SCOPE �� A. The Contractor shall fumish alt equipment, materiats, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating piping system as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Piping Systems Included: 1. Condensate Drain Systems 2. Domestic Water Systems 3. Sanitary Waste and Vent Systems 4. StoRn Drainage System 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 - Mechanical - General Provisions � B. Section 15180 - Insulation C. Section 15400 - Plumbing Fixtures D. Section 15907 - Testing and Ba�ancing 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. � � � L� 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. American National Standarcls Institute (ANSI) 2: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Factory Mutual (FM) 4. Local Building Codes 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. Undervvriters' Laboratories (UL) 7. Uniform Mechani�al Code 8. Uniform Plumbing Code Halbach • Dietz Atchitects Summer Glen Brench Library 15401-1 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Pipe, Steel: Schedule 40, black or galvanized steel, ASTM A 53, Grade B. B � Tube; Copper, Seamless: Type K, soft-drawn, coiled; ASTM B 88. Tube, Copper, Seamless: Type 1, hard-drawn, straight, ASTM B 88. � La� C�.! D. Malleable iron Fittings: Threaded, with same bursting pressure as pipe of the same size, � ANSI B 16.3,�ANSI B 2.1 taper thread. E. Copper Fittings: Wrought copper solder-joint; ANSI B 16.22. Flared brass fittings shall be ANSI B 16.26 and AST.M B 62. F. Soider: 1. Hot and Co�d Water Piping: Lead-free solder equal to Harris Stay Safe 50 plus. 2. All Underground Piping: Silver solder with a melting temperature of 538 degrees C (1000 degrees F), Safety Sil No. 1370. G. Escutcheon, Fioor and Wali: Sawtooth; chrome plated pressed brass; RD; Crane Company Shallow Pattem No. 8-446. . 2.02 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Potable Water Piping: 1. Piping Below Grade: Type f� soft-drawn copper with wrought copper fittings. are allowed on buried lines under concrete or building slabs. 2. Piping Above Grade: Type L hard-drawn copper with wrought copper fittings. exposed piping in finished areas shall be chrome plated. No joints All B. Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: 1. Piping shall be service weight hub-and-spigot cast iron soil pipe with positive double seal elastomeric compression joiMs equal to Tyler Pipe and Foundry Company's "Ty-Seal." 2. Other piping: one and one-half inches (1-1/2'� and smaller shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel or DWV copper. Fittings shall be galvanized cast iron drainage fittings for threaded piping, cast iron soil fittings for hub-and-spigot piping and DWV copper for copper tubing. Where piping is shown to be one and one-fourth inch (1-114'� or one and one-half inch (1-1/2'�, the Contractor may increase size to two inches (2'� and use service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings. 3. "No-Hub" fittings by Tyler Pipe and Foundry Company for soil, waste, drain and vent piping above ground shall be acceptable. C. Relief Valve Piping: Type L hard-drawn copper, -not less than valve outlet size. Extend discharge piping as shown on the drawings. D. Storm Drainage Piping: 1. Piping Betow Grade Outside of the Building: PVC pipe equal to Johns-Manville TRX-11 with Ring-Tite joint, or approved equal. 2. Piping Above Grade and Below Building Slab: Cast iron pipe with fittings per soil and waste pipe. E. Condensate Drain Piping: Type K hard-drawn copper with wrought copper fittings. Halbach • Die� Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15401-2 � HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort wortn, Texas � L�J 2.03 VALVES AND COCKS A. Materials: Bronze or iron, with screwed or soider ends: �J O � `'� � � B. All valves shall be located so as to make the removal of their bonnets possibie. Valves placed in the horizontal lines shail be moved so that the vaive stem is inclined at an angle of 30 degrees above the horizontal position. All valves must be true and strajght at the time the system is tested for final acceptance. Valves shall be installed as nearly as possible in the locations shown on the plans. All valves shall be located for easy access from the floor. C. Gate Valves Rated for 200 Pound WOG: Crane 438, Jenkins 670 threaded, and Crane 1320, solder-end, or approved equal, nonrising stem, bronze construction. Q E. Ball Valves: Bronze body, top entry type, with threaded or solder ends, Buna-N seats and O- rings, lever handle, Crane 2180 or 2182. Balancing Cocks: Two inches (2'� and smaller, with memory stops, DeZurik 100, Homestead 1112, ACF EC, or approved equal. ' 2.04 DOMESTIC WATER DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. � Provide and install valve assembly with ball test cocks, ball or gate valve shutoffs, and two FDA approved, NSF 61 tested check vatves. Valve assemblies shall be approved for intended usage by local, state and federal code authorities. C. Valve assemblies shall be similar to Watts Series 007 and/or Series 709. � � La' C�l � 1!�J �� D. Install valve assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and governing code requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Corrtractor shall field verify the locations and elevations�of exisfing underground utilities prior to installing any new services. Piping installed before such verification that has to be re-located due to interferences shall be done at the Corrtrador's expense. 6. Water lines under drives and walks shall have Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves at least twice the size of the line. C. Excavation: Excavate trenching for underground piping to the required depth to insure the specified cover over the pipe. 1. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to a uniform grade so that the pipe or structure will bear on undisturbed soil. 2. Should rock be encountered, excavate six inches (6'� below top of rock, fill with gravel and tamp well. 3. Carefully lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Secure approval for the proposed route of piping before, any cutting is begun. 4. When ptastic pipe is buried, all bedding, haunching and cover material must be smooth, flat and free of sharp projections. If the natural soil is not suitable, use soil or dirt free from sharp rocks or stones. Provide a six-inch (6'� sand bed under all piping extending six inches (6'� over the top of piping. G Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen eranch Library 15401-3 E 11 HD Job No.'9889 Fort Worth Public Library [,� CopyrigM 1999 Fort Worth, Texas D. Depth of Cover: Trenches for utilities shall be of a depth that wili provide the foilowing minimum depths of cover from the existing grade or from the indicated fnish grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise specifically shown: 1. One-Foot Minimum Cover. Sanitary sewer, storm drainage lines. 2. Two-Foot Minimum Cover: Domestic water lines. E. Backfill: After pipe lines or structur�s have been inspected, tested and approved, backfill trenches or excavation with excavated �naterial, firrnly compacted. Flood, if necessary. Tamp thoroughly. Backfill under buildings and driveways with select material as specified under Division 2, Site Work. F. Restorati�n: Compact backfill where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, lawns, and similar areas, to a condition equal to undisturbed earth, and restore the surFace of the area to the condition existing prior to the trenching or excavating operation. . G. Flashing: Piping passing through the roof shall be flashed as shown on the architectural plans or with a thirty-inch �30'� square sheet of �ix-pound soft lead or sixteen-ounce copper. extended to the top of the pipe and tumed over the top and into fhe pipe one-half inch (1/2'�, or extended to the flashing collar where the pipe continues beyond the roof. Refer to architectural details for specific flashing details. H. Sleeves: 1. Generally: Sleeves for insulated lines shall be two (2) pipe sizes larger, minimum, to pass full thickness. Sleeves for uninsulated lines shall be one (1) pipe size larger than the line itself. Annular spaces shall be permanently sealed. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Unless otherwise required, where pipes extend through exterior walls or ftoors below or on grade, oversize sleeves shall be.used and the annular space between service pipe and sleeves caulked with picked oakum and lead as required�to make a waterproof joint. 3. Interior Surtaces: Unless otherwise� required, all sleeves through walls shall be installed flush with finished surtaces, and all sleeves through suspended floors (or monolithic curbing) shall extend two inches (2'� above finished floor line. Sleeves in concrete construction shall be cast in place. . I. Hangers and Supports: 1. The use of pipe hooks, chains or perforated iron for pipe support shall not be permitted. Hangers, rods and inserts shall be CJndennniters' Laboratories approved for the service intended. Where hangers occur at pipe insulation, saddles as specified in Sedion 15180, Insulation, shall be fumished. Hangers shall be spaced on ten foot, zero inch (10'-0'� ceMers maximum for piping one inch (1'� and larger, and five foot, zero inch (5'0'� centers maximum for piping three-fourths inch (3/4'� and smaller, or as necessary to properiy support the piping. Refer to the Uniform Plumbing Code for hangers on waste and vent piping. ' 2: Pipe hanger rods shall be in accordance with the following schedule: Pipe Diameter Upto2"� 2-1/2" through 3" 4" and 5" 6" Rod Diameter 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 7/8" 3. Hangers shall be as follows: a. Hangers supporting and contacting brass or�copper lines shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 361 hinged, copper plated, split-type h�ngers with adjusting swivel and lock nut for lines three inches (3'� and smalter.and Fig. 364 for lines four inches (4'� and larger. , Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15401-4 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � I� � l�l O �J l�J � � u O � �J b. Hangers supporting and contacting lines smaller than eight inches (8'� and hangers outside of insulation supporting insulated lines and specified to be outside the . insulation where the outside diameter of the insulation is the equivatent of eight inches (8'� diameter pipe or smailer in size shail be Fee and Mason Fig. 199 off- center, hinged, matleable iron, split-type hangers with adjusting swivel and lock nut. c. Other speciat types of hangers may be empioyed where so specified or shown on the plans, or where requir.ed by the particular conditions. Hangers of other manufacturers meeting requirements of the type specified may be used if an approved equal to the specified type. J. Soil, Waste, Drain and Vent Piping Instal�ation: 1. Piping shall be run in straight lines at a uniform grade, and no branch drain shall have a less grade than the main drain to which it is connected. Vent pipes shall project above the roof six inches (6'� minimum and eight�en inches (18") maximum. Vent pipes through the roof shall be offset where required, whether shown or not, to mairttain a minimum of ten feet (10� clearance from any fresh air intake. Vent pipes shall be connected at least three feet (3� above the floor on which the fixture vented is located so as to prevent the use of any vent line as a waste. Vents from the horizontal drain shall connect above the center line of the drain, either at the top or at an angle of 45 degrees. Waste piping shall slope not less than one-fourth inch (1/4'� per lineal foot toward the point of disposal. Piping four inches (4'� in diameter or larger may, when approved by the Building Official, slope at one-eighth inch (1/8'� per lineal foot. Refer to the Uniforrn.Plumbing Code for spacing of hangers on waste and vent piping. 2. Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe to be cleaned except that cleanouts larger than four inches (4'� shall not be required. Provide cleanouts at the ends of branches, at the bases of vertical soil and waste lines, on traps, at intervals of not over 50 feet on straight runs, at 90 degree offsets, and at other points indicated or necessary to remove obstructions, on soil, waste and drain lines and as required by codes. K. Provide di-electric unions on all connections between dissimilar metallic piping materials. L. Buried Water Lines: Provide plastic ribbon labeled "Water" in the trench above the pipe. M. Valve Boxes: Exterior valve boxes shall be concrete with metal cover. Cover shall be labeled "Water." Provide traffic grade cover on boxes installed in parking lots or driveways. 3.02 SUPPLEMENTAL EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary supports required � to install the equipment or piping fumished for the project. The Contractor is responsible for proper support connectors to the building structure. Securing pipe or equipment hangers . from metat roof decks shall not be permitted. END OF SECTION �'� � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15401-5 � HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library CopyrigM 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � u � �� l� � � � C� � PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 15820 - DUCTWORK AND DEVICES 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions and any Supp(ementary or Special Conditions or Provisions which are part of ihe Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in fuil, and the Contractor shall observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicable to his work. 1.02� SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary fot' or incide�tal to the installation of all necessary air distribution items and ductwork as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Equipment Included: 1. Air Distribution Devices 2. Duct Liner 3. Ductwork - Flexible 4. Ductwork - Sheet Metal 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 - Mechanical - General Provisions B. Section 15180 - Insulation C. Section 15907 - Testing and Balancing � L�J �� L� � 1�7 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's• certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 3. Intemational Mechanical Code �4: National Electrical Code (NEC) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) � 6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) . 7. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 8. Uniform Mechanical Code 1.06 SHap DRAWINGS A. Priorto beginning any fabrication, submit and receive approval of dimensioned shop drawings showing a11 fittings and ductwork as proposed for installation. Halbach • Die� Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15820 -1 � HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR DISTRIBUTION .DEVICES A. All devices shail be fumished with suitable frames for either mounting in an exposed grid tee- bar ceiling system or for surface mounting. If discrepancies exist befinreen the mechanical plans and the architectural reflected ceiling pians, the Contractor shall provide the proper frame. ' B. C. D. E. F. Style as determined by the Architect/Engineer at no additionat cost to the Owner. Ceiling diffusers shall have opposed blade or butterfly type volume dampers. Radial type dampers are not acceptable. Retum and exhaust air: registers shall be fumished with opposed blade dampers. Acceptable manufacturers are Titus, Metalaire, Price or approved equal. Color to match ceiling tile and grid. 2.02 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Flexible ductwork shall have a maximum flame spread rating of 25, a§moke developed rating of 50 per UL 723, a thermal conductance of 0.23 BTU/hr-sq. ft.-degree Fahrenheit, and a vapor transmission rating on the jacket of 0.2 perrns. Flexible ductwork shall be capable of withstanding interior temperatures from 0 degrees F to 250 degrees F and interior pressures from a negative of one-half inch (1/2'� W.G. to a positive of ten inches (10'� W.G. Flexible :ductwork shall be Class 1 air duct" per UL 181 as required by NFPA 90 A. Flexible ductwork shall have a resilient core of continuous inner air barrier with a minimum of one-inch (1'� fiberglass insulation and a�reinforced vapor barrier jacket. Provide spiral metal reinforcing in the outer jacket. Maximum length shatl be 6'-0". Flexible ductwork shall be supported by bands a minimum of one inch wide on 6'-0" centers. Sagging shall be limited to one-half inch (1/2'� per six-foot (6� section. Limit elbows or tums to one tum per six-foot (6� section. Z.03 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. �Ductwork shall be galvanized steel sheets of the gauges and fabricating methods called for by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Coptractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.04 DUCT LINER A. Provide duct liner.in all rectangular supply and retum ductwork. Duct liner shall be Owens � Coming Fiberglass Aeroflex Type 200 acoustical duct liner, or approved equal. B. All supply and retum duct liner shall be one inch (1'� thick, unless noted othervvise on the drawings. Duct sizes shown on drawings are free air stream dimensions and do not include allowances for liner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK A. Ductwork shall be installed in accordance with all codes, regulations, etc., and with the latest edition of SMACNA. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15820 -2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1998 Fort Worth, Texas � �� I�� I� B. Ducts shall be construded of galvanized steel and ereded in a diligerrt manner, straight and smooth, with joiMs neatly finished, anct�ored securely to the buiiding and free from vibration. Curved elbows shall have a cerrter line radius equal to one and one-half times the width of the dud. Air tuming devices, consisting of curved single-thickness metal vanes amanged to pertnit the air to follow the abrupt fums without appreciable turi�ulence, shall be installed in square elbows. Dudwork shall be installed in a neat, wortcmanlike manner with duds generally parallel to the strudure, with the tops of duds held as high as possible against the building construction. Provide offsets as necessary to avoid obstructions, piping, or structural members. C. For the first five feet (5� from the air unit, joints on supply ductwork shall be taped with an approved fire resistant duct sealing tape. D. At each branch from a main duct, install a splitter damper or adjustable air pickup as � indicated. The length of the splitter blade shall be one and one-half times the width of the split in the main duct, but in no case shall it be less than twelve inches (12'�. � E. Each individual air supply unit, register or diffuser shall be equipped with a volume control independent of any other outlet for the manual adjustment of air flow at each outlet. Face bars, blanks, and equalizing dampers shall not be used to regulate air flow. �� L�J � LI F. Volume dampers shall be installed in branches where indicated on the drawings or required by conditions. Volume dampers shall be multi-blade type with opposed acting blades linked togeiher and controlled by a single operator. Multi-blade dampers shall be not less than No. 16 gauge galvanized steel mounted to plenum or ductwork with suitable reinforcing bar of 14- gauge steet or angte iron. � G. Round or ova( ductwork, when approved for use, shall be fastened together with a minimum of three sheet metal screws equally spaced around the perimeter of the duct and taped with an approved duct sealing tape. Round ductwork shall be fumished complete with all starting collars, branch takeoffs, elbows, etc., and shall terminate in register plenum box, ceiling outlet collar or terminal box inlet. H. Damper quadrants, volume dampers and other duct velocity control quadrants shall be as manufactured by Young Regulator or approved equal. Where ducts are in mechanical rooms or unfinished areas, or where dampers occur above lift out ceilings, regulators shall be stamped galvanized steel, level type with locking screw mounted on face of ductwork. For all other areas, regulators shall be the concealed type with adjustable cover plate equal to Young Regulator No. 315 with two and one-fourth inch (2-1/4'� diameter cover plate maximum. Splitters and dampers shall be fitted with end bearings. I. On the inlet and outlet of each piece of air handling equipment, unless noted othervvise, install � a flexible connection made with sufficient slack to render it flexible. Canvas shall be fire resistant and water proof equal to "Duro Dyne Econ-O-Fab" 24-ounce Duralon fabric with 28- gauge sheet metal collar. � � C� J. Access Doors: Fumish access doors at each damper balancing device, where firestats, freezestats, smoke detectors, fire dampers or smoke dampers occur within ducfinrork and as indicated on the drawings. Access doors shall be hinged so that the air pressure holds the door in the closed position. Provide hinges and catches and, where duct is lined intemally, provide coltar and double thickness door. K. Furnish and install 26-gauge galvanized steel countertlashings for all ducts penetrating roofs �and for all roof-mounted equipment (refer to architectural plans for roof detai(s). L. Flexible ductwork shall be installed and supported as recommended by the manufacturer and � as required by these Specifications. Supports for flexible duct shalt be a one-inch (1'� metal strap completely around the duct on four-foot centers. Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Br�nch Library 15820 -3 j� HD Job No. 9689 � Fo�t Worth Public Library u Copyright 1999 �ort wortn, Texas M. fntemai Duct Liner: The duct liner shail be applied to the inside of the duct with the faced side to the airstream and shall be secured to the duct with pins 15 inches on center, caps and adhesives. Adhesives shaii completely coat the metal. Joints shall be firmly butted and tightly sealed with adhesive. All teading edges shalt be tapered and protected with 26 gauge metal formed into a double bend angis and screwed to the duct. Duct liner shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). END OF SECTION, � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth,°'Texas � 15820 -4 6� u L�9 C � � � � � 'J � CI I� l�1 � L�J SECTION 15851 - FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions and any Supplementary or Special Conditions�or Provisions which are part of the Cnntract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in fuil, and the Contractor shall observe atl the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicabte to his work. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shali fumish all equipment, materials, �tabor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all fans as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Equipment Included: 1. Cabinet Fans 2. Power Roof Ventilators 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 - Mechanical - General Provisions Q C. Section 15011 - Prefabricated Conventional Roof Curbs and Supports Section 15907 - Testing and Balancing 1.04 QUALITY ASSURA,NCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. Air Movement and Control Association 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 4. National Electrical Code (NEC) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) 7. Undervvriters' Laboratories (UL) PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CABINET FAN A. Fumish centrifugal cabinet enclosed fans of the size, type and capacity as scheduled, with a scheduled accessories. Fans shall carry the certified rating seal authorized by AMCA. The housing shalt be formed of aluminum or steel sheets, and shall be fumished and installed with the discharge arrangement as indicated on the drawings. Bearings shall be of the permanently lubricated type. Fans shall be AMCA certified. � � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15851-1 HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas B. Fans shall be Cook Gemini or approved equal. r � 2.02 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS ' A. Ventilators shail be the aluminum centrifugal type, beit drive, with automatic backdraft damper, bird screen, motor disconnect, and roof mounting curb. Roof mounting curbs shail be as specified in Section 15011, "Prefabricated Conventional Roof Curbs and Supports." B. Acceptable manufacturers are Cook, Penn Ventilator or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTtON � 3.01 IIVSTALLATION A. Install fans as shown on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Provide fans with "ON-OFF" switches or thermosta#s where shown on the drawings. Provide laminated pfastic label for each switch or theRnostat identifying fan served. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15851-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � CI � �,' C� � � � � � � � L�l l�l � ��J �� CI � SECTION 15852 - PACKAGED ROOF-TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS A. The Generai Conditions and any Suppiementary or Speciai Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in full, and the Contractor shaii observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicable to his work. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shati fumish ail equipment,,materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or�incideptal to the installation of all packaged roof-top air conditioning units as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 15010 - Mechanical - General Provisions B. ., ,« Section 15011 - Prefabricated Conventional Roof Curbs and Supports Section 15907 - Testing and Balancing 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest provisions`of the following standarcis: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 5. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. The units shall be completely factory assembled and tested, piped, intemally wired, full char+ged with compressor oil�and refrigerant, and shipped in one piece. All wiring shalt be in accordance with the NEC. Refer to Section 15011, Prefabricated Conventional Roof Curbs and Supports, for roof curbs. B. The casing shall be steel, with suitable weatherproofing and a factory painted enamel finish. Removabte panels shall be provided for access. Atl doors shall have gaskets. The casing shall have a minimum of one and one-half inch, one pound density fiberglass insulation or equal meeting NFF�A 80A. The unit shall have an intake hood and a moisture eliminator. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15852-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas • C. Aii wiring in the air stream shalt be in conduit. Factory wiring shali be compiete to the load side. Electrical control identification shall be stenciled on the controi panels. All wiring shall be numbered or cotored for identification. D. Compressor safety controls shall include, but not be limited to, motor winding thermostats located in motor windings, high and low pressure cutouts, staged starting for muiti- compressor units, time delays on compressors to prevent short cycting, and three-leg current overload protection. Furnish a five-year warranty on the compressor. E. The evaporator fan shall be centrifugal with an adjustabie V bett drive. The motor shaii be thermal overload protected. The fan assembly sha11 be mounted on vibration isolators. Bearings shall be grease tubricated. � F. G Condenser fan motors shali have rain/hail shields. Provide coii guards on the condenser coils. � ' Coils shall be aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to aluminum or copper tubes. Provide sloped condensate pan. H. The refrigeration system shali include service gauge connections, vibration isolation, and filter-driers. Each circuit of the unit shall have separate refrigeration controls. Electric Heat: Fumish with nickel-chromium elements, automatic reset of high limit control a�d heat limiters, and air flow proving switch. Heater shall have a minimum.of two stages. Unit shalf be fumished with remote thermostat having heating setpoint, cooling setpoint, HEAT-COOL-AUTO-OFF switch and fan AUTO-ON switch. Provide auxil'rary metal locking cover. K. At each air conditioning unit, install a smoke detector in the retum ductwork to provide detection of combustion gases, fire or smoke in the retum to the fan prior to mixing with outdoor air. In addition, instalt a smoke detector in the supply duct at each unit with an air circulation capacity over 2,000 CFM. The detectors shall be furnished by the Fire Alarm Contractor. Upon detection of smoke the unit fan shall stop. L. Freezestats: Provide automatic reset extended elemertt freezestats in the mixed air which shall stop each unit fan upon a fall in mixed air temperature below 40 degrees F for all units. The sensing element shall be located downstream of the heating coils on units handling more than 50 percent outdoor air. M. Firestats: Provide manual reset firestats (135 degrees F� in the return' air duct of each air conditioning unit. N. Air conditioning units shall be Trane, Carrier, Yor1c or approved equat. 2.02 FILTERS A. Filters for air conditioning units shall be instatled in the factory fabricated boxes fumished by the unit manufacturer as shown on the drawings. In each unit there shall be the size and number of fitters that are standard with the manufacturer for that size unit and of the thickness specified herein. B. Fitters shall be two-inch throw-away type, 350 FPM maximum velocity. Filters shall be American Air Filter, Farr, or approved equal. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15852-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1989 Fort Worth, Texas � � � Q -a � U � � � � � � D � D a � D C. At the time of construction and until final acceptance by the Owner, ail filter frames shali be loaded with filter media of the full thickness of the frame in which installed at ail times, to fully protect all coils and air distribution systems from dirt and debris. No unit shail be run without filters. Also, reptace such filters as directed by the Architect/Engineer during the construction period. Install new specified filters for final acceptance at the time as directed by the Architect/Engineer, and remove all fitter media from the premises. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units as shown on the plans and per the manufacturers' recommendations. B. Units shalt be installed 1evel. Referto Section 15011, "Prefabricated Conventional Roof Curbs and Supports." . Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 CoPY�9M 1989 END OF SECTION Summer Glen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 15852-3 L�J L� � � L� � �I �� L�l N�J L�J � L�J � L*J � u � � SECTION 15907 - TESTtNG AND BALANCING OF PLUMBING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions and any Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in full, and the Contractor shall observe atl the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicabie to his work. , 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall balance atl mechanical systems to accompiish flows and other condi�ions shown or indicated on the drawings and/or specified herein to the complete satisfaction of the ArchiteCt/Engineer. B. The Contractor shall provide all instruments, materials and labor to pertorm the balancing and to obtain and record all measurements. C. Systems Included: 1. Domestic Water Systems 2. Sanitary Waste and Vent Systems 3. Storm Drainage Systems 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other sections of Division 15 PART 2- PRODUCTS - Not used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTS A. Plumbing: 1. Testing shall be as specified in Section 15010, "Mechanical - General Provisions," and �fs specified herein. 2. Tests for Plumbing Systems: Soil, vvaste, vent and water piping shalf be tested by the Contractor and approved before acceptance. Underground soil and waste piping shall be tested before backfilling. Equipment required for testing shall be fumished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. a. Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water or air before the fixtures are installed. After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the entire drainage and venting system shall be submitted to a final test with smok� or peppermint. (1) Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipe shatl be tightly closed except the highest opening, and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10-foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the ,upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shal( be tested so that each joint or pipe in the building except the uppeRnost 10 feet of the system has been submitted to a test of at least a 10-foot head of water. The water shall be � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15907-1 HD Job No. se89 Fort Worth Public Library CopyrigM 1969 Fort Worth, Te�as 3 4. 5. � kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before the inspection starts; the system shall then be tight at all joints. (2) Air Test: If tests are made with air, a pressure of not less than five pounds per square inch shali be applied with a force pump and maintained at least 15 minutes without leakage. A mercury-column gauge shall be used in making the air test. (3) Finai Test: When the smoke test is employed, �he smoke shail be produced by a smoke machine, and a pressure equal to a one-inch water column shall be maintained for 15 minutes before inspection starts. When the peppermint test is used, two ounces of peppermint shall be introduced into each line or stack. b. Domestic Water System: When the roughing-in is completed and before insulation is applied or fixtures are set, the entire hot and cold-water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 pounds per square inch gauge, and proved tight at this pressure for not less than 30 minutes to permit inspection of all joints. Where a portion of the water-piping system is to be concealed before completion, this portion shall be tested separately as specified .for the entire system. c. Sanitary Sewer System (Outside the Building Five-Foot Line): The Contractor shall test for exfiltration by the hydrostatic or pneumatic method outlined above for the drainage and venting system, except that if local codes require otherwise, he shall cqmply with those test methods. d. Roof Drains - Downspouts: Test in the same manner as drainage system. Defective Work: If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary, and the inspection and tests shall be repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. No caulking of � screwed joints or holes shall be acceptable. Cleaning and Adjusting: Equipment, pipes, valves, fittings and fixtures shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that may have accumulated from the operation of the system during the, test. Any stoppage, discoloration or other damage to the finish, fumishing or parts of the building due to the Contractors failure to property clean the piping system, shall be repaired by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. When the work is complete, the water systems shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. Flush valves and automatic controt devices shall be adjusted for proper operation. Sterilization: After pressure tests have been made, the entire domestic water- distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed, and shall be sterilized by chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine conforming to Federal Specification BB-C-120 or hypochlorite confoRning to Federal Specification O-C-114, Type tl, Grade B, or Federal Specification OS-602, Grade A or B. The chlorinating materiat shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to � destroy all nonsporeforming bacteria. Except where a shorte� period is approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 ppm of chlorine at the extreme end of the system at the end of the retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be opened and c�osed several times during the contact period. The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less �than one part per millior�+ During the flushing period all valves and faucets shalt be opened and ctosed�severat times. Sterilization of Water Distribution System (Outside Building Five-Foot Line): Sterilization of the water lines shall be pertormed in accondance with the requirements of AVWI/A Standard No. C-601. 3.02 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel during start-up and separate operating tests of each major item of equipment. During the operating tests, the Contractor Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15907-2 HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library � Copyright 1968 , Fort Worth, Texas � � � � � � l � � � � � � � � � � � � � shaii prove the operation of equipment to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. At least seven days' notice shall be given to the Architect/Engineer of equipment start-up and ope�ating tests. `r " Halbach • Dietr Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1999 END OF SECTION Summer Glen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 15907-3 9 �' Li] L�J �'�l � L�J �� l�'J � C� !�J � �; r� U i �l u � L�J �� n I�� SECTION 15908 - COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL A. The General Conditions and any Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in full, and the Contra�tor shali observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicable to his work. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Commissioning (Testing and Balancing) Firm (TAB Firm) shall be an independent firm totally separate from the Mechanical Contractor and shall be a subcontractor directly to the General Contractor. B. The work included in this Section consists of the fumishing of all labor, instruments, tools and services required in connection with the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) of the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems as described in the Mechanical Specifications and/or as shown on the Mechanical Plans, or reasonably implied therefrom. C. TAB se�vices shall result in the optimum temperature, airflow and noise levels in the conditioned spaces of the Project. D. The following basic components of the mechanical systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced: 1. Air Distribution Systems 2. Air Moving Equipment 3. Heating Systems 4. Control Systems Verification 5. Cooling Systems E. Document Review: 1. The TAB Firm shall be responsible for reviewing the mechanical Plans and Specifications relating to the TAB services for proper arrangement and adequate provisions of devices for testing, adjusting and balancing. The TAB Firm shall fumish certification to the Architect/Engineer that the documents have been reviewed, including any TAB deficiencies. 2. The TAB Firm shall review the HVAC manufacturer's submittal data relative to balanceability. 3. The TAB Firrn shall review submitted HVAC automatic temperature control sequences for conformity to the Specifications. F. Six copies of the final report shall be submitted to the Owner or his representative indicating a summary of actual operating data and any abnormal operating conditions. When abhormal operating conditions occur, the TAB Firm shall inctude probabte causes and corrective measures. The report shall contain all required information as described within this Specification. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other sections of Division 15 PART 2- PRODUCTS - Not used. � Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15908-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort VVorth Public Library CopyrigM 1999 Fort Worth, Texas PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR A. The Mechanical Contractor shall start up and test all materials and equipment which normally require testing. All piping, etc. shail be tested to meet Code requirements or the Specification requirements, whichever is more stringent. All equipment shail operate a sufficient length of time at the Mechanical Contractor's expense to prove to the Arc�iitecUEngineer and/or the Owner that the equipment is free from mechanical defects, runs smoothly and quietly and perfonns satisfactorily to meet the requirements set forth in the Mechanical Plans and Specifcations. � B. Operating expenses to be paid by the .Contractor shali include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Utility costs (electricity, water, etc.) 2. Personnel costs to start, operate and stop all HVAC equipment 3. All start-up labor and material costs 4. Atl maintenance costs C. The Plans and Specifications have indicated valves, dampers and miscellaneous adjustment devices for testing, adjusting and balancing the mechanical systems #o obtain optimum operating conditions. It shalt be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to install these devices in a manner that shall leave them accessible and readily adjustable. The TAB firm shall be consulted if there is a questionable arrangement of a control or adjustab(e device. Should any device not be readily accessible, the Mechanical Contractor shall provide access as required by the TAB firm. D. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide and coordinate the services of qualified, responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and personnel as required to correct, repair or replace all deficient items or conditions found before and during the TAB period. E. As a part of this Project Contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall make any changes in the sheaves, belts, motors, dampers and valves or the addition of dampers and/or vatves as required to correctly balance the mechanical systems as required by the TAB firm at no additional cost. F. Provide su�cient time in the Project Contract completion schedute to permit the completion � of TAB services before Owner occupancy of the Project. G. The Mechanical Gontractor shall fumish without charge to the TAB Firrn: 1. One set of Mechanical Specifications 2. All pertinent change or�ders 3: Two complete sets of Mechanical Plans with latest revisions 4. "As-installed" drawings 5. Approved control diagr�ms 6. Approved manufacturer's submittals for all HVAC equipment H. Have all mechanical systems complete and in operational readiness before notifying the TAB Firm that the Project is ready for TAB services. The Mechanical Contractor shall so certify this in writing to the ArchitecUEngineer and/or the'Owner that such a condition exists. Complete operational readiness before commencement of TAB $ervices shall include the following: � 1. Construction status of the building shall permit the closing of doors and windows, ceilings installed, etc., to permit the obtaining of projected actuat operating conditions. � � � � Halbach • Dietz Architects summer Glen Branch Library 1590&2 HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �� L�J � � L�J � � 2. Air Distribution Systems: a. Verify instailation for confo,rmity to design of all supply, retum and exhaust ducts. Document and cer£ify that �II duct leakage tests as required by the Mechanical Specifications have been performed and the test results are within specified limits. b. Verify that all volume dampers are properly located, functional and open. c. Verify that all suppfy, retum, exhaust and transfer diffusers, grilles and registers are installed as indicated on the Mechanical Plans. d. Verify that all packaged rooftop units, etc., and associated apparatuses such as heating sections, cooling coils, filter sections, etc., have been blanked and sealed to eliminate bypass air around the coils, filters, etc. or leakage of air into or out of the unit. e. Verify that all supply and exhaust fans are operational including: proper fan rotation and belt tension, and free from vibrations. f. Verify that all motor starter�overload heater elements are of the proper size and rating. g. Make a recdrd of actual motor amperage and vottage and verify that they do not exceed nameplate ratings. 3. Automatic Controls: a. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with the Project Requirements and are functional, including all electrical interiocks, damper sequences, air resets, firestats, freezestats, safeties, etc. b. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions with the exception of room thermostats, which shall be calibrated at the completion of the TAB services with cooperation between the TAB Firm and the Controls Contractor. I. The Automatic Temperature Control Contractor shall thoroughly check all controls, sensors, °� operators, sequences, etc. before notifying the TAB Firm that the Automatic Temperature Controls are operational. The Automatic Temperature Control Contractor shalt provide technical support to the TAB Firm for a complete check of these systems. � I� LtJ � L■J � Li7 J. The scope of the TAB work as defined herein is indicated so that the Contractor shall be apprised of his responsibility regarding the coordination and assistance required to complete the Project Requirements for final TAB. The TAB Firm shall be responsible to the General Contractor for the satisfactory execution of the TAB services. 3.02 SERVICES OF THE TAB FIRM A. TAB Firm Qualifications: 1. The TAB Firm shalt be one which is organized to provide independent professional testing, adjusting and balancing services. The TAB Firm shall have one Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, with current registration. 2. The Firm shall have operated a minimum of five years under its current firm name. 3. All personnel used on the job site shall be either TAB engineers or TAB technicians who shall have been permanent, full-time employees of the Firm for a minimum of six (6) months prior to working on this specific Project. 4. The TAB Firm shall submit the following to the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner for approval before commencing services: � a. The name and biographical data of the Professional Engineer and all personnel to be assigned to this Project. b. Proof of company operation as a TAB firm for a minimum of five (5) years. B. TAB Firrn Responsibilities: 1. Liaison: The TAB Firm personnel on the job shall act as liaison between the ArchitecUEngineer, the Owner and the Contractor. � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas 15908-3 2. Eariy Inspection: The TAB Firm shall inspect the installation of inechanical piping systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls and other component parts of the � HVAC systems during the construction stage for the purpose of reviewing that part of the work relating to the proper arrangement and adequate provisions for TAB. The TAB firm shall report to the Architect any installation that deviates from the contract documents or that will cause design air or water flow shortages. C. TAB Firm Services: 1. TAB Firm personnet shall test, adjust and balance the HVAC systems to provide optimum temperature, airtlow and noise conditions in conditioned spaces in the building while the HVAC equipmertt is operating efficiently. 2. The TAB Firm shall be responsible fortesting, adjusting, balancing and logging actual data on all air distribution and air moving equipment, heating and cooling equipment and the operating conditions of all motors, etc., as indicated in this Specification. a. Air Conditioning Units: (1) Manufacturer, model, size and serial� number (2) Motor nameplate data (3) Actual motor amperage and voltage • (4) tntet gas pressures (5) Verify that filters are clean. (6) Verify correct fan rotation. (Tj Verify that all equipment safeties are operational (firestat, freezestat, high static pressure, etc.) (8) Verify correct size and rating of motor overload protection. (9) Verify that fan motor is not overloaded - that amperage and voltage readings do not exceed motor nameplate �rating. (10) If belt driven, verify proper belt tension and that fan and motor sheaves are properly aligned. (11) Determine total si�pply and retum air. Air quantities shall be determined by duct traverse if duct configuration permits and air velocity is 1000 feet per minute or greater. (12) Balance air distribution system (see Air Distribution Devices). (13) If air volume differs from design, and motor capacity is available, adjust the fan or fans to supply and retum design air flows. If new sheave or sheaves and belts are required, submit data to the Mechanical Contractor. (14) Test and adjust the minimum outside air and retum air flow relationship to design. (15) Test and record entering and leaving air temperature of cooling and heating coils to verify design capacity (if applicable). (16) Verify that all temperature control devices are set and calibrated at the design setpoint. b. Air Distribution Devices: (1) Preset all volume dampers in the 100 percent open position. � (2) Determine and verify that proper air pattem deflection devices have been installed. (3) Read out all air distribution devices served by their sources (Air Handling Unit, Exhaust Fan, etc.) (4) Balance all air distribution devices proportional to the design air flow. (5) Adjust source to design air flow. (6) Verify that air flows at all air distribution devices are within plus or minus 10 percent of design. If air flows are less than allowable, report on the probable cause of the shortage. c. Exhaust Fans: (1) Verify correct fan rotation. � . (2) Verify that all safeties and interlocks are operational. (3) Verify Correct size and rating of motor overload protection. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15908-4 HD Job No. 998s Fort Worth Public Library � CopyrigM 1960 Fort Worth, Texas � � l�' �•J � 3. ..� � l�J L�J L�� L�J � � � � 5. (4) Verify that fan motor is not overfoaded and that amperage and voftage . readings do not exceed nameplate rating. (5) If belt driven, verify proper belt tension and that fan and motor sheaves are prope�ly aligned. (6) Determine total air. Air quantities shall be determined by duct traverse if duct configuration peRnits and air velocity is 1000 feet per minute or greater. (� If air volume differs from design air volume ancf motor capacity is avaifable, a�just the fan to design air flows. If new sheave or sheaves and beits are required, submit data to the Contractoc. tf air flows are less than allowabie, report on the probabie cause of the shortage. (8) Balance air distribution system (see Air Distribution Devices). During the balancing process, TAB Firm personnel shail promptiy report to the Archiiect/Engineer, Owner and Contractor all abnormatities or malfunctions of equipment or components discovered, so that the condition can be correeted expediently. The temperature controls shall be verified for calibration and proper relationship between control devices. The Contractor shall be advised of any instrument out of calibration so that the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Contractor can recalibrate, using data supptied by the TAB Firm. The ATC Contractor shalt assist the TAB Firm as required. After testing, adjusting and batancing to design conditions, if comfort conditions are not being maintained, the air-conditioning system shall be rebalanced within the limitations of the equipmenf installed to obtain comfort conditions. If comfort.conditions cannot be obtained, a report shall be submitted giving specific data regarding the trouble area. D. The TAB Report: 1. The TAB report shalt incorporate all performance data for the HVAC systems. The intent of the final report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the Owner's operating personnel. 2. All measurements and recorded readings (of air, water, electricity, etc.) that appear in the report must be made on site by the permanently employed technicians or engineers of the TAB Firm. 3. The TAB Report shall include but not be limited to the follov,ring: a. Index b. Preface: A general discussion of the system, an outline of normal and ventilation modes of operation, any unusual operating conditions and any deficiencies not corrected. c. tnstrumentation List: A tist of instruments used by type, modei, range and calibration date. All instruments must be calibrated within six months prior to the starting date of TAB services. The calibration of all instruments shall be maintained throughout the TAB services. d. Air Conditioning Units, etc.: (1) Manufacturer, model, size and serial number � (2) Design and actuaf air flows (Supply, Retum and Outside) (3) Design and actual fan RPM (4) Static pressure entering and leaving filters, coi(s and fan (5) Motor nameplate data (6) Motor starter data and motor overtoad protection size and rating (� Actual motor amperage and voltage (all phases) (8) Filter type, size and quantity. e. Air Distribution Devices: � (1) Manufacturer, model and size (2) Location , (3) Design and actual air flow (cooling and heating). (4) Air distribution devices where a velocity indicating instrument is used to determine air flow, required and actual velocity in FPM. (When hood is used to determine air flow, only air flow recorded). Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15908-5 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas f. 9• Exhaust Fan�: (1) Manufacturer, model and size . (2) Design and actual air flow (3) Design and actual fan RPM (4) Design and actual static pressure (5) Motor nameplate data (6) Motor starter data and ,motor ove�load protection size �nd rating ('T) Actual motor amperage and�voltage (all phases) DX Coils: (1) Manufacturer (2) Design and actuai air flows (3) Design and actual static pressures (4) Design and actual entering air temperatures (5) Design and actual leaving air temperatures (6) Actual outside air temperature E. Instructions to Operating Personnel - the TAB Firm shail instruct the operating personnel regarding the foilowing: 1. Systems operation 2. Unusual operating conditions 3. System troubleshooting procedures F. Guarantee: Provide an extended warranty of twelve (12) months after occupancy during which time the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner may, at his discretion, request a check of the balance of any HVAC equipment. Provide TAB technicians to assist as required in making such tests. When any device is found not balanced, in accorciance with the Mechanical Plans and Specifications, that HVAC system shall be comptetety rebalanced as directed by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner at the TAB Firm's expense. 3.03 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING A. The Mechanical Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel during start-up and separate operating tests of each major item ,of equipment. During the operating tests, the Mechanical Contractor shall prove the operation of the equipment to the satisfaction of the Architect/Enginee,r. At least seven days' notice shall be given to the Architect/Engineer of equipment start-up and operating tests. END �OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 15908-6 HD .lob No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL - GENERAL PROVISIONS r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED CONDITIONS . A. The General Conditions and any Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions which are part of the Contract Documents are part of this Division to the same extent as if written herein in full, and the Contractor shall observe all the requirements thereof insofar as they are applicable to his work. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall fumish all skilled mechanics, craftsmen, labor, supervision, equipment, materials, tools, costs and services necessary to completely install all electrical work called for on the drawings and/or specified herein. � r B. It is the intent and meaning of the Contract Documents that the Contractor shall provide an electrical installation that is complete with all items and appurtenances necessary, reasonably incidental, or customarily included, even though each and every item is not specifically called out or shown. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 16 B. Mechanical: Division 15 �,.,. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ► A. In accordance with the General Conditions, and before starting installation, the CoMrador shall submit to the Architect/Engineer for approval, lists of materials, fixtures, and equipment to be X incorporated in the woric. If departures from the corrtrad drawings are deemed necessary by the . Contractor, details of such departures, inGuding changes in related portions of the project and the reasons therefor, shall be submitted with the drawings. Where such departures require piping or equipmeM to be supported othervvise than shown, the details submitted shall include loadings and types and kinds of frames, brackets, stanchions, or other supports necessary. Approved departures shatl be made at no additional cost to the Owner. The lists of materials and equipment shall be supported by sufficient descriptive material, such as catatogs, cuts, diagrams, and other " data published by the manufacturer, as well as evidence of compliance with safety and performance standarcis, to demonstrate conformance to the Specification requir�ements; catalog �' numbers alone shalt not be acceptable. The data shall include the name and address of the ,. nearest service and mairrtenance organization that r�egulariy stocks repair parts. �, B. Submittals shall include the foltowing: 1. Lighting Fixtures 2. Switchgear 3. Conduit and Fittings 4. Wire and Cable ., 5. Devices and Plates 6. Fire Alarm System � 7. Any low voltage or specialty system � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16010-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � 1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS � A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect/Engineer one set of �^* drawings neatly and clearly marked in red to show variations between the construction actually � provided and that indicated or specified in the Contract Documents. 1.06 CODES AND STANDARDS � �� A. Materials and workmanship shall comply with the Contract Documents and applicable codes and standards. In case of any difference between applicable codes and standards and the r Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of � such difference. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the requirements of applicable codes and standards, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting such deficiencies. Applicable codes and standards shall include all ordinances, utility company � regulations, and applicable requirements of nationally accepted codes and standards. B. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 4. City of Fort Worth Electrical Code 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 6. National Electrical Code (NEC) 7. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) 8. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) 9. Uniform Building Code (UBC) 1.07 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall compare the Electrical Drawings and Specifications with the drawings and specifications for other trades and report any discrepancies between them to the Architect/Engineer and obtain from him written instructions for changes necessary in the electrical work. The electrical work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades installing interrelated work. Before installation, the Contractor shall make proper provision to avoid interferences. Changes required in the work of the Contractor caused by his neglect to do so shall be made by him at his own expense. � � �. � � � � B. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to determine the � actual electrical charaeteristics of equipment supplied and provide the required connections. C. Provide power and fire ala►m system connections at all fire/smoke dampers. 1.08 VERIFICATION OF DIMENSIONS � A. The Contractor shall visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the worfc and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work. The Contractor shatl be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building � structure and to the work of all trades. � 1.09 INTERFERENCES A. Locations of conduit, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the worlc to '— interferences anticipated or encountered. The Contractor shall determine the exact route and � location of each conduit prior to installation. � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16010-2 , HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � r B. Offsets and changes in diredion in conduit shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and not interfere with pitch of sloping lines, whether or not indicated on the Drawings. 1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall follow the manufacturers' directions completely in the delivery, storage � and handling of equipment and materials. B. Equipment and materials shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury and theft. At the completion of the work, fixtures, equipment and materials shall be cleaned and polished thoroughly and shall be in a condition satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer. '� PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless specifically noted otherwise, and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trademark and ASME, UL and/or other labels in every case where a standard has been established for the particular item. Equipment shatl be the latest approved design of the standard product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the , production of the required type of equipment, and shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, reasonably convenient to the � $ite. B. The Contractor shall insure that items fumished fit the space available with adequate room for proper operation and maintenance. He shall make field measurements to ascertain space requirements, including those for connections, and shall fumish and install such sizes and shapes of equipment that, in the final installation, will suit the true intent and meaning of the drawings and Specifications. �� 2.02 EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES A. The Contractor shall fumish and install all equipment accessories, connections and incidental ` items necessary to complete the work, ready for use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. B. When the ArchitecUEngineer has reviewed equipment submittals and has given instructions to proceed with the installation of items of equipment that require arrangements or connections different from those shown on the drawings, it shall be the responsibility of the " Contractor to install the equipment to operate properly and in accord with the intent of the drawings and Specifications, and he shall provide any additional motors, controllers, fittings r and other equipment and materials that may be required. The Contractor shall be responsible , for the proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. Alt changes shall be made at no increase in the Contract amount or additional costs to other trades. r C. The Contractor shall support work and equipment plumb, rigid and true to line. The Contractor shall study the General, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings, shop drawings, and catalog data to determine how equipment, fixtures, conduit, etc., are to be installed, and shall provide foundations, bolts, inserts, stands, hangers, brackets, and accessories for proper support whether or not shown on the drawings. .- 2.03 NAMEPLATES AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, serial and model number on a plate securely attached to the item. Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer G!en Branch Librery 16010-3 HD Job No. 988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas � � B. Equipment Identification: Unless othervvise specified, all items of equipment, except those in � finished areas such as fixtures, etc., shall be identified as to number, name, function, capacity and other pertinent data with securely attached laminated plastic name tags of an appropriate fi+ size with white tetters and black background. Generally, the number and name shall be at least one-fourth inch (1/4'� high and other data at least one-eighth inch (1/8'� high. "` Identification tags on items in finished areas, such as special switches, etc., shall be securely attached on or in the immediate vicinity of the item. The Contractor shall submit for approval, "� a schedule of name tags detailing all appropriate data. ,., C. Panelboards shall be marked with voltage labels--Brady B-500 series, style B. 2.04 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Wiring: � 1. Electrical wiring for mechanical equipment is separated into two main wiring divisions: "Power Wiring" and "Control Wiring." 2. Power wiring shall be the energy source and includes circuit protective devices, motor �+�. starters or controllers, conduit, wiring and safety disconnects beginning at the Power Supply and terminating at the motor or terminals on equipment. 3. Control wiring is comprised of conduit and wiring not included in "Power Wiring" including automatic temperature contro� wiring, interlock wiring, pilot light and signal r wiring, etc., that is not included as a part of pre-wired equipment but necessary for the ,.r proper operation or safety of the equipment. 4. Unless otherwise noted, "Power Wiring" shall be done by the Electrical Contractor in � accordance with the Electrical portions of the Specifications and under the supervision of the equipment supplier, and "Control Wiring" shall be done by the Contractor fumishing the equipment in compliance with the etectrical section of these Specifications. � B. Motor and Equipment Control: 1. Each motor, electrical equipment or group of motors and equipment shall be provided •� wiih controllers and pilot devices that will perform the functions as specified. Controllers and pilot devices shall conform to NEMA Standard ICL and UL Standard for Industrial ""'i Control Equipment. Control voltage shali be 120 volts. Control voltage shall be obtained from a control power transformer located within the motor controller. "� 2. Manual starters shall be provided for manually started single phase motors under one- � half (1/2) horsepower or as noted on the drawings. Starters shall be single or two pole with selector switches, push buttons, pilot lights and locking attachments as required. •� Contactors may be used instead of manual starter if the motor has integral overload protection. "• 3. Magnetic starters shall be provided for single phase motors one-half (1/2) horsepower and larger, integral horsepower motors, all three-phase motors, and motors started by � pilot devices. Starters shall be provided with necessary control devices in cover and three interlocking contacts. 4. Controllers shall have overload relays in all ungrounded conductors. Overload relays ,�„' shall be sized to protect the motor, with consideration given to ambient temperature of the motor and controlle�. �� 5. Starters, motor controls, push-button stations, selector switches, pilot lights, relays, automatic temperature controllers, safety devices, solenoids, and similar devices shall " be fumished and installed by the Contractor fumishing the equipment, except starters � and motor controllers only shall be fumished to the Electrical Contractor for his installation. �,,, 6. Disconnect switches, except where fumished factory mounted, shall be supplied and ' installed by the Electrical Contractor. `"� 7. Starters, pilot lights, controllers, push buttons, and similar devices located in finished spaces shatl be flush mounted and surface painted to match the surrounding finish. '"'� � Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16010-4 r HD,lob No.988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas ,... � 0 8. The Electrical Contractor shall provide power connections at required control locations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be pertormed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the manufacturer and the best practices of the trade and in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall promptly notify the ArchitecUEngineer in writing of any conflict between any requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain written instructions from the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting deficiencies. 3.02 UTILITIES, REGULATIONS, METERS A. Locations and etevations of utilities have been obtained from utility maps or other sources and are offered as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. The Contractor shall verify the location and elevation of utilities and their relation to the work before entering into a Contract. � B. The Contractor shall arrange with authorities and utility companies for temporary and permanent service connections, verify locations, arrange for and pay all charges, including arrangements for cutting and patching pavements, sidewalks, etc., and provide all support requirements. W.< �- . � 3.03 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING FOR ELECTRICAL CONDUIT A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings or as otherwise specified. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distartce from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. All excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be removed and wasted as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the ArchitecUEngineer. Such grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surtace water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping or other approved method. Sheeting and shoring shall be done as may be necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of the personnel. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut except that short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the ArchitecUEngineer, the pipe or duct can be safely and property installed and backfill can be properly tamped in such tunnel sections. Earth excavation shall comprise all materials and shall irtclude clay, silt, sand, muck, gravel, hardpan, loose shale, and loose stone. B. Trench Excavation: Trenches shall be of the necessary width for the proper laying of the conduit, and the banks shall be as nearly vertical as practicable. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Except where rock is encountered, care shall be taken not to excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavations are required, the rock shall be excavated to a minimum overdepth of four inches (4'7 below the trench depths indicated on the drawings or specified. Overdepths in the rock excavation and unauthorized overdepths shall be backfilled with loose, granular, moist earth, thoroughly tamped. Whenever wet or othenrvise unstable soil thaf is incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, is encountered in the bottom of the trench, . Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library HD Job No. 988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 196a Fort Worth, Texas 16010-5 � such soil shall be removed to the depth required and the trench backfilied to the proper grade ,� with coarse sand, fine gravel or other suitable material, as hereinafter speci�ed. C. Depth of Cover. Trenches for utilities shall be of a depth that will provide the following � minimum depths of cover from existing grade or from indicated finish grade, whichever is lower, unless otherwise specifically shown: 1. Two Feet Minimum Cover: Raceways for communications conductors. '"�" 2. Two Feet Minimum Cover. Raceways for secondary vottage conductors. ;,.� D. Protection of Existing Utilities: Existing utility lines shall be retained as are shown on the ,.- drawings or the locations which are made known to the Contractor prior to excavation, as well as all utility lines uncovered during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage `"� during excavation and backfilling, and, if damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. • ""• 3.04 BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES A. After conduits or structures have been inspected, tested and approved, backfill trenches or excavation with excavated material, firmly compacted. Flood, if necessary, and tamp thoroughly. Backfill under buildings and driveways with select materials specified under Site Woric. B. Restoration: Compact backfill where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, lawns, and similar areas, to a condition equal to undisturbed earth, and restore the surface of the area to the condition existing prior to the trenching or excavating operation. 3.05 BRANCH CIRCUITS A. No branch circuit shall be installed with wire smaller than No. 12. 3.06 MOTOR FEEDERS � � � r A. Fumish and install complete systems of motor branch circuit wiring. The Electrical Contractor shall install and wire all push-button and motor sta�ters. ""' B. Conduit connections to motors and moving etectrical equipment shall consist of an eighteen- inch (18") length of neoprene covered flexible conduit fastened to a wall or other non- r vibrating support. Motor connections shall terminate in a conduit box or conduit fitting. Provide ground wire jumper external to flexible conduit. ""r 3.07 GROUNDING A. All conduit work and other electrical equipment wired for and connected by the Electrical Contractor, shall be effectively and permanently grounded in strict accordance with the National Eledrical Code. 3.08 PAINTING A. Untess othervvise specified, job finish painting shall be performed by the General Contractor. v,,, Electrical equipment shall have a baked enamel finish. The Electrical Contractor shall restore damaged painted surfaces of electrical equipment to their original condition. �, �.r � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen eranch Library 16010-6 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas ,,,,, � r 3.09 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND TESTING r A. The Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel during start-up and separate operating tests of each major item of equipment. During the operating tests, the Contractor `' shalt prove the operation of each item of equipment to the satisfaction of the „ ArchitecUEngineer. 3.10 CATALOG DATA FOR OWNER A. The Contractor shall provide in loose-leaf binders a compilation of catalog data of each manufactured item of equipment used in the electrical work and shall present this compilation ` to the ArchitecUEngineer for transmittal to the Owner before final payment is made. ` Descriptive data and printed installation, operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment shall be included. A complete double index shall be provided as follows: - 1. Listing the products alphabetically by name. 2. Listing the names of manufacturers whose products have been incorporated in the work � alphabetically together with their addresses and the names and addresses of the tocal sales representatives. 3.11 WARRANTIES ,.. A. In addition to factory warranties on the individual items of equipment, the Contractor shall warrant equipment and work performed under this Contract to be free from defects in - materials and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. ► � • ��C�7�I � � � � e t � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Clen Branch Library 16010-7 HD Job No. 9s89 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � SECTION 16110 - CONDUIT PART 1 - GENERAL "` 1.01 SCOPE .�- A. The Contractor shali fumish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary conduit, raceway, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and all Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions shall apply to all work required for this section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 - Electrical - General Provisions 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. 0 7.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electricat Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) .� PARTZ-PRODUCTS � 2.01 CONDUIT, TUBING AND FLEXIBLE CONDUIT � A. Hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit and intermediate metallic conduit shall be National Electric, Allied or Pittsburgh Standard. B. Electric metallic tubing shall be National Electric, Allied or Pittsburgh Standard. �w C. Flexible metallic conduit for use in connection of all motors and moving electricat equipment and for use in wet, oily, dusty or corrosive locations shall be Anaconda "Sealtite" type UA, � Pittsburgh "Robroy" Flex, or Flexi-Guard Type UAG. D. Other flexible conduit shall be National Electric "Flexsteel," Allied or Pittsburgh Standard. �- 2.02 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Where shown or required, junction or pull boxes shall be provided to facilitate pulling, splicing, taping or nesting of conductors. Such boxes shall be of adequate size to suit the purpose constructed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and securely fastened .-. to the building structure independent of the conduit. Boxes shall be accessible. Boxes for exterior or underground use shall be cast and shall be watertight. Junction boxes shall be ^�� abeled with the circuit number of system function. 2.03 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes shall be zinc-coated or cadmium-plated sheet steel suitable for the conditions of Halbach • Dietr Architects 5ummer Glen Brench Library 16110-1 HD Job No. 968,9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas Q C. each outlet. Boxes located in the concrete, damp places, or exposed to the weather shall be cast metal with threaded hubs. Each box shall have sufficient volume to accommodate the number of conductors entering the box in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Boxes shall be not less than one and one-haif inches (1-1/2'� deep unless shallower boxes are required by the structural conditions and are especially approved by the Architect/Engineer. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be not less than four-inch (4'� octagonal except that smaller boxes may be used where required by the particular fixture to be installed. Switch and receptacle boxes shall be approximatety four inches by two inches (4" X 2'�. Boxes installed in concealed locations shall be set flush with the finish surfaces and shall be provided with the proper type of extension rirtgs or plaster covers where required. Switch and receptacle boxes shall be one, two, three, etc. gangs as required. Sectional switch boxes shall not be used. 2.04 SURFACE RACEWAY A. Surface raceway shall be Wiremold Series AL3300. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Extend conduits from the service entrance to the panels, and thence to the branch circuits as shown on the plans. Bond circuits throughout to form a continuous circuit. B. Install exposed conduits vertically or horizontally and paratlel to structural lines. C. Make fietd bends and offsets uniform and symmetrical without flattening. All field bends shall be code radius. D. Use factory elbows where possible. E. All underground conduit shall be watertignt. F. Cut conduits with a hacksaw; remove burrs and sharp edges. G. Do not use running threads. H. ln damp locations, install conduits, fittings and cast boxes in such a manner as to prevent moisture from entering the conduit system. I. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction. J. Clean conduits after installation with a mandrel and wire bn.ish prior to pulling conductors. K. Leave 200-pound test nylon pull wire in empty conduits. L. Provide plastic insulating bushing on all conduits and in all tubing connections. M. Use compression type steel EMT box connectors and couplings. No set-screw type fittings shall be allowed. N. Instalt galvanized rigid steel conduit where indicated on the plans, where exposed to the weather and where buried conduits rise above grade or slab. Halbach • Dietr Architeots Summer Glen Branch Library 16110-2 HD Job No. 988,9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � .. O. Install EMT for circuits not specified to be in rigid conduit. � P. Install Schedule 40 PVC for incoming telephone service conduit. "' Q. Buried conduits shall be Schedute 40 PVC with a separate grounding conductor. � R. Install neoprene covered flexible conduit for the final eighteen inches (18'� of connections to all motors and moving electrical equipment. S. Provide two locknuts where two-inch (2'� or larger conduits join switchboards, panelboards, or � equipment. �- T. Install liquid-tight connectors for all neoprene covered flexible conduits. �,_„ U. All wiring in panels and junction boxes shall be neatly tied with nylon cable ties. ,. END OF SECTION � L'J �"` � � � � � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen eranch Library 16110-3 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas f�J � � � r. �. � . ,�_., � SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE PART1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shali furnish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary materials as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and all Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions shall apply to all work required for this section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 - Electrical - General Provisions B. Section 16110 - Conduit 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the ArchitecUEngineer with manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE A. Install Code Type THWN or THHN copper for panet, motor and equipment feeders. B. Install Code Type THWN or THHN copper for branch circuits. C. Install Code Type SF-1 fixture wire for intemal wiring of fixtures which are not prewired or fixtures being rewired. D. Install Code Type THHN copper for fixture through-wiring, or within the ballast compartment. E. Wire shall be Anaconda, Southwire or Triangle. F. All wire and cable shall be color coded in accordance with the following tables. Use colored tape on Number Six or larger conductors. 120/208 Volt Svstem Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral Ground Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 CoPY�9M 1999 - Black - Red - Blue - White - Green Summer Glen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 16120-1 . � � w� G. All conductors shall be copper. ��, H. Branch circuit wiring shall be labeled at each end with Brady B-500 numbers corresponding to � the circuit number. 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE CONNECTIONS '"�' �� A. Connections for branch circuits shall be made with wire joints. Use one piece nylon self- insulated Buchanan B-cap connectors, Thomas & Betts "Piggy" wire joints. x B. Connections for feeders shall be bolted compression type connectors to suit the condition. `"'� Smooth the joint with insulating compound and insulate with two layers or one-fourth lapped plastic tape. � PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.01 INSTALLATION �� A. All wire and cable shall be installed per the National Electrical Code. rt END OF SECTION .r � � � � � � r � � � Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16120-2 a HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas ,,,�, � ... � � .� �.,. r .-.d SECTION 16140 - DEVICES AND PLATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractorshall fumish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary materials as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and all Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions shall apply to all work required for this section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 - Electrical - General Provisions 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineerwith manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the standards of the National Electrical Code (NEC). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DEVICES A. Devices shall be P8�S, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal, as listed below: Single Pole Switch � � Three-Way Switch Duplex Receptacle Floor Box '`' Dimmer Switch r- Ground Fault Interrupting Duplex Receptacle Isolated Ground Duplex B. Devices shall be white. All plates shall be white plastic. Halbach • Die� Architects Summer Glen Branch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas P8�S #20AC1-W Hubbell #1221-W Leviton #1221-W P8S #20AC3-W Hubbell #1223-W Leviton #1223-W P8�S #5362-W Hubbell #5362-W Leviton #5362-W Floor box shall be Hubbell #3SFB-C, with isolated ground duplex and carpet insert to match carpet with gray trim. Lutron N-1500 P&S #2091-S-I P8�S #IG6300 16140-1 � � "� PART 3 - EXECUTION ,,� 3.01 WORKMANSHIP �� A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade. All materials shall be installed in "'� accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. � B. All plates and devices shalt be securely fastened to the outtet box and shall be plumb. .. 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHT A. Mounting heights shall be as indicated on the drawings. "� END OF SECTION ""' � � � � � � � � � r � � Halbach • Die� Architects Summer Glen eranch Library 16140-2 � HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas -,�, � � ,� . SECTION 16400 - SWITCHGEAR � PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE � A. The Contractor shall fumish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary materials as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Applicable requirements of the Generat Conditions and all Supplementary or Special Conditions `" or Provisions shall apply to all work required for this section. r 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 - Electrical - General Provisions r�� B. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE .. A. Provide the Architect/Engineerwith manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet or exceed the minimum requirements as specified. � 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, confonn to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: �.., 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 2. National Elecirical Code (NEC) ^� 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. 4. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.01 ENCLOSURES A. All enclosures shall be constructed of code gauge sheet steel. �,.. B. Panel wiring gutters shall be fumished in accordance with UL standards and Article 373-6 of ihe �, National Electrical Code. .. C. Enclosures shall be of the type required by the National Electrical Code for the environment encountered. r 2.02 LOCKING PROVISIONS A. All switches shalf have provisions for padlocking the switch in the OFF position. �� B. All panelboards shall have locking doors. r 2.03 LUGS A. Alt equipment shall have compression type lugs of the required size to accept the conductors indicated on the drawings. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16400-1 HD Job No. 988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas s � 2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS � ,�I A. Molded case circuit breakers shall have over-center, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms ,,,� with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Two and three-pole breakers shall be common trip. Each circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip unit containing � individual thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. The circuit breaker shall be constructed to accommodate the supply connections at either end. Circuit breaker operating 'A" handles shall assume a center position when tripped. All breakers shall be calibrated for . operation in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. 6. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for mounting and operating in any position. Circuit breakers mounted in panelboards and switchboards shatl be bolt-on type. +� C. The circuit breaker contacts shall be of the high pressure butt-type and shall be made of silve� � alloy material. Arc chutes shall be provided to confine, cool and quench the arc drawn at interruption. D. Circuit breakers mounted in individuaf enclosures shall have easily accessible pressure terminals � to accept conductor sizes commensurate with the breaker ampere ratings. � E. The interrupting rating of the circuit breaker shall be at least equal to the available short-circuit �` current at the line terminals of the breaker. � F. Circuit breakers shall be Square D, General Electric, Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.05 NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Shall be two or three pote as required with rating as indicated on the drawings. B. Shall meet or exceed NEMA KSI-1969 for Type GD (General Duty) or type HD (Heavy Duty) switches. C. Shall be Square D, General Electric, Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.06 FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES �. A. Shall be two or three pole as required with ratings indicated on the drawings. � B. Shall be or exceed NEMA KSI-1969 for Type HD (heavy duty). C. Shall be Square D, General Electric, Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.07 FUSES �. .ti A. All fuses shall be UL listed Class RK-1 or Class L. All fuse contact surFaces shall be ,.� electroplated. B. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. C. Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes shall be protected by current limiting UL Class L fuses. Fuses shall � employ "O" rings as positive seals between the end bells and the glass melamine fuse barrel. The terminals shall be peened. Fuses shall be time-delay and must hold 500 percent of rated ,�„� current for a minimum of four seconds, clear 2d times rated current in .01 second or less and shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes � r.m.s. symmetrical. Fuses shall be Bussman "Low-Peak" or approved equal. � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16400-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Te�ms y. � r D. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by "Low Peak" current limiting UL Class RK-1 time-delay fuses. All dual-elemerrt fuses shall have separate overload and short-circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring-adivated thermal overload elemerrt having a 284 degree F melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit cleaning chamber. The fuse must hold 500 percent of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., with an interYupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical. Fuses shall be Bussman "Lov�Peak" or approved equal. E. Upon tuming the building over to the Owner, the Electrical Contractor shall provide 10 percent of installed fuses, or a minimum of three fuses of each rating, as spares placed in a spare fuse cabinet on the wall of the mechanical equipment room. r r 2.08 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. B. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that anythree adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two- or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. All current-carrying parts of the bus assembty shall be plated. Main ratings shall be as shown in the panelboard schedule or on the plans. C. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable forthe type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutrat, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. D. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side. "" E. The panelboard bus assembty shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The size of the wiring gutters and gauge of steel shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards Publication No. PBI-1977 and ` UL Standard No. 67 for panelboards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steet or � equivalent rust-resistant steel. F. Fronts shall include doors and shall have flush, stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring-loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of ihe door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps which shalt be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted by completely conceated steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. A circuit directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory card shall provide a space at least one-fourth inch high by three inches long (1/4" X 3'� or equivalent for each circuit. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel. G. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. Panelboards :, shall be marked with their maximum short-circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. r H. Provide panetboards with main and neutral buses type minimum 98 percent conductivity • rectangular copper bars provided with bolted type lugs as necessary. � I. Busses shall be drilled to fit connectors; the connectors shall be interchangeable. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16400-3 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort wortn, Texas � � J. Provide buses, connectors and terminals silver plated to a minimum thickness of 0.005 inch. The plating shall conform to the requirements of FS QQ-S-3656. K. All terminal lugs shall be prevented from tuming per NEMA Standard PBI-1971 and shall be suitable for the conductor material and size. L. Panelboards shall not exceed 78 inches in height or 20 inches in width. M. Cabinet fronts, trims and surface-mounted boxes shall be finished in ANSI No. 61 or No. 49, gray enamel over a rust-inhibitive primer. Cabinets shall be surface or flush mounting as indicated on the drawings. N. Shall be Square D, General Electric, Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.09 LIGHTING CONTACTOR A. Shall be electrically held, with number of poles and rating indicated on the drawings. B. Shall be suitable for tungsten, fluorescent, and mercury arc lighting. C. Shall have NEMA-1 enclosure. D. Shall be Square D, General Electric, Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.10 TIME CLOCK A. Shall be three-pole, single throw. B. Shall have reserve and skip-a-day features. C. Shall have NEMA 1 enclosure. D. Shall have contacts rated at 40 amperes at 277 volts. E. Shall be Paragon, Tork or approved equal. 2.11 MAIN FUSIBLE DISTRIBUTION PANEL (MDP) A. Furnish and install the service entrance distribution panel as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings. The panel shall have copper bus and interrupting ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Fusible Switches 800 amperes and smaller: The fusible switches shall be quick-make, quick- break and shall be suitable for use on the service as described for sizes as shown on the associated drawings. The units shall be listed and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories for general service entrance use and, where applicable, shall be dual horsepower rated for both standard one-time ordual-element fuses. The fusible switches shall be group mounted in panel- type construction. Each switch shall be enclosed in a separate steel enclosure. The enclosure shalt employ a hinged cover for access to the fuses which sha(I be interlocked with the operating handle to prevent opening the cover when the switch is in the ON position. This interlock shall be constructed so that it can be re�eased with a standard electrician's tool for testing fuses without interrupting service. The units shall have padlocking provisions in the OFF position and the operating handle position shall give positive switch position indication; i.e., horizontal OFF, diagonal ON. Switches shall pass industry standard I�t withstandability tests and fuse race tests. C. The panel shall be Square D QMB or approved equal. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen eranch Library HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas �� r � .� � .� P � »M � � �r+ �� 16400-4 F: �� r� ,.., 2.12 MOUNTING HEIGHT ^ A. All main disconnects shall be located to allow easy operation. ` END OF SECTION � � � A1 � � � � � � � � � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16400-5 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas � � 4 . SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING ' PART1-GENERAL ,, 1.01 SCOPE � A. The Contractorshall fumish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary materials as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. � B. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and all Supplementary or Special Conditions or Provisions shall apply to all work required for this section. .. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 16010 - Electrical - General Provisions � 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Architect/Engineerwith manufacturer's certificate showing materials meet orexceed the minimum requirements as specified. d_.. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest editions of the following standards: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) c�.y � 1.05 SUBMITTALS � A. Provide complete photometric data. r B. Indicate baltast type, voltage and temperature limits. � C. Indicate lens material and type of construction, i.e., extruded or injection molded. D. Indicate fixture body material and gauge and fixture weight. � PART2-PRODUCTS r 2.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES .- A. All fixtures shall be as scheduled or detailed on the drawings. , B. All plastic lenses shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic. , 2.02 LAMPS A. All lamps shall be new and shall be as scheduled on the drawings. '� B. Lamps shall be Sylvania, General Electric, Westinghouse, or approved equal. � 2.03 BALLASTS � A. Batlasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be electronic, Valmont Ultra-Miser or equal. _, Halbach • Die� Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16500-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas r � B. Ballasts for HID fixtures shall be high power factor type. r� PART 3 - EXECUTION � 3.01 WIRING CONNECTIONS "� A. Outlet boxes and wiring channeis shall contain only the conductors of the connected circuits and '�"R shall not be used as a junction box or raceway for other circuits, unless specifically approved for „� the purpose. � B. Approved solderiess connectors shall be used in making connections in the wiring within the fixtures or in connecting the fixture wiring to the wiring of the building. "'� 3.02 CLEANING � ..,r'i A. Clean all fixtures prior to final inspection. � END OF SECTION » � � � � � � � � ' � � Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen eranch Library 16500-2 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library copyrignt 1 s99 Fort wortn, Texes �„ � .- SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM/LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Specification provides for the installation of a new and complete Addressable Intelligent Life Safety System. The system shall include, but not be limited to: Fire Alarrn Control Panel(s), Automatic and Manually activated alann initiating and indicating peripheral Devices and Appliances, wire and accessories required to fumish a complete and operational Life Safety System. � B. The system shall be designed by the certified system installer and shall include all devices required by ADA, ANSI, NFPA, TAS and local authorities. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS � A. Division 15 - Mechanical B. Division 16 - Electrical 1.03 ALTERNATES - A. Altemates/Altematives to any of the products or work specified in this document shall be al�owed only if the substitution is recognized by the various listing agencies as compatible. 1.04 REFERENCES +��. A. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current provisions of the following standards: � 1. National Electricat Code, Article 760 2. National Fire Protection Association Standards: � a. NFPA 72 - National Fire AIaRn Code ,� b. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 3. Local and State Building Codes 4. Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction 5. ULC, CSFM, BSA 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: The system and atl components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in fire protedion signaling systems under the `�" following standards as applicable: .� a. UL 864/UOJZ, APOU - Control Units for Fire Protedive Signaling Systems b. UL 268 - Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signating Systems ,..� c. UL 268A - Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications d. UL 217 - Smoke Detectors Single Station ► e. UL 521 - Heat Detectors for Fire Protedive Signaling Systems f. UL 228 - Door Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems g. UL 464 - Audible Signaling Appliances h. UL 1638 - Visual Signaling Appliances i. UL 38 - Manuafly Activated Signaling Boxes �,, j. UL 346 - Watertlow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems k. UL 197t - Standard for Signating Devices for the Hearing Impaired � I. UL 1481 - Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems m. UL 1711 - Amplifiers for Fire Protedive Signaling Systems "" 7. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 8. Internafianal Standands Organization (ISO} '� a. ISO-9000 Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Litxary 16721-1 HD Job No. �J889 Fort Wath Publ'ic Library Copyright 1989 Fort Worth, Texas � � � b. ISO-9001 � 9. European Union (EU) a. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC - Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements �«� b. CENELL - Appropriate European Committee for Electro-Technology 10. Standardization Standarcis '� 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION � � A. The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System supplied under this Specification shall be a microprocessor- based network system. All control panel assemblies and connected field appliances shall be . both designed and manufactured by the same company, and shall be tested and cross-listed as compatible to ensure that a fully functioning Life Safety System is designed and installed. � 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: The Corrtractor shall submit froe (5) comptete sets of documerttation within 30 calendar days after awarcJ of purchase order. Indicated in the documentation shall be the type, �.► size, rating, styte, catatog number, manufacturers' names, photos, and/or catalog data sheets for all items proposed to meet these Specifications. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the "� approval of the Architecx/Engineer, and no equipmerrt shall be ondered or installed on the premises without that approval. r �r B. Shop Drawings: A complete set of Shop Drawings, one for each unit sub-assembly which requires that a field wire be connected to it, shall be supplied. The Shop Drawings shall be � reproduced electronically from a master copy supplied by the manufacturer in digital format. C. Samples: Two samples of each field-connected device (smoke detectors, intelligent modules, hom, strobes and/or speakers) shall be provided to the Contractor for his familiarization. � D. Close-out Submittals - Two (2) copies of the following manual shall be delivered to the Owner's � representative at the time of system acceptance. The close-out submittals shall include: � 1. Operating manuals covering the installed Life Safety System. 2. PoiM-to-poir�t diagrams of the entire Life Safety System as installed—this shall inGude all "'� conneded smoke detectors and addressable field modules. All drawings shall be provided in CAD and supplied in standand .DXF format. Vellum plots of each sheet shall also be ''"'' provided. A system-generated point-to-point diagram shall be required to insure accuracy. ,.„�, 3. The apptication program listing for the system as installed at the time of acceptance by the Owner and/or local AHJ (disk and hard copy printout). . 4. Name, address and telephone number of the authorized factory representative. 5. All drawings must reflect device address and programmed characteristics as verified in "'� the presence of the Engineer and/or the end user unfess device addressing is electronically generated and graphically printed. °`" � 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: The installing Contractor shall provide proof of its qualifications for Factory Authorization and Factory Training for the product(s) specified herein. These credentials shall be not more than two years old, to ensure up-to-date product and application knowledge on the part of the installing Contractor. .r B. Warranty: 1. Warranty ali materials, installation and woricmanship for three (3) years from date of � acceptance, unless otherwise specified. 2. A copy of the manufacturers' warranty shall be provided with close-out documentation and shall be included with the operation and installation manuals. � Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-2 r HD Job No. 988,9 Fort Worth Public Library CopyrigM 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �• � .�. '.�., 1.08 SYSTEM STARTUP, OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS, COMMISSIONING - A. System startup shali be perFormed by a Factory Trained and Authorized Edwards System � Technology Strategic Partner Program (SPP). Certain functions of the system's startup procedure may be pertormed by a contractor under the direction of the Factory Trained and � Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor. B. Owner's Instructions and Operation Manuals, specific for this project, shalt be supplied to the building operations staff by the Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor. A generic or typical Owner's Instruction and Operation Manual shalt not be acceptable to fulfill this requirement. C. Commissioning of the installed system shall be performed by the Factory Trained and Authorized SPP in the presence of the Local AHJ, the Owner's representative, and a representative of the General Contractor, if deemed appropriate. � D. A system-generated device map, which shall serve as an °as-built" drawing, shall be provided to the Local AHJ and the Owner's representative. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPATIBILITY — A. This Life Safety System Specification must be conformed to in its entirety to ensure that the installed and programmed Life Safety System shall accommodate all future requirements and operations required by the Owner. Any specified item or operational feature not specifically addressed prior to bid date shall be required to be met without exception. ,,,,, B. Submission of products purported to be equal to those specified herein shall be considered as possible substitutes only when all of the following requirements have been met: ,� 1. Any deviation from the equipment, operations, methods, design or other criteria specified herein must be submitted in detail to the specifying Architect/Engineer a �' ' minimum of 10 working days prior to the scheduled submission of bids. Each deviation from the operation detailed in these Specifications must be documented in detail, ~ including the page number and section number which list the system function for which the substitution is proposed. 2. A complete list of such substituted product, with three (3) copies of working drawings for each, shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect/Engineer not less than ten (10) calendar days prior to the scheduled date for opening bids. ``" 3. The Contractor or substitute bidder shall functionally demonstrate that the proposed substituted products are, in fact, equal in quality and pertorrnance to those specified � herein. Because the decision to specify the Life Safety System(s) and Equipment ,, , detailed herein was made by an Architect/Engineer on behaff of their client (the Owners), such evidence of the applicability of any substitute materials must be submitted to, and ,� accepted by, the ArchitecUEngineer not less than ten (10) catendar days prior to the scheduled date for opening bids for this project. Substitute equipment shall be accepted � only on the discretion of the Architect/Engineer on behalf of the Owner. 2.02 REQUIREMENTS � A. All equipment fumished for this project shall be new and unused. All components and �-, systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices and other facilities covered by this Specification or noted on contract drawings and installation Specifications shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer. If any of the equipment provided under this Specification is Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch �ibrary 16721-3 HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public �ibrary Copyright 1999 Fort WoRh, Texas � � � provided by different manufacturers, then that equipment shall be recognized as compatible �,i by both manufacturers, and listed as such by Underwriters' Laboratories. � B. System installation and operations shall be verified by the manufacturer's representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion. The manufacturer's representative shall "''r be responsible for an on-site demonstration of the operation of the system and initial staff training as required by the Architect/Engineer. '"' C. The system shall be capable of detecting the electrical location of each Signature intelligent device including new and existing devices. It shall be possible to display the intelligent device map on the laptop PC. � D. If a device map cannot be generated by the control panel, the Contractor must include a minimum of (3) days to verify location of all wire runs while in the presence of the � Architect/Engineer or Owner's representative to verify all conduit and wire runs. E. In addition, °as-built" riser and wiring diagrams reflecting all T-taps, each programmed device ,�„ characteristic including detector type, base type, serial number, sensitivity setting and wire configurations shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer, based on the information gathered """° during the verification process described above. F. It shall be possible for authorized service personnel using a program/service tool or laptop PC ,.� to change the personality/function of a Signature series device to meet changes in building layout or environment. System changes shall be verified by the manufacturer's ,,,,, representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion. ' .� 2.03 MANUFACTURERS � A. Equipment and materials shall be provided by an Edwards System Technology (ES� ,,,,,, Strategic Partner Program (SPP) to ensure proper Specification adherence, final connection, test, tumover, warranty compliance, and service. Other manufacturers that may be considered are: Notifier (NESCO Only). B. Service Availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have a fully equipped service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 24 hours of service calls, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to service completed systems. C. The Engineered Systems Distributor of the Fire Alarm/Life Safety Equipment specified herein shall provide a copy of its certificate of successful completion of an authorized training course given by the manufacturer of the Fire Alarm/Life Safety Equipment. 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. The Life Safety System shall be a Multi-Processor Based Network System designed specifically for Fire, Audio Evacuation and Security applications. The Life Safety System shall be a Modet EST3, and shall be UL listed under Standard 864 (Control Units for Fire- Protective Signaling Systems) under categories UOJZ and APOU, and ULC listed under standard CAN/ULC-S527. The specified modules shal� also be listed under UL 1076 (Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems) under category APOU. �..r � B. The Life Safety System shall include all required hardware and system programming to provide a complete and operational system, capable of providing the protected premises with ,�,� the following functions and operations: 1. Modular systems design, with a layered application design concept, including an '"'� °Operational Layer° and a°Human Intertace Layer", to allow maximum flexibility of the system with a minimum physical size requirement. !'"' � Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-4 , HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1969 Fort Worth, Texas ,�, � rM A. 4 r � w... .� y, .. � w., .- � �,., �: 2. All system-operational software shall be stored in FLASH memory. Control panel disassembly, or replacement of electronic components of any kind, shatl not be required in order to upgrade the operation of the installed system to conform to future application code and operating system changes. 3. Up to 128 service groups must be definable within the system program to allow for the testing of the installed system based on the physical layout of the system, not on the wiring of the field circuits connected to the fire alarm controt panel. 4. Advanced WindowsTM'-based system definition utility with program-version reporting to document any and all changes made during system start-up or system commissioning. Time and date stamps of all modifications made to the program must be included to allow full retention of all previous program-version data. 5. System response to any alarm condition must occur within 3 seconds, regarriless of the size and complexity of the installed system. 2.05 MECHANICAL AND OVERALL FEATURE SUMMARY A. The Life Safety System shall include the following features and shall support the following operations in each installed cabinet or node of the system: 1. Up to 10 Signature Series Intelligent Device Loops 2. Up to 125 Intelligent Smoke Detectors and 125 Intelligent Modules per SDC 3. Up to 120 Hardwired InpuUOutput Circuits 4. Up to 342 Manual Control (Input) Switches 5. Up to 456 LED Annunciation Points 6. Up to 63 Remote Display Units 7. Multi-Priority, Token Passing, Peer-to-Peer Network Connection of up to 64 system nodes wired as Class B(Style 4). 8. Ground Fault Detection by panel, by Signature data circuit, and by device module 9. Ability to download all system applications programs and "firmware" from a computer through a single point in the system 10. True Distributed Intelligence, including microprocessor-based detectors and modules 11. AC Power Trouble Delay adjustable from 4 hours to 10 hours 12. Removable, Interlocked Terminal Blocks for the connection of the field wiring to the Fire Alarm Control Panel 13. Electronic Addressing of Field Devices 14. Advanced Power Management 15. Dead Front Constniction 2.06 HUMAN INTERFACE A. System Common Controls and Emergency User Interface: The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall include an Emergency Operator's Interface Panel which shall include the following system annunciation and control functions: 1. Hands-Free Emergency Operation: The first and last highest priority event on the system shall be displayed automatically and simultaneousty. 2. Control Panel Intemal Audible Signal shall have four programmable signal patterns, to allow for the easy differentiation between Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble and Monitor conditions within the installed system. B. Five Discreet "System Status" LEDs: 1. Power Status LED: Green LED shall illuminate when AC power is present. 2. Test Status LED: Yellow LED shall illuminate when any portion of the system is in the test mode. A programmable timer shall cause the system to automatically exit the test mode after a period of system inactivity. This Test LED shall function in a local or in a group mode. 3. CPU Fail Status LED: Yellow LED shall illuminate when the panel controller has an intemal failure. r. Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9689 Copyright 1969 Summer Glen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 16721-5 � � 4. Ground Fault Status LED: Yellow LED shall illuminate when un-grounded wiring � connected to the cabinet's power supply has continuity to ground. This feature shall function in either a local or group mode. �• 5. Disable Status LED: Yellow LED shall illuminate whenever any point or zone in the installed system is manually disabled. '"" C. Four Discreet Common Control Switches with Associated Status LEDs: 1. Reset: Depression of the Reset switch shall start the system reset operation. The associated yellow LED shall have three flash rates during this operation to inform the user of the progress status of the reset cycle. The LED shall flash fast during the smoke detector power down sequence, then it shall flash slowly during the restart phase, and shall iltuminate steadily for the restoral phase. The LED shall go out completely when the system is back to normal mode. Each phase, as well as the overall reset cycle, shall be programmable to perform other functions. 2. Alarm Silence: Depression of the Alarm Silence switch shall tum off all (audible and/or visible) notification appliance circuits. The associated yellow LED shall illuminate when the Alarm Silence function is active, whether by the Alarm Silence switch or by an integral software timer. Subsequent activation of the Alarrn Sitence switch shall resound the signals. Activation of the Alarm Silence switch shall be programmable to perform other functions. 3. Panel Sitence: Depression of the Panel Silence switch shall turn off the system's internal audible signal when configured as a"local" system. The associated yellow LED shall illuminate when the panel silence feature is activated. 4. Dril� Switch/LED: Depressing the Drill switch shall activate the fire drill function. The yellow LED shall indicate that the fire drill function is active. The Drill switch also shall be programmable to perform system functions other ihan the Drill function. � ,� D. Other Operator Control Switches: � 1. Previous Message Switch: Pressing the Previous Message switch shall scroll the display to show the preceding message in the selected queue. Holding the Previous Message switch and pressing any Queue Select switch shall move to the top of the ,,.,� respective queue event list. Scrolling through event messages may be done by the operator at any time. � 2. Next Message Switch: Pressing the Next Message switch shall scroll the display to show the following message in the selecied queue. Holding the Previous Message '"�` switch and pressing any Queue Select switch shall move to the bottom of the respective „� queue event list. Scrolling through event messages may be done by the operator at any time. r 3. More Details Switch: Pressing the More Details switch shall show the address and 42- character location message of the active device on display. If a zone is active, pressing "�' the More Details switch shall display the address and message of active devices within the zone. When multiple devices are active, the Previous/Next message switch may be °"'" used to scrotl through the messages. � 2.07 THE SYSTEM MAIN LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY � A. The liquid crystal display shall provide the means to inform the system operator with detailed � information about the off-normal status of the installed Fire Alarm/Life Safety System. The main display shall automatically respond to the status of the system, and shall display that ` status on an 8-line-by-21-character backlit alpha-numeric graphical liquid crystal display. ,�„ B. Automatic Functions: The following status functions shall be annunciated by the main liquid ,,,,� crystal display: f 1. When the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System is in the Normal mode, the LCD shall display. �� a. The current date and time. b. A custom system title (2 lines X 21 characters). "'" � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-6 � HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth PubllC Llbrary Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas ,,.,, � .� � r. � w., � w; � � .• w,� �.. c. A summary total of the alarm history of the system. 2. With the Fire Alarm Life Safety System in the Alarm mode, the LCD shall automatically reconfigure into four logical windows. a. Systems Status Window: The LCD shall show the system time, and the number of active points and disabled points in the system in this section of the LCD display. b. Current Event Window: The LCD shall show the first active event of the highest priority in reverse text to highlight the condition to the emergency operator. The top line of the reversed text shall show the sequence number in which the displayed event was received, as well as its event type. The second and third lines of reversed text shall display an identification message related to the displayed event. c. Last Event Window: The LCD shall show the most recent, highest priority event received by the system. d. Type Status Window: The LCD shall show the total number of active events in the system, by event type. Four different system event types shall be displayed: Alarm events, Supervisory events, Active Trouble events and Active Monitor Events. 2.08 SYSTEM MESSAGE PROCESSING A. In orcier to simplify, and to clarify the system status information which is given to the emergency operator, the main LCD shall include queues for each of the system-event types. The main LCD shall allow the emergency operator access to the system status information contained within those queues by pressing an associated queue-select switch. Whenever there is an unacknowledged event in any of the system-event queues, the associated Status LED shall flash. Viewing each event listed in a queue shall acknowledge all events in that queue, and shall cause the associated LED to illuminate steadily. B. All messages contained in any of the System Event queues shall be accessible for review by the emergency operator using the Previous/Next Message switch. It shall be possible to route additional event information to a printer. 2.09 MAINTENANCE MENU A. The main LCD shall also allow the system operator to access system maintenance functions through a four-level password system. The authorized system operator shall be able to access the following functions: 1. System Status: The system shall a�low the operator to determine the status of individual system components, including active points, disabled points, and active points by panel. 2. Enable: a. The system shall allow the operator to restore a disabled point (device) in the system, allowing that point (device) to operate as originally intended by the application program of the system. b. Additionally, the system shall allow the operator to restore any group function, guard-patrol function, panel, system module, software-defined zone, operator control or time-control function. 3. Disable: a. The system shall allow the operator to disable any point (device) in the system, inhibiting that point (device) from operating as originally intended by the application program of the system. b. Additionally, the system shall allow the operator to disable any group function, guard-patrol function, panel, system module, software-defined zone, operator control or time control function within the system. 4. Activate: The system shall allow the operator to manually tum on any system output point, or system function. Alternate smoke detector sensitivity, message routing within C- Halbach • Die� Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-7 f HD Job No. 988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas r � the system, guard-patrol timing, and check-in group timings shall be modifiable with this � simple command from the control panel. 5. Restore: The system shall allow the operator to restore the primary (application � program defined) operation to the smoke detector sensitivity and the message routing ; functions with this simple command from the control panel. "'"'�' 6. ControlOutput: a. The system shall allow the operator to manually command and control relays and '"� LEDs. Relays shall be able to be commanded to latch, to energize as a high ,�1 priority, or as a low priority, to energize or to de-energize. b. LEDs shall be able to be commanded to latch, to energize as a high priority, or as � a low priority, to tum on, to tum off, to slow blink, or to fast blink. 7. Reports: The system shall provide the operator with system reports which give detailed descriptions of the status of certain system parameters for corrective action, or for preventative maintenance programs. The system shall provide these reports via the '"'� main LCD, and shall be capable of being printed on any of the connected system �..i printers. � a. The system shall provide a report which lists sensitivity of all detectors which have ,,,, less than 75 percent environmental compensation remaining. b. The system shall provide a report which provides a sensitivity listing of any '°"' particular detector. c. The system shall provide a report which gives a listing of the sensitivity of all of the ` detectors on any given panel in the system, or any given SDC loop within any ..,,,� given panel. d. The system shall provide a report which gives a chronological listing of up to the � last 1740 system events. e. The system shall provide a listing of atl of the firmware revision listings for all of the installed network components in the system. 8. Program: The system shall allow the authorized operator to perform all of the following ""t system functions: � a. Set the System Time b. Set the System Date ,� c. Set (or change) the System Passwords d. Restart the System "`' e. Set the dates for the System Holiday Schedule f. Clear the Chronological System History file '""' 9. Test: The system shall allow the authorized operator to pertorm test functions within the ;,,„ installed system. Test functions shall be defined by the authorized operator to be pertormed on a per cabinet, circuit, or seroice group basis. � 2.10 OPERATIONS INTERFACE J A. SDC Carci: �* 1. The Signature Device Card (SDC) shall be the interFace between the fire alarm control �„r panel and the Signature series detectors and modules. 2. The communications format between the SDC and the Signature series devices shall be ,,,� 100 percent digital. Communications to devices must incorporate Broadcast Polling and Direct Address Search to ensure the fastest reporting of off-normal conditions to the "�, system human-interface layer. 3. It shall be possible to wire the SDC as Class B(Style 4) without twisted or shielded wire. " It must be possible to wire branch circuits (T-taps) from Class B circuits. �,r, 4. The associated controller (3-SSDC), through the SDC, shall provide the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual intelligent detectors on the �, circuit. It shall be possible to automatically set the sensitivity of individual intelligent detectors during day and night periods. �' 5. It shall be possible for the SDC to address all intelligent devices connected to it without having to set switches at the individual devices. ""r Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-8 „ HD Job No. 988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � � .� ., 6. It shall be possible to obtain a mapping report of all devices conneded to the circuit for confirmation of °as-buift" wiring. The map shall show physical wiring of T taps, device types, f and the panel addresses of devices connected to the circuit. The SDC shall be capable of reporting unexpeded additional devic:e addresses and cha►�ges to the wiring in the data ' circuit. A speafic trouble shall be reported for any off-norma! non-alarm condition. 7. The SDC shall be able to report the following information on a per intelligent device � basis: a. Device Serial Number b. Device Address c. Device Type d. Current Detector Sensitivity Values and the Extent of Environmental "�- Compensation e. Any of 32 possible trouble codes to specifically diagnose faults "' 8. Should a Signature driver controller CPU fail to communlcate, the Signature circuit shall �, go into the stand-alone mode. The circuit shall be capable of producing a loop alarm if an alarm type device becomes adive during stand-alone mode. B. Hard Wired NAC Circuits: 1. Provide where indicated on the plans supervised hard wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control of 24 VDC EST Integrity Series Signaling Appliances. The NAC shall be Class B(Style 4), and shall control up to 3.5 amps of power to the circuit. ,. . , 2. Provide where indicated on the plans supervised hard-wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control of 70.7 VRMS EST Integrity Series Audio Signaling � Appliances. The NAC shall be Class B(Style 4), and shall control up to 35 watts of power to the circuit. 3. Panel NACs shall be power limited to 3.5 A at 24 VDC and 4.1 A at 20.4 VDC to support higher cunent demand by visible appliances at lower battery voltages. �� 2.11 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM PROGRAMMABLE OPERATIONS �- A. System Message Processing and Display Operations: 1. The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall allow Network Routing to be configured to any or all nodes (cabinets) in the network. 2. All of the system printer ports can be configured to display any or all of the following ' functions: a. Alarm b. Supervisory c. Trouble d. Monitor �� e. Service Group 3. Each LCD display on each node (cabinet) in the system shall be configurable to show '' the status of any or all of the following functions anywhere in the system: w,w a. Alarm b. Supervisory ,� c. Trouble d. Monitor 4. The system shall provide the capability to label each of the system points with up to 256 characters of location message. The first 42 characters shall be directed to the LCD, while the entire message shall be sent to the printer. 5. The system shall have the capability to provide up to 128 logical Counting AND Groups. `�4 Each group shall have a programmable activation number. Whenever the number of . active devices in an AND group reaches the activation number, the AND group's rules shall execute. tt shall be possible to overlap AND groups by having devices appear in more than one group. 6. The system shall provide a means to monitor the well being of any or all of the occupants of the protected premises by means of a check-in-group feature. The check- Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-9 HD Job No. 988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Wo�th, Texas 7. � Q 10. 11 in group shall display an emergency alarm whenever any member of a check-in group fails to check in during the programmable check-in period. Subsequent check-in activations during the check-in period, or activations outside of the check-in period shall also activate an emergency response. It shall be possible to have a minimum of 128 check-in groups. All event messages for the check-in feature shall be directable to any system monitor or printer. The system shall have the ability to define a minimum of 128 matrix groups with up to 250 points each. For each matrix, it shall be possible to define a radius and an activation number. The radius number shall define the proximity between detector locations. When two detectors activate at or within the value of the radius, or whenever the number of active devices reaches the activation number, the matrix group shall activate. It shall be possible to overlap matrix groups by having devices appear in more than one group. The system shall include the ability to define an altemate set of device commands which may be used in combination with the system test command for the testing of the conneded Signature series smoke detectors. This function shall disable the normal alarm command for each of the members of the group, so that the testing process will not resuft in an activation of the building evacuation signals, auxiliary relays or central station connedions. The system shall include time control functions which shall have the ability to control any system output or function, or initiate any system operational sequence as a function of the month, day of week, date, hour, minute or holiday. The system shatl include up to 600 software-defined logical zone groups which may group any input from any Signature data circuit, or other initiating device circuit, in order to control a system output or function, or initiate any system operational sequence. A device or IDC may be a member of one logical zone group. Each of these zones shall have an associated message. The system shall provide the ability to download data from the Signature series detectors to a PC while the system is on-line and operational in the protected premises. The downloaded data may then be analyzed in a diagnostic program supplied by the system manufacturer. 2.12 COMPONENTS A. Intelligent Detectors - General Operation: 1. The system intelligent detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using both broadcast and polling protocol. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent fire-detection algorithms. The fire-detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions and time pattems and shall combine different fire parameters to increase reliability and distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted deceptive nuisance alarms. Signal pattems that are not typical of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters. Devices not capable of combining different fire parameters or employing digital filters shall not be acceptable. 2. Each dete�tor shall have an integral microprocessor capabte of making alarm decisions based on fire parameter information stored in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall improve response time by decreasing the data flow between the detector and the analog loop controller. Detectors not capable of making independent alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. Maximum total analog loop response time for detectors changing state shall be 0.5 seconds. 3. Each detector shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. A green LED shalt flash to confirm communication with the analog loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. Both LEDs on steady shall indicate a�arm-standalone mode status. Both LEDs shall be visible through a fulf 360 degree viewing angle. 4. The detector shall be capable of identifying up to 32 diagnostic codes. This information shall be available for system maintenance. The diagnostic code shall be stored at the detector. Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-10 HD ,lob No. se89 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �. � s,.,, � 5. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, troubte and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. 6. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm which identifies and sets ambient "environmental thresho�ds" approximatety six times an hour. The microprocessor shall continually monitor the environmental impact of temperature, humidity and other contaminants, as well as detector aging. The process shall employ digital compensation to adapt the detector to both 24 hour long term and 4 hour short term environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor the environ- mental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80 percent and 100 percent of the allowable environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the leamed base-line sensitivity. The base-line sensitivity information shall be updated and permanently stored at the detector approximately once every hour. � 7. The intelligent analog device and the analog loop controller shall provide increased reliability and inherent survivability through intelligent analog standalone operation. The device shatt automaticalty change to standalone conventional device operation in the event of a loop controller polling communications failure. In the analog standalone detector mode, the analog detector shall continue to operate using sensitivity and environmental compensation information stored in its microprocessor at the time of communications failure. The analog loop controller shall monitor the loop and activate a loop alarm if any detector reaches its alarm sensitivity threshotd. 8. Each Signature series device shall be capable of automatic electronic addressing and/or custom addressing without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP or rotary switches for addressing, either in the base or on the detector, shall not be acceptable. 9. The intelligent analog detectors shatl be suitable for mounting on any Signature series detector mounting base. B. Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise Heat Detector, SIGA-HRS: Provide intelligent combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise heat detectors (SIGA-HRS). The heat detector shall have a low mass thermistor heat sensor and operate at a fixed temperature and at a temperature rate-of- rise. It shall continually monitor the temperature of the air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to process an atarm. The integrat microprocessor shall determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of the data. Systems using central intetligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The intelligent heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F (57°C) and a rate-of-rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft. (21.3m) ceatters and be suitable for wall mounting applications. � w ., C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors, SIGA-PS (For Duct Detectors Only): 1. Provide intelligent photoelectric smoke detectors, SIGA-PS, for use in all areas except in the auditorium and stage area. The analog photoelectric detectors shall utilize a light- scattering type of photoelectric smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from their surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate an alann based on the analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shalf not be acceptable. The detectors shall continualty monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental effects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and humidity. The inforrnation shall be stored in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop controller for retrieval using a laptop PC (or the SIGA-PRO Signature program/service tool). The photo detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 ft. (9.1 m) centers and be suitable for wall mounting applications. The photoelectric smoke detectors shall be suitable for direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 ft. (0.91 m) high and 3 ft. (0.91 m) wide with air velocities Halbach • Dietz Architects HD Job No. 9889 Copyright 1989 Summer Glen Branch Library Fort Worth Public Library Fort Worth, Texas 16721-11 � "�I � up to 500 ft./min. (0-25.39 m/sec.) without requiring specific duct detector housings or ,,,,,� supply tubes. 2. The percent smoke obscuration per foot alarm setpoint shall be field selectable to any of ..� five sensitivity settings ranging from 1.% to 3.5%. The photo detector shall be suitable ` for operation in the following environment: ""'" a. Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) b. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing � c. Elevation: no limit D. 4D Multisensory Detector, SIGA-IPHS (for all area detectors): .�,, 1. Provide intelligent 4D multisensory smoke detectors (SIGA-IPHS) for use in the auditorium and stage area. The stage area shall have the same stable detector, but it �' must come from the manufacturer in the color btack (base also must be manufactured in black). The multisensory analog detector shall use a light-scattering type photoelectric '"�' smoke sensor, a unipolar ionization smoke sensor and an ambient temperature sensor ,,,� to sense changes in air samples from their surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall emptoy time-based algorithms to dynamically examine values from the three ,,,,, sensors simultaneously and initiate an alarm based on that data. The 4D multisensory detector shall be capable of adapting to ambient environmental conditions. The �^ temperature sensor shall self-adjust to the ambient temperature of the surrounding air and input an alarm when there is a change of 65°F (35°C) in ambient temperature. "` Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The �„ detectors shall continually monitor any changes in sensitiviiy due to the environmental effects of dirt, smoke, temperature, age and humidity. The information shall be stored � in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop controller for retrieval using a laptop PC or the SIGA-PRO Signature program/service tool. Separately mounted photoelectric detectors, ionization detectors and heat detectors in the same location are not acceptable alternatives. The 4D multisensory smoke detectors shall be rated for � ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 ft. (9.1 m) centers and suitable for wall mounting applications. The 4D multis�nsory smoke detectors shall be suitable for direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 ft. (0.91 m) high and 3 ft. (0.91 m) wide and air velocities up to 500 ft./min. (0-2.54 m/sec.) without requiring specific duct-detector housings or supply tubes. ,� 2. The percent of smoke obscuration per foot alarm setpoint shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging from 1.% to 3.5%. The integral heat sensor shatl cause an alarm when it senses a change in ambient temperature of 65°F (35°C) or '"'" reaches its fixed temperature alarm setpoint of 135°F (57°C) nominal. The 4D � multisensory detector shall be suitable for operation in the following environment: a. Temperature: 32°F to 100°F (0°C to 38°C) �- b. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing c. Elevation: Up to 6,000 ft. (1828 m) �°"'r E. Standard Detector Mounting Bases, SIGA-S64: Provide standard detector mounting bases � SIGA-S64 suitable for mounting on North American 1-gang, 3-1/2" or 4" octagon box and 4" square box. The base shall contain no electronics, shall suppo�t all Signature series detector types and shall have the following minimum requirements: „„� 1. Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors. L* 2. Terminat connections shall be made on the room side of the base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terrninals shall not be acceptable. " 3. The base shall be capable of supporting one (1) Signature series (SIGA-LED) remote ,,,,� alarm LED indicator. Provide remote LED alarm indicators where shown on the plans. F. Relay Detector Mounting Bases, SIGA-R64: Provide relay detector mounting bases SIGA- � RB4 suitable for mounting on North American 1-gang, 3-1/2" or 4" octagon box and 4" square � box. The relay base shall support all Signature series detector types and have the following minimum requirements: ""! ,.� Halbach • Dietr Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-12 �, HD Job No. 988.9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas „_,, � �. .. , 1. The relay shall be a bi-stable type and selectable for normally open or normally closed operation. � 2. The position of the contact shall be supervised. 3. The relay operation shall be exercised by the detector processor upon power up. �� 4. The relay shall automatically de-enerc�ize when a detector is removed. 5. The operation of the relay base shall be controlled by its respective detector processor. � Detectors operating in a standalone mode shall operate the relay upon changing to alarm state. Relay bases not controlled by the detector microprocessor shall not be acceptable. 6. Form "C" Relay contacts shall have a minimum rating of 1 amp � 30 VDC and shall be listed for "pilot duty". `�° 7. Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors. � 8. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base. Bases which must ,. , be removed to gain access to the terminals shall not be acceptable. G. Duct Detector Housing, SIGA-DH: Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies SIGA- DH to facilitate mounting an intelligent analog 3D multisensory detector SIGA-PHS along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 300 and 400 feet per minute (300 to 1000 feet per minute for ion-photo-heat detector). Protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. Provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube which extend into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Provide drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing. Provide five one-gang knockouts for mounting optional Signature series modules. Finish the housing in baked red enamel. Provide remote alarm LEDs SIGA-LED and remote test stations SIGA-DTS as shown on the plans. Provide all duct detectors required, whether or not shown on the Electrical Drawings. Refer to the Mechanical Drawings. Coordinate with Mechanical for unit shutdown. �.., H. Intelligent Modules - General Operation: It shall be possible to address each intetligent . Signature series module without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personatity code downloaded from the analog toop controller. Modules requiring EPROM, ' PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper changes shall not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of two diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring K� shall be supervised for open and ground fautts. The modute shall be suitable for operation in the following environment: ` 1. Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) a 2. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing ',. 1. Input Module, SIGA-CT1: Provide intelligerrt single input modules SIGA-CT1. The single input module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. The single input module shall support the foltowing circuit types: 1. Normally open alarm latching (manual stations, heat detectors, etc.) �' 2. Normally open alarm-delayed latching (watertlow switches) �, 3. Normally open active non-latching (monitor, fans, dampers, doors, etc.) 4. Normally open active latching (supervisory, tamper switches) J. Dual Input Module, SIGA-CT2: Provide intelligent dual input modules SIGA-CT2. The dual � input module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-13 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas !: � � mounting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" ,,,i square boxes with 1-gang covers. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types: �» 1. Normally open alarm latching (manual stations, heat detectors, etc.) 2. Normally open alarm delayed latching (waterflow switches) "`� 3. Normally open active non-latching (monitor, fans, dampers, doors, etc.) 4. Normally open active latching (supervisory, tamper switches) """'� '�r K. Waterflow/Tamper Module, SIGA-WTM: Provide intelligent waterflow/tamper modules SIGA- WTM. The waterflow/tamper module shall be factory set to support two (2) supervised Class � B input circuits. Channel A shall support a normally open alarm delayed latching waterflow switch circuit. Channel 6 shall support a normally open active latching tamper switch. The ""'�' watertlow/tamper modute shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. "'" L. Single Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC1: Provide intelligent single input signal modules SIGA- CC1. The single input (single riser select) signal module shall provide one (1) supervised ,�,y Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its d°' own ring tone. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or ' European 100 mm square boxes. The single input signal module shall support the following ,,�, operation: Audible/visible signal power selector (polarized 24 VDC cLD Z A, 25 V RMS @ 50 W or 70 V RMS � 35 W of Audio). �„ M. Dua� Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC2: Provide intelligent dual input signal modules SIGA- CC2. The dual input (dual riser select) signal module shall provide a means to selectively connect one of two (2) signaling circuit power risers to one (1) supervised output circuit. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100 mm square boxes. The dual input signal module shall support the following operation: Audible/visible signal power selector (polarized 24 VDC � 2A, 25 V RMS � 50 W or 70 V RMS � 35 W of Audio). N. Controt Relay Modute, SIGA-CR: Provide intelligent control relay modules SIGA-CR. The �"" control relay module shall provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps � 24 VDC ,,, to control extemat appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shatl be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the ,, system firrnware. The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang ""� covers. � O. Universal Class A/B Module, SIGA-UM: Provide intelligent class A/B modules SIGA-UM. ,,,,� The universal Class A/6 module shall be capable of a minimum of fifteen (15) distinct operations. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) ,,,, deep 2-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100 mm square boxes. The universal Class A/B module shall support the following °� circuit types: 1. Two (2) supervised Class B normally open alarm latching " 2. Two (2) supervised Class B normally open alarm-delayed latching � 3. Two (2) supervised Class B normally open active non-latching 4. Two (2) supervised Class B normally open active latching � 5. One (1) form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps � 24 VDC 6. One (1) supervised Class A normally open alarm latching 7. One (1) supervised Class A normally open alarm-delayed latching 8. One (1) supervised Class A normally open active non-latching '"'� 9. One (1) supervised Class A normally open active latching ;,�, Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen eranch Library 16721-14 ` HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas �„ L�+: .- 10. One (1) supervised Class A 2-wire smoke alarm non-verified 11. One (1) supervised Ctass B 2-wire smoke alarm non-verified 12. One (1) supervised Class A 2-wire smoke alarm verified 13. One (1) supervised Class B 2-wire smoke alarm verified 14. One (1) supervised Class A signal circuit, 24 VDC � 2A 15. One (1) supervised Class B signal circuit, 24 VDC � 2A P. Intelligent Manual Pull Stations - General Operation: It shall be possible to address each Signature series fire atarrn pull station without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The manual stations shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mourited on their integral, fadory-assembled single- ortwo-stage input modute. A green LED �� shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The station shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for " troubleshooting assistance. Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The fire alarm pull station shall be suitable for operation in the following environmerrt: 1. Temperature: 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C) 2. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing Q. Double Action Manual Pull Station, SIGA-278: Provide intelligent double action, single stage fire alarm stations SIGA-278. The fire alarm station shall be of Lexan construdion with an irrtemal toggle switch. Provide a key-locked test feature. Finish the station in red with white °PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" lettering. The manual station shall be suitable for mourtting on North American 2-1/2" (64 mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1-1/2" (38 mm) deep 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. All pull stations must have an STI - safety stopper to help prever�t false alarms. R. Self-Synchronized Strobe: Strobes shall be manufactured by EST, Catalog Number 405 Series. In-out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The strobes shall have a red plastic faceplate. They shall provide 15/75 CD, 30 CD, 60 CD, 110 CD synchronized flash outputs. Use NFPA guidelines for correct candle size for the area being cover by the strobe. Strobes shall mount in a 4-square box. The strobe shall have lens markings oriented for wall mounting. It shall be possible to replace the lens markings with LKW series or LKC series lens marking kits. Removal of an installed strobe to change the lens markings shall not be acceptable. Strobes shall have required ANSI intensities. . . f S. Homs and Hom/Strobes - Temporal Type: 1. Horns shall be manufactured by EST, Catalog Number 757 Series. In-out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The hom shall have a red plastic housing. Homs shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor use. A sound output level of 103 dBA Peak shall be provided. Homs shall mount to a 4" electrical box with extension ring using the 2 screws provided with ring. It must not be necessary to completely remove the screws to facilitate mounting. Strobes shall have required ANSI intensities. 2. Hom/strobes shal� be manufactured by EST, Catalog Number 757 Series. 3. The hom/strobes shall have a red plastic housing. The strobe shall provide 15/75 CD, 30 CD, 60 CD and 110 CD synchronized flash outputs. The strobe shalt have lens markings oriented for wall mounting. It shall be possible to replace the lens markings with LKW series or LKC series lens martting kits. Removal of an installed hom/sirobe to change the tens maiicings shall not be acceptable. Homs shall provide a 100 dBA peak sound output. HomsJstrobes shall mourtt in a 4" eledrical box with extension ring using the 2 screws provided with ring. It must not be necessary to completely remove the screws to facilitate mourrting. _ 2.13 ANCILLARY DEVICES �.. •�- A. Remote Relays: 1. Multi Voltage Control Relays, MR-100 Series: Provide remote control relays connected to supervised ancillary circuits for control of fans, dampers, door releases, etc. Relay Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-15 HD Job No. 988,9 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � contact ratings shall be SPDT and rated for 10 amperes at 115 VAC. A single relay may � be energized from a voitage source of 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC. A red LED shall indicate the relay is energized. A metal enclosure shall be provided. � 2. Multi Voltage Control Relays, MR-200 Series: Provide remote control relays connected to supervised ancillary circuits for control of fans, dampers, door releases, etc. Relay "'"� contact ratings shall be DPDT and rated for 10 amperes at 115 VAC. A single relay may be energized from a voltage source of 24 VDC, 24 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC. A "" red LED shall indicate the retay is energized. A metal enclosure shall be provided. ,,,� B. Electromagnetic Doorholders, 1500 Series: 1. Floor MouMed, 1501/1502 Series: Provide single door floor mourrted eleciromagnetic doorholder/releases rated at 24 VAC/DC input. Finish shall be brushed zinc. 2. Wall Mounted, 1504/1505/1508/1509 Series: Provide semi-flush wall mounted electromagnetic doorholder/releases rated at 24 VAC/DC. Finish shall be brushed zinc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A A. The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with approved manufacturer's manuals and wiring diagrams. The Contractor shall fumish all wiring, outlet "� boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and simifar devices necessary for the complete installation. ,y,, Conduit shall be supplied by the Division 16 Contractor. All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the NEC, approved by toca� authorities having jurisdiction for the purpose, � and shall be installed in dedicated conduit throughout. B. All penetrations of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all local fire codes. � C. End-of-line resistors shall be fumished as required for mounting as directed by the manufacturer. ,�. D. All wiring shall be installed according to NEC standards per the drawings submitted by the authorized Engineered Systems Distributor, unless othervvise noted. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The system shall be installed and fulty tested under the supervision of trained manufacturer's representative. The system shall be demonstrated to pertorm all the functions as specified. 3.03 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS � A. The Fire Alarm/Life Safety System specified herein shall be installed by a Factory Trained ,ri and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor for EST (SPP), Notifier (NESCO) and Simptex (Factory O�ce). ,n, B. Field connected devices may be installed and wired, and primary power may be wired by licensed contractors under the direct supervision of a Factory Trained and Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor for EST (SPP) and Notifier (NESCO). 3.04 EXAMINATION A. Prior to the commencement of any of the woric detailed herein, an examination and analysis � of the area(s) where the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System and all associated components are to be installed shall be made. � � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer G!en Branch Library 16721-16 , HD Job No. 9689 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1998 Fort Worth, Texas . � � ..� B. Any of these area(s) which are found to be outside the manufacturers' recommended environments for the particular specified products shall be noted on a site examination report which shall be given to the Owner's representative and the local AHJ. °' C. Any shorts, opens or grounds found on existing wiring shall be corrected prior to the �- connection of these wires to any panel component or field device. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Each of the intended operations of the installed Fire Alarm/Life Safety System shall be demonstrated to the Owner's representative and the local authority having jurisdiction by the ` � installing ESD. .- � � � � � � � � END OF SECTION � Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16721-17 HD Job No. 9869 Fort Worth Public Library . CopyrigM 1999 Fort Worth, Texas � �� SECTION 16770 - SOUND SYSTEMS ; PART 1 - GENERAL M 1,01 SCOPE � A. The Contractorshall furnish all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of fhe sound systems as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Applicable requirements of the General Conditions and all Supplementary or Special Conditions ` or Provisions shall app�y to all work required for this section. ' 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE �. A. Section 16010 - Electrical - General Provisions ra B. Section 16110 - Conduit C. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable �, 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE � A. ProvidetheArchitecUEngineerwithmanufacturer'scertificateshowingmaterialsmeetorexceed the minimum requirements as specified. � 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS 'w�-- A. Except as modified by this Specification, conform to the applicable provisions and recommendations of the latest provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC). � PART2-PRODUCTS ,. 2.01 AMPLIFIER A. Amplifier shalt be Bogen CTS1100 or equal. 2.02 CEILING MOUNTED SPEAKERS k A. Fumish Soundolier No. C5, eight-inch (8'� diameter speaker having a frequency response of 30 ., to 15,000 hertz. w•- B. Provide required matching transformer. �' C. Baffle shalt be Soundolier 62-8 perforated face, round trim, constructed of steel and finished with , a baked white semi-gloss enamel. D. Speaker enclosure shall be Soundolier No. 199-5 with channel supports. `u PART 3 - EXECUTION "� 3.01 WIRE AND CABLE � A. Wire and cabte shall be as recommended by the sound system manufacturer, #14 AWG . minimum. Cable shall be installed in conduit or shall be plenum-rated cable where installed in a retum air plenum. Halbach • Die� Architects Summer Glen eranch Librdry 16770-1 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1989 Fort Worth, Texas 3.02 SPLICES A. No splices shall be allowed. Where connections must be made, provide a junction box with labeled terminal strips. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Contractorshall fumish and install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions all wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the instaltation of a complete system as described herein and as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION Halbach • Dietz Architects Summer Glen Branch Library 16770-2 HD Job No. 9889 Fort Worth Public Library Copyright 1999 Fort Worth, Texas City of Fort Wor�th, Texas n►�Ayar And C,aunc�l C,,ammun�cAt�an DATE REFERENCE NUMBER LOG NAME PAGE 11/2/99 C-17742 846RANCH I 1 of 1 SUBJECT AWARD OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TO THE FRYMIRE COMPANY FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE SUMMERGLEN BRANCH LIBRARY RECOMMENDATION: It is recommended that the City Council approve the execution of a construction contract with The Frymire Company for construction of the Summerglen Branch Library in the amount of $1,326,100 with a contract duration of 300 calendar days. DISCUSSION: The Summerglen Branch Library includes approximately 11,055 square feet of floor space, and will be located near the northwest corner of Basswood Boulevard and North Beach Street in north Fort Worth. Halbach-Dietz Architects prepared the construction documents. The project was advertised for bid in the Fort Worth Star Telearam on August 26 and September 2, 1999. On September 23, 1999, bids were received from 10 general contractors, as shown in the attached bid tabulation. We are accepting Alternate Nos. 1-6 and No. 8. The architect's estimate, including the alternates, was $1,489,269. The low bid, including Alternate Nos.1-6 and No. 8, was submitted by The Frymire Company. The Frymire Company is in compliance with the City's M/WBE Ordinance by committing to 30% M/WBE participation on the base bid. The City's goal on this project is 29%. The Summerglen Branch Library is located in COUNCIL DISTRICT 4. FISCAL INFORMATION/CERTIFICATION: The Finance Director certifies that funds are available in the current capital budget, as appropriated, of the Library Services Fund. RG:j Submitted for City Manager's Oftice by: Ramon Guajardo Originating Department Head: Gleniece Robinson 6104 7708 I FUND I ACCOUNT I CENTER I AMOUNT � (t�) � (from) � C141 541200 020141050101 $1,326,100.00 CITY SECRETARY P��it��.li CiTY COUNCIL N OV � 19'99 Additional Information Contact: Kathy Dolan � 7797 I �., l i�ie,�...,� Cicy S�cretmry ot th�o ;;;Ey ot Fori Wart1. �`s�ra� �